MICOM P34x - EN - O - F33

MiCOM
P342, P343
Generator Protection Relays
Software Version 0070C
Operation Guide
P34x/EN O/F33
MiCOM P342, P343 Guides
This version of the Operation Guide is specific to the following models
Model Number Software Number

P342------0070C P342------0070-A/B/C
P343------0070C P343------0070-A/B/C
For other models / software versions, please contact ALSTOM T&D – Energy,
Automation & Information for the relevant information.
(Software versions P342------0010*, P342------0020*, P342------0030*,
P342------0040*, P342------0050* and P343------0010*, P343------0020*,
P343------0030*, P343------0040*, P343------0050* are not supported by this
menu database, see OG8614A (0010), OG8614B (0020 – 0040),
P34x/EN O/C11 (0050) and P34x/EN O/D22 (0060) for information on the
menu database for these software versions)
Operation Guide
MiCOM P342, P343
Volume 2
Issue Control P34x/EN O/E33
MiCOM P342, P343
Manual Issue F33 Amendments completed 21.11.2003
Doc.
Section Page Description
Ref.
Front cover
Software version details amended to reflect latest relay
- - - software, on the back of the front cover
All references to appendices and chapters replaced with
IT Throughout
new subdocument references
Password protection
Minor amendment made to Access level column of table
Last row of table : As level 1 plus: and Password 2
IT 3.4 11 required swapped around
IN Throughout
RTD connections (if applicable)
8 Paragraph 1 : minor amendments
IN 6.3 9 Paragraphs 2 and 3 : added
Current loop input output (CLIO) connections (if
applicable)
IN 6.4 9 New section added
IRIG-B connections (if applicable)
IN 6.5 9 3rd sentence : amended
EIA(RS)232 port
Download/monitor port
IN - 10 Footnote added
Insulation
CM 5.1.3 12 Item h) has been added to the relay terminals list
Current loop inputs
CM 5.2.8 17 - 18 New section added
Current loop outputs
CM 5.2.9 18 New section added
Replacing a PCB
35 Paragraph 4 : minor amendment
35 Paragraph 7 : minor amendment
36 Paragraph 13 : added
CM 9.3.2 36 - 37 Table 14: data added
Replacement of the IRIG-B/2nd communications
board
CM 9.3.2.2 40 4th paragraph after Figure 8 : minor amendment
Replacement of the input module
CM 9.3.2.3 41 Last paragraph on page : minor amendment
Replacement of the power supply board
CM 9.3.2.4 43 4th paragraph after Figure 10 : minor amendment
P34x/EN O/E33 Issue Control
MiCOM P342, P343
Manual Issue F33 Amendments completed 21.11.2003
Doc.
Section Page Description
Ref.
Replacement of the opto and separate relay
boards (P343 only)
CM 9.3.2.6 44 Paragraph 6 : minor amendment
Replacement of the RTD input board (P342 and
P343 only)
CM 9.3.2.7 45 Figure 15 : figure title amended
Replacement of the CLIO input board
CM 9.3.2.8 46 - 47 New section added
Product checks
54 - 55 5.2.8 : new section added
CM 5. 55 5.2.9 : new section added
Setting record
62 Table 0900 : last 3 rows added
77 Table 4500 : last row added
81 - 83 Table 4D00 : added
95 - 97 Table 6D00 : added
108 - 111 Table 8D00 : added
118 Table A500 : last row added
CM 11. 122 - 124 Table AD00 : added
PR Throughout
Relay menu database
GC - - Amended to reflect latest relay software
External connection diagrams
CO - - Additional diagrams added
Hardware/software version history and
compatibility
Presented in new layout and updated to reflect latest relay
VC - - software
Operation Guide P34x/EN O/F33
MiCOM P342, P343
GENERATOR PROTECTION RELAYS
MICOM P342, P343
CONTENT
Issue Control
Handling of Electronic Equipment
Safety Section
Introduction P34x/EN IT/F33
Installation P34x/EN IN/F33
Commissioning and Maintenance P34x/EN CM/F33
Problem Analysis P34x/EN PR/F33
Relay Menu Database P34x/EN GC/F33
External Connection Diagrams P34x/EN CO/F33
Hardware / Software Version History and

P34x/EN VC/E33
Compatibility
Repair Form
P34x/EN O/F33 Operation Guide
MiCOM P342, P343

HANDLING OF ELECTRONIC EQUIPMENT
A person’s normal movements can easily generate electrostatic potentials of several
thousand volts. Discharge of these voltages into semiconductor devices when
handling circuits can cause serious damage, which often may not be immediately
apparent but the reliability of the circuit will have been reduced.
The electronic circuits of AREVA T&D are immune to the relevant levels of electrostatic
discharge when housed in their cases. Do not expose them to the risk of damage by
withdrawing modules unnecessarily.
Each module incorporates the highest practicable protection for its semiconductor
devices. However, if it becomes necessary to withdraw a module, the following
precautions should be taken to preserve the high reliability and long life for which the
equipment has been designed and manufactured.
1. Before removing a module, ensure that you are a same electrostatic potential
as the equipment by touching the case.
2. Handle the module by its front-plate, frame, or edges of the printed circuit
board. Avoid touching the electronic components, printed circuit track or
connectors.
3. Do not pass the module to any person without first ensuring that you are both
at the same electrostatic potential. Shaking hands achieves equipotential.
4. Place the module on an antistatic surface, or on a conducting surface which is
at the same potential as yourself.
5. Store or transport the module in a conductive bag.
More information on safe working procedures for all electronic equipment can be
found in BS5783 and IEC 60147-0F.
If you are making measurements on the internal electronic circuitry of an equipment
in service, it is preferable that you are earthed to the case with a conductive wrist
strap.
Wrist straps should have a resistance to ground between 500k – 10M ohms. If a
wrist strap is not available you should maintain regular contact with the case to
prevent the build up of static. Instrumentation which may be used for making
measurements should be earthed to the case whenever possible.
AREVA T&D strongly recommends that detailed investigations on the electronic
circuitry, or modification work, should be carried out in a Special Handling Area such
as described in BS5783 or IEC 60147-0F.
CONTENT
1. SAFETY SECTION 3
1.1 Health and safety 3
1.2 Explanation of symbols and labels 3
2. INSTALLING, COMMISSIONING AND SERVICING 3
3. EQUIPMENT OPERATING CONDITIONS 4

3.1 Current transformer circuits 4
3.2 External resistors 4
3.3 Battery replacement 4
3.4 Insulation and dielectric strength testing 4
3.5 Insertion of modules and pcb cards 4
3.6 Fibre optic communication 5
4. OLDER PRODUCTS 5
5. DECOMMISSIONING AND DISPOSAL 5
6. TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 6
1. SAFETY SECTION
This Safety Section should be read before commencing any work on the
equipment.
1.1 Health and safety
The information in the Safety Section of the product documentation is intended to
ensure that products are properly installed and handled in order to maintain them in
a safe condition. It is assumed that everyone who will be associated with the
equipment will be familiar with the contents of the Safety Section.
1.2 Explanation of symbols and labels
The meaning of symbols and labels may be used on the equipment or in the product
documentation, is given below.
Caution: refer to product documentation Caution: risk of electric shock
Protective/safety *earth terminal Functional *earth terminal

Note: This symbol may also be
used for a protective/safety earth
terminal if that terminal is part of a
terminal block or sub-assembly
e.g. power supply.
*NOTE: THE TERM EARTH USED THROUGHOUT THE PRODUCT DOCUMENTATION IS THE
DIRECT EQUIVALENT OF THE NORTH AMERICAN TERM GROUND.
2. INSTALLING, COMMISSIONING AND SERVICING

Equipment connections
Personnel undertaking installation, commissioning or servicing work on this
equipment should be aware of the correct working procedures to ensure safety. The
product documentation should be consulted before installing, commissioning or
servicing the equipment.
Terminals exposed during installation, commissioning and maintenance may present
a hazardous voltage unless the equipment is electrically isolated.
If there is unlocked access to the rear of the equipment, care should be taken by all
personnel to avoid electrical shock or energy hazards.
Voltage and current connections should be made using insulated crimp terminations
to ensure that terminal block insulation requirements are maintained for safety. To
ensure that wires are correctly terminated, the correct crimp terminal and tool for the
wire size should be used.
Before energising the equipment it must be earthed using the protective earth
terminal, or the appropriate termination of the supply plug in the case of plug
connected equipment. Omitting or disconnecting the equipment earth may cause a
safety hazard.
The recommended minimum earth wire size is 2.5mm2, unless otherwise stated in the
technical data section of the product documentation.
Before energising the equipment, the following should be checked:
− Voltage rating and polarity;
− CT circuit rating and integrity of connections;
− Protective fuse rating;
− Integrity of earth connection (where applicable)
− Remove front plate plastic film protection
− Remove insulating strip from battery compartment
3. EQUIPMENT OPERATING CONDITIONS

The equipment should be operated within the specified electrical and environmental
limits.
3.1 Current transformer circuits
Do not open the secondary circuit of a live CT since the high level voltage produced
may be lethal to personnel and could damage insulation.
3.2 External resistors
Where external resistors are fitted to relays, these may present a risk of electric shock
or burns, if touched.
3.3 Battery replacement
Where internal batteries are fitted they should be replaced with the recommended
type and be installed with the correct polarity, to avoid possible damage to the
equipment.
3.4 Insulation and dielectric strength testing
Insulation testing may leave capacitors charged up to a hazardous voltage. At the
end of each part of the test, the voltage should be gradually reduced to zero, to
discharge capacitors, before the test leads are disconnected.
3.5 Insertion of modules and pcb cards
These must not be inserted into or withdrawn from equipment whist it is energised
since this may result in damage.
3.6 Fibre optic communication
Where fibre optic communication devices are fitted, these should not be viewed
directly. Optical power meters should be used to determine the operation or signal
level of the device.
4. OLDER PRODUCTS
Electrical adjustments
Equipments which require direct physical adjustments to their operating mechanism
to change current or voltage settings, should have the electrical power removed
before making the change, to avoid any risk of electrical shock.
Mechanical adjustments
The electrical power to the relay contacts should be removed before checking any
mechanical settings, to avoid any risk of electric shock.
Draw out case relays
Removal of the cover on equipment incorporating electromechanical operating
elements, may expose hazardous live parts such as relay contacts.
Insertion and withdrawal of extender cards
When using an extender card, this should not be inserted or withdrawn from the
equipment whilst it is energised. This is to avoid possible shock or damage hazards.
Hazardous live voltages may be accessible on the extender card.
Insertion and withdrawal of heavy current test plugs
When using a heavy current test plug, CT shorting links must be in place before
insertion or removal, to avoid potentially lethal voltages.
5. DECOMMISSIONING AND DISPOSAL

Decommissioning: The auxiliary supply circuit in the relay may include capacitors
across the supply or to earth. To avoid electric shock or energy
hazards, after completely isolating the supplies to the relay (both
poles of any dc supply), the capacitors should be safely
discharged via the external terminals prior to decommissioning.
Disposal: It is recommended that incineration and disposal to water
courses is avoided. The product should be disposed of in a safe
manner. Any products containing batteries should have them
removed before disposal, taking precautions to avoid short
circuits. Particular regulations within the country of operation,
may apply to the disposal of lithium batteries.
6. TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
Protective fuse rating
The recommended maximum rating of the external protective fuse for this equipment
is 16A, Red Spot type or equivalent, unless otherwise stated in the technical data
section of the product documentation.
Insulation class: IEC 601010-1 : 1990/A2 : 2001 This equipment requires a

Class I protective (safety) earth
EN 61010-1: 2001 connection to ensure user
Class I safety.
Insulation IEC 601010-1 : 1990/A2 : 1995 Distribution level, fixed

Category Category III insulation. Equipment in this
(Overvoltage): EN 61010-1: 2001 category is qualification tested
Category III at 5kV peak, 1.2/50µs,
500Ω, 0.5J, between all supply
circuits and earth and also
between independent circuits.
Environment: IEC 601010-1 : 1990/A2 : 1995 Compliance is demonstrated

Pollution degree 2 by reference to generic safety
standards.
EN 61010-1: 2001
Pollution degree 2
Product Safety: 72/23/EEC Compliance with the European

Commission Low Voltage
Directive.
EN 61010-1: 2001 Compliance is demonstrated
EN 60950-1: 2002 by reference to generic safety
standards.
MiCOM P342, P343
INTRODUCTION
P34x/EN IT/F33 Introduction
MiCOM P342, P343

MiCOM P342, P343 Page 1/28
CONTENT
1. INTRODUCTION TO MICOM 3
2. INTRODUCTION TO MiCOM GUIDES 4
3. USER INTERFACES AND MENU STRUCTURE 6

3.1 Introduction to the relay 6
3.1.1 Front panel 6
3.1.2 Relay rear panel 7
3.2 Introduction to the user interfaces and settings options 8
3.3 Menu structure 9
3.3.1 Protection settings 10
3.3.2 Disturbance recorder settings 11
3.3.3 Control and support settings 11
3.4 Password protection 11
3.5 Relay configuration 12
3.6 Front panel user interface (keypad and LCD) 12
3.6.1 Default display and menu time-out 13
3.6.2 Menu navigation and setting browsing 14
3.6.3 Password entry 14
3.6.4 Reading and clearing of alarm messages and fault records 14
3.6.5 Setting changes 15
3.7 Front communication port user interface 16
3.8 Rear communication port user interface 17
3.8.1 Courier communication 18
3.8.2 MODBUS communication 20
3.8.3 IEC 60870-5 CS 103 communication 21
3.8.4 DNP 3.0 Communication 23
3.9 Second rear communication port 24
Page 2/28 MiCOM P342, P343
Figure 1: Relay front view 6

Figure 2: Relay rear view 8
Figure 3: Menu structure 10
Figure 4: Front panel user interface 13
Figure 5: Front port connection 16
Figure 6: PC – relay signal connection 17
Figure 7: Remote communication connection arrangements 19
Figure 8: Second rear port k-bus application 26
Figure 9: Second rear port EIA(RS)485 example 27
Figure 10: Second rear port EIA(RS)232 example 27
1. INTRODUCTION TO MICOM
MiCOM is a comprehensive solution capable of meeting all electricity supply
requirements. It comprises a range of components, systems and services from AREVA
T&D.
Central to the MiCOM concept is flexibility.
MiCOM provides the ability to define an application solution and, through extensive
communication capabilities, to integrate it with your power supply control system.
The components within MiCOM are:
− P range protection relays;
− C range control products;
− M range measurement products for accurate metering and monitoring;
− S range versatile PC support and substation control packages.
MiCOM products include extensive facilities for recording information on the state
and behaviour of the power system using disturbance and fault records. They can
also provide measurements of the system at regular intervals to a control centre
enabling remote monitoring and control to take place.
For up-to-date information on any MiCOM product, visit our website:
www.areva-td.com
2. INTRODUCTION TO MiCOM GUIDES

The guides provide a functional and technical description of the MiCOM protection
relay and a comprehensive set of instructions for the relay’s use and application.
Divided into two volumes, as follows:
Volume 1 – Technical Guide, includes information on the application of the relay and
a technical description of its features. It is mainly intended for protection engineers
concerned with the selection and application of the relay for the protection of the
power system.
Volume 2 – Operation Guide, contains information on the installation and
commissioning of the relay, and also a section on fault finding. This volume is
intended for site engineers who are responsible for the installation, commissioning
and maintenance of the relay.
The section content within each volume is summarised below:
Volume 1 Technical Guide
Safety Section
P34x/EN IT Introduction
A guide to the different user interfaces of the protection relay describing how to start
using the relay.
P34x/EN AP Application Notes
Comprehensive and detailed description of the features of the relay including both
the protection elements and the relay’s other functions such as event and disturbance
recording, fault location and programmable scheme logic. This section includes a
description of common power system applications of the relay, calculation of suitable
settings, some typical worked examples, and how to apply the settings to the relay.
P34x/EN HW Relay Description
Overview of the operation of the relay’s hardware and software. This section
includes information on the self-checking features and diagnostics of the relay.
P34x/EN TD Technical Data
Technical data including setting ranges, accuracy limits, recommended operating
conditions, ratings and performance data. Compliance with technical standards is
quoted where appropriate.
P34x/EN CT Communications and Interface Guide
This section provides detailed information regarding the communication interfaces of
the relay, including a detailed description of how to access the settings database
stored within the relay. The section also gives information on each of the
communication protocols that can be used with the relay, and is intended to allow the
user to design a custom interface to a SCADA system.
P34x/EN GC Relay Menu Database: User interface/Courier/MODBUS/
IEC60870-5-103/DNP 3.0
Listing of all of the settings contained within the relay together with a brief description
of each.
P34x/EN CO External Connection Diagrams

All external wiring connections to the relay.
P34x/EN VC Hardware / Software Version History and Compatibility
Volume 2 Operation Guide
Safety Section
P34x/EN IT Introduction
A guide to the different user interfaces of the protection relay describing how to start
using the relay.
P34x/EN IN Installation
Recommendations on unpacking, handling, inspection and storage of the relay. A
guide to the mechanical and electrical installation of the relay is provided
incorporating earthing recommendations.
P34x/EN CM Commissioning and Maintenance
Instructions on how to commission the relay, comprising checks on the calibration
and functionality of the relay. A general maintenance policy for the relay is outlined.
P34x/EN PR Problem Analysis
Advice on how to recognise failure modes and the recommended course of action.
P34x/EN GC Relay Menu Database: User interface/Courier/MODBUS/
IEC 60870-5-103/DNP 3.0
Listing of all of the settings contained within the relay together with a brief description
of each.
P34x/EN CO External Connection Diagrams
All external wiring connections to the relay.
P34x/EN VC Hardware / Software Version History and Compatibility
Repair Form
3. USER INTERFACES AND MENU STRUCTURE

The settings and functions of the MiCOM protection relay can be accessed both from
the front panel keypad and LCD, and via the front and rear communication ports.
Information on each of these methods is given in this section to describe how to get
started using the relay.
3.1 Introduction to the relay
3.1.1 Front panel
The front panel of the relay is shown in Figure 1, with the hinged covers at the top
and bottom of the relay shown open. Extra physical protection for the front panel can
be provided by an optional transparent front cover. With the cover in place read only
access to the user interface is possible. Removal of the cover does not compromise
the environmental withstand capability of the product, but allows access to the relay
settings. When full access to the relay keypad is required, for editing the settings, the
transparent cover can be unclipped and removed when the top and bottom covers
are open. If the lower cover is secured with a wire seal, this will need to be removed.
Using the side flanges of the transparent cover, pull the bottom edge away from the
relay front panel until it is clear of the seal tab. The cover can then be moved
vertically down to release the two fixing lugs from their recesses in the front panel.
Serial No and I*, V Ratings Top cover
In 1/5 A 50/60 Hz
SER No Vx V
DIAG No Vn V
LCD
TRIP
Fixed ALARM
Hotkeys
function
LEDs OUT OF SERVICE
HEALTHY
User programable
= CLEAR function LEDs
= READ
= ENTER
Keypad
Bottom
cover
Battery compartment Front comms port Download/monitor port P0103ENb
Figure 1: Relay front view

The front panel of the relay includes the following, as indicated in Figure 1:
− a 16-character by 2-line alphanumeric liquid crystal display (LCD).
− a 7-key keypad comprising 4 arrow keys (/, 6, 8 and 2), an enter key
(5), a clear key (0), and a read key (1).
− 12 LEDs; 4 fixed function LEDs on the left hand side of the front panel and 8
programmable function LEDs on the right hand side.
Under the top hinged cover:
− the relay serial number, and the relay’s current and voltage rating information*.
Under the bottom hinged cover:
− battery compartment to hold the 1/2 AA size battery which is used for memory
back-up for the real time clock, event, fault and disturbance records.
− a 9-pin female D-type front port for communication with a PC locally to the
relay (up to 15m distance) via an EIA(RS)232 serial data connection.
− a 25-pin female D-type port providing internal signal monitoring and high
speed local downloading of software and language text via a parallel data
connection.
The fixed function LEDs on the left hand side of the front panel are used to indicate
the following conditions:
Trip (Red) indicates that the relay has issued a trip signal. It is reset when the
associated fault record is cleared from the front display. (Alternatively the trip LED
can be configured to be self-resetting)*.
Alarm (Yellow) flashes to indicate that the relay has registered an alarm. This may be
triggered by a fault, event or maintenance record. The LED will flash until the alarms
have been accepted (read), after which the LED will change to constant illumination,
and will extinguish when the alarms have been cleared.
Out of service (Yellow) indicates that the relay’s protection is unavailable.
Healthy (Green) indicates that the relay is in correct working order, and should be on
at all times. It will be extinguished if the relay’s self-test facilities indicate that there is
an error with the relay’s hardware or software. The state of the healthy LED is
reflected by the watchdog contact at the back of the relay.
3.1.2 Relay rear panel
The rear panel of the relay is shown in Figure 2. All current and voltage signals*,
digital logic input signals and output contacts are connected at the rear of the relay.
Also connected at the rear is the twisted pair wiring for the rear EIA(RS)485
communication port, the IRIG-B time synchronising input and the optical fibre rear
communication port which are both optional.
Note: *May vary according to relay type/model

Optional IRIG-B board Digital input connections
A B C D E F
Power supply
connection
IRIG B
TX
PORT 1
Rear comms port

(RS485)
RX
Current* and voltage Digital output

input terminals (relays) connections
P0104ena
Figure 2: Relay rear view

Refer to the wiring diagram in section P34x/EN CO/E33 for complete connection
details.
3.2 Introduction to the user interfaces and settings options
The relay has three user interfaces:
− the front panel user interface via the LCD and keypad.
− the front port which supports Courier communication.
− the rear port which supports one protocol of either Courier, MODBUS,
IEC 60870-5-103 or DNP3.0. The protocol for the rear port must be specified
when the relay is ordered.
The measurement information and relay settings which can be accessed from the
three interfaces are summarised in Table 1.

Keypad/ IEC870-5-
Courier MODBUS DNP3.0
LCD 103
Display & modification of
• • •
all settings
Digital I/O signal status • • • • •
Display/extraction of
• • • • •
measurements
Display/extraction of fault
• • •
records
Extraction of disturbance
• • •
records
Programmable scheme
•
logic settings
Reset of fault & alarm
• • • • •
records
Clear event & fault records • • • •
Time synchronisation • • • •
Control commands • • • • •
Table 1
3.3 Menu structure
The relay’s menu is arranged in a tabular structure. Each setting in the menu is
referred to as a cell, and each cell in the menu may be accessed by reference to a
row and column address. The settings are arranged so that each column contains
related settings, for example all of the disturbance recorder settings are contained
within the same column. As shown in Figure 3, the top row of each column contains
the heading which describes the settings contained within that column. Movement
between the columns of the menu can only be made at the column heading level. A
complete list of all of the menu settings is given in section P34x/EN GC/E33 of the
manual.

Column header Up to 4 protection setting groups
System data View records Overcurrent Ground fault Overcurrent Ground fault
Column
data
settings
Control & support Group 1 Group 2
Repeated for groups 2, 3 and 4
P0106ena
Figure 3: Menu structure

All of the settings in the menu fall into one of three categories: protection settings,
disturbance recorder settings, or control and support (C&S) settings. One of two
different methods is used to change a setting depending on which category the
setting falls into. Control and support settings are stored and used by the relay
immediately after they are entered. For either protection settings or disturbance
recorder settings, the relay stores the new setting values in a temporary ‘scratchpad’.
It activates all the new settings together, but only after it has been confirmed that the
new settings are to be adopted. This technique is employed to provide extra security,
and so that several setting changes that are made within a group of protection
settings will all take effect at the same time.
3.3.1 Protection settings
The protection settings include the following items:
− protection element settings
− scheme logic settings
− auto-reclose and check synchronisation settings (where appropriate)*
− fault locator settings (where appropriate)*
There are four groups of protection settings, with each group containing the same
setting cells. One group of protection settings is selected as the active group, and is
used by the protection elements.

3.3.2 Disturbance recorder settings

The disturbance recorder settings include the record duration and trigger position,
selection of analogue and digital signals to record, and the signal sources that trigger
the recording.
3.3.3 Control and support settings
The control and support settings include:
− relay configuration settings
− open/close circuit breaker*
− CT & VT ratio settings*
− reset LEDs
− active protection setting group
− password & language settings
− circuit breaker control & monitoring settings*
− communications settings
− measurement settings
− event & fault record settings
− user interface settings
− commissioning settings
3.4 Password protection
The menu structure contains three levels of access. The level of access that is enabled
determines which of the relay’s settings can be changed and is
controlled by entry of two different passwords. The levels of access are summarised
in Table 2.
Access level Operations enabled

Level 0 Read access to all settings, alarms, event
No password required records and fault records
As level 0 plus:
Control commands, e.g.
Level 1 circuit breaker open/close.
Password 1 or 2 required Reset of fault and alarm conditions.
Reset LEDs.
Clearing of event and fault records.
Level 2 As level 1 plus:
Password 2 required All other settings
Table 2
Each of the two passwords are 4 characters of upper case text. The factory default
for both passwords is AAAA. Each password is user-changeable once it has been
correctly entered. Entry of the password is achieved either by a prompt when a
setting change is attempted, or by moving to the ‘Password’ cell in the ‘System data’
column of the menu. The level of access is independently enabled for each interface,
that is to say if level 2 access is enabled for the rear communication port, the front
panel access will remain at level 0 unless the relevant password is entered at the front
panel. The access level enabled by the password entry will time-out independently
for each interface after a period of inactivity and revert to the default level. If the
passwords are lost an emergency password can be supplied - contact AREVA T&D
with the relay’s serial number. The current level of access enabled for an interface
can be determined by examining the 'Access level' cell in the 'System data' column,
the access level for the front panel User Interface (UI), can also be found as one of
the default display options.
The relay is supplied with a default access level of 2, such that no password is
required to change any of the relay settings. It is also possible to set the default
menu access level to either level 0 or level 1, preventing write access to the relay
settings without the correct password. The default menu access level is set in the
‘Password control’ cell which is found in the ‘System data’ column of the menu (note
that this setting can only be changed when level 2 access is enabled).
3.5 Relay configuration
The relay is a multi-function device which supports numerous different protection,
control and communication features. In order to simplify the setting of the relay,
there is a configuration settings column which can be used to enable or disable many
of the functions of the relay. The settings associated with any function that is disabled
are made invisible, i.e. they are not shown in the menu. To disable a function
change the relevant cell in the ‘Configuration’ column from ‘Enabled’ to ‘Disabled’.
The configuration column controls which of the four protection settings groups is
selected as active through the ‘Active settings’ cell. A protection setting group can
also be disabled in the configuration column, provided it is not the present active
group. Similarly, a disabled setting group cannot be set as the active group.
The column also allows all of the setting values in one group of protection settings to
be copied to another group.
To do this firstly set the ‘Copy from’ cell to the protection setting group to be copied,
then set the ‘Copy to’ cell to the protection group where the copy is to be placed. The
copied settings are initially placed in the temporary scratchpad, and will only be used
by the relay following confirmation.
To restore the default values to the settings in any protection settings group, set the
‘Restore defaults’ cell to the relevant group number. Alternatively it is possible to set
the ‘Restore defaults’ cell to ‘All settings’ to restore the default values to all of the
relay’s settings, not just the protection groups’ settings. The default settings will
initially be placed in the scratchpad and will only be used by the relay after they have
been confirmed. Note that restoring defaults to all settings includes the rear
communication port settings, which may result in communication via the rear port
being disrupted if the new (default) settings do not match those of the master station.
3.6 Front panel user interface (keypad and LCD)
When the keypad is exposed it provides full access to the menu options of the relay,
with the information displayed on the LCD.
The /, 6, 8 and 2 keys which are used for menu navigation and setting value
changes include an auto-repeat function that comes into operation if any of these
keys are held continually pressed. This can be used to speed up both setting value
changes and menu navigation; the longer the key is held depressed, the faster the
rate of change or movement becomes.
System Other default displays

frequency 3-phase voltage
Alarm messages
Date and time

C
C
Column 1 Column 2 Column n

Group 4
Sytem data View records Other column headings Overcurrent
Data 1.1 Data 2.1 Data n.1

Language Last record |>1 function
C
Note: The C key will return
to column header
Data 1.2 Data 2.2 from any menu cell Data n.2
Password Time and date |>1 directional
Other setting Other setting Other setting

cells in cells in cells in
column 1 column 2 column n
Data 1.n Data 2.n Data n.n

Password C A voltage |> char angle
level 2
P0105ena
Figure 4: Front panel user interface

3.6.1 Default display and menu time-out
The front panel menu has a selectable default display. The relay will time-out and
return to the default display and turn the LCD backlight off after 15 minutes of
keypad inactivity. If this happens any setting changes which have not been confirmed
will be lost and the original setting values maintained.
The contents of the default display can be selected from the following options:
3-phase and neutral current, 3-phase voltage, power, system frequency, date and
time, relay description, or a user-defined plant reference*. The default display is
selected with the ‘Default display’ cell of the ‘Measure’t setup’ column. Also, from the
default display the different default display options can be scrolled through using the
/and 6 keys. However the menu selected default display will be restored following
the menu time-out elapsing. Whenever there is an uncleared alarm present in the
relay (e.g. fault record, protection alarm, control alarm etc.) the default display will
be replaced by:
Alarms/Faults
Present

Entry to the menu structure of the relay is made from the default display and is not
affected if the display is showing the ‘Alarms/Faults present’ message.
3.6.2 Menu navigation and setting browsing
The menu can be browsed using the four arrow keys, following the structure shown in
Figure 4. Thus, starting at the default display the 8 key will display the first column
heading. To select the required column heading use the Pand 6 keys. The setting
data contained in the column can then be viewed by using the
2 and 8 keys. It is possible to return to the column header either by holding the
[up arrow symbol] key down or by a single press of the clear key 0. It is only
possible to move across columns at the column heading level. To return to the
default display press the 8 key or the clear key 0 from any of the column
headings. It is not possible to go straight to the default display from within one of the
column cells using the auto-repeat facility of the 8 key, as the auto-repeat will stop
at the column heading. To move to the default display, the 8 key must be released
and pressed again.
3.6.3 Password entry
When entry of a password is required the following prompt will appear:
Enter password
**** Level 1
Note: The password required to edit the setting is the prompt as shown
above
A flashing cursor will indicate which character field of the password may be changed.
Press the 8 and 2 keys to vary each character between A and Z. To move
between the character fields of the password, use the 4 and 6 keys. The password is
confirmed by pressing the enter key 5. The display will revert to ‘Enter Password’ if
an incorrect password is entered. At this point a message will be displayed indicating
whether a correct password has been entered and if so what level of access has been
unlocked. If this level is sufficient to edit the selected setting then the display will
return to the setting page to allow the edit to continue. If the correct level of
password has not been entered then the password prompt page will be returned to.
To escape from this prompt press the clear key 0. Alternatively, the password can
be entered using the ‘Password’ cell of the ‘System data’ column.
For the front panel user interface the password protected access will revert to the
default access level after a keypad inactivity time-out of 15 minutes. It is possible to
manually reset the password protection to the default level by moving to the
‘Password’ menu cell in the ‘System data’ column and pressing the clear key 0
instead of entering a password.
3.6.4 Reading and clearing of alarm messages and fault records
The presence of one or more alarm messages will be indicated by the default display
and by the yellow alarm LED flashing. The alarm messages can either be self-
resetting or latched, in which case they must be cleared manually. To view the alarm
messages press the read key 1. When all alarms have been viewed, but not

cleared, the alarm LED will change from flashing to constant illumination and the
latest fault record will be displayed (if there is one). To scroll through the pages of
this use the 1 key. When all pages of the fault record have been viewed, the
following prompt will appear:
Press clear to
reset alarms
To clear all alarm messages press 0; to return to the alarms/faults present display
and leave the alarms uncleared, press 1. Depending on the password configuration
settings, it may be necessary to enter a password before the alarm messages can be
cleared (see section on password entry). When the alarms have been cleared the
yellow alarm LED will extinguish, as will the red trip LED if it was illuminated following
a trip.
Alternatively it is possible to accelerate the procedure, once the alarm viewer has
been entered using the 1 key, the 0 key can be pressed, this will move the display
straight to the fault record. Pressing 0 again will move straight to the alarm reset
prompt where pressing 0 once more will clear all alarms.
3.6.5 Setting changes

To change the value of a setting, first navigate the menu to display the relevant cell.
To change the cell value press the enter key 5, which will bring up a flashing cursor
on the LCD to indicate that the value can be changed. This will only happen if the
appropriate password has been entered, otherwise the prompt to enter a password
will appear. The setting value can then be changed by pressing the or 6 keys. If the
setting to be changed is a binary value or a text string, the required bit or character to
be changed must first be selected using the /and 6 keys. When the desired new
value has been reached it is confirmed as the new setting value by pressing
5. Alternatively, the new value will be discarded either if the clear button 0 is
pressed or if the menu time-out occurs.
For protection group settings and disturbance recorder settings, the changes must be
confirmed before they are used by the relay. To do this, when all required changes
have been entered, return to the column heading level and press the key. Prior to
returning to the default display the following prompt will be given:
Update settings?
Enter or clear
Pressing 5 will result in the new settings being adopted, pressing 0 will cause the
relay to discard the newly entered values. It should be noted that, the setting values
will also be discarded if the menu time out occurs before the setting changes have
been confirmed. Control and support settings will be updated immediately after they
are entered, without ‘Update settings?’ prompt.

3.7 Front communication port user interface

The front communication port is provided by a 9-pin female D-type connector located
under the bottom hinged cover. It provides EIA(RS)232 serial data communication
and is intended for use with a PC locally to the relay (up to 15m distance) as shown
in Figure 5. This port supports the Courier communication protocol only. Courier is
the communication language developed by AREVA T&D to allow communication with
its range of protection relays. The front port is particularly designed for use with the
relay settings program MiCOM S1 which is a Windows 98/NT based software
package.
MiCOM relay
Laptop
SK2
SK1
25 pin
download/monitor port
9 pin
Battery front comms port Serial communication port
(COM 1 or COM 2)
Serial data connector
(up to 15m)
P0107ena
Figure 5: Front port connection

The relay is a Data Communication Equipment (DCE) device. Thus the pin
connections of the relay’s 9-pin front port are as follows:
Pin no. 2 Tx Transmit data
Pin no. 3 Rx Receive data
Pin no. 5 0V Zero volts common
None of the other pins are connected in the relay. The relay should be connected to
the serial port of a PC, usually called COM1 or COM2. PCs are normally Data
Terminal Equipment (DTE) devices which have a serial port pin connection as below
(if in doubt check your PC manual):
25 Way 9 Way
Pin no. 3 2 Rx Receive data
Pin no. 2 3 Tx Transmit data
Pin no. 7 5 0V Zero volts common
For successful data communication, the Tx pin on the relay must be connected to the
Rx pin on the PC, and the Rx pin on the relay must be connected to the Tx pin on the
PC, as shown in Figure 6. Therefore, providing that the PC is a DTE with pin
connections as given above, a ‘straight through’ serial connector is required, i.e. one
that connects pin 2 to pin 2, pin 3 to pin 3, and pin 5 to pin 5. Note that a common
cause of difficulty with serial data communication is connecting Tx to Tx and Rx to Rx.
This could happen if a ‘cross-over’ serial connector is used, i.e. one that connects pin
2 to pin 3, and pin 3 to pin 2, or if the PC has the same pin configuration as the
relay.
PC
MiCOM relay
DCE Serial data connector DTE

Pin 2 Tx Pin 2 Rx
Pin 3 Rx Pin 3 Tx
Pin 5 0V Pin 5 0V
Note: PC connection shown assuming 9 Way serial port
P0108ena
Figure 6: PC – relay signal connection

Having made the physical connection from the relay to the PC, the PC’s
communication settings must be configured to match those of the relay. The relay’s
communication settings for the front port are fixed as shown in the table below:
Protocol Courier
Baud rate 19,200 bits/s
Courier address 1
Message format 11 bit - 1 start bit, 8 data bits, 1 parity bit (even parity),
1 stop bit
The inactivity timer for the front port is set at 15 minutes. This controls how long the
relay will maintain its level of password access on the front port. If no messages are
received on the front port for 15 minutes then any password access level that has
been enabled will be revoked.
3.8 Rear communication port user interface
The rear port can support one of four communication protocols (Courier, MODBUS,
DNP3.0, IEC 60870-5-103), the choice of which must be made when the relay is
ordered. The rear communication port is provided by a 3-terminal screw connector
located on the back of the relay. See section P34x/EN CO/E33 for details of the
connection terminals. The rear port provides K-Bus/EIA(RS)485 serial data
communication and is intended for use with a permanently-wired connection to a
remote control centre. Of the three connections, two are for the signal connection,
and the other is for the earth
shield of the cable. When the K-Bus option is selected for the rear port, the
two signal connections are not polarity conscious, however for MODBUS, IEC 60870-
5-103 and DNP3.0 care must be taken to observe the correct polarity.
The protocol provided by the relay is indicated in the relay menu in the
‘Communications’ column. Using the keypad and LCD, firstly check that the ‘Comms
settings’ cell in the ‘Configuration’ column is set to ‘Visible’, then move to the
‘Communications’ column. The first cell down the column shows the communication
protocol being used by the rear port.

3.8.1 Courier communication

Courier is the communication language developed by AREVA T&D to allow remote
interrogation of its range of protection relays. Courier works on a master/slave basis
where the slave units contain information in the form of a database, and respond
with information from the database when it is requested by a master unit.
The relay is a slave unit which is designed to be used with a Courier master unit such
as MiCOM S1, MiCOM S10, PAS&T or a SCADA system. MiCOM S1 is a Windows
NT4.0/98 compatible software package which is specifically designed for setting
changes with the relay.
To use the rear port to communicate with a PC-based master station using Courier, a
KITZ K-Bus to EIA(RS)232 protocol converter is required. This unit is available from
AREVA T&D. A typical connection arrangement is shown in Figure 7. For more
detailed information on other possible connection arrangements refer to the manual
for the Courier master station software and the manual for the KITZ protocol
converter. Each spur of the K-Bus twisted pair wiring can be up to 1000m in length
and have up to 32 relays connected to it.

Twisted pair K-Bus RS485 communications link
MiCOM relay MiCOM relay MiCOM relay
RS232 K-Bus
PC
KITZ protocol
converter
PC serial port
Modem
Public switched Courier master station

telephone network eg. substation control room
PC
Modem
Remote Courier master station P0109ena

eg. area control centre
Figure 7: Remote communication connection arrangements

Having made the physical connection to the relay, the relay’s communication settings
must be configured. To do this use the keypad and LCD user interface. In the relay
menu firstly check that the ‘Comms settings’ cell in the ‘Configuration’ column is set
to ‘Visible’, then move to the ‘Communications’ column. Only two settings apply to
the rear port using Courier, the relay’s address and the inactivity timer. Synchronous
communication is used at a fixed baud rate of 64kbits/s.
Move down the ‘Communications’ column from the column heading to the first cell
down which indicates the communication protocol:
Protocol
Courier

The next cell down the column controls the address of the relay:
Remote address
1
Since up to 32 relays can be connected to one K-bus spur, as indicated in Figure 7, it

is necessary for each relay to have a unique address so that messages from the
master control station are accepted by one relay only. Courier uses an integer
number between 0 and 254 for the relay address which is set with this cell. It is
important that no two relays have the same Courier address. The Courier address is
then used by the master station to communicate with the relay.
The next cell down controls the inactivity timer:
Inactivity timer
10.00 mins
The inactivity timer controls how long the relay will wait without receiving any
messages on the rear port before it reverts to its default state, including revoking any
password access that was enabled. For the rear port this can be set between 1 and
30 minutes.
Note that protection and disturbance recorder settings that are modified using an on-
line editor such as PAS&T must be confirmed with a write to the ‘Save changes’ cell of
the ‘Configuration’ column. Off-line editors such as MiCOM S1 do not require this
action for the setting changes to take effect.
3.8.2 MODBUS communication
MODBUS is a master/slave communication protocol which can be used for network
control. In a similar fashion to Courier, the system works by the master device
initiating all actions and the slave devices, (the relays), responding to the master by
supplying the requested data or by taking the requested action. MODBUS
communication is achieved via a twisted pair connection to the rear port and can be
used over a distance of 1000m with up to 32 slave devices.
To use the rear port with MODBUS communication, the relay’s communication
settings must be configured. To do this use the keypad and LCD user interface. In
the relay menu firstly check that the ‘Comms settings’ cell in the ‘Configuration’
column is set to ‘Visible’, then move to the ‘Communications’ column. Four settings
apply to the rear port using MODBUS which are described below. Move down the
‘Communications’ column from the column heading to the first cell down which
indicates the communication protocol:
Protocol
MODBUS

The next cell down controls the MODBUS address of the relay:
MODBUS address
23
Up to 32 relays can be connected to one MODBUS spur, and therefore it is necessary

for each relay to have a unique address so that messages from the master control
station are accepted by one relay only. MODBUS uses an integer number between 1
and 247 for the relay address. It is important that no two relays have the same
MODBUS address. The MODBUS address is then used by the master station to
communicate with the relay.
The next cell down controls the inactivity timer:
Inactivity timer
10.00 mins
30 minutes.
The next cell down the column controls the baud rate to be used:
Baud rate
9600 bits/s
MODBUS communication is asynchronous. Three baud rates are supported by the

relay, ‘9600 bits/s’, ‘19200 bits/s’ and ‘38400 bits/s’. It is important that whatever
baud rate is selected on the relay is the same as that set on the MODBUS master
station.
The next cell down controls the parity format used in the data frames:
Parity
None
The parity can be set to be one of ‘None’, ‘Odd’ or ‘Even’. It is important that
whatever parity format is selected on the relay is the same as that set on the
MODBUS master station.
3.8.3 IEC 60870-5 CS 103 communication
The IEC specification IEC 60870-5-103: Telecontrol Equipment and Systems, Part 5:
Transmission Protocols Section 103 defines the use of standards
IEC 60870-5-1 to IEC 60870-5-5 to perform communication with protection
equipment. The standard configuration for the IEC 60870-5-103 protocol is to use a
twisted pair connection over distances up to 1000m. As an option for IEC 60870-5-
103, the rear port can be specified to use a fibre optic connection for direct

connection to a master station. The relay operates as a slave in the system,

responding to commands from a master station. The method of communication uses
standardised messages which are based on the VDEW communication protocol.
To use the rear port with IEC 60870-5-103 communication, the relay’s
communication settings must be configured. To do this use the keypad and LCD user
interface. In the relay menu firstly check that the ‘Comms settings’ cell in the
‘Configuration’ column is set to ‘Visible’, then move to the ‘Communications’ column.
Four settings apply to the rear port using IEC 60870-5-103 which are described
below. Move down the ‘Communications’ column from the column heading to the
first cell which indicates the communication protocol:
Protocol
IEC 60870-5-103
The next cell down controls the IEC 60870-5-103 address of the relay:
Remote address
162
Up to 32 relays can be connected to one IEC 60870-5-103 spur, and therefore it is

necessary for each relay to have a unique address so that messages from the master
control station are accepted by one relay only. IEC 60870-5-103 uses an integer
number between 0 and 254 for the relay address. It is important that no two relays
have the same IEC 60870-5-103 address. The IEC 60870-5-103 address is then
used by the master station to communicate with the relay.
Baud rate
9600 bits/s
IEC 60870-5-103 communication is asynchronous. Two baud rates are supported by

the relay, ‘9600 bits/s’ and ‘19200 bits/s’. It is important that whatever baud rate is
selected on the relay is the same as that set on the IEC 60870-5-103 master station.
The next cell down controls the period between IEC 60870-5-103 measurements:
Measure’t period
30.00 s
The IEC 60870-5-103 protocol allows the relay to supply measurements at regular
intervals. The interval between measurements is controlled by this cell, and can be
set between 1 and 60 seconds.
The following cell is not currently used but is available for future expansion
Inactive timer
The next cell down the column controls the physical media used for the
communication:
Physical link
EIA(RS)485
The default setting is to select the electrical EIA(RS)485 connection. If the optional
fibre optic connectors are fitted to the relay, then this setting can be changed to ‘Fibre
optic’. This cell is also invisible if second rear comms port is fitted as it is mutually
exclusive with the fibre optic connectors.
The next cell down can be used for monitor or command blocking:
CS103 Blocking
There are three settings associated with this cell; these are:
• Disabled - No blocking selected.
• Monitor Blocking - When the monitor blocking DDB Signal is active high, either
by energising an opto input or control input, reading of the
status information and disturbance records is not permitted.
When in this mode the relay returns a “Termination of
general interrogation” message to the master station.
• Command Blocking - When the command blocking DDB signal is active high, either
by energising an opto input or control input, all remote
commands will be ignored (i.e. CB Trip/Close, change setting
group etc.). When in this mode the relay returns a “negative
acknowledgement of command” message to the master
station.
3.8.4 DNP 3.0 Communication

The DNP 3.0 protocol is defined and administered by the DNP User Group.
Information about the user group, DNP 3.0 in general and protocol specifications
can be found on their website: www.dnp.org
The relay operates as a DNP 3.0 slave and supports subset level 2 of the protocol
plus some of the features from level 3. DNP 3.0 communication is achieved via a
twisted pair connection to the rear port and can be used over a distance of 1000m
with up to 32 slave devices.
To use the rear port with DNP 3.0 communication, the relay’s communication settings
must be configured. To do this use the keypad and LCD user interface. In the relay
menu firstly check that the ‘Comms setting’ cell in the ‘Configuration’ column is set to
‘Visible’, then move to the ‘Communications’ column. Four settings apply to the rear
port using DNP 3.0, which are described below. Move down the ‘Communications’
column from the column heading to the first cell which indicates the communications
protocol:
Protocol
DNP 3.0

The next cell controls the DNP 3.0 address of the relay:
DNP 3.0 address

232
Upto 32 relays can be connected to one DNP 3.0 spur, and therefore it is necessary
for each relay to have a unique address so that messages from the master control
station are accepted by only one relay. DNP 3.0 uses a decimal number between 1
and 65519 for the relay address. It is important that no two relays have the same
DNP 3.0 address. The DNP 3.0 address is then used by the master station to
communicate with the relay.
Baud rate
9600 bits/s
DNP 3.0 communication is asynchronous. Six baud rates are supported by the relay
‘1200bits/s’, ‘2400bits/s’, ‘4800bits/s’, ’9600bits/s’, ‘19200bits/s’ and
‘38400bits/s’. It is important that whatever baud rate is selected on the relay is the
same as that set on the DNP 3.0 master station.
The next cell down the column controls the parity format used in the data frames:
Parity
None
The parity can be set to be one of ‘None’, ‘Odd’ or ‘Even’. It is important that
whatever parity format is selected on the relay is the same as that set on the DNP 3.0
master station.
The next cell down the column sets the time synchronisation request from the master
by the relay:
Time Synch
Enabled
The time synch can be set to either enabled or disabled. If enabled it allows the DNP
3.0 master to synchronise the time.
3.9 Second rear communication port
For relays with Courier, MODBUS, IEC60870-5-103 or DNP3 protocol on the first
rear communications port there is the hardware option of a second rear
communications port, which will run the Courier language. This can be used over
one of three physical links: twisted pair K-Bus (non polarity sensitive), twisted pair
EIA(RS)485 (connection polarity sensitive) or EIA(RS)232.

The settings for this port are located immediately below the ones for the first port as
described in previous sections of P34x/EN IT/E33. Move down the settings until the
following sub heading is displayed.
REAR PORT2 (RP2)
The next cell down indicates the language, which is fixed at Courier for RP2.
RP2 Protocol
Courier
The next cell down indicates the status of the hardware, e.g.
RP2 Card Status

EIA(RS)232 OK
The next cell allows for selection of the port configuration.
RP2 Port Config

EIA(RS)232
The port can be configured for EIA(RS)232, EIA(RS)485 or K-Bus.

In the case of EIA(RS)232 and EIA(RS)485 the next cell selects the communication
mode.
RP2 Comms Mode

IEC60870 FT1.2
The choice is either IEC60870 FT1.2 for normal operation with 11-bit modems, or
10-bit no parity.
The next cell down controls the comms port address.
RP2 Address
255
Since up to 32 relays can be connected to one K-bus spur, as indicated in Figure 7, it

is necessary for each relay to have a unique address so that messages from the
master control station are accepted by one relay only. Courier uses an integer
number between 0 and 254 for the relay address which is set with this cell. It is
important that no two relays have the same Courier address. The Courier address is
then used by the master station to communicate with the relay.
The next cell down controls the inactivity timer.
RP2 Inactivity Timer

15 mins
30 minutes.
In the case of EIA(RS)232 and EIA(RS)485 the next cell down controls the baud rate.
For K-Bus the baud rate is fixed at 64kbit/second between the relay and the KITZ
interface at the end of the relay spur.
RP2 Baud Rate

19200
Courier communications is asynchronous. Three baud rates are supported by the

relay, ‘9600 bits/s’, ‘19200 bits/s’ and ‘38400 bits/s’.
K-Bus Application example

Master 1 Master 2
st
Note: 1 RP could be any chosen protocol, 2nd RP is always Courier To SCADA
CENTRAL PROCESSOR
POWER SUPPLY
modem modem R.T.U.

EIA(RS)232 K-Bus KITZ102 EIA(RS)232
EIA(RS)232 1st RP (Courier)

port 1
Master 3 KITZ K-Bus

201 port 3
EIA(RS)232
port 0
2nd RP (Courier)
3 Master stations configuration: SCADA (Px40 1st RP) via

KITZ101, K-Bus 2nd rear port via remote PC and S/S PC
P2084ENA
Figure 8: Second rear port K-Bus application

“EIA(RS)485 Application” example

Master 2
Master 1
Note: 1st RP could be any chosen protocol,nd2 RP is always Courier To SCADA
CE
PO NT
WE RAL
R PR
SU OC
ESS
modem modem PPL
Y OR R.T.U.
EIA232 EIA232 EIA232
EIA485
CK222
1st RP (Modbus/ IEC103)

KITZ202/4
CK222
EIA485
Front port
EIA232
2nd RP (EIA485)
MiCOMS1
2 Master stations configuration: SCADA (Px40 1st RP) via CK222, EIA485 2nd
rear port via remote PC, Px40 & Px30 mixture plus front access P2085ENA
Figure 9: Second rear port EIA(RS)485 example
“EIA(RS)232 Application” example

Master 2
Master 1
Note: 1st RP could be any chosen protocol, 2nd RP is always Courier CENTRAL PROCESSOR To SCADA
POWER SUPPLY
EIA232
modem modem R.T.U.
EIA232 EIA232
EIA485 CK222
EIA232
splitter 1st RP (Modbus / DNP/ IEC103)
EIA232
15 a x
m
m
Front port
EIA232
2nd RP (EIA232)
MiCOMS1
2 Master stations configuration: SCADA (Px40 1st RP) via CK222, EIA232 2nd rear P2086ENA
port via remote PC, max EIA232 bus distance 15m, PC local front/rear access
Figure 10: Second rear port EIA(RS)232 example


MiCOM P342, P343
INSTALLATION
P34x/EN IN/F33 Installation
MiCOM P342, P343

CONTENT
1. RECEIPT OF RELAYS 3
2. HANDLING OF ELECTRONIC EQUIPMENT 3
3. STORAGE 4
4. UNPACKING 4
5. RELAY MOUNTING 4
5.1 Rack mounting 5
5.2 Panel mounting 6
6. RELAY WIRING 7
6.1 Medium and heavy duty terminal block connections 7
6.2 EIA(RS)485 port 8
6.3 RTD connections (if applicable) 8
6.4 Current loop input output (CLIO) connections (if applicable) 9
6.5 IRIG-B connections (if applicable) 9
6.7 Download/monitor port 9
6.8 Second EIA(RS)232/485 port 10
6.8.1 Connection to the second rear port 10
6.9 Earth connection 11
Figure 1: Location of battery isolation strip 5

Figure 2: Rack mounting of relays 6

1. RECEIPT OF RELAYS
Protective relays, although generally of robust construction, require careful treatment
prior to installation on site. Upon receipt, relays should be examined immediately to
ensure no external damage has been sustained in transit. If damage has been
sustained, a claim should be made to the transport contractor and AREVA T&D
should be promptly notified.
Relays that are supplied unmounted and not intended for immediate installation
should be returned to their protective polythene bags and delivery carton. Section 3
gives more information about the storage of relays.
2. HANDLING OF ELECTRONIC EQUIPMENT

handling electronic circuits can cause serious damage which, although not always
immediately apparent, will reduce the reliability of the circuit. This is particularly
important to consider where the circuits use complementary metal oxide
semiconductors (CMOS), as is the case with these relays.
The relay’s electronic circuits are protected from electrostatic discharge when housed
in the case. Do not expose them to risk by removing the front panel or printed circuit
boards unnecessarily.
Each printed circuit board incorporates the highest practicable protection for it’s
semiconductor devices. However, if it becomes necessary to remove a printed circuit
board, the following precautions should be taken to preserve the high reliability and
long life for which the relay has been designed and manufactured.
1. Before removing a printed circuit board, ensure that you are at the same
electrostatic potential as the equipment by touching the case.
2. Handle analogue input modules by the front panel, frame or edges of the
circuit boards. Printed circuit boards should only be handled by their edges.
Avoid touching the electronic components, printed circuit tracks or connectors.
3. Do not pass the module to another person without first ensuring you are both at
the same electrostatic potential. Shaking hands achieves equipotential.
4. Place the module on an anti-static surface, or on a conducting surface which is
5. If it is necessary to store or transport printed circuit boards removed from the
case, place them individually in electrically conducting anti-static bags.
In the unlikely event that you are making measurements on the internal electronic
circuitry of a relay in service, it is preferable that you are earthed to the case with a
conductive wrist strap. Wrist straps should have a resistance to ground between
500kΩ to 10MΩ. If a wrist strap is not available you should maintain regular contact
with the case to prevent a build-up of electrostatic potential. Instrumentation which
may be used for making measurements should also be earthed to the case whenever
possible.
found in BS EN 100015: Part 1:1992. It is strongly recommended that detailed
investigations on electronic circuitry or modification work should be carried out in a
special handling area such as described in the aforementioned British Standard
document.
3. STORAGE
If relays are not to be installed immediately upon receipt, they should be stored in a
place free from dust and moisture in their original cartons. Where de-humidifier
bags have been included in the packing they should be retained. The action of the
de-humidifier crystals will be impaired if the bag is exposed to ambient conditions
and may be restored by gently heating the bag for about an hour prior to replacing it
in the carton.
To prevent battery drain during transportation and storage a battery isolation strip is
fitted during manufacture. With the lower access cover open, presence of the battery
isolation strip can be checked by a red tab protruding from the positive side.
Care should be taken on subsequent unpacking that any dust which has collected on
the carton does not fall inside. In locations of high humidity the carton and packing
may become impregnated with moisture and the de-humidifier crystals will lose their
efficiency.
Prior to installation, relays should be stored at a temperature of between –25º to
+70ºC.
4. UNPACKING
Care must be taken when unpacking and installing the relays so that none of the
parts are damaged and additional components are not accidentally left in the
packing or lost.
Note: With the lower access cover open, the red tab of the battery
isolation strip will be seen protruding from the positive side of
the battery compartment. Do not remove this strip because it
prevents battery drain during transportation and storage and will
be removed as part of the commissioning tests.
Relays must only be handled by skilled persons.
The site should be well lit to facilitate inspection, clean, dry and reasonably free from
dust and excessive vibration. This particularly applies to installations which are being
carried out at the same time as construction work.
5. RELAY MOUNTING
MiCOM relays are dispatched either individually or as part of a panel/rack assembly.
Individual relays are normally supplied with an outline diagram showing the
dimensions for panel cut-outs and hole centres. This information can also be found
in the product publication.
Secondary front covers can also be supplied as an option item to prevent
unauthorised changing of settings and alarm status. They are available in sizes 40TE
(GN0037 001) and 60TE (GN0038 001).
The design of the relay is such that the fixing holes in the mounting flanges are only
accessible when the access covers are open and hidden from sight when the covers
are closed.
If an MMLG test block is to be included, it is recommended that, when viewed from
the front, it is positioned on the right-hand side of the relay (or relays) with which it is
associated. This minimises the wiring between the relay and test block, and allows
the correct test block to be easily identified during commissioning and maintenance
tests.
P2013ENA
Figure 1: Location of battery isolation strip

If it is necessary to test correct relay operation during the installation, the battery
isolation strip can be removed but should be replaced if commissioning of the
scheme is not imminent. This will prevent unnecessary battery drain during
transportation to site and installation. The red tab of the isolation strip can be seen
protruding from the positive side of the battery compartment when the lower access
cover is open. To remove the isolation strip, pull the red tab whilst lightly pressing the
battery to prevent it falling out of the compartment. When replacing the battery
isolation strip, ensure that the strip is refitted as shown in Figure 1, i.e. with the strip
behind the battery with the red tab protruding.
5.1 Rack mounting
MiCOM relays may be rack mounted using single tier rack frames (our part number
FX0021 001), as illustrated in Figure 2. These frames have been designed to have
dimensions in accordance with IEC60297 and are supplied pre-assembled ready to
use. On a standard 483mm rack system this enables combinations of widths of case
up to a total equivalent of size 80TE to be mounted side by side.
The two horizontal rails of the rack frame have holes drilled at approximately 26mm
intervals and the relays are attached via their mounting flanges using M4 Taptite self-
tapping screws with captive 3mm thick washers (also known as a SEMS unit). These
fastenings are available in packs of 5 (our part number ZA0005 104).
Note: Conventional self-tapping screws, including those supplied for
mounting MIDOS relays, have marginally larger heads which
can damage the front cover moulding if used.
Once the tier is complete, the frames are fastened into the racks using mounting
angles at each end of the tier.
P2014ENA
Figure 2: Rack mounting of relays

Relays can be mechanically grouped into single tier (4U) or multi-tier arrangements
by means of the rack frame. This enables schemes using products from the MiCOM
and MiDOS product ranges to be pre-wired together prior to mounting.
Where the case size summation is less than 80TE on any tier, or space is to be left for
installation of future relays, blanking plates may be used. These plates can also be
used to mount ancillary components. Table 1 shows the sizes that can be ordered.
Note: Blanking plates are only available in black.
Further details on mounting MiDOS relays can be found in publication R7012,
“MiDOS Parts Catalogue and Assembly Instructions”.
Case Size Summation Blanking Plate Part Number

5TE GJ2028 001
10TE GJ2028 002
15TE GJ2028 003
20TE GJ2028 004
25TE GJ2028 005
30TE GJ2028 006
35TE GJ2028 007
40TE GJ2028 008
Table 1: Blanking plates

5.2 Panel mounting
The relays can be flush mounted into panels using M4 SEMS Taptite self-tapping
screws with captive 3mm thick washers (also known as a SEMS unit). These
Alternatively tapped holes can be used if the panel has a minimum thickness of
2.5mm.
For applications where relays need to be semi-projection or projection mounted, a
range of collars are available. Further details can be obtained from the Contracts
Department of AREVA T&D.
Where several relays are to be mounted in a single cut-out in the panel, it is advised
that they are mechanically grouped together horizontally and/or vertically to form
rigid assemblies prior to mounting in the panel.
Note: It is not advised that MiCOM relays are fastened using pop rivets
as this will not allow the relay to be easily removed from the
panel in the future if repair is necessary.
If it is required to mount a relay assembly on a panel complying to BS EN60529
IP52, it will be necessary to fit a metallic sealing strip between adjoining relays (Part
no GN2044 001) and a sealing ring selected from Table 3 around the complete
assembly.
Width Single Tier Double Tier

10TE GJ9018 002 GJ9018 018
15TE GJ9018 003 GJ9018 019
20TE GJ9018 004 GJ9018 020
25TE GJ9018 005 GJ9018 021
30TE GJ9018 006 GJ9018 022
35TE GJ9018 007 GJ9018 023
40TE GJ9018 008 GJ9018 024
45TE GJ9018 009 GJ9018 025
50TE GJ9018 010 GJ9018 026
55TE GJ9018 011 GJ9018 027
60TE GJ9018 012 GJ9018 028
65TE GJ9018 013 GJ9018 029
70TE GJ9018 014 GJ9018 030
75TE GJ9018 015 GJ9018 031
80TE GJ9018 016 GJ9018 032
Table 3: IP52 sealing rings

6. RELAY WIRING
This section serves as a guide to selecting the appropriate cable and connector type
for each terminal on the MiCOM relay.
6.1 Medium and heavy duty terminal block connections
Loose relays are supplied with sufficient M4 screws for making connections to the rear
mounted terminal blocks using ring terminals, with a recommended maximum of two
ring terminals per relay terminal.
If required, AREVA T&D can supply M4 90° crimp ring terminals in three different
sizes depending on wire size (see Table 4). Each type is available in bags of 100.
Part Number Wire Size Insulation Colour

ZB9124 901 0.25 – 1.65mm2 (22 – 16AWG) Red
ZB9124 900 1.04 – 2.63mm2 (16 – 14AWG) Blue
ZB9124 904 2.53 – 6.64mm2 (12 – 10AWG) Uninsulated*
Table 4: M4 90° crimp ring terminals

* To maintain the terminal block insulation requirements for safety, an insulating
sleeve should be fitted over the ring terminal after crimping.
The following minimum wire sizes are recommended:
Current Transformers 2.5mm2
Auxiliary Supply, Vx 1.5mm2
EIA(RS)485 Port See separate section
Other circuits 1.0mm2
Due to the limitations of the ring terminal, the maximum wire size that can be used
for any of the medium or heavy duty terminals is 6.0mm2 using ring terminals that
are not pre-insulated. Where it required to only use pre-insulated ring terminals, the
maximum wire size that can be used is reduced to 2.63mm2 per ring terminal. If a
larger wire size is required, two wires should be used in parallel, each terminated in a
separate ring terminal at the relay.
The wire used for all connections to the medium and heavy duty terminal blocks,
except the first rear EIA(RS)485 port and second rear EIA(RS)232/485 port, should
have a minimum voltage rating of 300Vrms.
It is recommended that the auxiliary supply wiring should be protected by a 16A high
rupture capacity (HRC) fuse of type NIT or TIA. For safety reasons, current
transformer circuits must never be fused. Other circuits should be appropriately fused
to protect the wire used.
6.2 EIA(RS)485 port
Connections to the first rear EIA(RS)485 port are made using ring terminals. It is
recommended that a 2 core screened cable is used with a maximum total length of
1000m or 200nF total cable capacitance. A typical cable specification would be:
Each core: 16/0.2mm copper conductors PVC insulated
Nominal conductor area: 0.5mm2 per core
Screen: Overall braid, PVC sheathed
6.3 RTD connections (if applicable)
Where RTD inputs are available on a MiCOM relay, the connections are made using
screw clamp connectors on the rear of the relay which can accept wire sizes between
0.1mm2 and 1.5mm2. The connections between the relay and the RTD’s must be
made using a screened 3 core cable with a total resistance less than 10Ω. The cable
should have a minimum voltage rating of 300Vrms.
A 3-core cable should be used even for 2-wire RTD applications, as it allows for the
cables resistance to be removed from the overall resistance measurement. In such
cases the 3rd wire is connected to the 2nd wire at the point the cable is joined to the
RTD.
The screen of each cable must only be earthed at one end, preferably at the relay
end and must be continuous. Multiple earthing of the screen can cause circulating
current to flow along the screen, which induces noise and is unsafe. It is
recommended to minimise noise pick-up in the RTD cables by keeping them close to
earthed metal casings and avoiding areas of high electromagnetic and radio
interference. The RTD cables should not be run adjacent to or in the same conduit as
other high voltage or current cables.
A typical cable specification would be:
Each core: 7/0.2mm copper conductors heat resistant PVC
insulated
Screen: Nickel-plated copper wire braid heat resistant
PVC sheathed
6.4 Current loop input output (CLIO) connections (if applicable)
Where current loop inputs and outputs are available on a MiCOM relay, the
connections are made using screw clamp connectors, as per the RTD inputs, on the
rear of the relay which can accept wire sizes between 0.1mm2 and 1.5mm2. It is
recommended that connections between the relay and the current loop inputs and
outputs are made using a screened cable. The wire should have a minimum voltage
rating of 300Vrms.
6.5 IRIG-B connections (if applicable)
The IRIG-B input has a BNC connection. It is recommended that the cable and
connector have a characteristic impedance of 50Ω. It is also recommended that
connections between the IRIG-B equipment and the relay are made using coaxial
cable 50Ω characteristic impedance with a halogen free, fire retardant sheath.
6.6 EIA(RS)232 port
Short term connections to the EIA(RS)232 port, located behind the bottom access
cover, can be made using a screened multi-core communication cable up to 15m
long, or a total capacitance of 2500pF. The cable should be terminated at the relay
end with a 9-way, metal shelled, D-type male plug. Section 3.7 of P34x/EN IT/E33
of this manual details the pin allocations.
6.7 Download/monitor port
Short term connections to the download/monitor port, located behind the bottom
access cover, can be made using a screened 25-core communication cable up to 4m
long. The cable should be terminated at the relay end with a 25-way, metal shelled,
D-type male plug. Section 3.7 of P34x/EN IT/E33 and section 3.5 of
P34x/EN CM/E33 of this manual details the pin allocations.
6.8 Second EIA(RS)232/485 port

Relays with Courier, MODBUS, IEC60870-5-103 or DNP3 protocol on the first rear
communications port have the option of a second rear port, running Courier
language. The second rear communications port can be used over one of three
physical links: twisted pair K-Bus (non polarity sensitive), twisted pair EIA(RS)485
(connection polarity sensitive) or EIA(RS)2321.
6.8.1 Connection to the second rear port
The second rear Courier port connects via a 9-way female D-type connector (SK4) in
the middle of the card end plate (in between IRIG-B connector and lower D-type).
The connection is compliant to EIA(RS)574.
For IEC60870-5-2 over EIA(RS)232/574
Pin Connection
1 No Connection
2 RxD
3 TxD
4 DTR#
5 Ground
6 No Connection
7 RTS#
8 CTS#
9 No Connection
Connections to the second rear port configured for EIA(RS)232 operation can be
made using a screened multi-core communication cable up to 15m long, or a total
capacitance of 2500pF. The cable should be terminated at the relay end with a
9-way, metal shelled, D-type male plug. The table above details the pin allocations.
For K-bus or IEC60870-5-2 over EIA(RS)485
Pin* Connection
4 EIA(RS)485 – 1 (+ ve)
7 EIA(RS)485 – 2 (- ve)
* - All other pins unconnected.

#
- These pins are control lines for use with a modem
NOTES:
1. Connector pins 4 and 7 are used by both the EIA(RS)232/574 and EIA(RS)485
physical layers, but for different purposes. Therefore, the cables should be
removed during configuration switches.
2. For the EIA(RS)485 protocol an EIA(RS)485 to EIA(RS)232/574 converter will be
required to connect a modem or PC running MiCOM S1, to the relay. An
AREVA T&D CK222 is recommended.
1 This port is actually compliant to EIA(RS)574; the 9-pin version of EIA(RS)232, see www.tiaonline.org.
3. EIA(RS)485 is polarity sensitive, with pin 4 positive (+) and pin 7 negative (-).
4. The K-Bus protocol can be connected to a PC via a KITZ101 or 102.
5. It is recommended that a 2 core screened cable is used. To avoid exceeding
the second communications port flash clearances it is recommended that the
length of cable between the port and the communications equipment should be
less than 300m. This length can be increased to 1000m or 200nF total cable
capacitance if the communications cable is not laid in close proximity to high
current carrying conductors. The cable screen should be earthed at one end
only.
6.9 Earth connection
Every relay must be connected to the local earth bar using the M4 earth studs in the
bottom left hand corner of the relay case. The minimum recommended wire size is
2.5mm2 and should have a ring terminal at the relay end. Due to the limitations of
the ring terminal, the maximum wire size that can be used for any of the medium or
heavy duty terminals is 6.0mm2 per wire. If a greater cross-sectional area is
required, two parallel connected wires, each terminated in a separate ring terminal at
the relay, or a metal earth bar could be used.
Note: To prevent any possibility of electrolytic action between brass or
copper earth conductors and the rear panel of the relay,
precautions should be taken to isolate them from one another.
This could be achieved in a number of ways, including placing a
nickel-plated or insulating washer between the conductor and
the relay case, or using tinned ring terminals.

Installation P34x/EN IN/E33
CONTENT
1. RECEIPT OF RELAYS 3
2. HANDLING OF ELECTRONIC EQUIPMENT 3
3. STORAGE 4
4. UNPACKING 4
5. RELAY MOUNTING 4
5.1 Rack mounting 5
5.2 Panel mounting 6
6. RELAY WIRING 7
6.1 Medium and heavy duty terminal block connections 7
6.3 RTD connections (if applicable) 8
6.4 Current loop input output (CLIO) connections (if applicable) 9
6.5 IRIG-B connections (if applicable) 9
6.7 Download/monitor port 9
6.8 Second EIA(RS)232/485 port 10
6.8.1 Connection to the second rear port 10
6.9 Earth connection 11
Figure 1: Location of battery isolation strip 5

Figure 2: Rack mounting of relays 6
P34x/EN IN/E33 Installation

1. RECEIPT OF RELAYS
Protective relays, although generally of robust construction, require careful treatment
prior to installation on site. Upon receipt, relays should be examined immediately to
ensure no external damage has been sustained in transit. If damage has been
sustained, a claim should be made to the transport contractor and ALSTOM T&D –
Energy Automation & Information should be promptly notified.
Relays that are supplied unmounted and not intended for immediate installation
should be returned to their protective polythene bags and delivery carton. Section 3
gives more information about the storage of relays.
2. HANDLING OF ELECTRONIC EQUIPMENT

handling electronic circuits can cause serious damage which, although not always
immediately apparent, will reduce the reliability of the circuit. This is particularly
important to consider where the circuits use complementary metal oxide
semiconductors (CMOS), as is the case with these relays.
The relay’s electronic circuits are protected from electrostatic discharge when housed
in the case. Do not expose them to risk by removing the front panel or printed circuit
boards unnecessarily.
Each printed circuit board incorporates the highest practicable protection for it’s
semiconductor devices. However, if it becomes necessary to remove a printed circuit
board, the following precautions should be taken to preserve the high reliability and
long life for which the relay has been designed and manufactured.
1. Before removing a printed circuit board, ensure that you are at the same
electrostatic potential as the equipment by touching the case.
2. Handle analogue input modules by the front panel, frame or edges of the
circuit boards. Printed circuit boards should only be handled by their edges.
Avoid touching the electronic components, printed circuit tracks or connectors.
3. Do not pass the module to another person without first ensuring you are both at
the same electrostatic potential. Shaking hands achieves equipotential.
4. Place the module on an anti-static surface, or on a conducting surface which is
5. If it is necessary to store or transport printed circuit boards removed from the
case, place them individually in electrically conducting anti-static bags.
In the unlikely event that you are making measurements on the internal electronic
circuitry of a relay in service, it is preferable that you are earthed to the case with a
conductive wrist strap. Wrist straps should have a resistance to ground between
500kΩ to 10MΩ. If a wrist strap is not available you should maintain regular contact
with the case to prevent a build-up of electrostatic potential. Instrumentation which
may be used for making measurements should also be earthed to the case whenever
possible.
found in BS EN 100015: Part 1:1992. It is strongly recommended that detailed
investigations on electronic circuitry or modification work should be carried out in a
special handling area such as described in the aforementioned British Standard
document.
3. STORAGE
If relays are not to be installed immediately upon receipt, they should be stored in a
place free from dust and moisture in their original cartons. Where de-humidifier
bags have been included in the packing they should be retained. The action of the
de-humidifier crystals will be impaired if the bag is exposed to ambient conditions
and may be restored by gently heating the bag for about an hour prior to replacing it
in the carton.
To prevent battery drain during transportation and storage a battery isolation strip is
fitted during manufacture. With the lower access cover open, presence of the battery
isolation strip can be checked by a red tab protruding from the positive side.
Care should be taken on subsequent unpacking that any dust which has collected on
the carton does not fall inside. In locations of high humidity the carton and packing
may become impregnated with moisture and the de-humidifier crystals will lose their
efficiency.
Prior to installation, relays should be stored at a temperature of between –25º to
+70ºC.
4. UNPACKING
Care must be taken when unpacking and installing the relays so that none of the
parts are damaged and additional components are not accidentally left in the
packing or lost.
Note: With the lower access cover open, the red tab of the battery
isolation strip will be seen protruding from the positive side of
the battery compartment. Do not remove this strip because it
prevents battery drain during transportation and storage and will
be removed as part of the commissioning tests.
Relays must only be handled by skilled persons.
The site should be well lit to facilitate inspection, clean, dry and reasonably free from
dust and excessive vibration. This particularly applies to installations which are being
carried out at the same time as construction work.
5. RELAY MOUNTING
MiCOM relays are dispatched either individually or as part of a panel/rack assembly.
Individual relays are normally supplied with an outline diagram showing the
dimensions for panel cut-outs and hole centres. This information can also be found
in the product publication.
Secondary front covers can also be supplied as an option item to prevent
unauthorised changing of settings and alarm status. They are available in sizes 40TE
(GN0037 001) and 60TE (GN0038 001).
The design of the relay is such that the fixing holes in the mounting flanges are only
accessible when the access covers are open and hidden from sight when the covers
are closed.
If an MMLG test block is to be included, it is recommended that, when viewed from
the front, it is positioned on the right-hand side of the relay (or relays) with which it is
associated. This minimises the wiring between the relay and test block, and allows
the correct test block to be easily identified during commissioning and maintenance
tests.
P2013ENA
Figure 1: Location of battery isolation strip

If it is necessary to test correct relay operation during the installation, the battery
isolation strip can be removed but should be replaced if commissioning of the
scheme is not imminent. This will prevent unnecessary battery drain during
transportation to site and installation. The red tab of the isolation strip can be seen
protruding from the positive side of the battery compartment when the lower access
cover is open. To remove the isolation strip, pull the red tab whilst lightly pressing the
battery to prevent it falling out of the compartment. When replacing the battery
isolation strip, ensure that the strip is refitted as shown in Figure 1, i.e. with the strip
behind the battery with the red tab protruding.
5.1 Rack mounting
MiCOM relays may be rack mounted using single tier rack frames (our part number
FX0021 001), as illustrated in Figure 2. These frames have been designed to have
dimensions in accordance with IEC60297 and are supplied pre-assembled ready to
use. On a standard 483mm rack system this enables combinations of widths of case
up to a total equivalent of size 80TE to be mounted side by side.
The two horizontal rails of the rack frame have holes drilled at approximately 26mm
intervals and the relays are attached via their mounting flanges using M4 Taptite self-
tapping screws with captive 3mm thick washers (also known as a SEMS unit). These
Once the tier is complete, the frames are fastened into the racks using mounting
angles at each end of the tier.
P2014ENA
Figure 2: Rack mounting of relays

Relays can be mechanically grouped into single tier (4U) or multi-tier arrangements
by means of the rack frame. This enables schemes using products from the MiCOM
and MiDOS product ranges to be pre-wired together prior to mounting.
Where the case size summation is less than 80TE on any tier, or space is to be left for
installation of future relays, blanking plates may be used. These plates can also be
used to mount ancillary components. Table 1 shows the sizes that can be ordered.
Note: Blanking plates are only available in black.
Case Size Summation Blanking Plate Part Number

5TE GJ2028 001
10TE GJ2028 002
15TE GJ2028 003
20TE GJ2028 004
25TE GJ2028 005
30TE GJ2028 006
35TE GJ2028 007
40TE GJ2028 008
Table 1: Blanking plates

5.2 Panel mounting
The relays can be flush mounted into panels using M4 SEMS Taptite self-tapping
screws with captive 3mm thick washers (also known as a SEMS unit). These
Alternatively tapped holes can be used if the panel has a minimum thickness of
2.5mm.
For applications where relays need to be semi-projection or projection mounted, a
range of collars are available. Further details can be obtained from the Contracts
Department of ALSTOM T&D – Energy Automation & Information.
Where several relays are to be mounted in a single cut-out in the panel, it is advised
that they are mechanically grouped together horizontally and/or vertically to form
rigid assemblies prior to mounting in the panel.
Note: It is not advised that MiCOM relays are fastened using pop rivets
as this will not allow the relay to be easily removed from the
panel in the future if repair is necessary.
If it is required to mount a relay assembly on a panel complying to BS EN60529
IP52, it will be necessary to fit a metallic sealing strip between adjoining relays (Part
no GN2044 001) and a sealing ring selected from Table 3 around the complete
assembly.
Width Single Tier Double Tier

10TE GJ9018 002 GJ9018 018
15TE GJ9018 003 GJ9018 019
20TE GJ9018 004 GJ9018 020
25TE GJ9018 005 GJ9018 021
30TE GJ9018 006 GJ9018 022
35TE GJ9018 007 GJ9018 023
40TE GJ9018 008 GJ9018 024
45TE GJ9018 009 GJ9018 025
50TE GJ9018 010 GJ9018 026
55TE GJ9018 011 GJ9018 027
60TE GJ9018 012 GJ9018 028
65TE GJ9018 013 GJ9018 029
70TE GJ9018 014 GJ9018 030
75TE GJ9018 015 GJ9018 031
80TE GJ9018 016 GJ9018 032
Table 3: IP52 sealing rings

6. RELAY WIRING
This section serves as a guide to selecting the appropriate cable and connector type
for each terminal on the MiCOM relay.
6.1 Medium and heavy duty terminal block connections
Loose relays are supplied with sufficient M4 screws for making connections to the rear
mounted terminal blocks using ring terminals, with a recommended maximum of two
ring terminals per relay terminal.
If required, ALSTOM T&D – Energy Automation & Information can supply M4 90°
crimp ring terminals in three different sizes depending on wire size (see Table 4).
Each type is available in bags of 100.
Part Number Wire Size Insulation Colour

ZB9124 901 0.25 – 1.65mm2 (22 – 16AWG) Red
ZB9124 900 1.04 – 2.63mm2 (16 – 14AWG) Blue
ZB9124 904 2.53 – 6.64mm2 (12 – 10AWG) Uninsulated*
Table 4: M4 90° crimp ring terminals

* To maintain the terminal block insulation requirements for safety, an insulating
sleeve should be fitted over the ring terminal after crimping.
The following minimum wire sizes are recommended:
Current Transformers 2.5mm2
Auxiliary Supply, Vx 1.5mm2
EIA(RS)485 Port See separate section
Other circuits 1.0mm2
Due to the limitations of the ring terminal, the maximum wire size that can be used
for any of the medium or heavy duty terminals is 6.0mm2 using ring terminals that
are not pre-insulated. Where it required to only use pre-insulated ring terminals, the
maximum wire size that can be used is reduced to 2.63mm2 per ring terminal. If a
larger wire size is required, two wires should be used in parallel, each terminated in a
separate ring terminal at the relay.
The wire used for all connections to the medium and heavy duty terminal blocks,
except the first rear EIA(RS)485 port and second rear EIA(RS)232/485 port, should
have a minimum voltage rating of 300Vrms.
It is recommended that the auxiliary supply wiring should be protected by a 16A high
rupture capacity (HRC) fuse of type NIT or TIA. For safety reasons, current
transformer circuits must never be fused. Other circuits should be appropriately fused
to protect the wire used.
6.2 EIA(RS)485 port
Connections to the first rear EIA(RS)485 port are made using ring terminals. It is
recommended that a 2 core screened cable is used with a maximum total length of
1000m or 200nF total cable capacitance. A typical cable specification would be:
6.3 RTD connections (if applicable)
Where RTD inputs are available on a MiCOM relay, the connections are made using
screw clamp connectors on the rear of the relay which can accept wire sizes between
0.1mm2 and 1.5mm2. The connections between the relay and the RTD’s must be
made using a screened 3 core cable with a total resistance less than 10Ω. The cable
should have a minimum voltage rating of 300Vrms.
A 3-core cable should be used even for 2-wire RTD applications, as it allows for the
cables resistance to be removed from the overall resistance measurement. In such
cases the 3rd wire is connected to the 2nd wire at the point the cable is joined to the
RTD.
The screen of each cable must only be earthed at one end, preferably at the relay
end and must be continuous. Multiple earthing of the screen can cause circulating
current to flow along the screen, which induces noise and is unsafe. It is
recommended to minimise noise pick-up in the RTD cables by keeping them close to
earthed metal casings and avoiding areas of high electromagnetic and radio
interference. The RTD cables should not be run adjacent to or in the same conduit as
other high voltage or current cables.
Each core: 7/0.2mm copper conductors heat resistant PVC
insulated
Screen: Nickel-plated copper wire braid heat resistant
PVC sheathed
6.4 Current loop input output (CLIO) connections (if applicable)
Where current loop inputs and outputs are available on a MiCOM relay, the
connections are made using screw clamp connectors, as per the RTD inputs, on the
rear of the relay which can accept wire sizes between 0.1mm2 and 1.5mm2. It is
recommended that connections between the relay and the current loop inputs and
outputs are made using a screened cable. The wire should have a minimum voltage
rating of 300Vrms.
6.5 IRIG-B connections (if applicable)
The IRIG-B input has a BNC connection. It is recommended that the cable and
connector have a characteristic impedance of 50Ω. It is also recommended that
connections between the IRIG-B equipment and the relay are made using coaxial
cable 50Ω characteristic impedance with a halogen free, fire retardant sheath.
6.6 EIA(RS)232 port
Short term connections to the EIA(RS)232 port, located behind the bottom access
cover, can be made using a screened multi-core communication cable up to 15m
long, or a total capacitance of 2500pF. The cable should be terminated at the relay
end with a 9-way, metal shelled, D-type male plug. Section 3.7 of P34x/EN IT/E33
of this manual details the pin allocations.
6.7 Download/monitor port
Short term connections to the download/monitor port, located behind the bottom
access cover, can be made using a screened 25-core communication cable up to 4m
long. The cable should be terminated at the relay end with a 25-way, metal shelled,
D-type male plug. Section 3.7 of P34x/EN IT/E33 and section 3.5 of
P34x/EN CM/E33 of this manual details the pin allocations.
6.8 Second EIA(RS)232/485 port

Relays with Courier, MODBUS, IEC60870-5-103 or DNP3 protocol on the first rear
communications port have the option of a second rear port, running Courier
language. The second rear communications port can be used over one of three
physical links: twisted pair K-Bus (non polarity sensitive), twisted pair EIA(RS)485
(connection polarity sensitive) or EIA(RS)2321.
6.8.1 Connection to the second rear port
The second rear Courier port connects via a 9-way female D-type connector (SK4) in
the middle of the card end plate (in between IRIG-B connector and lower D-type).
The connection is compliant to EIA(RS)574.
For IEC60870-5-2 over EIA(RS)232/574
Pin Connection
1 No Connection
2 RxD
3 TxD
4 DTR#
5 Ground
6 No Connection
7 RTS#
8 CTS#
9 No Connection
9-way, metal shelled, D-type male plug. The table above details the pin allocations.
For K-bus or IEC60870-5-2 over EIA(RS)485
Pin* Connection
4 EIA(RS)485 – 1 (+ ve)
7 EIA(RS)485 – 2 (- ve)

#
- These pins are control lines for use with a modem
NOTES:
1. Connector pins 4 and 7 are used by both the EIA(RS)232/574 and EIA(RS)485
physical layers, but for different purposes. Therefore, the cables should be
removed during configuration switches.
2. For the EIA(RS)485 protocol an EIA(RS)485 to EIA(RS)232/574 converter will be
required to connect a modem or PC running MiCOM S1, to the relay. An
ALSTOM CK222 is recommended.
3. EIA(RS)485 is polarity sensitive, with pin 4 positive (+) and pin 7 negative (-).
4. The K-Bus protocol can be connected to a PC via a KITZ101 or 102.
5. It is recommended that a 2 core screened cable is used. To avoid exceeding
the second communications port flash clearances it is recommended that the
length of cable between the port and the communications equipment should be
less than 300m. This length can be increased to 1000m or 200nF total cable
capacitance if the communications cable is not laid in close proximity to high
current carrying conductors. The cable screen should be earthed at one end
only.
6.9 Earth connection
Every relay must be connected to the local earth bar using the M4 earth studs in the
bottom left hand corner of the relay case. The minimum recommended wire size is
2.5mm2 and should have a ring terminal at the relay end. Due to the limitations of
the ring terminal, the maximum wire size that can be used for any of the medium or
heavy duty terminals is 6.0mm2 per wire. If a greater cross-sectional area is
required, two parallel connected wires, each terminated in a separate ring terminal at
the relay, or a metal earth bar could be used.
Note: To prevent any possibility of electrolytic action between brass or
copper earth conductors and the rear panel of the relay,
precautions should be taken to isolate them from one another.
This could be achieved in a number of ways, including placing a
nickel-plated or insulating washer between the conductor and
the relay case, or using tinned ring terminals.

Commissioning and P34x/EN CM/F33
Maintenance
MiCOM P342, P343
COMMISSIONING AND
MAINTENANCE
P34x/EN CM/F33 Commissioning and
Maintenance
MiCOM P342, P343
Maintenance
CONTENT
1. INTRODUCTION 5
2. SETTING FAMILIARISATION 5
3. COMMISSIONING TEST MENU 6

3.1 Opto I/P status 7
3.2 Relay O/P status 7
3.3 Test port status 7
3.4 LED status 7
3.5 Monitor bits 1 to 8 7
3.6 Test mode 8
4. EQUIPMENT REQUIRED FOR COMMISSIONING 8

4.1 Minimum equipment required 8
4.2 Optional equipment 8
5. PRODUCT CHECKS 9
5.1 With the relay re-energised 9
5.1.1 Visual inspection 10
5.1.2 Current transformer shorting contacts 10
5.1.3 Insulation 12
5.1.4 External wiring 12
5.1.5 Watchdog contacts 12
5.1.6 Auxiliary supply 13
5.2 With the relay energised 13
5.2.1 Watchdog contacts 13
5.2.2 Date and time 14
5.2.2.1 With an IRIG-B signal 14
5.2.2.2 Without an IRIG-B signal 14
5.2.3 Light emitting diodes (LED’s) 15
5.2.3.1 Testing the alarm and out of service LED’s 15
5.2.3.2 Testing the trip LED 15
5.2.3.3 Testing the user-programmable LED’s 15
5.2.4 Field voltage supply 15
Maintenance
5.2.5 Input opto-isolators 15

5.2.6 Output relays 16
5.2.7 RTD inputs 17
5.2.8 Current loop inputs 17
5.2.9 Current loop outputs 18
5.2.10 First rear communications port 18
5.2.10.1 Courier communications 18
5.2.10.2 MODBUS communications 19
5.2.10.3 IEC60870-5-103 (VDEW) communications 19
5.2.10.4 DNP3.0 communications 19
5.2.11 Second rear communications port 20
5.2.11.1 K-Bus configuration 20
5.2.11.2 EIA(RS)485 configuration 20
5.2.11.3 EIA(RS)232 configuration 21
5.2.12 Current inputs 21
5.2.13 Voltage inputs 23
6. SETTING CHECKS 24
6.1 Apply application-specific settings 24
6.2 Check application-specific settings 24
6.3 Demonstrate correct relay operation 25
6.3.1 Generator differential protection (P343) 25
6.3.1.1 Connect the test circuit 25
6.3.1.2 Biased differential protection lower slope 26
6.3.1.3 Biased differential protection upper slope 27
6.3.2 Generator differential operation and contact assignment 27
6.3.2.1 Phase A 27
6.3.2.2 Phase B 28
6.3.2.3 Phase C 28
6.3.3 Backup phase overcurrent protection 28
6.3.3.1 Connect the test circuit 28
6.3.3.2 Perform the test 29
6.3.3.3 Check the operating time 29
7. ON-LOAD CHECKS 30
7.1 Voltage connections 30
Maintenance
7.2 Current connections 31
8. FINAL CHECKS 32
9. MAINTENANCE 32
9.1 Maintenance period 32
9.2 Maintenance checks 33
9.2.1 Alarms 33
9.2.2 Opto-isolators 33
9.2.3 Output relays 33
9.2.4 Measurement accuracy 33
9.3 Method of repair 33
9.3.1 Replacing the complete relay 34
9.3.2 Replacing a PCB 35
9.3.2.1 Replacement of the main processor board 37
9.3.2.2 Replacement of the IRIG-B/2nd communications board 38
9.3.2.3 Replacement of the input module 40
9.3.2.4 Replacement of the power supply board 42
9.3.2.5 Replacement of the relay board in the power supply module 43
9.3.2.6 Replacement of the opto and separate relay boards (P343 only) 44
9.3.2.7 Replacement of the RTD input board (P342 and P343 only) 45
9.3.2.8 Replacement of the CLIO input board 46
9.4 Re-calibration 47
9.5 Changing the battery 47
9.5.1 Instructions for replacing the battery 47
9.5.2 Post modification tests 48
9.5.3 Battery disposal 48
9.6 Cleaning 48
10. COMMISSIONING TEST RECORD 49
11. SETTING RECORD 60

Maintenance
Figure 1: Rear terminal blocks on size 40TE case 10

Figure 2: Location of securing screws for heavy duty terminal blocks 11
Figure 3: Connection for Testing 26
Figure 4: Location of securing screws for terminal blocks 34
Figure 5: Front panel assembly 38
Figure 6: Location of securing screws for IRIG-B board 39
Figure 7: Typical IRIG-B board 39
Figure 8: 2nd communications board with IRIG-B 40
Figure 9: Location of securing screws for input module 41
Figure 10: Typical power supply board 42
Figure 11: Typical relay board 43
Figure 12: Typical opto board 44
Figure 13: Location of securing screws for RTD/CLIO input board 45
Figure 14: Typical RTD input board 46
GROUP 1 PROTECTION SETTINGS 70

Maintenance
1. INTRODUCTION
The MiCOM P340 generator protection relays are fully numerical in their design,
implementing all protection and non-protection functions in software. The relays
employ a high degree of self-checking and, in the unlikely event of a failure, will give
an alarm. As a result of this, the commissioning tests do not need to be as extensive
as with non-numeric electronic or electro-mechanical relays.
To commission numeric relays, it is only necessary to verify that the hardware is
functioning correctly and the application-specific software settings have been applied
to the relay. It is considered unnecessary to test every function of the relay if the
settings have been verified by one of the following methods:
• Extracting the settings applied to the relay using appropriate setting software
(Preferred method)
• Via the operator interface.
To confirm that the product is operating correctly once the application-specific
settings have been applied, a test should be performed on a single protection
element.
Unless previously agreed to the contrary, the customer will be responsible for
determining the application-specific settings to be applied to the relay and for testing
of any scheme logic applied by external wiring and/or configuration of the relay’s
internal programmable scheme logic.
Blank commissioning test and setting records are provided at the end of this
sub-document for completion as required.
As the relay’s menu language is user-selectable, it is acceptable for the
Commissioning Engineer to change it to allow accurate testing as long as the menu is
restored to the customer’s preferred language on completion.
To simplify the specifying of menu cell locations in these Commissioning Instructions,
they will be given in the form [courier reference: COLUMN HEADING, Cell Text]. For
example, the cell for selecting the menu language (first cell under the column
heading) is located in the System Data column (column 00) so it would be given as
[0001: SYSTEM DATA, Language].
Before carrying out any work on the equipment, the user should be
familiar with the contents of the Safety and technical data sections and
the ratings on the equipment’s rating label.
2. SETTING FAMILIARISATION
When commissioning a MiCOM P340 relay for the first time, sufficient time should be
allowed to become familiar with the method by which the settings are applied.
Sub-document – Introduction contains a detailed description of the menu structure of
P340 relays.
With the secondary front cover in place all keys except the [Enter] key are accessible.
All menu cells can be read. LEDs and alarms can be reset. However, no protection
or configuration settings can be changed, or fault and event records cleared.
Removing the secondary front cover allows access to all keys so that settings can be
changed, LEDs and alarms reset, and fault and event records cleared. However,
menu cells that have access levels higher than the default level will require the
appropriate password to be entered before changes can be made.
Maintenance
Alternatively, if a portable PC is available together with suitable setting software (such

as MiCOM S1), the menu can be viewed a page at a time to display a full column of
data and text. This PC software also allows settings to be entered more easily, saved
to a file on disk for future reference or printed to produce a setting record. Refer to
the PC software user manual for details. If the software is being used for the first
time, allow sufficient time to become familiar with its operation.
3. COMMISSIONING TEST MENU

To help minimise the time required to test MiCOM relays the relay provides several
test facilities under the ‘COMMISSION TESTS’ menu heading. There are menu cells
which allow the status of the opto-isolated inputs, output relay contacts, internal
digital data bus (DDB) signals and user-programmable LEDs to be monitored.
Additionally there are cells to test the operation of the output contacts and user-
programmable LEDs.
The following table shows the relay menu of commissioning tests, including the
available setting ranges and factory defaults:
Menu Text Default Setting Settings

COMMISSION TESTS
Opto I/P Status - -
Relay O/P Status - -
Test Port Status - -
LED Status - -
Monitor Bit 1 64 (LED 1) 0 to 511
See P34x/EN GC/E33 for
Monitor Bit 3 66 (LED 3)
details of digital data bus
Monitor Bit 4 67 (LED 4) signals
Disabled
Test Mode Disabled Test Mode
Contacts Blocked
0 = Not Operated
Test Pattern All bits set to 0
1 = Operated
No Operation
Contact Test No Operation Apply Test
Remove Test
No Operation
Test LEDs No Operation
Apply Test
Table 37
Maintenance
3.1 Opto I/P status

This menu cell displays the status of the relay’s opto-isolated inputs as a binary string,
a ‘1’ indicating an energised opto-isolated input and a ‘0’ a de-energised one. If the
cursor is moved along the binary numbers the corresponding label text will be
displayed for each logic input.
It can be used during commissioning or routine testing to monitor the status of the
opto-isolated inputs whilst they are sequentially energised with a suitable dc voltage.
3.2 Relay O/P status
This menu cell displays the status of the digital data bus (DDB) signals that result in
energisation of the output relays as a binary string, a ‘1’ indicating an operated state
and ‘0’ a non-operated state. If the cursor is moved along the binary numbers the
corresponding label text will be displayed for each relay output.
The information displayed can be used during commissioning or routine testing to
indicate the status of the output relays when the relay is ‘in service’. Additionally fault
finding for output relay damage can be performed by comparing the status of the
output contact under investigation with it’s associated bit.
Note: When the ‘Test Mode’ cell is set to ‘Enabled’ this cell will
continue to indicate which contacts would operate if the relay
was in-service, it does not show the actual status of the output
relays.
3.3 Test port status
This menu cell displays the status of the eight digital data bus (DDB) signals that have
been allocated in the ‘Monitor Bit’ cells. If the cursor is moved along the binary
numbers the corresponding DDB signal text string will be displayed for each monitor
bit.
By using this cell with suitable monitor bit settings, the state of the DDB signals can be
displayed as various operating conditions or sequences are applied to the relay.
Thus the programmable scheme logic can be tested.
As an alternative to using this cell, the optional monitor/download port test box can
be plugged into the monitor/download port located behind the bottom access cover.
Details of the monitor/download port test box can be found in section ? of this
Commissioning and Maintenance sub-document.
3.4 LED status
The ‘LED Status’ cell is an eight bit binary string that indicates which of the
user-programmable LEDs on the relay are illuminated when accessing the relay from
a remote location, a ‘1’ indicating a particular LED is lit and a ‘0’ not lit.
3.5 Monitor bits 1 to 8
The eight ‘Monitor Bit’ cells allow the user to select the status of which digital data bus
signals can be observed in the ‘Test Port Status’ cell or via the monitor/download
port.
Each ‘Monitor Bit’ is set by entering the required digital data bus (DDB) signal
number (0 – 511) from the list of available DDB signals in section P34x/EN GC/E33
of this guide. The pins of the monitor/download port used for monitor bits are given
in the table overleaf. The signal ground is available on pins 18, 19, 22 and 25.
Maintenance
Monitor Bit 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Monitor/ Download Port Pin 11 12 15 13 20 21 23 24
Table 38
THE MONITOR/DOWNLOAD PORT DOES NOT HAVE ELECTRICAL ISOLATED
AGAINST INDUCED VOLTAGES ON THE COMMUNICATIONS CHANNEL. IT
SHOULD THEREFORE ONLY BE USED FOR LOCAL COMMUNICATIONS.
3.6 Test mode
This menu cell is used to allow secondary injection testing to be performed on the
relay without operation of the trip contacts. It also enables a facility to directly test the
output contacts by applying menu controlled test signals. To select test mode this cell
should be set to ‘Enabled’ which takes the relay out of service causing an alarm
condition to be recorded and the yellow ‘Out of Service’ LED to illuminate. Once
testing is complete the cell must be set back to ‘Disabled’ to restore the relay back to
service.
4. EQUIPMENT REQUIRED FOR COMMISSIONING

4.1 Minimum equipment required
Overcurrent test set with interval timer
110V ac voltage supply (if stage 1 of the overcurrent function is set directional)
Multimeter with suitable ac current range, and ac and dc voltage ranges of 0-440V
and 0-250V respectively
Continuity tester (if not included in multimeter)
Phase angle meter
Phase rotation meter
100Ω precision wirewound or metal film resistor, 0.1% tolerance (0°C±2°C)
Note: Modern test equipment may contain many of the above features
in one unit.
4.2 Optional equipment
Multi-finger test plug type MMLB01 (if test block type MMLG installed)
An electronic or brushless insulation tester with a dc output not exceeding 500V (For
insulation resistance testing when required).
A portable PC, with appropriate software (This enables the rear communications port
to be tested if this is to be used and will also save considerable time during
commissioning).
KITZ K-Bus to EIA(RS)232 protocol convertor (if first rear EIA(RS)485 K-Bus port or
second rear port configured for K-Bus is being tested and one is not already
installed).
EIA(RS)485 to EIA(RS)232 convertor (if first rear EIA(RS)485 port or second rear port
configured for EIA(RS)485 is being tested).
A printer (for printing a setting record from the portable PC).
Maintenance
5. PRODUCT CHECKS
These product checks cover all aspects of the relay that need to be checked to ensure
that it has not been physically damaged prior to commissioning, is functioning
correctly and all input quantity measurements are within the stated tolerances.
If the application-specific settings have been applied to the relay prior to
commissioning, it is advisable to make a copy of the settings so as to allow their
restoration later. If programmable scheme logic other than the default settings with
which the relay is supplied have been applied the default settings should be restored
prior to commissioning. This could be done by:
• Obtaining a setting file on a diskette from the customer (This requires a portable
PC with appropriate setting software for transferring the settings from the PC to
the relay)
• Extracting the settings from the relay itself (This again requires a portable PC with
appropriate setting software)
• Manually creating a setting record. This could be done using a copy of the setting
record located at the end of this sub-document to record the settings as the relay’s
menu is sequentially stepped through via the front panel user interface.
If password protection is enabled and the customer has changed password 2 that
prevents unauthorised changes to some of the settings, either the revised password 2
should be provided, or the customer should restore the original password prior to
commencement of testing.
Note: In the event that the password has been lost, a recovery
password can be obtained from AREVA T&D by quoting the
serial number of the relay. The recovery password is unique to
that relay and is unlikely to work on any other relay.
5.1 With the relay re-energised
The following group of tests should be carried out without the auxiliary supply being
applied to the relay and with the trip circuit isolated.
The current and voltage transformer connections must be isolated from the relay for
these checks. If an MMLG test block is provided, the required isolation can easily be
achieved by inserting test plug type MMLB01 which effectively open-circuits all wiring
routed through the test block.
Before inserting the test plug, reference should be made to the scheme (wiring)
diagram to ensure that this will not potentially cause damage or a safety hazard. For
example, the test block may be associated with protection current transformer circuits.
It is essential that the sockets in the test plug which correspond to the current
transformer secondary windings are linked before the test plug is inserted into the test
block.
DANGER: Never open circuit the secondary circuit of a current
transformer since the high voltage produced may be lethal
and could damage insulation.
If a test block is not provided, the voltage transformer supply to the relay should be
isolated by means of the panel links or connecting blocks. The line current
transformers should be short-circuited and disconnected from the relay terminals.
Where means of isolating the auxiliary supply and trip circuit (e.g. isolation links,
fuses, MCB, etc.) are provided, these should be used. If this is not possible, the
Maintenance
Page 10/124 MiCOM P342, P343
wiring to these circuits will have to be disconnected and the exposed ends suitably
terminated to prevent them from being a safety hazard.
5.1.1 Visual inspection
Carefully examine the relay to see that no physical damage has occurred since
installation.
The rating information given under the top access cover on the front of the relay
should be checked to ensure it is correct for the particular installation.
Ensure that the case earthing connections, bottom left-hand corner at the rear of the
relay case, are used to connect the relay to a local earth bar using an adequate
conductor.
A B C D E F
19
1
1
1
2
2
3
3
4
5
20
4
4
7
5
5
8
IRIG-B 9
10
6
11
21
7
12
7
7
13
14
15
8
8
9
9
10
12
22
11
10
10
10
16
11
11
11
17
18
19
12
12
12
20
13
14
15
23
TX
13
13
13
21
22
RX 23
14
14
24 14
25
15
15
15
26
16
17
18
24
27
28
16
16
16
29
17
17
17
30
18
18
18
P2015ENA
Figure 1: Rear terminal blocks on size 40TE case

5.1.2 Current transformer shorting contacts
If required, the current transformer shorting contacts can be checked to ensure that
they close when the heavy duty terminal block (block reference C in Figure 1) is
disconnected from the current input PCB. For P342 relays block reference C (40TE
case) and D (60TE case) are heavy duty terminal blocks. In the case of P343 relays
they are located at block references C and E (60TE case) and D and F (80TE case).
Maintenance
MiCOM P342, P343 Page 11/124
Current Input Shorting Contact Between Terminals

P342 (40TE), P343 (60TE) P342 (60TE), P343 (80TE)
1A CT’s 5A CT’s 1A CT’s 5A CT’s
ΙA C3-C2 C1-C2 D3-D2 D1-D2
ΙB C6-C5 C4-C5 D6-D5 D4-D5
ΙC C9-C8 C7-C8 D9-D8 D7-D8
ΙN C12-C11 C10-C11 D12-D11 D10-D11
ΙN SENSITIVE C15-C14 C13-C14 D15-D14 D13-D14
ΙA(2) (P343 only) E3-E2 E1-E2 F3-F2 F1-F2
ΙB(2) (P343 only) E6-E5 E4-E5 F6-F5 F4-F5
ΙC(2) (P343 only) E9-E8 E7-E8 F9-F8 F7-F8
Table 1: Current transformer shorting contact locations

Heavy duty terminal block are fastened to the rear panel using four crosshead screws.
These are located top and bottom between the first and second, and third and fourth,
columns of terminals (see Figure 2).
Note: The use of a magnetic bladed screwdriver is recommended to
minimise the risk of the screws being left in the terminal block or
lost.
Pull the terminal block away from the rear of the case and check with a continuity
tester that all the shorting switches being used are closed. Table 1 shows the
terminals between which shorting contacts are fitted.
19
1
20
5
4
21
7
9
11
22
12
10
15
13
14
23
16
17
18
24
Heavy duty terminal block

P2016ENA
Figure 2: Location of securing screws for heavy duty terminal blocks

Maintenance
Page 12/124 MiCOM P342, P343
5.1.3 Insulation
Insulation resistance tests are only necessary during commissioning if it is required for
them to be done and they haven’t been performed during installation.
Isolate all wiring from the earth and test the insulation with an electronic or brushless
insulation tester at a dc voltage not exceeding 500V. Terminals of the same circuits
should be temporarily connected together.
The main groups of relay terminals are:
a) Voltage transformer circuits
b) Current transformer circuits
c) Auxiliary voltage supply
d) Field voltage output and opto-isolated control inputs
e) Relay contacts
f) First rear EIA(RS)485 communication port
g) RTD inputs
h) Current loop (analogue) inputs and outputs (CLIO)
i) Case earth
The insulation resistance should be greater than 100MΩ at 500V.
On completion of the insulation resistance tests, ensure all external wiring is correctly
reconnected to the unit.
5.1.4 External wiring
Check that the external wiring is correct to the relevant relay diagram or scheme
diagram. The relay diagram number appears on the rating label under the top
access cover on the front of the relay. The corresponding connection diagram will
have been supplied with the AREVA T&D order acknowledgement for the relay.
If an MMLG test block is provided, the connections should be checked against the
scheme (wiring) diagram. It is recommended that the supply connections are to the
live side of the test block (coloured orange with the odd numbered terminals (1, 3, 5,
7 etc.)). The auxiliary supply is normally routed via terminals 13 (supply positive) and
15 (supply negative), with terminals 14 and 16 connected to the relay’s positive and
negative auxiliary supply terminals respectively. However, check the wiring against
the schematic diagram for the installation to ensure compliance with the customer’s
normal practice.
5.1.5 Watchdog contacts
Using a continuity tester, check that the watchdog contacts are in the states given in
Table 2 for a de-energised relay.
Maintenance
MiCOM P342, P343 Page 13/124
Contact State
Terminals
Relay De-Energised Relay Energised
F11 - F12 (P342 40TE)
J11 - J12 (P342/3 60TE) Closed Open
M11- M12 (P343 80TE)
F13 - F14 (P342 40TE)
J13 - J14 (P342/3 60TE) Open Closed
M13 - M14 (P343 80TE)
Table 2: Watchdog contact status

5.1.6 Auxiliary supply
The relay can be operated from either a dc only or an ac/dc auxiliary supply
depending on the relay’s nominal supply rating. The incoming voltage must be
within the operating range specified in Table 3.
Without energising the relay, measure the auxiliary supply to ensure it is within the
operating range.
Nominal Supply Rating

DC Operating Range AC Operating Range
DC [AC rms]
24 - 48V [-] 19 - 65V -
48 - 110V [30 - 100V] 37 - 150V 24 - 110V
110 - 240V [100 - 240V] 87 - 300V 80 - 265V
Table 3: Operational range of auxiliary supply Vx

It should be noted that the relay can withstand an ac ripple of up to 12% of the upper
rated voltage on the dc auxiliary supply.
Do not energise the relay using the battery charger with the battery
disconnected as this can irreparably damage the relay’s power supply
circuitry.
Energise the relay only if the auxiliary supply is within the operating range. If an
MMLG test block is provided, it may be necessary to link across the front of the test
plug to connect the auxiliary supply to the relay.
5.2 With the relay energised
The following group of tests verify that the relay hardware and software is functioning
correctly and should be carried out with the auxiliary supply applied to the relay.
The current and voltage transformer connections must remain isolated from the relay
for these checks. The trip circuit should also remain isolated to prevent accidental
operation of the associated circuit breaker.
5.2.1 Watchdog contacts
Using a continuity tester, check the watchdog contacts are in the states given in Table
2 for an energised relay.
Maintenance
Page 14/124 MiCOM P342, P343
5.2.2 Date and time

Before setting the date and time, ensure that the factory-fitted battery isolation strip
that prevents battery drain during transportation and storage has been removed.
With the lower access cover open, presence of the battery isolation strip can be
checked by a red tab protruding from the positive side of the battery compartment.
Lightly pressing the battery to prevent it falling out of the battery compartment, pull
the red tab to remove the isolation strip.
The data and time should now be set to the correct values. The method of setting will
depend on whether accuracy is being maintained via the optional inter-range
instrumentation group standard B (IRIG-B) port on the rear of the relay.
5.2.2.1 With an IRIG-B signal
If a satellite time clock signal conforming to IRIG-B is provided and the relay has the
optional IRIG-B port fitted, the satellite clock equipment should be energised.
To allow the relay’s time and date to be maintained from an external IRIG-B source
cell [0804: DATE and TIME, IRIG-B Sync] must be set to ‘Enabled’.
Ensure the relay is receiving the IRIG-B signal by checking that cell [0805: DATE and
TIME, IRIG-B Status] reads ‘Active’.
Once the IRIG-B signal is active, adjust the time offset of the universal co-ordinated
time (satellite clock time) on the satellite clock equipment so that local time is
displayed.
Check the time, date and month are correct in cell [0801: DATE and TIME,
Date/Time]. The IRIG-B signal does not contain the current year so it will need to be
set manually in this cell.
In the event of the auxiliary supply failing, with a battery fitted in the compartment
behind the bottom access cover, the time and date will be maintained. Therefore,
when the auxiliary supply is restored, the time and date will be correct and not need
to be set again.
To test this, remove the IRIG-B signal, then remove the auxiliary supply from the relay.
Leave the relay de-energised for approximately 30 seconds. On re-energisation, the
time in cell [0801: DATE and TIME, Date/Time] should be correct.
Reconnect the IRIG-B signal.
5.2.2.2 Without an IRIG-B signal
If the time and date is not being maintained by an IRIG-B signal, ensure that cell
[0804: DATE and TIME, IRIG-B Sync] is set to ‘Disabled’.
Set the date and time to the correct local time and date using cell [0801: DATE and
TIME, Date/Time].
In the event of the auxiliary supply failing, with a battery fitted in the compartment
behind the bottom access cover, the time and date will be maintained. Therefore
when the auxiliary supply is restored the time and date will be correct and not need to
be set again.
To test this, remove the auxiliary supply from the relay for approximately 30 seconds.
On re-energisation, the time in cell [0801: DATE and TIME, Date/Time] should be
correct.
Maintenance
MiCOM P342, P343 Page 15/124
5.2.3 Light emitting diodes (LED’s)

On power up the green LED should have illuminated and stayed on indicating that
the relay is healthy. The relay has non-volatile memory which remembers the state
(on or off) of the alarm, trip and, if configured to latch, user-programmable LED
indicators when the relay was last energised from an auxiliary supply. Therefore
these indicators may also illuminate when the auxiliary supply is applied.
If any of these LED’s are on then they should be reset before proceeding with further
testing. If the LED’s successfully reset (the LED goes out), there is no testing required
for that LED because it is known to be operational.
5.2.3.1 Testing the alarm and out of service LED’s
The alarm and out of service LED’s can be tested using the COMMISSIONING TESTS
menu column. Set cell [0F0D: COMMISSIONING TESTS, Test Mode] to ‘Contacts
Blocked’. Check that the out of service LED illuminates continuously and the alarm
LED flashes.
It is not necessary to return cell [0F0D: COMMISSIONING TESTS, Test Mode] to
‘Disabled’ at this stage because the test mode will be required for later tests.
5.2.3.2 Testing the trip LED
The trip LED can be tested by initiating a manual circuit breaker trip from the relay.
However, the trip LED will operate during the setting checks performed later.
Therefore no further testing of the trip LED is required at this stage.
5.2.3.3 Testing the user-programmable LED’s
To test the user-programmable LED’s set cell [0F10: COMMISSIONING TESTS, Test
LED’s] to ‘Apply Test’. Check that all 8 LED’s on the right-hand side of the relay
illuminate.
5.2.4 Field voltage supply
The relay generates a field voltage of nominally 48V that can be used to energise the
opto-isolated inputs (alternatively the substation battery may be used).
Measure the field voltage across terminals 7 and 9 on the terminal block given in
Table 4. Check that the field voltage is within the range 40V to 60V when no load is
connected and that the polarity is correct.
Repeat for terminals 8 and 10.
Terminals
Supply Rail
P342 (40TE) P342/P343 (60TE) P343 (80TE)
+ve F7 & F8 J7 & J8 M7 & M8
-ve F9 & F10 J9 & J10 M9 & M10
Table 4: Field voltage terminals

5.2.5 Input opto-isolators
This test checks that all the opto-isolated inputs are functioning correctly. The P342
relay has 8-16 opto-isolated inputs in the 40TE case and 16-24 opto-isolated inputs
in the 60TE case. The P343 relay has 16-24 opto-isolated inputs in the 60TE case
and 24-32 opto-isolated inputs in the 80TE case.
Maintenance
Page 16/124 MiCOM P342, P343
The opto-isolated inputs should be energised one at a time, see external connection
diagrams (P34x/EN CO/E33) for terminal numbers. Ensuring that the correct opto
input nominal voltage is set in the ‘Opto Config’ menu and correct polarity, connect
the field supply voltage to the appropriate terminals for the input being tested.
Note: The opto-isolated inputs may be energised from an external dc
auxiliary supply (e.g. the station battery) in some installations.
Check that this is not the case before connecting the field voltage
otherwise damage to the relay may result. If an external
24/27V, 30/34V, 48/54V, 110/125V, 220/250V supply is being
used it will be connected to the relay's optically isolated inputs
directly. If an external supply is being used then it must be
energised for this test but only if it has been confirmed that it is
suitably rated with less than 12% ac ripple.
The status of each opto-isolated input can be viewed using either cell [0020: SYSTEM
DATA, Opto Ι/P Status] or [0F01: COMMISSIONING TESTS, Opto Ι/P Status], a ‘1’
indicating an energised input and a ‘0’ indicating a de-energised input. When each
opto-isolated input is energised one of the characters on the bottom line of the
display will change to indicate the new state of the inputs.
5.2.6 Output relays
This test checks that all the output relays are functioning correctly. The P342 relay
has 7-15 output relays in the 40TE case and 16-24 output relays in the 60TE case.
The P343 relay has 14-22 output relays in the 60TE case and 24-32 output relays in
the 80TE case.
Ensure that the cell [0F0D: COMMISSIONING TESTS, Test Mode] is set to ‘Contacts
Blocked’.
The output relays should be energised one at a time. To select output relay 1 for
testing, set cell [0F0E: COMMISSIONING TESTS, Test Pattern]
00000000000000000000000000000001.
Connect a continuity tester across the terminals corresponding to output relay 1 as

given in external connection diagram (P34x/EN CO/E33).
To operate the output relay set cell [0F0F: COMMISSIONING TESTS, Contact Test] to
‘Apply Test’. Operation will be confirmed by the continuity tester operating for a
normally open contact and ceasing to operate for a normally closed contact.
Measure the resistance of the contacts in the closed state.
Reset the output relay by setting cell [0F0F: COMMISSIONING TESTS, Contact Test]
to ‘Remove Test’.
Note: It should be ensured that thermal ratings of anything connected
to the output relays during the contact test procedure is not
exceeded by the associated output relay being operated for too
long. It is therefore advised that the time between application
and removal of contact test is kept to the minimum.
Repeat the test for the rest of the relays.
Return the relay to service by setting cell [0F0D: COMMISSIONING TESTS, Test
Mode] to ‘Disabled’.
Maintenance
MiCOM P342, P343 Page 17/124
5.2.7 RTD inputs

This test checks that all the RTD inputs are functioning correctly and is only performed
on relays with the RTD board fitted, i.e. P342 and P343 models.
A 100Ω resistor, preferably with a tolerance of 0.1%, should be connected across
each RTD in turn. The resistor needs to have a very small tolerance as RTDs
complying to BS EN 60751 : 1995 typically have a change of resistance of 0.39Ω per
°C, therefore the use of a precision wirewound or metal film resistor is
recommended. It is essential to connect the RTD common return terminal to the
appropriate RTD input otherwise the relay will report a RTD error as it will assume
that the RTD wiring has been damaged. The connections required for testing each
RTD input are given in Table 7.
Check that the corresponding temperature displayed in the ‘MEASUREMENTS 3’
column of the menu is 0°C ±2°C. This range takes into account the 0.1% resistor
tolerance and relay accuracy of ±1°C. If a resistor of lower accuracy is used during
testing the acceptable setting range will need to be increased.
Terminal Connections Measurement Cell

RTD (in ‘Measurements 3’
Resistor Between Wire Between Column (04) of Menu)
1 B1 and B2 B2 and B3 [0412: RTD 1 Label]
9 B25 and B26 B26 and B27 [041A: RTD 9 Label]
10 B28 and B29 B29 and B30 [041B: RTD 10 Label]
Table 7: RTD input terminals

5.2.8 Current loop inputs
This test checks that all the current loop (analogue) inputs are functioning correctly
and is only performed on relays with the CLIO (current loop input output) board
fitted.
Relay terminal connections can be found by referring to the connection diagrams in
P34x/EN CO/E33. Note that for the current loop inputs the physical connection of
the 0-1mA input is different from that of the 0-10, 0-20 and 4-20mA inputs, as
shown in the connection diagrams.
An accurate dc current source can be used to apply various current levels to the
current loop inputs. Another approach is to use the current loop output as a
convenient and flexible dc current source to test the input protection functionality.
Externally the current loop outputs can be fed into their corresponding current loop
inputs. Then by applying a certain level of analogue signal, such as VA, to the relay
the required dc output level can be obtained from the current loop output which is
feeding the current loop input.
Maintenance
Page 18/124 MiCOM P342, P343
Enable the current loop input to be tested. Set the CLIx minimum and maximum
settings and the CLIx Input type for the application.
Apply a dc current to the relay current loop input at 50% of the CLI input maximum
range, 0.5mA (0-1mA CLI), 5mA (0-10mA CLI) or 10mA (0-20, 4-20mA CLI).
Check the accuracy of the current loop input using the MEASUREMENTS 3 – CLIO
Input 1/2/3/4 column of the menu. The display should show (CLIx maximum + CLIx
minimum)/2 ±1% full scale accuracy.
5.2.9 Current loop outputs
This test checks that all the current loop (analogue) outputs are functioning correctly
and is only performed on relays with the CLIO board fitted.
Relay terminal connections can be found by referring to the connection diagrams in
P34x/EN CO/E33. Note that for the current loop outputs the physical connection of
the 0-1mA output is different from that of the 0-10, 0-20 and 4-20mA outputs, as
shown in the connection diagrams.
Enable the current loop output to be tested. Set the CLOx parameter, CLOx
minimum and maximum settings and the CLOx Output type for the application.
Apply the appropriate analogue input parameter to the relay equals to (CLOx
maximum + CLOx minimum)/2. The current loop output should be at 50% of its
maximum rated output. Using a precision resistive current shunt together with a
high-resolution voltmeter, check that the current loop output is at 50% of its maximum
rated output, 0.5mA (0-1mA CLO), 5mA (0-10mA CLO) or 10mA (0-20, 4-20mA
CLO). The accuracy should be within ±0.5% of full scale + meter accuracy.
5.2.10 First rear communications port
This test should only be performed where the relay is to be accessed from a remote
location and will vary depending on the communications standard being adopted.
It is not the intention of the test to verify the operation of the complete system from the
relay to the remote location, just the relay’s rear communications port and any
protocol converter necessary.
5.2.10.1Courier communications
If a K-Bus to EIA(RS)232 KITZ protocol convertor is installed, connect a portable PC
running the appropriate software (e.g. MiCOM S1 or PAS&T) to the incoming (remote
from relay) side of the protocol converter.
If a KITZ protocol convertor is not installed, it may not be possible to connect the PC
to the relay installed. In this case a KITZ protocol convertor and portable PC running
appropriate software should be temporarily connected to the relay’s first rear K-Bus
port. The terminal numbers for the relay’s first rear K-Bus port are given in Table 8.
However, as the installed protocol convertor is not being used in the test, only the
correct operation of the relay’s K-Bus port will be confirmed.
Maintenance
MiCOM P342, P343 Page 19/124
Connection Terminal
MODBUS, VDEW or P342 P342/3 P343
K-Bus
DNP3.0 (40TE) (60TE) (80TE)
Screen Screen F16 J16 M16
1 +ve F17 J17 M17
2 -ve F18 J18 M18
Table 8: EIA(RS)485 terminals

Ensure that the communications baud rate and parity settings in the application
software are set the same as those on the protocol convertor (usually a KITZ but could
be a SCADA RTU). The relay’s Courier address in cell [0E02: COMMUNICATIONS,
Remote Address] must be set to a value between 1 and 254.
Check that communications can be established with this relay using the portable PC.
5.2.10.2MODBUS communications
Connect a portable PC running the appropriate MODBUS Master Station software to
the relay’s first rear EIA(RS)485 port via a EIA(RS)485 to EIA(RS)232 interface
convertor. The terminal numbers for the relay’s EIA(RS)485 port are given in Table 8.
Ensure that the relay address, baud rate and parity settings in the application
software are set the same as those in cells [0E02: COMMUNICATIONS, Remote
Address], [0E04: COMMUNICATIONS, Baud Rate] and [0E05: COMMUNICATIONS,
Parity] of the relay.
Check that communications with this relay can be established.
5.2.10.3IEC60870-5-103 (VDEW) communications
If the relay has the optional fibre optic communications port fitted, the port to be used
should be selected by setting cell [0E07: COMMUNICATIONS, Physical Link] to ‘Fibre
Optic’ or ‘EIA(RS)485’.
IEC60870-5-103/VDEW communication systems are designed to have a local Master
Station and this should be used to verify that the relay’s rear fibre optic or EIA(RS)485
port, as appropriate, is working.
Ensure that the relay address and baud rate settings in the application software are
set the same as those in cells [0E02: COMMUNICATIONS, Remote Address] and
[0E04: COMMUNICATIONS, Baud Rate] of the relay.
Check that, using the Master Station, communications with the relay can be
established.
5.2.10.4DNP3.0 communications
Connect a portable PC running the appropriate DNP3.0 Master Station Software to
the relay’s first rear EIA(RS)485 port via a EIA(RS)485 to EIA(RS)232 interface
converter. The terminal numbers for the relay’s EIA(RS)485 port are given in Table 8.
Ensure that the relay address, baud rate and parity settings in the application
software are set the same as those in cells [0E02: COMMUNICATIONS, Remote
address], [0E04: COMMUNICATIONS, Baud Rate] and [0E05: COMMUNICATIONS,
Parity] of the relay.
Check that communications with this relay can be established.
Maintenance
Page 20/124 MiCOM P342, P343
5.2.11 Second rear communications port

This test should only be performed where the relay is to be accessed from a remote
location and will vary depending on the communications standard being adopted.
It is not the intention of the test to verify the operation of the complete system from the
relay to the remote location, just the relay’s rear communications port and any
protocol converter necessary.
5.2.11.1K-Bus configuration
If a K-Bus to EIA(RS)232 KITZ protocol convertor is installed, connect a portable PC
running the appropriate software (e.g. MiCOM S1 or PAS&T) to the incoming (remote
from relay) side of the protocol converter.
If a KITZ protocol convertor is not installed, it may not be possible to connect the PC
to the relay installed. In this case a KITZ protocol convertor and portable PC running
appropriate software should be temporarily connected to the relay’s second rear
communications port configured for K-Bus. The terminal numbers for the relay’s
K-Bus port are given in Table 9. However, as the installed protocol convertor is not
being used in the test, only the correct operation of the relay’s K-Bus port will be
confirmed.
Pin* Connection
4 EIA485 – 1 (+ ve)
7 EIA485 – 2 (- ve)
Table 9: 2nd rear communications port K-Bus terminals

software are set the same as those on the protocol convertor (usually a KITZ but could
be a SCADA RTU). The relay’s Courier address in cell [0E90: COMMUNICATIONS,
RP2 Address] must be set to a value between 1 and 254. The second rear
communication’s port configuration [0E88: COMMUNICATIONS RP2 Port Config]
must be set to K-Bus.
5.2.11.2EIA(RS)485 configuration
If an EIA(RS)485 to EIA(RS)232 convertor (AREVA T&D CK222) is installed, connect a
portable PC running the appropriate software (e.g. MiCOM S1) to the EIA(RS)232
side of the converter and the second rear communications port of the relay to the
EIA(RS)485 side of the converter.
The terminal numbers for the relay’s EIA(RS)485 port are given in Table 9.
software are set the same as those in the relay. The relay’s Courier address in cell
[0E90: COMMUNICATIONS, RP2 Address] must be set to a value between 1 and
254. The second rear communication’s port configuration [0E88:
COMMUNICATIONS RP2 Port Config] must be set to EIA(RS)485.
Maintenance
MiCOM P342, P343 Page 21/124
5.2.11.3EIA(RS)232 configuration
Connect a portable PC running the appropriate software (e.g. MiCOM S1) to the rear
EIA(RS)2321 port of the relay.
The second rear communications port connects via the 9-way female D-type
connector (SK4). The connection is compliant to EIA(RS)574.
Pin Connection
1 No Connection
2 RxD
3 TxD
4 DTR#
5 Ground
6 No Connection
7 RTS#
8 CTS#
9 No Connection
Table 10: Second rear communications port EIA(RS)232 terminals

#
- These pins are control lines for use with a modem.
9-way, metal shelled, D-type male plug. The terminal numbers for the relay’s
EIA(RS)232 port are given in Table 10.
software are set the same as those in the relay. The relay’s Courier address in cell
[0E90: COMMUNICATIONS, RP2 Address] must be set to a value between 1 and
254. The second rear communication’s port configuration [0E88:
COMMUNICATIONS RP2 Port Config] must be set to EIA(RS)232.
5.2.12 Current inputs
This test verifies that the accuracy of current measurement is within the acceptable
tolerances.
All relays will leave the factory set for operation at a system frequency of 50Hz. If
operation at 60Hz is required then this must be set in cell [0009: SYSTEM DATA,
Frequency].
Apply current equal to the line current transformer secondary winding rating to each
current transformer input of the corresponding rating in turn, checking its magnitude
using a multimeter. Refer to Table 9 for the corresponding reading in the relay’s
MEASUREMENTS 1 or MEASUREMENTS 3 columns, as appropriate, and record the
value displayed.
Maintenance
Page 22/124 MiCOM P342, P343
Apply Current to
P342 (40TE), P343 P342 (60TE), P343
Menu Cell
(60TE) (80TE)
1A CT’s 5A CT’s 1A CT’s 5A CT’s
[0201: MEASUREMENTS 1,
C3-C2 C1-C2 D3-D2 D1-D2
ΙA Magnitude]
C6-C5 C4-C5 D6-D5 D4-D5
ΙB Magnitude]
C9-C8 C7-C8 D9-D8 D7-D8
ΙC Magnitude]
C12-C11 C10-C11 D12-D11 D10-D11
ΙN Measured Mag]
[020B: MEASUREMENTS 1,
C15-C14 C13-C14 D15-D14 D13-D14
ΙSEF Magnitude]
E3-E2 E1-E2 F3-F2 F1-F2
ΙA-2 Magnitude] (P343 only)
E6-E5 E4-E5 F6-F5 F4-F5
ΙB-2 Magnitude] (P343 only)
E9-E8 E7-E8 F9-F8 F7-F8
ΙC-2 Magnitude] (P343 only)
Table 9: Current input terminals

The measured current values displayed on the relay LCD or a portable PC connected
to the front communication port will either be in primary or secondary Amperes. If
cell [0D02: MEASURE’T SETUP, Local Values] is set to ‘Primary’, the values displayed
should be equal to the applied current multiplied by the corresponding current
transformer ratio set in the ‘CT and VT RATIOS’ menu column (see Table 10). If cell
[0D02: MEASURE’T SETUP, Local Values] is set to ‘Secondary’, the value displayed
should be equal to the applied current.
Note: If a PC connected to the relay via the rear communications port
is being used to display the measured current, the process will be
similar. However, the setting of cell [0D03: MEASURE’T SETUP,
Remote Values] will determine whether the displayed values are
in primary or secondary Amperes.
The measurement accuracy of the relay is ±1%. However, an additional allowance
must be made for the accuracy of the test equipment being used.
Maintenance
MiCOM P342, P343 Page 23/124
Corresponding CT Ratio
Menu Cell (in ‘VT and CT RATIO
Column (0A) of Menu)
[0201: MEASUREMENTS 1, ΙA Magnitude]
[0203: MEASUREMENTS 1, ΙB Magnitude]
[0205: MEASUREMENTS 1, ΙC Magnitude] [0A07: Phase CT Primary]
[0401: MEASUREMENTS 3, ΙA-2 Magnitude] [0A08: Phase CT Sec'y]
[0403: MEASUREMENTS 3, ΙB-2 Magnitude]
[0405: MEASUREMENTS 3, ΙC-2 Magnitude]
[0A09: E/F CT Primary]
[0207: MEASUREMENTS 1, ΙN Measured Mag]
[0A0A: E/F CT Sec'y]
[0A0B: SEF CT Primary]
[020B: MEASUREMENTS 1, ΙSEF Magnitude]
[0A0C: SEF CT Sec'y]
Table 10: CT ratio settings

5.2.13 Voltage inputs
This test verifies the accuracy of voltage measurement is within the acceptable
tolerances.
Apply rated voltage to each voltage transformer input in turn, checking its magnitude
using a multimeter. Refer to Table 11 for the corresponding reading in the relay’s
MEASUREMENTS 1 column and record the value displayed.
Voltage Applied To
P342 (40TE), P342 (60TE),
Menu Cell
P343 (60TE) P343 (80TE)
[021A: MEASUREMENTS 1, VAN Magnitude] C19-C22 D19-D22
[021C: MEASUREMENTS 1, VBN Magnitude] C20-C22 D20-D22
[021E: MEASUREMENTS 1, VCN Magnitude] C21-C22 D21-D22
[0220: MEASUREMENTS 1, VN Measured Mag] C23-C24 D23-D24
Table 11: Voltage input terminals

The measured voltage values displayed on the relay LCD or a portable PC connected
to the front communication port will either be in primary or secondary volts. If cell
[0D02: MEASURE’T SETUP, Local Values] is set to ‘Primary’, the values displayed
should be equal to the applied voltage multiplied by the corresponding voltage
transformer ratio set in the ‘VT and CT RATIOS’ menu column (see Table 12). If cell
[0D02: MEASURE’T SETUP, Local Values] is set to ‘Secondary’, the value displayed
should be equal to the applied voltage.
Note: If a PC connected to the relay via the rear communications port
is being used to display the measured voltage, the process will
be similar. However, the setting of cell [0D03: MEASURE’T
SETUP, Remote Values] will determine whether the displayed
values are in primary or secondary Volts.
The measurement accuracy of the relay is ±1%. However, an additional allowance
must be made for the accuracy of the test equipment being used.
Maintenance
Page 24/124 MiCOM P342, P343
Corresponding VT Ratio
Menu Cell (in ‘VT and CT RATIO
[021A: MEASUREMENTS 1, VAN Magnitude]
[0A01: Main VT Primary]
[021C: MEASUREMENTS 1, VBN Magnitude]
[0A02: Main VT Sec'y)]
[021E: MEASUREMENTS 1, VCN Magnitude]
[0A05: NVD VT Primary]
[0220: MEASUREMENTS 1, VN Measured Mag]
[0A06: NVD VT Sec'y]
Table 12: VT ratio settings
6. SETTING CHECKS
The setting checks ensure that all of the application-specific relay settings (i.e. both
the relay’s function and programmable scheme logic settings) for the particular
installation have been correctly applied to the relay.
If the application-specific settings are not available, ignore Sections 6.1 and 6.2.
Note: The trip circuit should remain isolated during these checxks to
prevent accidental operation of the associated circuit breaker.
6.1 Apply application-specific settings
There are two methods of applying the settings:
• Transferring them from a pre-prepared setting file to the relay using a portable
PC running the appropriate software (MiCOM S1) via the relay’s front EIA(RS)232
port, located under the bottom access cover, or the first rear communications port
(Courier protocol with a KITZ protocol convertor connected), or the second rear
communications port. This method is preferred for transferring function settings
as it is much faster and there is less margin for error. If programmable scheme
logic other than the default settings with which the relay is supplied are to be used
then this is the only way of changing the settings.
• If a setting file has been created for the particular application and provided on a
diskette, this will further reduce the commissioning time and should always be the
case where application-specific programmable scheme logic is to be applied to
the relay.
• Enter them manually via the relay’s operator interface. This method is not
suitable for changing the programmable scheme logic.
Note: It is essential that where the installation needs application-
specific Programmable Scheme Logic, that the appropriate .psl
file is downloaded (sent) to the relay, for each and every setting
group that will be used. If the user fails to download the
required .psl file to any setting group that may be brought into
service, then factory default PSL will still be resident. This may
have severe operational and safety consequences.
6.2 Check application-specific settings
The settings applied should be carefully checked against the required
application-specific settings to ensure they have been entered correctly. However, this
is not considered essential if a customer-prepared setting file on diskette has been
transferred to the relay using a portable PC.
Maintenance
MiCOM P342, P343 Page 25/124
There are two methods of checking the settings:

• Extract the settings from the relay using a portable PC running the appropriate
software (MiCOM S1) via the front EIA(RS)232 port, located under the bottom
access cover, or the first rear communications port (Courier protocol with a KITZ
protocol convertor connected), or the second rear communications port.
Compare the settings transferred from the relay with the original written
application-specific setting record. (For cases where the customer has only
provided a printed copy of the required settings but a portable PC is available).
• Step through the settings using the relay’s operator interface and compare them
with the original application-specific setting record.
Unless previously agreed to the contrary, the application-specific programmable
scheme logic will not be checked as part of the commissioning tests.
Due to the versatility and possible complexity of the programmable scheme logic, it is
beyond the scope of these commissioning instructions to detail suitable test
procedures. Therefore, when programmable scheme logic tests must be performed,
written tests which will satisfactorily demonstrate the correct operation of the
application-specific scheme logic should be devised by the Engineer who created it.
These should be provided to the Commissioning Engineer together with the diskette
containing the programmable scheme logic setting file.
6.3 Demonstrate correct relay operation
Tests 4.2.9 and 4.2.10 have already demonstrated that the relay is within calibration,
thus the purpose of these tests is as follows:
− To determine that the primary protection function of the P343 relay, the current
differential protection, can trip according to the correct application settings.
− To verify correct setting of the backup phase overcurrent protection (P342/3).
− To verify correct assignment of the trip contacts, by monitoring the response to
a selection of fault injections.
6.3.1 Generator differential protection (P343)
To avoid spurious operation of any other protection elements all protection elements
except the generator differential protection should be disabled for the duration of the
differential element tests. This is done in the relay’s CONFIGURATION column.
Make a note of which elements need to be re-enabled after testing.
For testing the biased differential protection select the ‘Biased’ setting in the GEN
DIFF, GenDiff Function menu and perform the tests described in section 6.3.1.2,
6.3.1.3 and 6.3.2. For testing the high impedance differential protection select the
‘High Impedance’ setting in the GEN DIFF, GenDiff Function menu and perform the
tests described in section 6.3.2.
The P343 generator differential protection has three elements, one for each phase.
The biased differential protection uses the maximum bias current in the three phases
to bias the elements. The detailed bias characteristic is described in sub-document -
Installation. The following instructions are for testing the bias characteristic of the B
phase element. The bias current is applied to the A phase element.
6.3.1.1 Connect the test circuit
The following tests require a variable transformer and two resistors connected as
shown in Figure 3. Alternatively an injection test set can be used to supply Ιa and Ιb
currents.
Maintenance
Page 26/124 MiCOM P342, P343
P34x Ia
Ra relay
A
L Ph a
Rb Ib
A
Ph b
P2075ENa
Figure 3: Connection for Testing

For the biased differential protection a current is injected into the A phase ΙA-2 input,
(E3-E2 (1A, 60TE case), E1-E2 (5A, 60TE case), F3-F2 (1A, 80TE case), F1-F2 (5A,
80TE case)), which is used as the bias current, ΙBias = (ΙA + ΙA-2)/2 = ΙA-2/2 as
ΙA=0. Another current is injected into the B phase ΙB-2 input (E6-E5 (1A, 60TE case),
E4-E5 (5A, 60TE case), F6-F5 (1A, 80TE case), F4-F5 (5A, 80TE case)) which is used
as the differential current, Differential = ΙB-2 – ΙB = ΙB-2 as ΙB=0. Ιa is always
greater than Ιb.
6.3.1.2 Biased differential protection lower slope
If three LEDs have been assigned to give phase segregated trip information, Gen Diff
Trip A, Gen Diff Trip B and Gen Diff Trip C (DDB 419, 420, 421), these may be used
to indicate correct per-phase operation. If not, monitor options will need to be used –
see the next paragraph.
Go to the COMMISSION TESTS column in the menu, scroll down and change cells
[0F05: Monitor Bit 1] to 419, [0F06: Monitor Bit 2] to 420 and [0F07: Monitor Bit 3]
to 421. Cell [0F04: Test Port Status] will now appropriately set or reset the bits that
now represent Phase A Trip (DDB #419), Phase B Trip (DDB #420) and Phase C Trip
(DDB #421) with the rightmost bit representing Phase A Trip. From now on you
should monitor the indication of [0F04: Test Port Status].
Adjust the variac and the resistor to inject 1 pu into ΙA-2 to give a bias current of 0.5
pu in the A-phase. (Note: 1pu = 1A into terminals E3-E2 (60TE case), F3-F2 (80TE
case) for 1A applications; or 1pu = 5A into terminals E1-E2 (60TE case), F1-F2 (80TE
case) for 5A applications). The relay will trip and any contacts associated with the A-
phase will operate, and bit 1 (rightmost) of [0F04: Test Port Status] will be set to 1.
Some LEDs, including the yellow alarm LED, will come on, but ignore them for the
moment.
Slowly increase the current in the B-phase ΙB-2 input E6-E5 (1A, 60TE), E4-E5
(5A, 60TE case), F6-F5 (1A, 80TE case), F4-F5 (5A, 80TE case) until phase B trips (Bit
2 of [0F04 : Test Port Status] is set to 1). Record the phase B current magnitude and
check that it corresponds to the information below.
Switch OFF the ac supply and reset the alarms.
Bias Current (ΙA-2/2) Differential Current (ΙB)

Phase Magnitude Phase Magnitude
A 0.5 pu B 0.05pu +/-10%
Maintenance
MiCOM P342, P343 Page 27/124
Assumption: Ιs1 = 0.05pu, k1 = 0%, Ιs2 = 1.2pu

For other differential settings the formula below can be used (enter k1 slope in pu
form, i.e. percentage/100):
B phase operate current is (Ιs1 + ΙBias x k1) pu +/- 10%
6.3.1.3 Biased differential protection upper slope
Repeat the test in 6.2.1.2 with the A phase, IA-2, current set to be 3.4pu (Ibias = 1.7
pu).
Slowly increase the current in the B phase until phase B trips (bit 2 of [0F04: Test Port
Status] is set to 1). Record the phase B current magnitude and check that it
corresponds to the information below.
Switch OFF the ac supply and reset the alarms.
Bias Current (ΙA-2/2) Differential current (ΙB)

Phase Magnitude Phase Magnitude
A 1.7 pu B 0.8pu +/-20%
Assumption: Ιs1 = 0.05pu, k1 = 0%, Ιs2 = 1.2pu, k2 =150%as above

For other differential settings the formula below can be used (enter k1 and k2 slopes in
pu form, i.e. percentage/100):
Operate current is [(ΙBias x k2) + {(k1 – k2) x Ιs2 } + Ιs1] pu +/- 20%
Note that especially for 5A applications the duration of current injections should be
short to avoid overheating of the variac or injection test set.
6.3.2 Generator differential operation and contact assignment
6.3.2.1 Phase A
Retaining the same test circuit as before, prepare for an instantaneous injection of 4 x
Ιs1 pu current in the A phase, with no current in the B phase (B phase switch open).
Connect a timer to start when the fault injection is applied, and to stop when the trip
occurs.
Determine which output relay has been selected to operate when a Gen Diff Trip
occurs by viewing the relay’s programmable scheme logic. The programmable
scheme logic can only be changed using the appropriate software. If this software is
not available then the default output relay allocations will still be applicable. In the
default PSL, relay 3 is the designated protection trip contact and DDB418 Gen Diff
Trip is assigned to this contact. If the generator differential trip is not mapped directly
to an output relay in the programmable scheme logic, output relay 3 (H5-H6 in the
60TE case and L5-L6 in the 80TE case) should be used for the test as relay 3 initiates
the trip led.
Ensure that the timer is reset.
Apply a current of 4 x the setting in cell [3002: GROUP 1 GEN DIFF, Gen Diff Is1] to
the relay and note the time displayed when the timer stops.
After applying the test check the red trip led and yellow alarm led turns on when the
relay operates. Check ‘Alarms / Faults Present – Tripped Phase A, Gen Diff Trip’ is
on the display. Reset the alarms.
Maintenance
Page 28/124 MiCOM P342, P343
Three Pole Tripping DDB 418 : Gen Diff Trip

Single Pole Tripping DDB 419 : Gen Diff Trip A
DDB 420 : Gen Diff Trip B
DDB 421 : Gen Diff Trip C
6.3.2.2 Phase B
Reconfigure the test equipment to inject fault current into the B phase. Repeat the test
in 6.3.2.1, this time ensuring that the breaker trip contacts relative to B phase
operation close correctly. Record the phase B trip time. Check the red trip led and
yellow alarm led turns on when the relay operates. Check ‘Alarms / Faults Present –
Tripped Phase B, Gen Diff Trip’ is on the display. Reset the alarms.
6.3.2.3 Phase C
Repeat 6.3.2.2 for the C phase.
The average of the recorded operating times for the three phases should be
less than 30ms. Switch OFF the ac supply and reset the alarms.
Upon completion of the tests any protection elements which were disabled for testing
purposes must have their original settings restored in the CONFIGURATION column.
6.3.3 Backup phase overcurrent protection
The overcurrent protection function Ι>1 element should be tested.
To avoid spurious operation of any other protection elements all protection elements
except the overcurrent protection should be disabled for the duration of the
overcurrent element tests. This is done in the relay’s CONFIGURATION column.
Make a note of which elements need to be re-enabled after testing.
6.3.3.1 Connect the test circuit
Determine which output relay has been selected to operate when an Ι>1 trip occurs
by viewing the relay’s programmable scheme logic.
The programmable scheme logic can only be changed using the appropriate
software. If this software has not been available then the default output relay
allocations will still be applicable.
If the trip outputs are phase-segregated (i.e. a different output relay allocated for
each phase), the relay assigned for tripping on ‘A’ phase faults should be used.
If stage 1 is not mapped directly to an output relay in the programmable scheme
logic, output relay 3 (H5-H6 in the 60TE case and L5-L6 in the 80TE case) should be
used for the test as relay 3 initiates the trip led. In the default PSL relay 3 is the
designated protection trip contact and DDB477 Ι>1 Trip is assigned to this contact.
Three Pole Tripping DDB 477 : Ι>1 Trip

Single Pole Tripping DDB 478 : Ι>1 Trip A
DDB 479 : Ι>1 Trip B
DDB 480 : Ι>1 Trip C
The associated terminal numbers can be found from the external connection
diagrams in section P34x/EN CO/E33.
Connect the output relay so that its operation will trip the test set and stop the timer.
Maintenance
MiCOM P342, P343 Page 29/124
Connect the current output of the test set to the ‘A’ phase current transformer input of
the relay (terminals C3-C2 (1A, 60TE case), D3-D2 (1A, 80TE case) C1-C2 (5A, 60TE
case), D1-D2 (5A, 80TE case)).
Ensure that the timer will start when the current is applied to the relay.
6.3.3.2 Perform the test
Ensure that the timer is reset.
Apply a current of twice the setting in cell [3504: GROUP 1 OVERCURRENT, Ι>1
Current Set] to the relay and note the time displayed when the timer stops.
Check the red trip led and yellow alarm led turns on when the relay operates. Check
‘Alarms / Faults Present – Started Phase A, Tripped Phase A, Overcurrent Start I>1,
Overcurrent Trip I>1’ is on the display. Reset all alarms. Note, the trip led is
initiated from operation of relay 3, the protection trip contact in the default PSL.
6.3.3.3 Check the operating time
Check that the operating time recorded by the timer is within the range shown in
Table 13.
Note: Except for the definite time characteristic, the operating times
given in Table 13 are for a time multiplier or time dial setting of
1. Therefore, to obtain the operating time at other time
multiplier or time dial settings, the time given in Table 12 must
be multiplied by the setting of cell
[3506: GROUP 1 OVERCURRENT, Ι>1 TMS] for IEC and UK
characteristics or cell [3507: GROUP 1 OVERCURRENT, Time
Dial] for IEEE and US characteristics.
In addition, for definite time and inverse characteristics there is an additional delay of
up to 0.02 second and 0.08 second respectively that may need to be added to the
relay’s acceptable range of operating times.
For all characteristics, allowance must be made for the accuracy of the test equipment
being used.
Maintenance
Page 30/124 MiCOM P342, P343
Characteristic Operating time at twice current setting and time

multiplier/time dial setting of 1.0
Nominal (seconds) Range (seconds)
DT [3505: Ι>1 Time Delay] Setting ±5%
setting
IEC S Inverse 10.03 9.53 – 10.53
IEC V Inverse 13.50 12.83 – 14.18
IEC E Inverse 26.67 25.34 – 28
UK LT Inverse 120.00 114.00 – 126.00
IEEE M Inverse 3.8 3.61 – 3.99
IEEE V Inverse 7.03 6.68 – 7.38
IEEE E Inverse 9.52 9.04 - 10
US Inverse 2.16 2.05 – 2.27
US ST Inverse 12.12 11.51 – 12.73
Table 13: Characteristic operating times for Ι>1

Upon completion of the tests any protection elements which were disabled for testing
purposes must have their original settings restored in the CONFIGURATION column.
7. ON-LOAD CHECKS
The following on-load measuring checks ensure the external wiring to the current and
voltage inputs is correct but can only be carried out if there are no restrictions
preventing the energisation of the plant being protected.
Remove all test leads, temporary shorting leads, etc. and replace any external wiring
that has been removed to allow testing.
If it has been necessary to disconnect any of the external wiring from the relay in
order to perform any of the foregoing tests, it should be ensured that all connections
are replaced in accordance with the relevant external connection or scheme diagram.
7.1 Voltage connections
Using a multimeter measure the voltage transformer secondary voltages to ensure
they are correctly rated. Check that the system phase rotation is correct using a
phase rotation meter.
Compare the values of the secondary phase voltages with the relay’s measured
values, which can be found in the MEASUREMENTS 1 menu column.
If cell [0D02: MEASURE’T SETUP, Local Values] is set to ‘Secondary’, the values
displayed on the relay LCD or a portable PC connected to the front EIA(RS)232
communication port should be equal to the applied secondary voltage. The values
should be within 1% of the applied secondary voltages. However, an additional
allowance must be made for the accuracy of the test equipment being used.
If cell [0D02: MEASURE’T SETUP, Local Values] is set to ‘Primary’, the values
displayed should be equal to the applied secondary voltage multiplied the
corresponding voltage transformer ratio set in the ‘CT & VT RATIOS’ menu column
(see Table 14). Again the values should be within 1% of the expected value, plus an
additional allowance for the accuracy of the test equipment being used.
Maintenance
MiCOM P342, P343 Page 31/124
Corresponding VT Ratio
Cell in MEASUREMENTS 1
Voltage (in ‘VT and CT RATIO
Column (02)
VAB [0214: VAB Magnitude]
VBC [0216: VBC Magnitude]
VCA [0218: VCA Magnitude] [0A01: Main VT Primary]
VAN [021A: VAN Magnitude] [0A02: Main VT Sec'y]
VBN [021C: VBN Magnitude]

VCN [021E: VCN Magnitude]
[0A05: NVD VT Primary]
VN [0220: VN Measured Mag]
[0A06: NVD VT Sec'y]
Table 14: Measured voltages and VT ratio settings

7.2 Current connections
Measure the current transformer secondary values for each input using a multimeter
connected in series with corresponding relay current input.
Check that the current transformer polarities are correct by measuring the phase
angle between the current and voltage, either against a phase meter already installed
on site and known to be correct or by determining the direction of power flow by
contacting the system control centre.
Ensure the current flowing in the neutral circuit of the current transformers is
negligible.
Compare the values of the secondary phase currents and phase angle with the
relay’s measured values, which can be found in the MEASUREMENTS 1 menu
column.
Note: Under normal load conditions the earth fault function will
measure little, if any, current. It is therefore necessary to
simulate a phase to neutral fault. This can be achieved by
temporarily disconnecting one or two of the line current
transformer connections to the relay and shorting the terminals
of these current transformer secondary windings.
Check that the ΙA/ΙB/ΙC Differential currents measured on the relay are less than 10%
of the ΙA/ΙB/ΙC Bias currents, see the Measurements 3 menu. Check that the Ι2
Magnitude negative phase sequence current measured by the relay is not greater
than expected for the particular installation, see the Measurements 1 menu. Check
that the active and reactive power measured by the relay are correct, see the
Measurements 2 menu. The power measurement modes are described in the
Application Notes section 3.9.3 of the technical guide P34x/EN T/E33.
If cell [0D02: MEASURE’T SETUP, Local Values] is set to ‘Secondary’, the currents
displayed on the relay LCD or a portable PC connected to the front EIA(RS)232
communication port should be equal to the applied secondary current. The values
should be within 1% of the applied secondary currents. However, an additional
allowance must be made for the accuracy of the test equipment being used.
If cell [0D02: MEASURE’T SETUP, Local Values] is set to ‘Primary’, the currents
displayed should be equal to the applied secondary current multiplied by the
corresponding current transformer ratio set in ‘CT & VT RATIOS’ menu column (see
Maintenance
Page 32/124 MiCOM P342, P343
Table 10). Again the values should be within 1% of the expected value, plus an
additional allowance for the accuracy of the test equipment being used.
Note: If a P342 or P343 relay is applied with a single dedicated current
transformer for the earth fault function, it may not be possible to
check the relay’s measured values as the neutral current will be
almost zero.
8. FINAL CHECKS
The tests are now complete.
Remove all test or temporary shorting leads, etc. If it has been necessary to
disconnect any of the external wiring from the relay in order to perform the wiring
verification tests, it should be ensured that all connections are replaced in accordance
with the relevant external connection or scheme diagram.
Ensure that the relay has been restored to service by checking that cell [0F0D:
COMMISSIONING TESTS, Test Mode] is set to ‘Disabled’.
If the relay is in a new installation or the circuit breaker has just been maintained, the
circuit breaker maintenance and current counters should be zero. These counters can
be reset using cell [0606: CB CONDITION, Reset All Values]. If the required access
level is not active, the relay will prompt for a password to be entered so that the
setting change can be made.
If the menu language has been changed to allow accurate testing it should be
restored to the customer’s preferred language.
If an MMLG test block is installed, remove the MMLB01 test plug and replace the
MMLG cover so that the protection is put into service.
Ensure that all event records, fault records, disturbance records, alarms and LEDs
have been reset before leaving the relay.
If applicable, replace the secondary front cover on the relay.
9. MAINTENANCE
9.1 Maintenance period
It is recommended that products supplied by AREVA T&D receive periodic monitoring
after installation. As with all products some deterioration with time is inevitable. In
view of the critical nature of protective relays and their infrequent operation, it is
desirable to confirm that they are operating correctly at regular intervals.
AREVA T&D protective relays are designed for life in excess of 20 years.
MiCOM P340 generator relays are self-supervising and so require less maintenance
than earlier designs of relay. Most problems will result in an alarm so that remedial
action can be taken. However, some periodic tests should be done to ensure that the
relay is functioning correctly and the external wiring is intact.
If a Preventative Maintenance Policy exists within the customer’s organisation then the
recommended product checks should be included in the regular programme.
Maintenance periods will depend on many factors, such as:
Maintenance
MiCOM P342, P343 Page 33/124
• the operating environment

• the accessibility of the site
• the amount of available manpower
• the importance of the installation in the power system
• the consequences of failure
9.2 Maintenance checks
Although some functionality checks can be performed from a remote location by
utilising the communications ability of the relays, these are predominantly restricted to
checking that the relay is measuring the applied currents and voltages accurately,
and checking the circuit breaker maintenance counters. Therefore it is recommended
that maintenance checks are performed locally (i.e. at the substation itself).
the ratings on the equipment’s rating label.
9.2.1 Alarms
The alarm status LED should first be checked to identify if any alarm conditions exist.
If so, press the read key [&] repeatedly to step through the alarms. Clear the alarms
to extinguish the LED.
9.2.2 Opto-isolators
The opto-isolated inputs can be checked to ensure that the relay responds to their
energisation by repeating the commissioning test detailed in Section 5.2.5 of this sub-
document.
9.2.3 Output relays
The output relays can be checked to ensure that they operate by repeating the
commissioning test detailed in Section 5.2.6 of this sub-document.
9.2.4 Measurement accuracy
If the power system is energised, the values measured by the relay can be compared
with known system values to check that they are in the approximate range that is
expected. If they are then the analogue/digital conversion and calculations are being
performed correctly by the relay. Suitable test methods can be found in Sections 7.1
and 7.2 of this sub-document.
Alternatively, the values measured by the relay can be checked against known values
injected into the relay via the test block, if fitted, or injected directly into the relay
terminals. Suitable test methods can be found in Sections 5.2.12 and 5.2.13 of this
sub-document. These tests will prove the calibration accuracy is being maintained.
9.3 Method of repair
If the relay should develop a fault whilst in service, depending on the nature of the
fault, the watchdog contacts will change state and an alarm condition will be flagged.
Due to the extensive use of surface-mount components faulty PCBs should be
replaced as it is not possible to perform repairs on damaged circuits. Thus either the
complete relay or just the faulty PCB, identified by the in-built diagnostic software,
can be replaced. Advice about identifying the faulty PCB can be found in sub-
document - ‘Problem Analysis’.
Maintenance
Page 34/124 MiCOM P342, P343
The preferred method is to replace the complete relay as it ensures that the internal
circuitry is protected against electrostatic discharge and physical damage at all times
and overcomes the possibility of incompatibility between replacement PCBs.
However, it may be difficult to remove an installed relay due to limited access in the
back of the cubicle and rigidity of the scheme wiring.
Replacing PCBs can reduce transport costs but requires clean, dry conditions on site
and higher skills from the person performing the repair. However, if the repair is not
performed by an approved service centre, the warranty will be invalidated.
the ratings on the equipment’s rating label. This should ensure that no
damage is caused by incorrect handling of the electronic components.
9.3.1 Replacing the complete relay
The case and rear terminal blocks have been designed to facilitate removal of the
complete relay should replacement or repair become necessary without having to
disconnect the scheme wiring.
Before working at the rear of the relay, isolate all voltage and current supplies to the
relay.
Note: The MiCOM range of relays have integral current transformer
shorting switches which will close when the heavy duty terminal
block is removed.
Disconnect the relay earth connection from the rear of the relay.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
RTD input Heavy duty terminal block Medium duty terminal block
terminal blocks
P2017ENA
Figure 4: Location of securing screws for terminal blocks

There are three types of terminal block used on the relay, RTD input, heavy duty and
medium duty, which are fastened to the rear panel using screws (crosshead on the
heavy and medium duty blocks, slotted on RTD input blocks), as in Figure 4.
Maintenance
MiCOM P342, P343 Page 35/124
Note: The use of a magnetic bladed screwdriver is recommended to

minimise the risk of the screws being left in the terminal block or
lost.
Without exerting excessive force or damaging the scheme wiring, pull the terminal
blocks away from their internal connectors.
Remove the screws used to fasten the relay to the panel, rack, etc. These are the
screws with the larger diameter heads that are accessible with the access covers are
fitted and open.
If the top and bottom access covers have been removed, Do not remove
the screws with the smaller diameter heads which are accessible. These
screws hold the front panel on the relay.
Withdraw the relay from the panel, rack, etc. carefully because it will be heavy due to
the internal transformers, particularly in the case of a P343 relay.
To reinstall the repaired or replacement relay follow the above instructions in reverse,
ensuring that each terminal block is relocated in the correct position and the case
earth, IRIG-B and fibre optic connections are replaced. To facilitate easy
identification of each terminal block, they are labelled alphabetically with ‘A’ on the
left hand side when viewed from the rear.
Once reinstallation is complete the relay should be recommissioned using the
instructions in sub-documents 1 to 7 inclusive of this sub-document.
9.3.2 Replacing a PCB
If the relay fails to operate correctly refer to sub-document - ‘Problem Analysis’, to
help determine which PCB has become faulty.
To replace any of the relay’s PCBs it is necessary to first remove the front panel.
Before removing the front panel to replace a PCB the auxiliary supply
must be removed. It is also strongly recommended that the voltage and
current transformer connections and trip circuit are isolated.
Open the top and bottom access covers. With size 60TE/80TE cases the access
covers have two hinge-assistance T-pieces which clear the front panel moulding when
the access covers are opened by more than 90°, thus allowing their removal.
If fitted, remove the transparent secondary front cover. A description of how to do
this is given in sub-document - ‘Introduction’.
By applying outward pressure to the middle of the access covers, they can be bowed
sufficiently so as to disengage the hinge lug allowing the access cover to be removed.
The screws that fasten the front panel to the case are now accessible.
The size 40TE case has four crosshead screws fastening the front panel to the case,
one in each corner, in recessed holes. The size 60TE/80TE case has an additional
two screws, one midway along each of the top and bottom edges of the front plate.
Undo and remove the screws.
Do not remove the screws with the larger diameter heads which are
accessible when the access covers are fitted and open. These screws hold
the relay in its mounting (panel or cubicle).
When the screws have been removed, the complete front panel can be pulled
forward and separated from the metal case.
Maintenance
Page 36/124 MiCOM P342, P343
Caution should be observed at this stage because the front panel is

connected to the rest of the relay circuitry by a 64-way ribbon cable.
Additionally, from here on, the internal circuitry of the relay is exposed
and not protected against electrostatic discharges, dust ingress, etc.
Therefore ESD precautions and clean working conditions should be
maintained at all times.
The ribbon cable is fastened to the front panel using an IDC connector; a socket on
the cable itself and a plug with locking latches on the front panel. Gently push the
two locking latches outwards which will eject the connector socket slightly. Remove
the socket from the plug to disconnect the front panel.
The PCBs within the relay are now accessible. Figures 28 to 36 in section P34x/EN
CO/E33 show the PCB locations for the generator relays in the size 40TE case
(P342), size 60TE case (P342 and P343) and size 80TE case (P343) respectively.
Note: The numbers above the case outline identify the guide slot
reference for each printed circuit board. Each printed circuit
board has a label stating the corresponding guide slot number
to ensure correct re-location after removal. To serve as a
reminder of the slot numbering there is a label on the rear of the
front panel metallic screen.
The 64-way ribbon cable to the front panel also provides the electrical connections
between PCBs with the connections being via IDC connectors.
The slots inside the case to hold the PCBs securely in place each correspond to a rear
terminal block. Looking from the front of the relay these terminal blocks are labelled
from right to left.
Note: To ensure compatibility, always replace a faulty PCB with one of
an identical part number. Table 14 lists the part numbers of
each PCB type.
PCB Part Number Design Suffix
Power Supply Board (24/48V dc) ZN0001 001 A/B
(48/125V dc) ZN0001 002 A/B
(110/250V dc) ZN0001 003 A/B
Power Supply Board (24/48V dc) ZN0021 001 C
(48/125V dc) ZN0021 002 C
(110/250V dc) ZN0021 003 C
Relay Board 7 Relay contacts ZN0002 001 A
Relay Board 7 Relay contacts ZN0031 001 B/C
Relay Board 8 Relay contacts ZN0019 001 B/C
Opto Board 8 Opto inputs ZN0005 002 A
Opto Board 8 Opto inputs ZN0017 002 B/C
Dual Input/Output 4 Opto inputs + 4
ZN0028 002 B/C
Board relay contacts
IRIG-B Board (Comms
(IRIG-B input only) ZN0007 001 A/B/C
Assy)
(Fibre optic port only) ZN0007 002 A/B/C
Maintenance
MiCOM P342, P343 Page 37/124
PCB Part Number Design Suffix

(Both) ZN0007 003 A/B/C
RTD Board 10 RTDs ZN0010 001 A/B/C
nd
2 Rear Comms Board (With IRIG-B) ZN0025 001 C
2nd Rear Comms Board (Without IRIG-B) ZN0025 002 C
CLIO Board 4 inputs + 4 outputs ZN0018 001 C
Transformer Board ZN0004 001 A/B/C
Auxiliary Transformer
ZN0011 001 A/B/C
Board
Input Board 8 Opto inputs ZN0005 001 A
Input Board 8 Opto inputs ZN0017 001 B/C
Input Module
(transformer +
P341 Vn=100/120V GN0010 004 A
auxiliary transformer +
input board)
P341 Vn=380/480V GN0010 008 A
P342 Vn=100/120V GN0010 004 A
P342 Vn=380/480V GN0010 008 A
P343 Vn=100/120V GN0012 002 A
P343 Vn=380/480V GN0012 003 A
P341 Vn=100/120V GN0010 024 B/C
P341 Vn=380/480V GN0010 028 B/C
P342 Vn=100/120V GN0010 029 B/C
P342 Vn=380/480V GN0010 030 B/C
P343 Vn=100/120V GN0012 009 B/C
P343 Vn=380/480V GN0012 010 B/C
Table 14: PCB part numbers

9.3.2.1 Replacement of the main processor board
The main processor board is located in the front panel, not within the case as with all
the other PCBs.
Place the front panel with the user interface face-down and remove the six screws
from the metallic screen, as shown in Figure 5. Remove the metal plate.
There are two further screws, one each side of the rear of the battery compartment
recess, that hold the main processor PCB in position. Remove these screws.
The user interface keypad is connected to the main processor board via a flex-strip
ribbon cable. Carefully disconnect the ribbon cable at the PCB-mounted connector
as it could easily be damaged by excessive twisting.
Maintenance
Page 38/124 MiCOM P342, P343
P2020ENA
Figure 5: Front panel assembly

The front panel can then be re-assembled with a replacement PCB using the reverse
procedure. Ensure that the ribbon cable is reconnected to the main processor board
and all eight screws are re-fitted.
Refit the front panel using the reverse procedure to that given in Section 9.3.2. After
refitting and closing the access covers on size 60TE cases, press at the location of the
hinge-assistance T-pieces so that they click back into the front panel moulding.
After replacement of the main processor board, all the settings required for the
application will need to be re-entered. Therefore, it is useful if an electronic copy of
the application-specific settings is available on disk. Although this is not essential, it
can reduce the time taken to re-enter the settings and hence the time the protection is
out of service.
Once the relay has been reassembled after repair, it should be recommissioned in
accordance with the instructions in sub-documents 1 to 7 inclusive of this sub-
document.
9.3.2.2 Replacement of the IRIG-B/2nd communications board
Depending on the model number of the relay, the relay may have an IRIG-B board
fitted with connections for IRIG-B signals, IEC60870-5-103 (VDEW) communications,
both or not be present at all. The relay may also have the 2nd communications board
fitted with or without IRIG-B in same position.
To replace a faulty board, disconnect all IRIG-B and/or IEC60870-5-103 and/or
communications connections at the rear of the relay.
The board is secured in the case by two screws accessible from the rear of the relay,
one at the top and another at the bottom, as shown in Figure 6. Remove these
screws carefully as they are not captive in the rear panel of the relay.
Maintenance
MiCOM P342, P343 Page 39/124
P2021ENA
Figure 6: Location of securing screws for IRIG-B board

Gently pull the IRIG-B board or 2nd communications board forward and out of the
case.
To help identify that the correct board has been removed, Figure 7 illustrates the
layout of the IRIG-B board with both IRIG-B and IEC60870-5-103 options fitted
(ZN0007 003). The other versions (ZN0007 001 and ZN0007 002) use the same
PCB layout but have less components fitted. Figure 8 shows the 2nd communications
board with IRIG-B.
C29 C27
E1 R56
C21 R61
C24
C22 R48 C28
R50
IC14 C9
R39 R60
C20 R57
C7 SK1
C23 R59 R47
R38 L2
D6 R54 R58
IC13 IC11 C25
R45 R46
D3
R36
IC3 R65 D2 C3
R34
R26 C6 R67 D7
C26
R55
C8 T1
R40
D5 R41 R66
D1 IC12 L1
R14
C14 R53 R49
R35 R68
IC9 D4
R16
C15 R4 R12 R18
R5 R17
R3
R6 R19
R2 R11 C12
R7 R20
R10
R8 XL1
IC10
R1
IC5
R33 C10 R9 R29 R27
R15
C19 C2 C1
IC7 TX1
PL1
R30
ZN0007 C
C18 IC16
R44
C5 R43
R32 R13
IC8 R42 R52 R51 R31 R37 R71 R70
R28
C4 RX1
1
IC4
C16 R72 C11
R25
IC6
C17
IC1
IC2
C13
SERIAL No. R24
R69
R22
R23
R21
IC15 E2
P2022ENA
Figure 7: Typical IRIG-B board

Maintenance
Page 40/124 MiCOM P342, P343
Optional IRIG-B Language:

Courier always
Courier Port Physical links:

(EIA232/EIA485) SK4 EIA 232
or
EIA 485 (polarity sensitive)
or
Not used (EIA232) SK5 K-Bus (non polarity sensitive)
Phyical links are s/w selectable P2083ENA
Figure 8: 2nd communications board with IRIG-B

Before fitting the replacement PCB check that the number on the round label adjacent
to the front edge of the PCB matches the slot number into which it will be fitted. If the
slot number is missing or incorrect write the correct slot number on the label.
The replacement PCB should be carefully slotted into the appropriate slot, ensuring
that it is pushed fully back on to the rear terminal blocks and the securing screws are
re-fitted.
Reconnect all IRIG-B and/or IEC60870-5-103 and/or communications connections at
the rear of the relay.
refitting and closing the access covers on size 60TE/80TE cases, press at the location
of the hinge-assistance T-pieces so that they click back into the front panel moulding.
accordance with the instructions in sub-documents 1 to 7 inclusive of this
sub-document.
9.3.2.3 Replacement of the input module
The input module comprises of two or three boards fastened together. In the P342
relays the input module consists of a transformer board and a input board. The
P343 input module has three boards; input, transformer and auxiliary transformer.
The module is secured in the case by two screws on its right-hand side, accessible
from the front of the relay, as shown in Figure 9. Remove these screws carefully as
they are not captive in the front plate of the module.
Maintenance
MiCOM P342, P343 Page 41/124
Input Module
Handle
P2023ENa
Figure 9: Location of securing screws for input module

On the right-hand side of the analogue input module in P342 relays there is a small
metal tab which brings out a handle. In the P343 relay there is an additional tab on
the left hand side. Grasping the handle or handles firmly, pull the module forward,
away from the rear terminal blocks. A reasonable amount of force will be required to
achieve this due to the friction between the contacts of the terminal blocks; one
medium duty and one heavy duty in P341 and P342 relays, one medium duty and
two heavy duty in P343 relays.
Note: Care should be taken when withdrawing the input module as it
will suddenly come loose once the friction of the terminal blocks
has been overcome. This is particularly important with
unmounted relays as the metal case will need to be held firmly
whilst the module is withdrawn.
Remove the module from the case, taking care as it is heavy because it contains all
the relay’s input voltage and current transformers.
Before fitting the replacement module check that the number on the round label
adjacent to the front edge of the PCB matches the slot number into which it will be
fitted. If the slot number is missing or incorrect write the correct slot number on the
label.
The replacement module can be slotted in using the reverse procedure, ensuring that
it is pushed fully back on to the rear terminal blocks. To help confirm that the
module has been inserted fully there is a V-shaped cut-out in the bottom plate of the
case that should be fully visible. Re-fit the securing screws.
Note: The transformer and input boards within the module are
calibrated together with the calibration data being stored on the
input board. Therefore it is recommended that the complete
module is replaced to avoid on-site recalibration having to be
performed.
Maintenance
Page 42/124 MiCOM P342, P343
sub-document.
9.3.2.4 Replacement of the power supply board
The power supply board is fastened to a relay board to form the power supply
module and is located on the extreme left-hand side of all MiCOM generator relays.
Pull the power supply module forward, away from the rear terminal blocks and out of
the case. A reasonable amount of force will be required to achieve this due to the
friction between the contacts of the two medium duty terminal blocks.
The two boards are held together with push-fit nylon pillars and can be separated by
pulling them apart. Care should be taken when separating the boards to avoid
damaging the inter-board connectors located near the lower edge of the PCBs
towards the front of the power supply module.
The power supply board is the one with two large electrolytic capacitors on it that
protrude through the other board that forms the power supply module. To help
identify that the correct board has been removed, Figure 10 illustrates the layout of
the power supply board for all voltage ratings.
E1
D16 D14
R29
R53
D17
RD1
D1 C18 C8 C14 C25
LK2 LK1
D3 D2 D15 C28 C29
L2
R26 C20 C19
R23
R24
R19 R28 R27

R25 C12
TR9
C9
C10
TR1
C7
IC3 R16
D28
R22 C13
R18
R21 IC1 R17 TR10
D24 R58 R59
C6 T1 C24 RD2
R33 R32
R8
R2
C32
D10
R62
R63
R5 R88 R31 C33
D13
D23
C5 C3 R9 R20 R15 D19 D20 C43
R7 C21 C11
D9 D4 R36 R45 R44
C16 R47 R57
PL1
R39
PC1
D5
T2 TR6 R56
D6
R37 R38
R43
R48 C47
R49 R46
IC4
C4 R4
R40
C46 C15 RD3

R11
PC2 R51 R50 R42 R41
R12 C45
IC2 TR7 R80 TR8
R10 D8
R52
C26
C36
R55 R54
D11
C41
C42
R6 D12 D7
C1 L1
R3 C2 D21
C22 C34 R79 R81 RL1
R13 R90 R78
TR4
C39
C23 C44 PC3 C37 R67 R89 RD4
R14 D25 TR3 TR5
R64
C17 D22
PC4 D18
R65
C35
R1 D26 D27 R68

C30
IC6
SERIAL No. ZN0001 D C40 C38
SK1 R70 IC5
R66
R30
R77
R76
C31 R69 PC5
E2
P2024ENA
Figure 10: Typical power supply board

Before re-assembling the module with a replacement PCB check that the number on
the round label adjacent to the front edge of the PCB matches the slot number into
which it will be fitted. If the slot number is missing or incorrect write the correct slot
number on the label.
Re-assemble the module with a replacement PCB ensuring the inter-board connectors
are firmly pushed together and the four push-fit nylon pillars are securely located in
their respective holes in each PCB.
Slot the power supply module back into the relay case, ensuring that it is pushed fully
back on to the rear terminal blocks.
Maintenance
MiCOM P342, P343 Page 43/124
Once the relay has been reassembled after repair, it should be re-commissioned in
sub-document.
9.3.2.5 Replacement of the relay board in the power supply module
Remove and replace the relay board in the power supply module as described in
9.3.2.4 above.
The relay board is the one with holes cut in it to allow the transformer and two large
electrolytic capacitors of the power supply board to protrude through. To help
identify that the correct board has been removed, Figure 11 illustrates the layout of
the relay board.
E1
1 TR3
2 R26 R68
C17
D10
R47
PL2 C61
3 ZN0002 D R33 R75 D3
RL1
4 R54 C38
D17 C45
R19
R28 C54 R61
TR10 R27 TR4
R35 R70 D11
R48
R49
D12 R69
C18
D19 R77 R55 C39
R56 C40 R34 R76 C62 D4 RL2
R20
R21
TR11
C16
C14
C12
TR12
C69
C56 R63 C47 C55 R62 D18 C46
TR5
C9
C6
C19
R82 C63 D5 RL3
R2 R1 R83
IC7
R8 R6 R84 R18
R3 IC2 R4 C8 R7
R5
R17
TR6
IC1
C20
C64 D6 RL4
R50
IC4 D13 R29 R71

PL1 R36 R78 PL3
R57 C41
D20 C48
R22
C4 C57 R64
TR13
TR7
R51
D14 R30 R72

IC5 R37 R79
C21
R58 C42 C65 D7 RL5

D21
R23
C49
C58 R65
TR14
C5 C3
R31 TR8
IC3 IC6
R52
D15 R38 R73

C22
R15
D22 R80 C66 D8

C7
R9 R59 C43 RL6

R24
TR15 C50
C59 R66
C15
C13
R14 C53 C52 TR9
R32
C11 D1
R53
D16 R39 R74

R13
C23
TR2
SERIAL No.
C2
D2 D23 R81 C67 D9 RL7

C68 R60 C44
SK1
R12
R25
R10
R11
TR1 TR16 C51

C1
C60 R67
E2
P2025ENa
Figure 11: Typical relay board

Before re-assembling the module with a replacement relay board check that the
number on the round label adjacent to the front edge of the PCB matches the slot
number into which it will be fitted. If the slot number is missing or incorrect write the
correct slot number on the label.
Ensure the setting of the link (located above IDC connector) on the replacement relay
board is the same as the one being replaced before replacing the module in the relay
case.
sub-document.
Maintenance
Page 44/124 MiCOM P342, P343
9.3.2.6 Replacement of the opto and separate relay boards (P343 only)
The P343 generator relay has two additional boards to the P341 and P342. These
boards provide extra output relays and optically-isolated inputs to those in the power
supply and input modules respectively.
To remove either, gently pull the faulty PCB forward and out of the case.
If the relay board is being replaced, ensure the setting of the link (located above IDC
connector) on the replacement relay board is the same as the one being replaced.
To help identify that the correct board has been removed, Figures 12 and 13
illustrate the layout of the relay and opto boards respectively.
Before fitting the replacement PCB check that the number on the round label adjacent
to the front edge of the PCB matches the slot number into which it will be fitted. If the
slot number is missing or incorrect write the correct slot number on the label.
The replacement PCB should be carefully slid into the appropriate slot, ensuring that
it is pushed fully back on to the rear terminal blocks.
RD4
R56 R43
R157
R149
D39 PC2 R163
D33
R133 D70 R42
RD5
R148
R57 R45
C7 R156
D40 PC1 R164
D34
R126 D71 R44

RD6
D69
R147
R48 R47
R155
D41 PC3 R165
D27
R127 D72 R46

RD7
R146
R49 R33
R154
D42 PC7 R166
R17
D28
R15 R128 D73 R32 PL2

R10 R14 RD8
IC8
R11 R13 R145
R12 R16 R50 R35
R153
R8 C18 D35 PC5 R159
R9
D29
R129 D74 R34

RD1
IC5 R144
R51 R37
R152
D36 PC6 R160
D30
R130 D75 R36

C13 RD2
C75 R69 C71 R65 R143

R141 R52 R39
C65 R134 C61 R151
IC7
C60 R64 C62 R66 D37 PC8 R161
D31
C70 R140 C72 R139 R131 D76 R38

RD3
C28 C69 R63 C73 R67
C59 R138 C63 R135 R142
R53 R41
C68 R62 C74 R68 R150
C58 R136 C64 R137 D38 PC4 R162
D32
R132 D77 R40

C5
C27
IC9
R23
P2026ENA
Figure 12: Typical opto board

sub-document.
Maintenance
MiCOM P342, P343 Page 45/124
9.3.2.7 Replacement of the RTD input board (P342 and P343 only)
To replace a faulty RTD input board, it is necessary to first remove the two 15-way
terminal blocks, each is fastened to its other half by slotted screws above and below
the row of terminals, as shown in Figure 13. Remove these screws carefully as they
are not captive in the terminal blocks.
Without damaging the RTD wiring, pull the terminal blocks away from their internal
halves. It is not necessary to disconnect the RTD screen connections from the spade
connectors on the metal rear panel of the relay.
P2027ENA
Figure 13: Location of securing screws for RTD/CLIO input board

The RTD input board is secured in the case by two screws accessible from the rear of
the relay, one at the top and another at the bottom, as shown in Figure 13. Remove
these screws carefully as they are not captive in the rear panel of the relay.
Maintenance
Page 46/124 MiCOM P342, P343
P2028ENA
Figure 14: Typical RTD input board

Gently pull the faulty RTD input PCB forward and out of the case. To help identify
that the correct board has been removed, Figure 12 illustrates the PCB layout.
that it is pushed fully back and the board securing screws are re-fitted.
Refit the RTD input terminal blocks, ensuring that they are in the correct location and
that their fixing screws are replaced.
sub-document.
9.3.2.8 Replacement of the CLIO input board
All external connections to the current loop input output board are made via the
same 15 way light duty I/O connector SL3.5/15/90F as used on the RTD board. Two
such connectors are used, one for the current loop outputs and one for the current
loop inputs.
To replace a faulty CLIO board, it is necessary to first remove the two 15-way
terminal blocks, each is fastened to its other half by slotted screws above and below
the row of terminals, as shown in Figure 13. Remove these screws carefully as they
are not captive in the terminal blocks. Note, the CLIO board occupies the same slot
B as the RTD board in the 60TE case but uses a separate slot C in the 80TE case.
Without damaging the CLIO wiring, pull the terminal blocks away from their internal
halves. It is not necessary to disconnect the CLIO screen connections from the spade
connectors on the metal rear panel of the relay.
The CLIO board is secured in the case by two screws accessible from the rear of the
relay, one at the top and another at the bottom, as shown in Figure 13. Remove
these screws carefully as they are not captive in the rear panel of the relay.
Maintenance
MiCOM P342, P343 Page 47/124
Gently pull the faulty CLIO PCB forward and out of the case.
that it is pushed fully back and the board securing screws are re-fitted.
Refit the CLIO terminal blocks, ensuring that they are in the correct location and that
their fixing screws are replaced.
sub-document.
9.4 Re-calibration
Re-calibration is not required when a PCB is replaced unless it happens to be one of
the boards in the input module, the replacement of either directly affect the
calibration.
Although it is possible to carry out re-calibration on site, this requires test equipment
with suitable accuracy and a special calibration program to run on a PC. It is
therefore recommended that the work is carried out by the manufacturer, or entrusted
to an approved service centre.
9.5 Changing the battery
Each relay has a battery to maintain status data and the correct time when the
auxiliary supply voltage fails. The data maintained includes event, fault and
disturbance records and the thermal state at the time of failure.
This battery will periodically need changing, although an alarm will be given as part
of the relay’s continuous self-monitoring in the event of a low battery condition.
If the battery-backed facilities are not required to be maintained during an
interruption of the auxiliary supply, the steps below can be followed to remove the
battery, but do not replace with a new battery.
Before carrying out any work on the equipment, the user should be familiar with the
contents of the safety and technical data sections and the ratings on the equipments
rating label.
9.5.1 Instructions for replacing the battery
Open the bottom access cover on the front of the relay.
Gently extract the battery from its socket. If necessary, use a small insulated
screwdriver to prize the battery free.
Ensure that the metal terminals in the battery socket are free from corrosion, grease
and dust.
The replacement battery should be removed from its packaging and placed into the
battery holder, taking care to ensure that the polarity markings on the battery agree
with those adjacent to the socket.
Note: Only use a type ½AA Lithium battery with a nominal voltage of
3.6V and safety approvals such as UL (Underwriters Laboratory),
CSA (Canadian Standards Association) or VDE (Vereinigung
Deutscher Elektrizitätswerke).
Ensure that the battery is securely held in its socket and that the battery terminals are
making good contact with the metal terminals of the socket.
Close the bottom access cover.
Maintenance
Page 48/124 MiCOM P342, P343
9.5.2 Post modification tests

To ensure that the replacement battery will maintain the time and status data if the
auxiliary supply fails, check cell [0806: DATE and TIME, Battery Status] reads
‘Healthy’.
Additionally, if further confirmation that the replacement battery is installed correctly
is required, the commissioning test described in section 5.2.2, ‘Date and Time’, can
be performed.
9.5.3 Battery disposal
The battery that has been removed should be disposed of in accordance with the
disposal procedure for Lithium batteries in the country in which the relay is installed.
9.6 Cleaning
Before cleaning the relay ensure that all ac and dc supplies, current transformer and
voltage transformer connections are isolated to prevent any chance of an electric
shock whilst cleaning.
The equipment may be cleaned using a lint-free cloth dampened with clean water.
The use of detergents, solvents or abrasive cleaners is not recommended as they may
damage the relay’s surface and leave a conductive residue.
Maintenance
MiCOM P342, P343 Page 49/124
10. COMMISSIONING TEST RECORD
Date Engineer
Station Circuit
System Frequency
Front Plate Information
Generator Protection Relay P34__

Model Number
Serial Number
Rated Current Ιn
Rated Voltage Vn
Auxiliary Voltage Vx
Test Equipment Used

This section should be completed to allow future identification of protective devices
that have been commissioned using equipment that is later found to be defective or
incompatible but may not be detected during the commissioning procedure.
Model:
Overcurrent test set
Serial No:
Model:
Phase angle meter
Serial No:
Model:
Phase rotation meter
Serial No:
Model:
Insulation tester
Serial No:
Type:
Setting software:
Version:
*Delete as appropriate
Have all relevant safety instructions been followed? Yes/No*

Maintenance
Page 50/124 MiCOM P342, P343
5. PRODUCT CHECKS
5.1 With the relay de-energised
5.1.1 Visual inspection
Relay damaged? Yes/No*
Rating information correct for installation? Yes/No*
Case earth installed? Yes/No*
5.1.2 Current transformer shorting contacts close? Yes/No/Not checked*
5.1.3 Insulation resistance >100MΩ at 500V dc Yes/No/Not tested*
5.1.4 External wiring

Wiring checked against diagram? Yes/No*
Test block connections checked? Yes/No/na*
5.1.5 Watchdog contacts (auxiliary supply off)

Terminals 11 and 12 Contact closed? Yes/No*
Contact resistance ____Ω/Not measured*
Terminals 13 and 14 Contact open? Yes/No*
5.1.6 Measured auxiliary supply ______V ac/dc*
5.2 With the relay energised

5.2.1 Watchdog contacts (auxiliary supply on)
Terminals 11 and 12 Contact open? Yes/No*
Terminals 13 and 14 Contact closed? Yes/No*
5.2.2 Date and time

Clock set to local time? Yes/No*
Time maintained when auxiliary supply removed? Yes/No*

Maintenance
MiCOM P342, P343 Page 51/124
5.2.3 Light emitting diodes

Relay healthy (green) LED working? Yes/No*
Alarm (yellow) LED working? Yes/No*
Out of service (yellow) LED working? Yes/No*
Trip (red) LED working? Yes/No*
All 8 programmable LEDs working? Yes/No*
5.2.4 Field supply voltage

Value measured between terminals 7 and 9 ______V dc
Value measured between terminals 8 and 10 ______V dc
5.2.5 Input opto-isolators

Opto input 1 working? Yes/No*
Opto input 9 working? Yes/No/na*
Maintenance
Page 52/124 MiCOM P342, P343

5.2.6 Output relays

Working? Yes/No*
Relay 1
Working? Yes/No*
Relay 2
Working? Yes/No*
Relay 3
Working? Yes/No*
Relay 4
Contact resistance (N/C) ____Ω/Not measured*
(N/O) ____Ω/Not measured*
Working? Yes/No*
Relay 5
Working? Yes/No*
Relay 6
Working? Yes/No*
Relay 7
Working? Yes/No/na*
Relay 8
Working? Yes/No/na*
Relay 9
Working? Yes/No/na*
Relay 10
Maintenance
MiCOM P342, P343 Page 53/124
Working? Yes/No/na*
Relay 11
Working? Yes/No/na*
Relay 12
Working? Yes/No/na*
Relay 13
Working? Yes/No/na*
Relay 14
Working? Yes/No/na*
Relay 15
Working? Yes/No/na*
Relay 16
Working? Yes/No/na*
Relay 17
Working? Yes/No/na*
Relay 18
Working? Yes/No/na*
Relay 19
Working? Yes/No/na*
Relay 20
Working? Yes/No/na*
Relay 21
Working? Yes/No/na*
Relay 22
Working? Yes/No/na*
Relay 23
Working? Yes/No/na*
Relay 24
Maintenance
Page 54/124 MiCOM P342, P343
Working? Yes/No/na*
Relay 25
Working? Yes/No/na*
Relay 26
Working? Yes/No/na*
Relay 27
Working? Yes/No/na*
Relay 28
Working? Yes/No/na*
Relay 29
Working? Yes/No/na*
Relay 30
Working? Yes/No/na*
Relay 31
Working? Yes/No/na*
Relay 32
5.2.7 RTD inputs

Resistor tolerance ____%
RTD 1 reading [0412: RTD 1 Label] ____°C
RTD 9 reading [041A: RTD 9 Label] ____°C
RTD 10 reading [041B: RTD 10 Label] ____°C
5.2.8 Current loop inputs

0-1mA/0-10mA/
CLI input type
0-20mA/4-20mA*
CLI1 reading at 50% CLI maximum range
_______
[0425: CLI1 Input Label]
Maintenance
MiCOM P342, P343 Page 55/124

_______
_______
_______
5.2.9 Current loop outputs

0-1mA/0-10mA/
CLO output type
0-20mA/4-20mA*
CLO1 output current at 50% of rated output _______mA
5.2.10 First rear communications port

K-Bus/MODBUS/
Communication standard
IEC60870-5-103*
Communications established? Yes/No*
Protocol convertor tested? Yes/No/na*
5.2.11 Second rear communications port

K-Bus/EIA(RS)485/
Communication port configuration
EIA(RS)232*
Communications established? Yes/No*
Protocol convertor tested? Yes/No/na*
5.2.12 Current inputs

Displayed Current Primary/Secondary*
æ [Phase CT Primary] ö
ç ÷ _______/na*
Phase CT Ratio ç ÷
è [Phase CT Sec'y] ø
æ [E/F CT Primary] ö
ç ÷ _______/na*
Earth Fault CT Ratio ç ÷
è [E/F CT Sec'y] ø
æ [SEF CT Primary] ö
ç ÷ _______/na*
SEF CT Ratio ç ÷
è [SEF CT Sec'y] ø
Maintenance
Page 56/124 MiCOM P342, P343
Ιnput CT Applied value Displayed value

ΙA _______A _______A
ΙB _______A _______A
ΙC _______A _______A
ΙN _______A/na* _______A/na*
ΙN Sensitive/ISEF _______A _______A
ΙA (2) _______A/na* _______A/na*
ΙB (2) _______A/na* _______A/na*
ΙC (2) _______A/na* _______A/na*
5.2.13 Voltage inputs

Displayed Voltage Primary/Secondary*
æ [Main VT Primary] ö
ç ÷ _______/na*
Main VT Ratio ç ÷
è [Main VT Sec'y] ø
æ [NVD VT Primary] ö
ç ÷ _______/na*
NVD VT Ratio ç ÷
è [NVD VT Secondary] ø
Input VT Applied value Displayed value

Va _______V _______V
Vb _______V _______V
Vc _______V _______V
Vo _______V _______V
6. SETTING CHECKS
6.1 Application-specific function settings applied? Yes/No*
Application-specific programmable scheme logic
Yes/No/na*
settings applied?
6.2 Application-specific function settings verified? Yes/No/na*

Application-specific programmable scheme logic
Yes/No/na*
tested?
6.3 Demonstrate correct relay operation

6.3.1 Generator differential protection (P343)
Maintenance
MiCOM P342, P343 Page 57/124
6.3.1.2 Generator Differential lower slope pickup _________A

6.3.1.3 Generator Differential upper slope pickup _________A
6.3.2.1 Generator Differential Phase A contact routing OK? Yes/No
Generator Differential Phase A trip time _________s
6.3.2.2 Generator Differential Phase B contact routing OK? Yes/No
Generator Differential Phase B trip time _________s
6.3.2.3 Generator Differential Phase C contact routing OK? Yes/No
Generator Differential Phase C trip time _________s
Average trip time, Phases A, B and C _________s
6.3.3 Phase overcurrent protection (P342/P343)

Protection function timing tested? Yes/No*
Directional
Overcurrent type (set in cell [Ι>1 Direction])
/Non-directional*
Applied current _________A
Expected operating time _________s
Measured operating time _________s
7. ON-LOAD CHECKS
Test wiring removed? Yes/No/na*
Disturbed customer wiring re-checked? Yes/No/na*
On-load test performed? Yes/No*
7.1 VT wiring checked? Yes/No/na*

Phase rotation correct? Yes/No*
Displayed Voltage Primary/Secondary*
æ [Main VT Primary] ö
ç ÷ _______V/na*
Main VT Ratio ç ÷
è [Main VT Sec'y] ø
æ [NVD VT Primary] ö
ç ÷ _______V/na*
NVD VT Ratio ç ÷
è [NVD VT Secondary] ø
Voltages: Applied value Displayed value

VAN/VAB* _______V _______V
VBN/VBC* _______V _______V
VCN/VCA* _______V _______V
VN _______V _______V
Maintenance
Page 58/124 MiCOM P342, P343
7.2 CT wiring checked? Yes/No/na*

CT polarities correct? Yes/No*
Displayed Current Primary/Secondary*
æ [Phase CT Primary] ö
Phase CT Ratio ç ÷ _______A/na*
ç ÷
è [Phase CT Sec'y] ø
æ [E/F CT Primary] ö
Earth Fault CT Ratio ç ÷ _______A/na*
ç ÷
è [E/F CT Sec'y] ø
æ [SEF CT Primary] ö
SEF CT Ratio ç ÷ _______A/na*
ç ÷
è [SEF CT Sec'y] ø
Currents: Applied value Displayed value

ΙA _______A _______A
ΙB _______A _______A
ΙC _______A _______A
ΙN _______A/na* _______A/na*
ΙN Sensitive/ISEF _______A _______A
ΙA (2) _______A/na* _______A/na*
ΙB (2) _______A/na* _______A/na*
ΙC (2) _______A/na* _______A/na*
8. FINAL CHECKS
Test wiring removed? Yes/No/na*
Disturbed customer wiring re-checked? Yes/No/na*
Test mode disabled? Yes/No*
Circuit breaker operations counter reset? Yes/No/na*
Current counters reset? Yes/No/na*
Event records reset? Yes/No*
Fault records reset? Yes/No*
Disturbance records reset? Yes/No*
Alarms reset? Yes/No*
LEDs reset? Yes/No*
Secondary front cover replaced? Yes/No/na*
Maintenance
MiCOM P342, P343 Page 59/124
Commissioning Engineer Customer Witness
Date Date
Maintenance
Page 60/124 MiCOM P342, P343
11. SETTING RECORD
Date Engineer
Station Circuit
System Frequency
Front Plate Information

Generator Protection Relay P34__
Model Number
Serial Number
Rated Current Ιn
Rated Voltage Vn
Auxiliary Voltage Vx
*Delete as appropriate
Setting Groups Used
Group 1 Yes/No*
Group 2 Yes/No*
Group 3 Yes/No*
Group 4 Yes/No*
0000 SYSTEM DATA

0001 Language English/Francais/Deutsch/Espanol*
0003 Sys Fn Links
0004 Description
0005 Plant Reference
0006 Model Number
0008 Serial Number
0009 Frequency
000A Comms Level
000B Relay Address
0011 Software Ref. 1
00D1 Password Control Level 0/Level 1/Level 2*
00D2 Password Level 1
00D3 Password Level 2
Maintenance
MiCOM P342, P343 Page 61/124
0600 CB CONDITION
0601 CB Operations
0602 Total ΙA Broken
0603 Total ΙB Broken

0604 Total ΙC Broken
0605 CB Operate Time
0700 CB CONTROL
Disabled/Local/Remote/Local+Remote/
0701 CB Control by Opto/Opto+Local/Opto+Remote/Opto+
Rem+Local*
0702 Close Pulse Time
0703 Trip Pulse Time
0705 Man Close Delay
0706 Healthy Window
0709 Reset Lockout by User Interface/CB Close*
070A Man Close Rst Dly
0711 CB Status Input None/52A/52B/Both 52A and 52B*
0800 DATE AND TIME

0804 IRIG-B Sync Disabled/Enabled*
0805 IRIG-B Status Inactive/Active*
0806 Battery Status Dead/Healthy*
0900 CONFIGURATION
0902 Setting Group Select via Menu/Select via Optos*
0903 Active Settings Group 1/Group 2/Group 3/Group 4*
0907 Setting Group 1 Disabled/Enabled*
090A Setting Group 4 Disabled/Enabled*
090B Gen Differential Disabled/Enabled*
090C Power Disabled/Enabled*
090D Field Failure Disabled/Enabled*
090E NPS Thermal Disabled/Enabled*
090F System Backup Disabled/Enabled*
0910 Overcurrent Disabled/Enabled*
0911 Thermal Overload Disabled/Enabled*
Maintenance
Page 62/124 MiCOM P342, P343
0913 Earth Fault Disabled/Enabled*

0915 SEF/REF/S Power Disabled/SEF/REF/Sensitive Power*
0916 Residual O/V NVD Disabled/Enabled*
0917 100% Stator EF Disabled/Enabled*
0918 Overfluxing V/Hz Disabled/Enabled*
091B Dead Machine Disabled/Enabled*
091D Volt Protection Disabled/Enabled*
091E Freq Protection Disabled/Enabled*
091F RTD Inputs Disabled/Enabled*
0920 CB Fail Disabled/Enabled*
0921 Supervision Disabled/Enabled*
0924 Pole Slipping Disabled/Enabled*
0925 Input Labels Invisible/Visible*
0926 Output Labels Invisible/Visible*
0927 RTD Labels Invisible/Visible*
0928 CT & VT Ratios Invisible/Visible*
0929 Event Recorder Invisible/Visible*
092A Disturb Recorder Invisible/Visible*
092B Measure’t Setup Invisible/Visible*
092C Comms Settings Invisible/Visible*
092D Commissioning Tests Invisible/Visible*
092E Setting Values Primary/Secondary*
092F Control Inputs Invisible/Visible*
0930 CLIO Inputs Disabled/Enabled*
0931 CLIO Outputs Disabled/Enabled*
0A00 VT AND CT RATIOS

0A01 Main VT Primary
0A02 Main VT Sec’y
0A05 NVD VT Primary
0A06 NVD VT Sec’y
0A07 Phase CT Primary
0A08 Phase CT Sec’y
0A09 E/F CT Primary
0A0A E/F CT Sec’y
0A0B SEF CT Primary
0A0C SEF CT Sec’y
Maintenance
MiCOM P342, P343 Page 63/124
0B00 RECORD CONTROL

0B04 Alarm Event Disabled/Enabled*
0B05 Relay O/P Event Disabled/Enabled*
0B06 Opto Input Event Disabled/Enabled*
0B07 System Event Disabled/Enabled*
0B08 Fault Rec Event Disabled/Enabled*
0B09 Maint Rec Event Disabled/Enabled*
0B0A Protection Event Disabled/Enabled*
0B0B DDB 31 - 0
0B0C DDB 63 - 32
0B0D DDB 95 - 64
0B0E DDB 127 - 96
0B0F DDB 159 - 128
0B10 DDB 191 - 160
0B11 DDB 223 - 192
0B12 DDB 255 - 224
0B13 DDB 287 - 256
0B14 DDB 319 - 288
0B15 DDB 351 - 320
0B16 DDB 383 - 352
0B17 DDB 415 - 384
0B18 DDB 447 - 416
0B19 DDB 479 - 448
0B1A DDB 511 - 480
0B1B DDB 543 - 512
0B1C DDB 575 - 544
0B1D DDB 607 - 576
0B1E DDB 639 - 608
0B1F DDB 671 - 640
0B20 DDB 703 - 672
0B21 DDB 735 - 704
0B22 DDB 767 - 736
0B23 DDB 799 - 768
0B24 DDB 831 - 800
0B25 DDB 863 - 832
0B26 DDB 895 - 864
0B27 DDB 927 - 896
Maintenance
Page 64/124 MiCOM P342, P343
0B28 DDB 959 - 928

0B29 DDB 991 - 960
0B2A DDB 1022 - 992
0C00 DISTURB RECORDER

0C01 Duration
0C02 Trigger Position
0C03 Trigger Mode Single/Extended*
0C04 Analog Channel 1
0C0A Analog Channel 7
0C0B Analog Channel 8
0C0C Digital Input 1
0C0D Input 1 Trigger No Trigger/Trigger L-H/Trigger H-L*
0C0E Digital Input 2
0C0F Input 2 Trigger No Trigger/Trigger L-H/Trigger H-L*
0C10 Digital Input 3
0C11 Input 3 Trigger No Trigger/Trigger L-H/Trigger H-L*
0C1A Digital Input 8
01B Input 8 Trigger No Trigger/Trigger L-H/Trigger H-L*
Maintenance
MiCOM P342, P343 Page 65/124

0C2B Input 16 Trigger No Trigger/Trigger L-H/Trigger H-L*
02F Input 18 Trigger No Trigger/Trigger L-H/Trigger H-L*
Maintenance
Page 66/124 MiCOM P342, P343

0D00 MEASURE’T SETUP

3Ph+N Current/3Ph Voltage/Power/
0D01 Default Display Date and Time/Description/Plant Reference/
Frequency/ Access Level*
0D02 Local Values Primary/Secondary*
0D03 Remote Values Primary/Secondary*
0D04 Measurement Ref VA/VB/VC/IA/IB/IC*
0D05 Measurement Mode
0D06 Fix Dem Period
0D07 Roll Sub Period
0D08 Num Sub Periods
0E00 COMMUNICATIONS
0E01 Rear protocol Courier/IEC870-5-103/MODBUS*/DNP3.0
0E02 Remote Address
0E03 Inactivity Timer
0E04 Baud Rate 1200/2400/4800/9600/19200/38400*
0E05 Parity Odd/Even/None*
0E06 Measure’t Period
0E07 Physical Link EIA(RS)485/Fibre Optic*
0E08 Time Synch Disabled/Enabled*
Disabled/Monitor Blocking/Command
0E0A CS103 Blocking
Blocking*
0E88 RP2 Port Config EIA(RS)232/EIA(RS)485/K-Bus*
0E8A RP2 Comms Mode IEC60870 FT1.2/10-bit no parity*
0E90 RP2 Address
0E92 RP2 Inactive Timer
0E94 RP2 Baud Rate 1200/2400/4800/9600/19200/38400*
Maintenance
MiCOM P342, P343 Page 67/124
0F00 COMMISSION TESTS

0F05 Monitor Bit 1
0F06 Monitor Bit 2
0F07 Monitor Bit 3
0F08 Monitor Bit 4
0F09 Monitor Bit 5
0F0A Monitor Bit 6
0F0B Monitor Bit 7
0F0C Monitor Bit 8
0F0D Test Mode Test Mode/Contacts Blocked*
0F0E Test Pattern
1000 CB MONITOR SETUP

1001 Broken Ι^
1002 Ι^ Maintenance Alarm Disabled/Alarm Enabled*
1003 Ι^ Maintenance
1004 Ι^ Lockout Alarm Disabled/Alarm Enabled*
1005 Ι^ Lockout
1006 No CB Ops Maint Alarm Disabled/Alarm Enabled*
1007 No CB Ops Maint
1008 No CB Ops Lock Alarm Disabled/Alarm Enabled*
1009 No CB Ops Lock
100A CB Time Maint Alarm Disabled/Alarm Enabled*
100B CB Time Maint
100C CB Time Lockout Alarm Disabled/Alarm Enabled*
100D CB Time Lockout
100E Fault Freq Lock Alarm Disabled/Alarm Enabled*
100F Fault Freq Count
1010 Fault Freq Time
Maintenance
Page 68/124 MiCOM P342, P343
1100 OPTO CONFIG

24-27V, 30-34V, 48-54V, 110-125V,
1101 Nominal V
220-250V, Custom*
24-27V, 30-34V, 48-54V, 110-125V,
1102 Opto Input 1
220-250V*
24-27V, 30-34V, 48-54V, 110-125V,
1103 Opto Input 2
220-250V*
24-27V, 30-34V, 48-54V, 110-125V,
1104 Opto Input 3
220-250V*
24-27V, 30-34V, 48-54V, 110-125V,
1105 Opto Input 4
220-250V*
24-27V, 30-34V, 48-54V, 110-125V,
1106 Opto Input 5
220-250V*
24-27V, 30-34V, 48-54V, 110-125V,
1107 Opto Input 6
220-250V*
24-27V, 30-34V, 48-54V, 110-125V,
1108 Opto Input 7
220-250V*
24-27V, 30-34V, 48-54V, 110-125V,
1109 Opto Input 8
220-250V*
24-27V, 30-34V, 48-54V, 110-125V,
110A Opto Input 9
220-250V*
24-27V, 30-34V, 48-54V, 110-125V,
110B Opto Input 10
220-250V*
24-27V, 30-34V, 48-54V, 110-125V,
110C Opto Input 11
220-250V*
24-27V, 30-34V, 48-54V, 110-125V,
110D Opto Input 12
220-250V*
24-27V, 30-34V, 48-54V, 110-125V,
110E Opto Input 13
220-250V*
24-27V, 30-34V, 48-54V, 110-125V,
110F Opto Input 14
220-250V*
24-27V, 30-34V, 48-54V, 110-125V,
1110 Opto Input 15
220-250V*
24-27V, 30-34V, 48-54V, 110-125V,
1111 Opto Input 16
220-250V*
24-27V, 30-34V, 48-54V, 110-125V,
1112 Opto Input 17
220-250V*
24-27V, 30-34V, 48-54V, 110-125V,
1113 Opto Input 18
220-250V*
24-27V, 30-34V, 48-54V, 110-125V,
1114 Opto Input 19
220-250V*
24-27V, 30-34V, 48-54V, 110-125V,
1115 Opto Input 20
220-250V*
Maintenance
MiCOM P342, P343 Page 69/124
24-27V, 30-34V, 48-54V, 110-125V,

1116 Opto Input 21
220-250V*
24-27V, 30-34V, 48-54V, 110-125V,
1117 Opto Input 22
220-250V*
24-27V, 30-34V, 48-54V, 110-125V,
1118 Opto Input 23
220-250V*
24-27V, 30-34V, 48-54V, 110-125V,
1119 Opto Input 24
220-250V*
24-27V, 30-34V, 48-54V, 110-125V,
111A Opto Input 25
220-250V*
24-27V, 30-34V, 48-54V, 110-125V,
111B Opto Input 26
220-250V*
24-27V, 30-34V, 48-54V, 110-125V,
111C Opto Input 27
220-250V*
24-27V, 30-34V, 48-54V, 110-125V,
111D Opto Input 28
220-50V*
24-27V, 30-34V, 48-54V, 110-125V,
111E Opto Input 29
220-250V*
24-27V, 30-34V, 48-54V, 110-125V,
111F Opto Input 30
220-250V*
24-27V, 30-34V, 48-54V, 110-125V,
1120 Opto Input 31
220-250V*
24-27V, 30-34V, 48-54V, 110-125V,
1121 Opto Input 32
220-250V*
B700 PSL DATA

B701 Grp 1 PSL Ref
B702 Date/Time
B703 Grp 1 PSL ID
B711 Grp 2 PSL Ref
B712 Date/Time
B713 Grp 2 PSL ID
B721 Grp 3 PSL Ref
B722 Date/Time
B723 Grp 3 PSL ID
B731 Grp 4 PSL Ref
B732 Date/Time
B733 Grp 4 PSL ID
Maintenance
Page 70/124 MiCOM P342, P343
GROUP 1 PROTECTION SETTINGS
3000 GROUP 1 GEN DIFF

Disabled/Percentage Bias/High
3001 Gen Diff Function
Impedance/Interturn*
3002 Gen Diff Ιs1
3003 Gen Diff k1
3004 Gen Diff Ιs2
3005 Gen Diff k2
3010 Interturn Is A
3014 Interturn Is B
3018 Interturn Is C
301C Interturn Delay
3100 GROUP 1 POWER

3120 Operating Mode Generating/Motoring
3124 Power1 Function Disabled/Reverse/Low Forward/Over*
3128 -P>1 Setting
312C P<1 Setting
3130 P>1 Setting
3134 Power 1 Time Delay
3138 Power1 DO Timer
313C P1 Poledead Inhibit Disabled/Enabled*
3140 Power 2 Function Disabled/Reverse/Low Forward/Over*
3144 -P>2 Setting
3148 P<2 Setting
314C P>2 Setting
3154 Power 2 DO Timer
3158 P2 Poledead Inhibit Disabled/Enabled*
3200 GROUP 1 FIELD FAILURE

3201 FFail Alm Status
3202 FFail Alm Angle Disabled/Enabled*
3203 FFail Alm Delay
3204 FFail1 Status
3205 FFail1 -Xa1 Disabled/Enabled*
3206 FFail1 Xb1
Maintenance
MiCOM P342, P343 Page 71/124
3207 FFail1 Time Delay

3208 FFail1 DO Timer
3209 FFail2 Status
320A FFail2 -Xa1 Disabled/Enabled*
320B FFail2 Xb1
320C FFail2 Time Delay
320D FFail2 DO Timer
3300 GROUP 1 NPS THERMAL

3301 Ι2>1 Status Disabled/Enabled*
3302 Ι2>1 Current Set
3303 Ι2>1 Time Delay
3306 Ι2>2 k Setting
3307 Ι2>2 kRESET
3308 Ι2>2 tMAX
3309 Ι2>2 tMIN
3400 GROUP 1 SYSTEM BACKUP

Disabled/Underimpedance/Voltage
3401 Backup Function
controlled/ Voltage restrained*
3402 Vector Rotation None/Delta-Star*
Disabled/DT/IEC S Inverse/IEC V
Inverse/IEC E Inverse/
3420 V Dep OC Char
UK LT Inverse/IEEE M Inverse/IEEE V Inverse/
IEEE E Inverse/US Inverse/US ST Inverse*
3423 V Dep OC Ι> Set
3425 V Dep OC T Dial
3426 V Dep OC Reset DT/Inverse*
3427 V Dep OC Delay
3428 V Dep OC TMS
3429 V Dep OC K (RI)
342A V Dep OC V<1 Set
342D V Dep OC V<2 Set
342E V Dep OC k Set
342F Z<1 Setting
3430 Z<1 Time Delay
Maintenance
Page 72/124 MiCOM P342, P343
3432 Z<1 tRESET

3433 Z< Stage 2 Disabled/Enabled*
3434 Z<2 Setting
3435 Z<2 Time Delay
3436 Z<2 tRESET
3500 GROUP 1 OVERCURRENT

Inverse/IEC E Inverse/UK LT
3523 Ι>1 Function Inverse/Rectifier/RI (K)/IEEE M Inverse/
IEEE V Inverse/IEEE E Inverse/US Inverse/
US ST Inverse*
3527 Ι>1 Current Set
3529 Ι>1 Time Delay
352A Ι>1 TMS
352B Ι>1 Time Dial
352C Ι>1 K (RI)
352E Ι>1 Reset Char DT/Inverse*
352F Ι>1 tRESET
3532 Ι>2 Function Disabled/DT*
3600 GROUP 1 THERMAL OVERLOAD

3650 Thermal Disabled/Enabled*
3655 Thermal Ι>
365A Thermal Alarm
365F T-heating
3664 T-cooling
3669 M Factor
3800 GROUP 1 EARTH FAULT

Inverse/IEC E Inverse/UK LT Inverse/
3825 ΙN>1 Function RI (K)/IEEE M Inverse/IEEE V Inverse/
IEEE E Inverse/US Inverse/US ST
Inverse/IDG*
3829 ΙN>1 Current Set
382A ΙN>1 IDG Is
Maintenance
MiCOM P342, P343 Page 73/124
382C ΙN>1 Time Delay

382D ΙN>1 TMS
382E ΙN>1 Time Dial
382F ΙN>1 K (RI)
3830 ΙN>1 IDG Time
3832 ΙN>1 Reset Char DT/Inverse*
3833 ΙN>1 tRESET
3836 ΙN>2 Function Disabled/DT*
383A ΙN>2 Current Set
383D ΙN>2 Time Delay
3A00 GROUP 1 SEF/REF PROT’N

SEF/Wattmetric/Hi Z REF/Lo Z REF/Lo Z
3A01 Sens E/F Options
REF+SEF/ Low Z REF+Wattmet*
3A2A ΙSEF>1 Function Disabled/DT*
Non-Directional/Directional Fwd/Directional
3A2B ΙSEF>1 Direction
Rev*
3A2E ΙSEF>1 Current
3A31 ΙSEF>1 Delay
3A57 ΙSEF> Func Link
3A58 ΙSEF Directional
3A59 ΙSEF> Char Angle
3A5A ΙSEF> Vpol Input Measured/Derived*
3A5B ΙSEF> VNpol Set
3A5D Wattmetric SEF
3A5E PN> Setting
3A60 Restricted E/F
3A61 ΙREF> k1
3A62 ΙREF> k2
3A63 ΙREF> Ιs1
3A64 ΙREF> Ιs2
3A65 ΙREF> Ιs
3B00 GROUP 1 RESIDUAL O/V NVD

3B01 VN Input Measured/Derived*
3B02 VN>1 Function Disabled/DT/IDMT*
3B03 VN>1 Voltage Set
Maintenance
Page 74/124 MiCOM P342, P343
3B04 VN>1 Time Delay

3B05 VN>1 TMS
3B06 VN>1 tReset
3B07 VN>2 Status Disabled/Enabled*
3C00 GROUP 1 100% STATOR EF

3C01 100% St Status Disabled/Enabled*
3C02 100% St EF VN3H<
3C03 VN3H< Delay
100% St EF V< Inhibit
3C04
Set
3C05 P< Inhibit Disabled/Enabled*
3C06 P< Inhibit Set
3C07 Q< Inhibit Disabled/Enabled*
3C08 Q< Inhibit Set
3C09 S< Inhibit Disabled/Enabled*
3C0A SP< Inhibit Set
3C0B 100% St EF VN3H>
3C0C VN3H> Delay
3D00 GROUP 1 VOLTS/Hz

3D01 V/f Alarm Status Disabled/Enabled*
3D02 V/f Alarm Set
3D03 V/f Alarm Delay
3D04 V/f Trip Func Disabled/DT/IDMT*
3D05 V/f Trip Setting
3D06 V/f Trip TMS
3D07 V/f Trip Delay
4000 GROUP 1 DEAD MACHINE

4001 Dead Mach Status Disabled/Enabled*
4002 Dead Mach Ι>
4003 Dead Mach V<
4004 Dead Mach tPU
4005 Dead Mach tDO
Maintenance
MiCOM P342, P343 Page 75/124
4200 GROUP 1 VOLT PROTECTION

4201 UNDERVOLTAGE
4202 V< Measur’t Mode Phase-Phase/Phase-Neutral*
4203 V< Operate Mode Any Phase/Three Phase*
4204 V<1 Function Disabled/DT/IDMT*
4205 V<1 Voltage Set
4206 V<1 Time Delay
4207 V<1 TMS
4208 V<1 Poledead Inhibit Disabled/Enabled*
4209 V<2 Status Disabled/Enabled*
420A V<2 Voltage Set
420B V<2 Time Delay
420C V<2 Poledead Inhibit Disabled/Enabled*
420D OVERVOLTAGE
420E V> Measur’t Mode Phase-Phase/Phase-Neutral*
420F V> Operate Mode Any Phase/Three Phase*
4210 V>1 Function Disabled/DT/IDMT*
4211 V>1 Voltage Set
4212 V>1 Time Delay
4213 V>1 TMS
4214 V>2 Status Disabled/Enabled*
4216 V>2 Time Delay
4300 GROUP 1 FREQ PROTECTION

4301 Under Frequency
4302 F<1 Status Disabled/Enabled*
4303 F<1 Setting
4304 F<1 Time Delay
4306 F<2 Setting
4307 F<2 Time Delay
4309 F<3 Setting
430A F<3 Time Delay
430B F<4 Status Disabled/Enabled*
430C F<4 Setting
Maintenance
Page 76/124 MiCOM P342, P343
430D F<4 Time Delay

430E F< Function Link
430F Over Frequency
4310 F>1 Status Disabled/Enabled*
4311 F>1 Freq Set
4312 F>1 Time Delay
4314 F>2 Freq Set
4315 F>2 Time Delay
4400 GROUP 1 RTD PROTECTION

4402 RTD 1 Alarm Set
4403 RTD 1 Alarm Dly
4404 RTD 1 Trip Set
4405 RTD 1 Trip Dly
4408 RTD 2 Trip Set
4409 RTD 2 Trip Dly
440A RTD 3 Alarm Set
440B RTD 3 Alarm Dly
440C RTD 3 Trip Set
440D RTD 3 Trip Dly
440E RTD 4 Alarm Set
440F RTD 4 Alarm Dly
4410 RTD 4 Trip Set
4411 RTD 4 Trip Dly
4414 RTD 5 Trip Set
4415 RTD 5 Trip Dly
4418 RTD 6 Trip Set
4419 RTD 6 Trip Dly
Maintenance
MiCOM P342, P343 Page 77/124
441C RTD 7 Trip Set

441D RTD 7 Trip Dly
4420 RTD 8 Trip Set
4421 RTD 8 Trip Dly
4424 RTD 9 Trip Set
4425 RTD 9 Trip Dly
4428 RTD 10 Trip Set
4429 RTD 10 Trip Dly
4500 GROUP 1 CB FAIL & Ι<

4501 BREAKER FAIL
4502 CB Fail 1 Status Disabled/Enabled*
4503 CB Fail 1 Timer
4506 CBF Non Ι Reset Ι< Only/CB Open & Ι</Prot Reset & Ι<*
4507 CBF Ext Reset Ι< Only/CB Open & Ι</Prot Reset & Ι<*
4508 UNDER CURRENT
4509 Ι< Current Set
450A ΙN< Current Set
450B ΙSEF< Current
450C BLOCKED O/C
450D Remove Ι> Start Disabled/Enabled*
450E Remove ΙN> Start Disabled/Enabled*
4515 I< Current Input IA-1 IB-1 IC-1/IA-2 IB-2 IC-2*
4600 GROUP 1 SUPERVISION

4601 VT SUPERVISION
4602 VTS Status Blocking/Indication*
4603 VTS Reset Mode Manual/Auto*
4604 VTS Time Delay
Maintenance
Page 78/124 MiCOM P342, P343
4605 VTS Ι> Inhibit

4606 VTS Ι2> Inhibit
4607 CT SUPERVISION
4608 CTS Status Disabled/Enabled*
4609 CTS VN Inhibit Measured/Derived*
460A CTS VN< Inhibit
460B CTS ΙN> Set
460C CTS Time Delay
4700 GROUP 1 SENSITIVE POWER

4720 Comp Angle
4724 Operating Mode Generating/Motoring*
4728 Sen Power 1 Func Disabled/Reverse/Low Forward/Over*
472C Sen-P>1 Setting
4730 Sen P<1 Setting
4734 Sen P>1 Setting
4738 Sen Power 1 Delay
473C Power 1 DO Timer
4740 P1 Pole dead Inhibit Disabled/Enabled*
4748 Sen-P>2 Setting
474C Sen P<2 Setting
4758 Power 2 DO Timer Disabled/Enabled*
475C P2 Pole dead Inhibit
4900 GROUP 1 POLE SLIPPING

4901 P Slip Function Disabled/Enabled*
4902 Z Based Pole Slip
4903 Pole Slip Mode Generating/Motoring/Both*
4904 P Slip Za Forward
4905 P Slip Zb Reverse
4906 Lens Angle
4907 P Slip Timer T1
4909 Blinder Angle
Maintenance
MiCOM P342, P343 Page 79/124
490A P Slip Zc
490B Zone 1 Slip Count
490C Zone 2 Slip Count
490D P Slip Reset Time
4A00 GROUP 1 INPUT LABELS

4A01 Opto Input 1
4A02 Opto Input 2
4A03 Opto Input 3
4A04 Opto Input 4
4A05 Opto Input 5
4A06 Opto Input 6
4A07 Opto Input 7
4A08 Opto Input 8
4A09 Opto Input 9
4A0A Opto Input 10
4A0B Opto Input 11
4A0C Opto Input 12
4A0D Opto Input 13
4A0E Opto Input 14
4A0F Opto Input 15
4A10 Opto Input 16
4A11 Opto Input 17
4A12 Opto Input 18
4A13 Opto Input 19
4A14 Opto Input 20
4A15 Opto Input 21
4A16 Opto Input 22
4A17 Opto Input 23
4A18 Opto Input 24
4A19 Opto Input 25
4A1A Opto Input 26
4A1B Opto Input 27
4A1C Opto Input 28
4A1D Opto Input 29
4A1E Opto Input 30
4A1F Opto Input 31
Maintenance
Page 80/124 MiCOM P342, P343
4A20 Opto Input 32
4B00 GROUP 1 OUTPUT LABELS

4B01 Relay 1
4B02 Relay 2
4B03 Relay 3
4B04 Relay 4
4B05 Relay 5
4B06 Relay 6
4B07 Relay 7
4B08 Relay 8
4B09 Relay 9
4B0A Relay 10
4B0B Relay 11
4B0C Relay 12
4B0D Relay 13
4B0E Relay 14
4B0F Relay 15
4B10 Relay 16
4B11 Relay 17
4B12 Relay 18
4B13 Relay 19
4B14 Relay 20
4B15 Relay 21
4B16 Relay 22
4B17 Relay 23
4B18 Relay 24
4B19 Relay 25
4B1A Relay 26
4B1B Relay 27
4B1C Relay 28
4B1D Relay 29
4B1E Relay 30
4B1F Relay 31
4B20 Relay 32
Maintenance
MiCOM P342, P343 Page 81/124
4C00 GROUP 1 RTD LABELS

4C01 RTD 1
4C02 RTD 2
4C03 RTD 3
4C04 RTD 4
4C05 RTD 5
4C06 RTD 6
4C07 RTD 7
4C08 RTD 8
4C09 RTD 9
4C0A RTD 10
4D00 GROUP 1 CLIO PROTECTION

4D02 CLIO Input 1 Disabled/Enabled*
4D04 CLI1 Input Type 0-1mA/0-10mA/0-20mA/4-20mA*
4D06 CLI1 Input Label
4D08 CLI1 Minimum
4D0A CLI1 Maximum
4D0C CLI1 Alarm Disabled/Enabled*
4D0E CLI1 Alarm Fn Under/Over*
4D10 CLI1 Alarm Set
4D12 CLI1 Alarm Delay
4D14 CLI1 Trip Disabled/Enabled*
4D16 CLI1 Trip Fn Under/Over*
4D18 CLI1 Trip Set
4D1A CLI1 Trip Delay
4D1C CLI1 I< Alarm
4D1E CLI1 I< Alm Set
4D28 CLI2 Minimum
4D2A CLI2 Maximum
4D30 CLI2 Alarm Set
Maintenance
Page 82/124 MiCOM P342, P343

4D38 CLI2 Trip Set
4D3C CLI2 I< Alarm
4D48 CLI3 Minimum
4D4A CLI3 Maximum
4D50 CLI3 Alarm Set
4D58 CLI3 Trip Set
4D5C CLI3 I< Alarm
4566 CLI4 Input Label
4D68 CLI4 Minimum
4D6A CLI4 Maximum
4D70 CLI4 Alarm Set
4D78 CLI4 Trip Set
4D7C CLI4 I< Alarm
4DA0 CLIO Output 1 Disabled/Enabled*
Maintenance
MiCOM P342, P343 Page 83/124
4DA2 CLO1 Output Type 0-1mA/0-10mA/0-20mA/4-20mA*

4DA4 CLO1 Set Values Primary//Secondary*
4DA6 CLO1 Parameter (See G155 Data Type)
4DA8 CLO1 Minimum
4DAA CLO1 Maximum
4DB0 CLIO Output 2 Disabled/Enabled*
4DB2 CLO2 Output Type 0-1mA/0-10mA/0-20mA/4-20mA*
4DB4 CLO2 Set Values Primary//Secondary*
4DB6 CLO2 Parameter (See G155 Data Type)
4DB8 CLO2 Minimum
4DBA CLO2 Maximum
4DC0 CLIO Output 3 Disabled/Enabled*
4DC2 CLO3 Output Type 0-1mA/0-10mA/0-20mA/4-20mA*
4DC4 CLO3 Set Values Primary//Secondary*
4DC6 CLO3 Parameter (See G155 Data Type)
4DC8 CLO3 Minimum
4DCA CLO3 Maximum
4DD0 CLIO Output 4 Disabled/Enabled*
4DD2 CLO4 Output Type 0-1mA/0-10mA/0-20mA/4-20mA*
4DD4 CLO4 Set Values Primary//Secondary*
4DD6 CLO4 Parameter (See G155 Data Type)
4DD8 CLO4 Minimum
4DDA CLO4 Maximum

5002 Gen Diff Ιs1
5003 Gen Diff k1
5004 Gen Diff Ιs2
5005 Gen Diff k2
5010 Interturn Is A
5014 Interturn Is B
5018 Interturn Is C
Maintenance
Page 84/124 MiCOM P342, P343
5100 GROUP 2 POWER

5128 -P>1 Setting
512C P<1 Setting
5130 P>1 Setting
5144 -P>2 Setting
5148 P<2 Setting
514C P>2 Setting

5204 FFail1 Status
5206 FFail1 Xb1
5209 FFail2 Status
520B FFail2 Xb1

Maintenance
MiCOM P342, P343 Page 85/124

5307 Ι2>2 kRESET
5308 Ι2>2 tMAX
5309 Ι2>2 tMIN

5420 V Dep OC Char
IEEE M Inverse/IEEE V Inverse/
5427 V Dep OC Delay
5428 V Dep OC TMS
542A V Dep OC tRESET
542E V Dep OC V<2 Set
542F V Dep OC k Set
5430 Z< 1 Setting
5431 Z< 1 Time Delay
5432 Z< 1 tRESET
5434 Z<2 Setting
5435 Z<2 Time Delay
5436 Z<2 tRESET

5523 Ι>1 Function Inverse/Rectifier/RI (K)/IEEE M Inverse/
IEEE V Inverse/IEEE E Inverse/US Inverse/
US ST Inverse*
Maintenance
Page 86/124 MiCOM P342, P343
552A Ι>1 TMS

552B Ι>1 Time Dial
552C Ι>1 K (RI)
552F Ι>1 tRESET

5655 Thermal Ι>
565A Thermal Alarm
565F T-heating
5664 T-cooling
5669 M Factor

5825 ΙN>1 Function
RI (K)/IEEE V Inverse/IEEE E Inverse/
US ST Inverse/IDG*
582A ΙN>1 IDG Is
582D ΙN>1 TMS
582F ΙN>1 K (RI)
5830 ΙN>1 IDG Time
5833 ΙN>1 tRESET
Maintenance
MiCOM P342, P343 Page 87/124

Rev*
5A31 ΙSEF>1 Delay
5A5D Wattmetric SEF
5A5E PN> Setting
5A60 Restricted E/F
5A61 ΙREF> k1
5A62 ΙREF> k2
5A63 ΙREF> Ιs1
5A64 ΙREF> Ιs2
5A65 ΙREF> Ιs

5B05 VN>1 TMS
5B06 VN>1 tReset

5C02 100% St EF VN3H<
5C03 VN3H< Delay
Maintenance
Page 88/124 MiCOM P342, P343

5C04
Set
5C06 P< Inhibit Set
5C08 Q< Inhibit Set
5C0C VN3H> Delay

5D02 V/f Alarm Set
5D06 V/f Trip TMS
5D07 V/f Trip Delay

6002 Dead Mach Ι>
6003 Dead Mach V<
6004 Dead Mach tPU
6005 Dead Mach tDO

6201 UNDERVOLTAGE
6206 V<1 Time Delay
6207 V<1 TMS
Maintenance
MiCOM P342, P343 Page 89/124
620B V<2 Time Delay

620D OVERVOLTAGE
6212 V>1 Time Delay
6213 V>1 TMS
6216 V>2 Time Delay

6303 F<1 Setting
6304 F<1 Time Delay
6306 F<2 Setting
6307 F<2 Time Delay
6309 F<3 Setting
630A F<3 Time Delay
630C F<4 Setting
630D F<4 Time Delay
630F Over Frequency
6311 F>1 Freq Set
6312 F>1 Time Delay
6314 F>2 Freq Set
6315 F>2 Time Delay
Maintenance
Page 90/124 MiCOM P342, P343

6404 RTD 1 Trip Set
6405 RTD 1 Trip Dly
6408 RTD 2 Trip Set
6409 RTD 2 Trip Dly
640C RTD 3 Trip Set
640D RTD 3 Trip Dly
6410 RTD 4 Trip Set
6411 RTD 4 Trip Dly
6414 RTD 5 Trip Set
6415 RTD 5 Trip Dly
6418 RTD 6 Trip Set
6419 RTD 6 Trip Dly
641C RTD 7 Trip Set
641D RTD 7 Trip Dly
6420 RTD 8 Trip Set
6421 RTD 8 Trip Dly
6424 RTD 9 Trip Set
6425 RTD 9 Trip Dly
Maintenance
MiCOM P342, P343 Page 91/124


6501 BREAKER FAIL
6508 UNDER CURRENT
650B ΙSEF< Current
650C BLOCKED O/C

6601 VT SUPERVISION
6604 VTS Time Delay
6607 CT SUPERVISION
660B CTS ΙN> Set
660C CTS Time Delay
Maintenance
Page 92/124 MiCOM P342, P343

6720 Comp Angle
675C P2 Pole dead Inhibit Disabled/Enabled*

6906 Lens Angle
6909 Blinder Angle
690A P Slip Zc

6A01 Opto Input 1
6A02 Opto Input 2
6A03 Opto Input 3
Maintenance
MiCOM P342, P343 Page 93/124
6A04 Opto Input 4

6A05 Opto Input 5
6A06 Opto Input 6
6A07 Opto Input 7
6A08 Opto Input 8
6A09 Opto Input 9
6A0A Opto Input 10
6A0B Opto Input 11
6A0C Opto Input 12
6A0D Opto Input 13
6A0E Opto Input 14
6A0F Opto Input 15
6A10 Opto Input 16
6A11 Opto Input 17
6A12 Opto Input 18
6A13 Opto Input 19
6A14 Opto Input 20
6A15 Opto Input 21
6A16 Opto Input 22
6A17 Opto Input 23
6A18 Opto Input 24
6A19 Opto Input 25
6A1A Opto Input 26
6A1B Opto Input 27
6A1C Opto Input 28
6A1D Opto Input 29
6A1E Opto Input 30
6A1F Opto Input 31
6A20 Opto Input 32

6B01 Relay 1
6B02 Relay 2
6B03 Relay 3
6B04 Relay 4
6B05 Relay 5
6B06 Relay 6
Maintenance
Page 94/124 MiCOM P342, P343
6B07 Relay 7
6B08 Relay 8
6B09 Relay 9
6B0A Relay 10
6B0B Relay 11
6B0C Relay 12
6B0D Relay 13
6B0E Relay 14
6B0F Relay 15
6B10 Relay 16
6B11 Relay 17
6B12 Relay 18
6B13 Relay 19
6B14 Relay 20
6B15 Relay 21
6B16 Relay 22
6B17 Relay 23
6B18 Relay 24
6B19 Relay 25
6B1A Relay 26
6B1B Relay 27
6B1C Relay 28
6B1D Relay 29
6B1E Relay 30
6B1F Relay 31
6B20 Relay 32

6C01 RTD 1
6C02 RTD 2
6C03 RTD 3
6C04 RTD 4
6C05 RTD 5
6C06 RTD 6
6C07 RTD 7
6C08 RTD 8
6C09 RTD 9
Maintenance
MiCOM P342, P343 Page 95/124
6C0A RTD 10

6D08 CLI1 Minimum
6D0A CLI1 Maximum
6D10 CLI1 Alarm Set
6D18 CLI1 Trip Set
6D1C CLI1 I< Alarm
6D28 CLI2 Minimum
6D2A CLI2 Maximum
6D30 CLI2 Alarm Set
6D38 CLI2 Trip Set
6D3C CLI2 I< Alarm
6D48 CLI3 Minimum
Maintenance
Page 96/124 MiCOM P342, P343
6D4A CLI3 Maximum

6D50 CLI3 Alarm Set
6D58 CLI3 Trip Set
6D5C CLI3 I< Alarm
6D68 CLI4 Minimum
6D6A CLI4 Maximum
6D70 CLI4 Alarm Set
6D78 CLI4 Trip Set
6D7C CLI4 I< Alarm
6DA8 CLO1 Minimum
6DAA CLO1 Maximum
6DB8 CLO2 Minimum
Maintenance
MiCOM P342, P343 Page 97/124
6DBA CLO2 Maximum

6DC8 CLO3 Minimum
6DCA CLO3 Maximum
6DD8 CLO4 Minimum
6DDA CLO4 Maximum

7001 Gen Diff Function Disabled/Percentage Bias/High Impedance*
7002 Gen Diff Ιs1
7003 Gen Diff k1
7004 Gen Diff Ιs2
7005 Gen Diff k2
7010 Interturn Is A
7014 Interturn Is B
7018 Interturn Is C
7100 GROUP 3 POWER

7128 -P>1 Setting
712C P<1 Setting
7130 P>1 Setting
Maintenance
Page 98/124 MiCOM P342, P343
7144 -P>2 Setting

7148 P<2 Setting
714C P>2 Setting

7204 FFail1 Status
7206 FFail1 Xb1
7209 FFail2 Status
720B FFail2 Xb1

7307 Ι2>2 kRESET
7308 Ι2>2 tMAX
7309 Ι2>2 tMIN

Maintenance
MiCOM P342, P343 Page 99/124
7420 V Dep OC Char
UK LT Inverse/IEEE M Inverse/IEEE V Inverse/
7427 V Dep OC Delay
7428 V Dep OC TMS
742F V Dep OC k Set
7430 Z<1 Setting
7431 Z<1 Time Delay
7432 Z<1 tRESET
7434 Z<2 Setting
7435 Z<2 Time Delay
7436 Z<2 tRESET

7523 Ι>1 Function UK LT Inverse/Rectifier/RI (K)/
752A Ι>1 TMS
752B Ι>1 Time Dial
752C Ι>1 K (RI)
752F Ι>1 tRESET
Maintenance
Page 100/124 MiCOM P342, P343

7655 Thermal Ι>
765A Thermal Alarm
765F T-heating
7664 T-cooling
7669 M Factor

7825 ΙN>1 Function
RI (K)/Inverse/IEEE V Inverse/IEEE E Inverse/
US Inverse/US ST Inverse/IDG*
782A ΙN>1 IDG Is
782D ΙN>1 TMS
782F ΙN>1 K (RI)
7830 ΙN>1 IDG Time
7833 ΙN>1 tRESET

Rev*
7A31 ΙSEF>1 Delay
Maintenance
MiCOM P342, P343 Page 101/124

7A5D Wattmetric SEF
7A5E PN> Setting
7A60 Restricted E/F
7A61 ΙREF> k1
7A62 ΙREF> k2
7A63 ΙREF> Ιs1
7A64 ΙREF> Ιs2
7A65 ΙREF> Ιs

7B05 VN>1 TMS
7B06 VN>1 tReset

7C02 100% St EF VN3H<
7C03 VN3H< Delay
7C04
Set
7C06 P< Inhibit Set
7C08 Q< Inhibit Set
7C0C VN3H> Delay
Maintenance
Page 102/124 MiCOM P342, P343

7D02 V/f Alarm Set
7D06 V/f Trip TMS
7D07 V/f Trip Delay

8002 Dead Mach Ι>
8003 Dead Mach V<
8004 Dead Mach tPU
8005 Dead Mach tDO

8201 UNDERVOLTAGE
8206 V<1 Time Delay
8207 V<1 TMS
820B V<2 Time Delay
820D OVERVOLTAGE
8212 V>1 Time Delay
8213 V>1 TMS
Maintenance
MiCOM P342, P343 Page 103/124

8216 V>2 Time Delay

8303 F<1 Setting
8304 F<1 Time Delay
8306 F<2 Setting
8307 F<2 Time Delay
8309 F<3 Setting
830A F<3 Time Delay
830C F<4 Setting
830D F<4 Time Delay
830F Over Frequency
8311 F>1 Freq Set
8312 F>1 Time Delay
8314 F>2 Freq Set
8315 F>2 Time Delay

8404 RTD 1 Trip Set
8405 RTD 1 Trip Dly
8408 RTD 2 Trip Set
8409 RTD 2 Trip Dly
Maintenance
Page 104/124 MiCOM P342, P343
840C RTD 3 Trip Set

840D RTD 3 Trip Dly
8410 RTD 4 Trip Set
8411 RTD 4 Trip Dly
8414 RTD 5 Trip Set
8415 RTD 5 Trip Dly
8418 RTD 6 Trip Set
8419 RTD 6 Trip Dly
841C RTD 7 Trip Set
841D RTD 7 Trip Dly
8420 RTD 8 Trip Set
8421 RTD 8 Trip Dly
8424 RTD 9 Trip Set
8425 RTD 9 Trip Dly

8501 BREAKER FAIL
Maintenance
MiCOM P342, P343 Page 105/124
8508 UNDER CURRENT
850B ΙSEF< Current
850C BLOCKED O/C

8601 VT SUPERVISION
8604 VTS Time Delay
8607 CT SUPERVISION
860B CTS ΙN> Set
860C CTS Time Delay

8720 Comp Angle
Maintenance
Page 106/124 MiCOM P342, P343

875C P2 Pole dead Inhibit Disabled/Enabled*

8906 Lens Angle
8909 Blinder Angle
890A P Slip Zc

8A01 Opto Input 1
8A02 Opto Input 2
8A03 Opto Input 3
8A04 Opto Input 4
8A05 Opto Input 5
8A06 Opto Input 6
8A07 Opto Input 7
8A08 Opto Input 8
8A09 Opto Input 9
8A0A Opto Input 10
8A0B Opto Input 11
8A0C Opto Input 12
8A0D Opto Input 13
8A0E Opto Input 14
8A0F Opto Input 15
Maintenance
MiCOM P342, P343 Page 107/124
8A10 Opto Input 16

8A11 Opto Input 17
8A12 Opto Input 18
8A13 Opto Input 19
8A14 Opto Input 20
8A15 Opto Input 21
8A16 Opto Input 22
8A17 Opto Input 23
8A18 Opto Input 24
8A19 Opto Input 25
8A1A Opto Input 26
8A1B Opto Input 27
8A1C Opto Input 28
8A1D Opto Input 29
8A1E Opto Input 30
8A1F Opto Input 31
8A20 Opto Input 32

8B01 Relay 1
8B02 Relay 2
8B03 Relay 3
8B04 Relay 4
8B05 Relay 5
8B06 Relay 6
8B07 Relay 7
8B08 Relay 8
8B09 Relay 9
8B0A Relay 10
8B0B Relay 11
8B0C Relay 12
8B0D Relay 13
8B0E Relay 14
8B0F Relay 15
8B10 Relay 16
8B11 Relay 17
8B12 Relay 18
Maintenance
Page 108/124 MiCOM P342, P343
8B13 Relay 19
8B14 Relay 20
8B15 Relay 21
8B16 Relay 22
8B17 Relay 23
8B18 Relay 24
8B19 Relay 25
8B1A Relay 26
8B1B Relay 27
8B1C Relay 28
8B1D Relay 29
8B1E Relay 30
8B1F Relay 31
8B20 Relay 32

8C01 RTD 1
8C02 RTD 2
8C03 RTD 3
8C04 RTD 4
8C05 RTD 5
8C06 RTD 6
8C07 RTD 7
8C08 RTD 8
8C09 RTD 9
8C0A RTD 10

8D08 CLI1 Minimum
8D0A CLI1 Maximum
8D10 CLI1 Alarm Set
Maintenance
MiCOM P342, P343 Page 109/124

8D18 CLI1 Trip Set
8D1C CLI1 I< Alarm
8D28 CLI2 Minimum
8D2A CLI2 Maximum
8D30 CLI2 Alarm Set
8D38 CLI2 Trip Set
8D3C CLI2 I< Alarm
8D48 CLI3 Minimum
8D4A CLI3 Maximum
8D50 CLI3 Alarm Set
8D58 CLI3 Trip Set
8D5C CLI3 I< Alarm
Maintenance
Page 110/124 MiCOM P342, P343

8D68 CLI4 Minimum
8D6A CLI4 Maximum
8D70 CLI4 Alarm Set
8D78 CLI4 Trip Set
8D7C CLI4 I< Alarm
8DA8 CLO1 Minimum
8DAA CLO1 Maximum
8DB8 CLO2 Minimum
8DBA CLO2 Maximum
8DC8 CLO3 Minimum
8DCA CLO3 Maximum
8DD8 CLO4 Minimum
Maintenance
MiCOM P342, P343 Page 111/124
8DDA CLO4 Maximum

9002 Gen Diff Ιs1
9003 Gen Diff k1
9004 Gen Diff Ιs2
9005 Gen Diff k2
9010 Interturn Is A
9014 Interturn Is B
9018 Interturn Is C
9100 GROUP 4 POWER

9128 -P>1 Setting
912C P<1 Setting
9130 P>1 Setting
9144 -P>2 Setting
9148 P<2 Setting
914C P>2 Setting

9204 FFail1 Status
Maintenance
Page 112/124 MiCOM P342, P343

9206 FFail1 Xb1
9209 FFail2 Status
920B FFail2 Xb1

9307 Ι2>2 kRESET
9308 Ι2>2 tMAX
9309 Ι2>2 tMIN

9420 V Dep OC Char
9427 V Dep OC Delay
9428 V Dep OC TMS
Maintenance
MiCOM P342, P343 Page 113/124
942F V Dep OC k Set

9430 Z<1 Setting
9431 Z<1 Time Delay
9432 Z<1 tRESET
9434 Z<2 Setting
9435 Z<2 Time Delay
9436 Z<2 tRESET

9523 Ι>1 Function Inverse/Rectifier/RI (K)/IEE M Inverse/
IEE V Inverse/IEEE E Inverse/US Inverse/
US ST Inverse*
952A Ι>1 TMS
952B Ι>1 Time Dial
952C Ι>1 K (RI)
952F Ι>1 tRESET

9655 Thermal Ι>
965A Thermal Alarm
965F T-heating
9664 T-cooling
9669 M Factor

9825 ΙN>1 Function RI (K)/IEE M Inverse/IEEE V Inverse/
IEEE E Inverse/US Inverse/
US ST Inverse/IDG*
Maintenance
Page 114/124 MiCOM P342, P343

982A ΙN>1 IDG Is
982D ΙN>1 TMS
982F ΙN>1 K (RI)
9830 ΙN>1 IDG Time
9833 ΙN>1 tRESET

Rev*
9A31 ΙSEF>1 Delay
9A5D Wattmetric SEF
9A5E PN> Setting
9A60 Restricted E/F
9A61 ΙREF> k1
9A62 ΙREF> k2
9A63 ΙREF> Ιs1
9A64 ΙREF> Ιs2
9A65 ΙREF> Ιs
Maintenance
MiCOM P342, P343 Page 115/124

9B05 VN>1 TMS
9B06 VN>1 tReset

9C02 100% St EF VN3H<
9C03 VN3H< Delay
9C04
Set
9C06 P< Inhibit Set
9C08 Q< Inhibit Set
9C0C VN3H> Delay

9D02 V/f Alarm Set
9D06 V/f Trip TMS
9D07 V/f Trip Delay
A000 GROUP 4 DEAD MACHINE

A001 Dead Mach Status Disabled/Enabled*
A002 Dead Mach Ι>
Maintenance
Page 116/124 MiCOM P342, P343
A003 Dead Mach V<

A004 Dead Mach tPU
A005 Dead Mach tDO
A200 GROUP 4 VOLT PROTECTION

A201 UNDERVOLTAGE
A202 V< Measur’t Mode Phase-Phase/Phase-Neutral*
A203 V< Operate Mode Any Phase/Three Phase*
A204 V<1 Function Disabled/DT/IDMT*
A205 V<1 Voltage Set
A206 V<1 Time Delay
A207 V<1 TMS
A208 V<1 Poledead Inhibit Disabled/Enabled*
A209 V<2 Status Disabled/Enabled*
A20A V<2 Voltage Set
A20B V<2 Time Delay
A20C V<2 Poledead Inhibit Disabled/Enabled*
A20D OVERVOLTAGE
A20E V> Measur’t Mode Phase-Phase/Phase-Neutral*
A20F V> Operate Mode Any Phase/Three Phase*
A210 V>1 Function Disabled/DT/IDMT*
A211 V>1 Voltage Set
A212 V>1 Time Delay
A213 V>1 TMS
A214 V>2 Status Disabled/Enabled*
A215 V>2 Voltage Set
A216 V>2 Time Delay
A300 GROUP 4 FREQ PROTECTION

A301 Under Frequency
A302 F<1 Status Disabled/Enabled*
A303 F<1 Setting
A304 F<1 Time Delay
A306 F<2 Setting
A307 F<2 Time Delay
Maintenance
MiCOM P342, P343 Page 117/124
A309 F<3 Setting

A30A F<3 Time Delay
A30B F<4 Status Disabled/Enabled*
A30C F<4 Setting
A30D F<4 Time Delay
A30E F< Function Link
A30F Over Frequency
A310 F>1 Status Disabled/Enabled*
A311 F>1 Freq Set
A312 F>1 Time Delay
A313 F>2 Status Disabled/Enabled*
A314 F>2 Freq Set
A315 F>2 Time Delay
A400 GROUP 4 RTD PROTECTION

A402 RTD 1 Alarm Set
A403 RTD 1 Alarm Dly
A404 RTD 1 Trip Set
A405 RTD 1 Trip Dly
A408 RTD 2 Trip Set
A409 RTD 2 Trip Dly
A40A RTD 3 Alarm Set
A40B RTD 3 Alarm Dly
A40C RTD 3 Trip Set
A40D RTD 3 Trip Dly
A40E RTD 4 Alarm Set
A40F RTD 4 Alarm Dly
A410 RTD 4 Trip Set
A411 RTD 4 Trip Dly
A414 RTD 5 Trip Set
A415 RTD 5 Trip Dly
Maintenance
Page 118/124 MiCOM P342, P343
A418 RTD 6 Trip Set

A419 RTD 6 Trip Dly
A41A RTD 7 Alarm Set
A41B RTD 7 Alarm Dly
A41C RTD 7 Trip Set
A41D RTD 7 Trip Dly
A41E RTD 8 Alarm Set
A41F RTD 8 Alarm Dly
A420 RTD 8 Trip Set
A421 RTD 8 Trip Dly
A424 RTD 9 Trip Set
A425 RTD 9 Trip Dly
A428 RTD 10 Trip Set
A429 RTD 10 Trip Dly
A500 GROUP 4 CB FAIL & Ι<

A501 BREAKER FAIL
A502 CB Fail 1 Status Disabled/Enabled*
A503 CB Fail 1 Timer
A504 CB Fail 2 Status Disabled/Enabled*
A505 CB Fail 2 Timer
A506 CBF Non Ι Reset Ι< Only/CB Open & Ι</Prot Reset & Ι<*
A507 CBF Ext Reset Ι< Only/CB Open & Ι</Prot Reset & Ι<*
A508 UNDER CURRENT
A509 Ι< Current Set
A50A ΙN< Current Set
A50B ΙSEF< Current
A50C BLOCKED O/C
A50D Remove Ι> Start Disabled/Enabled*
A50E Remove ΙN> Start Disabled/Enabled*
A515 I< Current Input IA-1 IB-1 IC-1/IA-2 IB-2 IC-2*
Maintenance
MiCOM P342, P343 Page 119/124
A600 GROUP 4 SUPERVISION

A601 VT SUPERVISION
A602 VTS Status Blocking/Indication*
A603 VTS Reset Mode Manual/Auto*
A604 VTS Time Delay
A605 VTS Ι> Inhibit
A606 VTS Ι2> Inhibit
A607 CT SUPERVISION
A608 CTS Status Disabled/Enabled*
A609 CTS VN Inhibit Measured/Derived*
A60A CTS VN< Inhibit
A60B CTS ΙN> Set
A60C CTS Time Delay
A700 GROUP 4 SENSITIVE POWER

A720 Comp Angle
A724 Operating Mode Generating/Motoring*
A728 Sen Power 1 Func Disabled/Reverse/Low Forward/Over*
A72C Sen-P>1 Setting
A730 Sen P<1 Setting
A734 Sen P>1 Setting
A738 Sen Power 1 Delay
A73C Power 1 DO Timer
A740 P1 Pole dead Inhibit Disabled/Enabled*
A744 Sen Power 2 Func Disabled/Reverse/Low Forward/Over*
A748 Sen-P>2 Setting
A74C Sen P<2 Setting
A750 Sen P>2 Setting
A754 Sen Power 2 Delay
A758 Power 2 DO Timer
A75C P2 Pole dead Inhibit Disabled/Enabled*
A900 GROUP 4 POLE SLIPPING

A901 P Slip Function Disabled/Enabled*
A902 Z Based Pole Slip
A903 Pole Slip Mode Generating/Motoring/Both*
A904 P Slip Za Forward
Maintenance
Page 120/124 MiCOM P342, P343
A905 P Slip Zb Reverse

A906 Lens Angle
A907 P Slip Timer T1
A908 P Slip Timer T2
A909 Blinder Angle
A90A P Slip Zc
A90B Zone 1 Slip Count
A90C Zone 2 Slip Count
A90D P Slip Reset Time
AA00 GROUP 4 INPUT LABELS

AA01 Opto Input 1
AA02 Opto Input 2
AA03 Opto Input 3
AA04 Opto Input 4
AA05 Opto Input 5
AA06 Opto Input 6
AA07 Opto Input 7
AA08 Opto Input 8
AA09 Opto Input 9
AA0A Opto Input 10
AA0B Opto Input 11
AA0C Opto Input 12
AA0D Opto Input 13
AA0E Opto Input 14
AA0F Opto Input 15
AA10 Opto Input 16
AA11 Opto Input 17
AA12 Opto Input 18
AA13 Opto Input 19
AA14 Opto Input 20
AA15 Opto Input 21
AA16 Opto Input 22
AA17 Opto Input 23
AA18 Opto Input 24
AA19 Opto Input 25
AA1A Opto Input 26
Maintenance
MiCOM P342, P343 Page 121/124
AA1B Opto Input 27

AA1C Opto Input 28
AA1D Opto Input 29
AA1E Opto Input 30
AA1F Opto Input 31
AA20 Opto Input 32
AB00 GROUP 4 OUTPUT LABELS

AB01 Relay 1
AB02 Relay 2
AB03 Relay 3
AB04 Relay 4
AB05 Relay 5
AB06 Relay 6
AB07 Relay 7
AB08 Relay 8
AB09 Relay 9
AB0A Relay 10
AB0B Relay 11
AB0C Relay 12
AB0D Relay 13
AB0E Relay 14
AB0F Relay 15
AB10 Relay 16
AB11 Relay 17
AB12 Relay 18
AB13 Relay 19
AB14 Relay 20
AB15 Relay 21
AB16 Relay 22
AB17 Relay 23
AB18 Relay 24
AB19 Relay 25
AB1A Relay 26
AB1B Relay 27
AB1C Relay 28
AB1D Relay 29
Maintenance
Page 122/124 MiCOM P342, P343
AB1E Relay 30
AB1F Relay 31
AB20 Relay 32
AC00 GROUP 4 RTD LABELS

AC01 RTD 1
AC02 RTD 2
AC03 RTD 3
AC04 RTD 4
AC05 RTD 5
AC06 RTD 6
AC07 RTD 7
AC08 RTD 8
AC09 RTD 9
AC0A RTD 10
AD00 GROUP 4 CLIO PROTECTION

AD02 CLIO Input 1 Disabled/Enabled*
AD04 CLI1 Input Type 0-1mA/0-10mA/0-20mA/4-20mA*
AD06 CLI1 Input Label
AD08 CLI1 Minimum
AD0A CLI1 Maximum
AD0C CLI1 Alarm Disabled/Enabled*
AD0E CLI1 Alarm Fn Under/Over*
AD10 CLI1 Alarm Set
AD12 CLI1 Alarm Delay
AD14 CLI1 Trip Disabled/Enabled*
AD16 CLI1 Trip Fn Under/Over*
AD18 CLI1 Trip Set
AD1A CLI1 Trip Delay
AD1C CLI1 I< Alarm
AD1E CLI1 I< Alm Set
AD28 CLI2 Minimum
AD2A CLI2 Maximum
Maintenance
MiCOM P342, P343 Page 123/124

AD30 CLI2 Alarm Set
AD38 CLI2 Trip Set
AD3C CLI2 I< Alarm
AD48 CLI3 Minimum
AD4A CLI3 Maximum
AD50 CLI3 Alarm Set
AD58 CLI3 Trip Set
AD5C CLI3 I< Alarm
AD68 CLI4 Minimum
AD6A CLI4 Maximum
AD70 CLI4 Alarm Set
AD78 CLI4 Trip Set
Maintenance
Page 124/124 MiCOM P342, P343

AD7C CLI4 I< Alarm
ADA0 CLIO Output 1 Disabled/Enabled*
ADA2 CLO1 Output Type 0-1mA/0-10mA/0-20mA/4-20mA*
ADA4 CLO1 Set Values Primary//Secondary*
ADA6 CLO1 Parameter (See G155 Data Type)
ADA8 CLO1 Minimum
ADAA CLO1 Maximum
ADB0 CLIO Output 2 Disabled/Enabled*
ADB2 CLO2 Output Type 0-1mA/0-10mA/0-20mA/4-20mA*
ADB4 CLO2 Set Values Primary//Secondary*
ADB6 CLO2 Parameter (See G155 Data Type)
ADB8 CLO2 Minimum
ADBA CLO2 Maximum
ADC0 CLIO Output 3 Disabled/Enabled*
ADC2 CLO3 Output Type 0-1mA/0-10mA/0-20mA/4-20mA*
ADC4 CLO3 Set Values Primary//Secondary*
ADC6 CLO3 Parameter (See G155 Data Type)
ADC8 CLO3 Minimum
ADCA CLO3 Maximum
ADD0 CLIO Output 4 Disabled/Enabled*
ADD2 CLO4 Output Type 0-1mA/0-10mA/0-20mA/4-20mA*
ADD4 CLO4 Set Values Primary//Secondary*
ADD6 CLO4 Parameter (See G155 Data Type)
ADD8 CLO4 Minimum
ADDA CLO4 Maximum
MiCOM P342, P343
PROBLEM ANALYSIS
P34x/EN PR/F33 Problem Analysis
MiCOM P342, P343

CONTENT
1. INTRODUCTION 3
2. INITIAL PROBLEM IDENTIFICATION 3
3. POWER UP ERRORS 4
4. ERROR MESSAGE/CODE ON POWER-UP 4
5. OUT OF SERVICE LED ILLUMINATED ON POWER UP 6
6. ERROR CODE DURING OPERATION 7
7. MIS-OPERATION OF THE RELAY DURING TESTING 7

7.1 Failure of output contacts 7
7.2 Failure of opto-isolated inputs 8
7.3 Incorrect analogue signals 8

1. INTRODUCTION
familiar with the contents of the safety and technical data sections and
the ratings on the equipment’s rating label
The purpose of this sub-document of the service manual is to allow an error condition
on the relay to be identified so that appropriate corrective action can be taken.
Should the relay have developed a fault, it should be possible in most cases to
identify which relay module requires attention. Sub-document - ‘Commissioning and
Maintenance’, advises on the recommended method of repair where faulty modules
need replacing. It is not possible to perform an on-site repair to a faulted module.
In cases where a faulty relay/module is being returned to the manufacturer or one of
their approved service centres, completed copy of the Repair Form located at the end
of this manual should be included.
2. INITIAL PROBLEM IDENTIFICATION

Consult the table below to find the description that best matches the problem
experienced, then consult the section referenced to perform a more detailed analysis
of the problem.
Symptom Refer to
Relay fails to power up Section 3
Relay powers up - but indicates error and halts during
Section 4
power-up sequence
Relay Powers up but Out of Service LED is illuminated Section 5
Relay Re-boots during normal operation Section 6
Error during normal operation Section 6
Misoperation of the relay during testing Section 7
Table 1: Problem identification
3. POWER UP ERRORS
If the relay does not appear to power up then the following procedure can be used to
determine whether the fault is in the external wiring, auxiliary fuse, power supply
module of the relay or the relay front panel.
Test Check Action

1 Measure auxiliary voltage on
terminals 1 and 2, verify voltage If auxiliary voltage is present and
level and polarity against the rating correct, then proceed to test 2.
label on front. Otherwise the wiring/fuses in
auxiliary supply should be checked.
Terminal 1 is -dc, 2 is +dc
2 Do LEDs/ and LCD backlight If they illuminate or the contact
illuminate on power up, also check closes and no error code is
the N/O watchdog contact for displayed then error is probably in
closing. the main processor board (front
panel). If they do not illuminate
and the contact does not close then
proceed to test 3.
3 Check Field voltage output If field voltage is not present then
(nominally 48V DC) the fault is probably in the relay
power supply module. Consult
sub-document – Commissioning
and Maintenance for a description
of how to remove this module. The
part number of this module can be
checked to verify that the rating of
the module conforms to the
auxiliary rated printed on the relay
front panel.
Table 2: Failure of relay to power up
4. ERROR MESSAGE/CODE ON POWER-UP

During the power-up sequence of the relay self-testing is performed as indicated by
the messages displayed on the LCD. If an error is detected by the relay during these
self-tests then an error message will be displayed and the power-up sequence will be
halted. If the error occurs when the relay application software is executing then a
maintenance record will be created and the relay will re-boot.
Test Check Action

1 Is an error message or code If relay locks up and displays an
permanently displayed during error code permanently then
power up. proceed to test 2. If the relay
prompts for input by the user
proceed to test 4. If the relay re-
boots automatically then proceed to
test 5
Test Check Action

2 Record displayed error, then Record whether the same error
remove and re-apply relay auxiliary code is displayed when the relay is
supply. re-booted. If no error code is
displayed then contact the local
service centre stating the error code
and relay information. If the same
code is displayed proceed to test 3.
3 Error code Identification Refer to sub-document –
Commissioning and Maintenance
Following text messages (in English)
for module location.
will be displayed if a fundamental
problem is detected preventing the These messages indicate that a
systemfrom booting: problem has been detected on the
main processor board of the relay
Bus Fail – address lines
(located in the front panel).
SRAM Fail – data lines
FLASH Fail format error
FLASH Fail checksum
Code Verify Fail
The following hex error codes relate
to errors detected in specific relay
modules:
0c140005/0c0d0000
0c140006/0c0e0000 Input Module (inc. Opto isolated
inputs)
Output Relay Cards
Other error codes relate to
problems within the main processor
board hardware or software. It will
be necessary to contact AREVA T&D
with details of the problem for a full
analysis.
4 Relay displays message for corrupt The power up tests have detected
settings and prompts for restoration corrupted relay settings, it is
of defaults to the affected settings. possible to restore defaults to allow
the power- up to be completed. It
will then be necessary to re-apply
the application- specific settings.
5 Relay resets on completion of power Error 0x0E080000, programmable
up - record error code displayed. scheme logic error due to excessive
execution time. Restore default
settings by performing a power up
with Kand 6 keys depressed,
confirm restoration of defaults at
prompt using ↵ key. If relay
powers up successfully, check
programmable logic for feedback
paths.
Test Check Action

Other error codes will relate to
software errors on the main
processor board, contact AREVA
T&D.
Table 3: Power-up self-test error
5. OUT OF SERVICE LED ILLUMINATED ON POWER UP
Test Check Action

1 Using the relay menu confirm If the setting is Enabled then disable
whether the Commission Test/Test the test mode and, verify that the
Mode setting is Enabled. Out of Service LED is extinguished.
Otherwise proceed to test 2.
2 Select and view the last Check for H/W Verify Fail this
maintenance record from the menu indicates a discrepancy between the
(in the View Records). relay model number and the
hardware, examine the “Maint
Data”, this indicates the causes of
the failure using bit fields:
Bit Meaning
0 The application type field in
the model number does not
match the software ID
1 The application field in the
model number does not match
the software ID
2 The variant 1 field in the
the software ID
3 The variant 2 field in the
the software ID
4 The protocol field in the model
number does not match the
software ID
5 The language field in the
the software ID
6 The VT type field in the model
number is incorrect (110V VTs
fitted)
number is incorrect (440V VTs
fitted)
Test Check Action

number is incorrect (no VTs
fitted)
Table 4: Out of service LED illuminated
6. ERROR CODE DURING OPERATION

The relay performs continuous self-checking, if an error is detected then an error
message will be displayed, a maintenance record will be logged and the relay will
reset (after a 1.6 second delay). A permanent problem (for example due to a
hardware fault) will generally be detected on the power up sequence, following which
the relay will display an error code and halt. If the problem was transient in nature
then the relay should re-boot correctly and continue in operation. The nature of the
detected fault can be determined by examination of the maintenance record logged.
There are also three cases where a maintenance record will be logged due to a
detected error where the relay will not reset. These are detection of a failure of either
the field voltage, the lithium battery, or the RTD board. In these cases the failure is
indicated by an alarm message, however the relay will continue to operate.
If the field voltage is detected to have failed (the voltage level has dropped below
threshold), then a scheme logic signal is also set. This allows the scheme logic to be
adapted in the case of this failure (for example if a blocking scheme is being used).
In the case of a battery failure it is possible to prevent the relay from issuing an alarm
using the setting under the Date and Time section of the menu. This setting "Battery
Alarm" can be set to 'Disabled' to allow the relay to be used without a battery, without
an alarm message being displayed.
In the case of the RTD board failure, an alarm "RTD board fail" message is displayed,
the RTD protection is disabled, but the operation of the rest of the relay functionality is
unaffected.
7. MIS-OPERATION OF THE RELAY DURING TESTING

7.1 Failure of output contacts
An apparent failure of the relay output contacts may be caused by the relay
configuration, the following tests should be performed to identify the real cause of the
failure. Note that the relay self-tests verify that the coil of the contact has been
energised, an error will be displayed if there is a fault in the output relay board.
Test Check Action

1 Is the Out of Service LED Illumination of this LED may
illuminated indicate that the relay is in test
mode or that the protection has
been disabled due to a hardware
verify error(see Table4)
2 Examine the Contact status in the If the relevant bits of the contact
Commissioning section of the status are operated then proceed to
menu. test 4, if not proceed to test 3.
Test Check Action

3 Verify by examination of the fault If the protection element does not
record, or by using the test port operate, verify whether the test is
whether the protection element is being correctly applied.
operating correctly.
If the protection element does
operate then it will be necessary to
check the programmable logic to
ensure that the mapping of the
protection element to the contacts is
correct.
4 Using the Commissioning/Test If the output relay does operate
mode function apply a test pattern then the problem must be in the
to the relevant relay output contacts external wiring to the relay. If the
and verify whether they operate output relay does not operate this
(note the correct external could indicate a failure of the
connection diagram should be output relay contacts (note that the
consulted). A continuity tester can self tests verify that the relay coil is
be used at the rear of the relay for being energised). Ensure that the
this purpose. closed resistance is not too high for
the continuity tester to detect.
Table 5: Failure of output contacts
7.2 Failure of opto-isolated inputs
The opto-isolated inputs are mapped onto the relay internal signals using the
programmable scheme logic. If an input does not appear to be recognised by the
relay scheme logic the Commission Tests/Opto Status menu option can be used to
verify whether the problem is in the opto-isolated input itself or the mapping of its
signal to the scheme logic functions. If the opto-isolated input does appear to be
read correctly then it will be necessary to examine its mapping within the
programmable logic.
If the opto-isolated input state is not being correctly read by the relay the applied
signal should be tested. Verify the connections to the opto-isolated input using the
correct wiring diagram and the nominal voltage settings in the ‘Opto Config’ menu.
In the ‘Opto Config’ menu the nominal battery voltage can be selected for all opto
inputs by selecting one of the five standard ratings in the ‘Global Nominal V’ settings.
If ‘Custom’ is selected then each opto input can individually be set to a nominal
voltage value. Next, using a voltmeter verify that >19.2 V dc (24/27V), or >24V dc
(30/34V), or >38.4V dc (48/54V), or >88V dc (110/125V), or >176V dc
(220/250V) is present on the terminals of the opto-islated input in the energised
state. If the signal is being correctly applied to the relay then the failure may be on
the input card itself. Depending on which opto-isolated input has failed this may
require replacement of either the complete analogue input module (the board within
this module cannot be individually replaced without re-calibration of the relay) or a
separate opto board.
7.3 Incorrect analogue signals
If it is suspected that the analogue quantities being measured by the relay are not
correct then the measurement function of the relay can be used to verify the nature of
the problem. The measured values displayed by the relay should be compared with
the actual magnitudes at the relay terminals. Verify that the correct terminals are
being used (in particular the dual rated CT inputs) and that the CT and VT ratios set
on the relay are correct.
MiCOM P342, P343
RELAY MENU DATABASE

P34x/EN GC/F33 Relay Menu Database
MiCOM P342, P343
MiCOM P342, P343 Guides

Relay Menu Database
This version of the Relay Menu Database is specific to the following

models
Model Number Software Number

P342------0070C P342------0070-A/B/C
P343------0070C P343------0070-A/B/C
For other models / software versions, please contact AREVA T&D for the
relevant information.
(Software versions P342------0010*, P342------0020*, P342------0030*,
P342------0040*, P342------0050*, P342------0060* and
P343------0010*, P343------0020*, P343------0030*, P343------0040*,
P343------0050*, P343------0060* are not supported by this menu
database, see OG8614A (0010), OG8614B (0020 – 0040),
P34x/EN O/C11 (0050) and P34x/EN O/D22 (0060) for information
on the menu database for these software versions).
RELAY MENU DATABASE

This Relay Menu Database is split into several sections, these are as follows:
• Menu Database for Courier, User Interface and MODBUS
• Menu Datatype Definition
• Event Data for Courier, User Interface and MODBUS
• IEC60870-5-103 Interoperability Guide
• Internal Digital Signals
• DNP3.0 Device Profile Document
• Default Programmable Logic
Menu database
This database defines the structure of the relay menu for the courier interface, the
front panel user interface and the MODBUS interface. This includes all the relay
settings and measurements. Datatypes for MODBUS and indexed strings for Courier
and the user interface are cross-referenced to the Menu Datatype Definition section
(using a G Number). For all settable cells the setting limits and default value are also
defined within this database.
Note: The following labels are used within the database
Label Description Value
V1 Main VT Rating 1 (120/110V) 4 (380/480V)
V2 Checksynch VT Rating 1 (100/110V) 4 (380/480V)
V3 NVD VT Rating 1 (100/110V) 4 (380/480V)
Ι1 Phase CT Rating 1 or 5 (Setting 0A08)
Ι2 Earth Fault CT Rating 1 or 5 (Setting 0A0A)
Ι3 Sensitive CT Rating 1 or 5 (Setting 0A0C)
Ι4 Mutual CT Rating 1 or 5 (Setting 0A0E)
Menu datatype definition

This table defines the datatypes used for MODBUS (the datatypes for the Courier and
user interface are defined within the Menu Database itself using the standard Courier
Datatypes). This section also defines the indexed string setting options for all
interfaces. The datatypes defined within this section are cross-referenced to from the
menu database using a G number.
Event data
This section specifies all the event information that can be produced by the relay. It
details exactly how each event will be presented via the Courier, User and MODBUS
interfaces.
IEC60870-5-103 interoperability guide
This table fully defines the operation of the IEC60870-5-103 (VDEW) interface for the
relay it should be read in conjunction with the relevant section of the Communications
section of this Manual (P34x/EN CT/E33).
Internal digital signals

This table defines all of the relay internal digital signals (opto inputs, output contacts
and protection inputs and outputs). A relay may have up to 1023 internal signals
each referenced by a numeric index as shown in this table. This numeric index is
used to select a signal for the commissioning monitor port. It is also used to explicitly
define protection events produced by the relay (see the Event Data section).
DNP3.0 device profile document
This table defines all of the objects, functions and/or qualifiers supported.
Default programmable logic
This section documents the default programmable logic for the various models of the
relay. This default logic for each model of the relay is supplied with the MiCOM S1
Scheme Logic Editor PC support software.
References
Introduction (P34x/EN IT/E33) : User Interface operation and connections to the relay
Communications (P34x/EN CT/E33) : Overview of communication interfaces
Courier User Guide R6512
Modicon MODBUS Protocol Reference Guide PI-MBUS-300 Rev E
IEC60870-5-103 Telecontrol Equipment and Systems – Transmission Protocols –
Companion Standard for the informative interface of Protection Equipment
Courier Modbus Address Modbus Password Model

Menu Text UI Data Type Strings
Datagroup
Default Setting Cell Type Min Max Step Level
Comment
Col Row Start End P341 P342 P343
SYSTEM DATA 00 00 * * *
Language 01 Indexed String G19 G19 English Setting 0 3 1 2 * * *
Password 02 ASCII Password(4 chars) G20 40001 40002 G20 AAAA Setting 65 90 1 0 * * *
Binary Flag (8 bits)
Sys Fn Links 03 G95 40003 G95 Setting 1 1 1 2 * * *
Indexed Strings
ASCII Text(16 chars) * = 1 for Model 1, 2 for Model 2, 3 for Model
Description 04 G3 40004 40011 G3 MiCOM P34* Setting 32 163 1 2 * * *
3
Plant Reference 05 ASCII Text(16 chars) G3 40012 40019 G3 ALSTOM Setting 32 163 1 2 * * *
Model Number 06 ASCII Text(32 chars) G3 30020 30035 G3 Model Number Data * * *
Serial Number 08 ASCII Text(7 chars) G3 30044 30051 G3 Serial Number Data * * *
Frequency 09 Unsigned Integer(8 bits) 40020 G1 50 Setting 50 60 10 2 * * *
Comms Level 0A Unsigned Integer(16 bits) 2 Data * * *
Needs to be address of interface
Relay Address 0B Unsigned Integer(16 bits) 255 Setting 0 255 1 1 * * *
Rear Courier Address available via LCD
Relay status (repeat of Courier Status byte
Binary Flag(16 bits) 30001 G26 Data * * *
without the busy flag)
Plant Status 0C Binary Flag(16 bits) G4 30002 G4 Data * * *
Control Status 0D Binary Flag(16 bits) G5 30004 G5 Data * * *
Active Group 0E Unsigned Integer(16 bits) 30006 G1 Data * * *
UNUSED 0F
CB Trip/Close 10 Indexed String(2) G55 No Operation Command 0 2 1 1 * Visible to LCD+Front Port
CB Trip/Close N/A 10 Indexed String(2) G55 40021 G55 No Operation Command 0 2 1 1 * Visible to Rear Port
Software Ref. 1 11 ASCII Text(16 chars) 30052 30059 G3 Data * * *
Binary Flag The original register 30007 is available for
Opto I/P Status 20 G8 30725 30726 G8 Data * * *
Indexed String opto inputs #1 to #16
Binary Flag
Relay O/P Status 21 G9 30008 30009 G9 Data * * *
Indexed String
Binary Flag
Alarm Status 1 22 G96 30011 30012 G96 Data * * *
Indexed String
UNUSED 23
Binary Flag
Opto I/P Status 30 G8 30725 30726 G8 Data * * * The original register 30007 is available
Indexed String
Binary Flag
Indexed String
Binary Flag
Indexed String
Binary Flag
Indexed String
Binary Flag(32 bits)
Indexed String
Access Level D0 Unsigned Integer(16 bits) 30010 G1 Data * * *
Password Control D1 Unsigned Integer(16 bits) G22 40022 G22 2 Setting 0 2 1 2 * * *
Password Level 1 D2 ASCII Password(4 chars) G20 40023 40024 G20 AAAA Setting 65 90 1 1 * * *
Password Level 2 D3 ASCII Password(4 chars) G20 40025 40026 G20 AAAA Setting 65 90 1 2 * * *
VIEW RECORDS 01 00 * * *

Datagroup
Comment
30100 G1 No of event records stored
30101 G1 Number of Fault records stored
30102 G1
Select Event 01 Unsigned Integer(16 bits) 40100 0 Setting 0 249 1 0 Max value is oldest record
Menu Cell Ref N/A 02 Cell Reference 30107 G13 (From Record) Data * * * Indicates type of event. See Event sheet.
Time & Date 03 IEC870 Time & Date 30103 30106 G12 (From Record) Data * * *
Event Text 04 Ascii String (32 chars) Data * * * See Event sheet
Note DTL depends on event type binary flag for
Event Value 05 Unsigned Int / Binary Flag (32 bits) 30108 30109 G27 Data * * * Contact, Opto, alarm & Protection. See Event
sheet of Spreadsheet.
Select Fault 06 Unsigned Integer (16 bits) 40101 Setting 0 4 1 2 * * * Allows Fault Record to be selected
Modbus address where change occurred.
Alarm 30011; Relay 30723; Opto 30725
30110 G1 Data * * * Protection 30727-30754. For platform events,
fault events and maintenance events the
default is 0.
This register will contain the DDB ordinal for
30111 G1 Data * * * protection events or the bit number for alarm
events.
0 means that there is no additional data
30112 G1 Data * * * 1 means that fault record data is available
2 means that maintenance data is available
Started Phase N/A Data * * *
ABCN A/B/C/N Visible if Start A/B/C/N
Tripped Phase N/A Data * * *
ABCN A/B/C/N Visible if Trip A/B/C/N
Gen Differential N/A Data *
Trip
Power N/A Data * * *
Start 1 2 1/2 visible if Start 1/2
Power N/A Data * * *
Trip 1 2 1/2 visible if Trip 1/2
Field Failure N/A Data * *
Alarm
Trip 1 2 1/2 visible if Trip 1/2
NPS Thermal N/A Data * *
Alarm Trip
Volt Dep O/C N/A Data * *
Start Trip
Underimedance N/A Data * *
Start Z< 12 1/2 visible if Start Z< 1/2
Underimedance N/A Data * *
Trip Z< 12 1/2 visible if Trip Z< 1/2

Datagroup
Comment
Overcurrent N/A Data * * *
Start I> 1234 1/2/3/4 Visible if Start I>1/2/3/4
Overcurrent N/A Data * * *
Trip I> 1234 1/2/3/4 Visible if Trip I>1/2/3/4
Earth Fault N/A Data * * *
Start IN> 1234 1/2/3/4 visible if Start IN>1/2/3/4
Earth Fault N/A Data * * *
Trip IN> 1234 1/2/3/4 visible if Trip IN>1/2/3/4
Sensitive E/F N/A Data * * *
Start ISEF> 1234 1/2/3/4 visible if Start ISEF>1/2/3/4
Sensitive E/F N/A Data * * *
Trip ISEF> 1234 1/2/3/4 visible if Trip ISEF>1/2/3/4
Restricted E/F N/A Data * * *
Trip IREF>
Sensitive Power N/A Data * * *
Sensitive Power N/A Data * * *
Trip 1 2 1/2 visible if trip 1/2
Residual O/V NVD N/A Data * * *
Start VN> 1 2 1/2 visible if Start VN>1/2
Residual O/V NVD N/A Data * * *
Trip VN> 1 2 1/2 visible if Trip VN>1/2
100% Stator EF N/A Data *
Start Trip
V/Hz N/A Data * *
Alarm Start Trip
df/dt N/A Data *
Start Trip
V Vector Shift N/A Data *
Trip
Dead Machine N/A Data *
Trip
U/Voltage start N/A Data * * * Ph-Ph or Ph-N
V< 1 2 AB BC CA 1/2 visible if Start V<1/2
U/Voltage Trip N/A Data * * * Ph-Ph or Ph-N
V< 1 2 AB BC CA 1/2 visible if Trip V<1/2
O/Voltage Start N/A Data * * * Ph-Ph or Ph-N
V> 1 2 AB BC CA 1/2 visible if Start V>1/2
O/Voltage Trip N/A Data * * * Ph-Ph or Ph-N
V> 1 2 AB BC CA 1/2 visible if Trip V>1/2
Underfrequency N/A Data * * *
Start F< 1234 1/2/3/4 visible if Start F<1/2/3/4
Underfrequency N/A Data * * *
Trip F< 1234 1/2/3/4 visible if Trip F<1/2/3/4
Overfrequency N/A Data * * *

Datagroup
Comment
Start F> 1 2 1/2 visible if Start F>1/2
Overfrequency N/A Data * * *
Trip F> 1 2 1/2 visible if Trip F>1/2
RTD Alarm N/A Data * *
RTD 1
RTD 2
RTD 3
RTD 4
RTD 5
RTD 6
RTD 7
RTD 8
RTD 9
RTD 10
RTD Trip N/A Data * *
RTD 1
RTD 2
RTD 3
RTD 4
RTD 5
RTD 6
RTD 7
RTD 8
RTD 9
RTD 10
CL I/P Alm Start N/A Data * * *
CLIO Input 1 Courier text = CLIO Input label setting

Datagroup
Comment
CL Input Alarm N/A Data * * *
CL I/P TripStart N/A Data * * *
CL Input Trip N/A Data * * *
Breaker Fail N/A Data * * *
CB Fail 1 2 1/2 visible if CB Fail 1/2
Supervision N/A Data * * *
VTS CTS VTS/CTS visible if AlarmVTS/CTS
PoleSlip z based N/A Data *
Start Z1 Z2
PoleSlip z based N/A Data *
Trip Z1 Z2
Thermal Overload N/A Data * *
Alarm Trip
For fault record use only. The Modbus register
Faulted Phase N/A 07 Binary Flag (8 Bits) G16 30113 G16 Data * * * cannot be accessed unless a fault record is
selected
Start Elements1 N/A 08 Binary Flag (32 Bits) G84 30114 30115 G84 Data * * * For fault record use only. The Modbus register
cannot be accessed unless a fault record is
Indexed String selected

Datagroup
Comment
Start Elements2 N/A 09 Binary Flag (32 Bits) G107 30116 30117 G107 Data * * * For fault record use only. The Modbus register
Trip Elements1 N/A 0A Binary Flag (32 Bits) G85 30118 30119 G85 Data * * * For fault record use only. The Modbus register
Trip Elements2 N/A 0B Binary Flag (32 Bits) G86 30120 30121 G86 Data * * * For fault record use only. The Modbus register
Fault Alarms N/A 0C Binary Flag (32 Bits) G87 30122 30123 G87 Data * * * For fault record use only. The Modbus register
Fault Time 0D IEC870 Time & Date 30124 30127 G12 (From Record) Data * * * cannot be accessed unless a fault record is
selected
Active Group 0E Unsigned Integer 30128 G1 Data * * * cannot be accessed unless a fault record is
selected
System Frequency 0F Courier Number (frequency) 30129 G30 Data * * * cannot be accessed unless a fault record is
selected
Fault Duration 10 Courier Number (time) 30130 30131 G24 Data * * * cannot be accessed unless a fault record is
selected
CB Operate Time 11 Courier Number (time) 30132 G25 Data * * * cannot be accessed unless a fault record is
selected
Relay Trip Time 12 Courier Number (time) 30133 30134 G24 Data * * * cannot be accessed unless a fault record is
selected
IA 13 Courier Number (current) 30135 30136 G24 Data * * For fault record use only. The Modbus register
IA-1 * selected
IB 14 Courier Number (current) 30137 30138 G24 Data * * For fault record use only. The Modbus register
IB-1 * selected
IC 15 Courier Number (current) 30139 30140 G24 Data * * For fault record use only. The Modbus register
IC-1 * selected
VAB 16 Courier Number (voltage) 30141 30142 G24 Data * * * cannot be accessed unless a fault record is
selected
VBC 17 Courier Number (voltage) 30143 30144 G24 Data * * * cannot be accessed unless a fault record is
selected
VCA 18 Courier Number (voltage) 30145 30146 G24 Data * * * cannot be accessed unless a fault record is
selected
VAN 19 Courier Number (voltage) 30147 30148 G24 Data * * * cannot be accessed unless a fault record is
selected
VBN 1A Courier Number (voltage) 30149 30150 G24 Data * * * cannot be accessed unless a fault record is
selected

Datagroup
Comment
VCN 1B Courier Number (voltage) 30151 30152 G24 Data * * * cannot be accessed unless a fault record is
selected
IA-2 1C Courier Number (current) 30153 30154 G24 Data * cannot be accessed unless a fault record is
selected.
IB-2 1D Courier Number (current) 30155 30156 G24 Data * cannot be accessed unless a fault record is
selected.
IC-2 1E Courier Number (current) 30157 30158 G24 Data * cannot be accessed unless a fault record is
selected.
IA Differential 1F Courier Number (current) 30159 30160 G24 Data * cannot be accessed unless a fault record is
selected.
IB Differential 20 Courier Number (current) 30161 30162 G24 Data * cannot be accessed unless a fault record is
selected.
IC Differential 21 Courier Number (current) 30163 30164 G24 Data * cannot be accessed unless a fault record is
selected.
VN Measured 22 Courier Number (voltage) 30165 30166 G24 Data * * * cannot be accessed unless a fault record is
selected.
VN Derived 23 Courier Number (voltage) 30167 30168 G24 Data * * * cannot be accessed unless a fault record is
selected.
IN Measured 24 Courier Number (current) 30169 30170 G24 Data * * For fault record use only. The Modbus register
IN Derived * selected.
I Sensitive 25 Courier Number (current) 30171 30172 G24 Data * * * cannot be accessed unless a fault record is
selected.
IREF Diff 26 Courier Number (current) 30173 30174 G24 Data * * cannot be accessed unless a fault record is
selected.
IREF Bias 27 Courier Number (current) 30175 30176 G24 Data * * cannot be accessed unless a fault record is
selected.
I2 28 Courier Number (current) 30177 30178 G24 Data * * cannot be accessed unless a fault record is
selected.
3 Phase Watts 29 Courier Number (Power) 30179 30180 G125 Data * * * cannot be accessed unless a fault record is
selected.
3 Phase VArs 2A Courier Number (VAr) 30181 30182 G125 Data * * * cannot be accessed unless a fault record is
selected.
3Ph Power Factor 2B Courier Number (Decimal) 30183 G30 Data * * * cannot be accessed unless a fault record is
selected.
Courier text = RTD Label setting for fault
RTD 1 2C Courier Number (Temperature) 30184 G10 Data * *
record use only
MiCOM P342, P343 Page 10/170

Datagroup
Comment
RTD 2 2D Courier Number (Temperature) 30185 G10 Data * *
record use only
RTD 3 2E Courier Number (Temperature) 30186 G10 Data * *
record use only
RTD 4 2F Courier Number (Temperature) 30187 G10 Data * *
record use only
RTD 5 30 Courier Number (Temperature) 30188 G10 Data * *
record use only
record use only
record use only
record use only
record use only
record use only
df/dt 36 Courier Number (Hz/s) 30194 G25 Data * cannot be accessed unless a fault record is
selected.
V Vector Shift 37 Courier Number (Angle) 30195 G30 Data * cannot be accessed unless a fault record is
selected.
Courier text = CLIO Input label setting for fault
CLIO Input 1 38 Courier Number (Decimal) 30196 G125 Data * * *
record use only
CLIO Input 2 39 Courier Number (Decimal) 30197 G125 Data * * *
record use only
CLIO Input 3 3A Courier Number (Decimal) 30198 G125 Data * * *
record use only
CLIO Input 4 3B Courier Number (Decimal) 30199 G125 Data * * *
record use only
Manual override to
Select Maint F0 Unsigned Integer (16 bits) 40102 G1 Setting 0 4 1 0 * * * Allows Self Test Report to be selected
select a fault record
Maint Text F1 Ascii Text (32 chars) Data * * *
Maint Type F2 Unsigned integer (32 bits) 30036 30037 G27 Data * * *
Maint Data F3 Unsigned integer (32 bits) 30038 30039 G27 Data * * *
Reset Indication FF Indexed String G11 No Command 0 1 1 1 * * *
MEASUREMENTS 1 02 00 * * *
IA Magnitude 01 Courier Number (current) 30200 30201 G24 Data * *
IA-1 Magnitude 01 Courier Number (current) 30200 30201 G24 Data *
IA Phase Angle 02 Courier Number (angle) 30202 G30 Data * *
IA-1 Phase Angle 02 Courier Number (angle) 30202 G30 Data *
IB Magnitude 03 Courier Number (current) 30203 30204 G24 Data * *
IB-1 Magnitude 03 Courier Number (current) 30203 30204 G24 Data *
IB Phase Angle 04 Courier Number (angle) 30205 G30 Data * *
MiCOM P342, P343 Page 11/170

Datagroup
Comment
IB-1 Phase Angle 04 Courier Number (angle) 30205 G30 Data *
IC Magnitude 05 Courier Number (current) 30206 30207 G24 Data * *
IC-1 Magnitude 05 Courier Number (current) 30206 30207 G24 Data *
IC Phase Angle 06 Courier Number (angle) 30208 G30 Data * *
IC-1 Phase Angle 06 Courier Number (angle) 30208 G30 Data *
IN Measured Mag 07 Courier Number (current) 30209 30210 G24 Data * *
IN Measured Ang 08 Courier Number (angle) 30211 G30 Data * *
IN Derived Mag 09 Courier Number (current) 30212 30213 G24 Data *
IN Derived Angle 0A Courier Number (angle) 30214 G30 Data *
I Sen Magnitude 0B Courier Number (current) 30215 30216 G24 Data * * *
I Sen Angle 0C Courier Number (degrees) 30217 G30 Data * * *
I1 Magnitude 0D Courier Number (current) 30218 30219 G24 Data * * *
I2 Magnitude 0E Courier Number (current) 30220 30221 G24 Data * * *
I0 Magnitude 0F Courier Number (current) 30222 30223 G24 Data * * *
IA RMS 10 Courier Number (current) 30224 30225 G24 Data * * *
IB RMS 11 Courier Number (current) 30226 30227 G24 Data * * *
IC RMS 12 Courier Number (current) 30228 30229 G24 Data * * *
VAB Magnitude 14 Courier Number (voltage) 30230 30231 G24 Data * * *
VAB Phase Angle 15 Courier Number (angle) 30232 G30 Data * * *
VBC Magnitude 16 Courier Number (voltage) 30233 30234 G24 Data * * *
VBC Phase Angle 17 Courier Number (angle) 30235 G30 Data * * *
VCA Magnitude 18 Courier Number (voltage) 30236 30237 G24 Data * * *
VCA Phase Angle 19 Courier Number (angle) 30238 G30 Data * * *
VAN Magnitude 1A Courier Number (voltage) 30239 30240 G24 Data * * *
VAN Phase Angle 1B Courier Number (angle) 30241 G30 Data * * *
VBN Magnitude 1C Courier Number (voltage) 30242 30243 G24 Data * * *
VBN Phase Angle 1D Courier Number (angle) 30244 G30 Data * * *
VCN Magnitude 1E Courier Number (voltage) 30245 30246 G24 Data * * *
VCN Phase Angle 1F Courier Number (angle) 30247 G30 Data * * *
VN Measured Mag 20 Courier Number (voltage) 30248 30249 G24 Data * * *
VN Measured Ang 21 Courier Number (angle) 30250 G30 Data * * *
VN Derived Mag 22 Courier Number (voltage) 30251 30252 G24 Data * * *
VN Derived Ang 23 Courier Number (angle) 30252 G30 Data * * *
V1 Magnitude 24 Courier Number (voltage) 30253 30254 G24 Data * * *
VAN RMS 27 Courier Number (voltage) 30259 30260 G24 Data * * *
VBN RMS 28 Courier Number (voltage) 30261 30262 G24 Data * * *
VCN RMS 29 Courier Number (voltage) 30263 30264 G24 Data * * *
Frequency 2D Courier Number (frequency) 30265 G30 Data * * *
VBC Phase Angle 17 Courier Number (angle) 30235 G30 Data * * *
VCA Magnitude 18 Courier Number (voltage) 30236 30237 G24 Data * * *
VCA Phase Angle 19 Courier Number (angle) 30238 G30 Data * * *
VAN Magnitude 1A Courier Number (voltage) 30239 30240 G24 Data * * *
VAN Phase Angle 1B Courier Number (angle) 30241 G30 Data * * *
MiCOM P342, P343 Page 12/170

Datagroup
Comment
VBN Magnitude 1C Courier Number (voltage) 30242 30243 G24 Data * * *
VBN Phase Angle 1D Courier Number (angle) 30244 G30 Data * * *
VCN Magnitude 1E Courier Number (voltage) 30245 30246 G24 Data * * *
VCN Phase Angle 1F Courier Number (angle) 30247 G30 Data * * *
VN Measured Mag 20 Courier Number (voltage) 30248 30249 G24 Data * * *
VN Measured Ang 21 Courier Number (angle) 30250 G30 Data * * *
VN Derived Mag 22 Courier Number (voltage) 30251 30252 G24 Data * * *
VN Derived Ang 23 Courier Number (angle) 30252 G30 Data * * *
VAN RMS 27 Courier Number (voltage) 30259 30260 G24 Data * * *
VBN RMS 28 Courier Number (voltage) 30261 30262 G24 Data * * *
VCN RMS 29 Courier Number (voltage) 30263 30264 G24 Data * * *
Frequency 2D Courier Number (frequency) 30265 G30 Data * * *
I1 Magnitude 40 Courier Number (current) 30218 30219 G24 Data * * *
I1 Phase Angle 41 Courier Number (angle) 30266 G30 Data * * *
V1 Phase Angle 47 Courier Number (angle) 30269 G30 Data * * *
V2 Phase Angle 49 Courier Number (angle) 30270 G30 Data * * *
V0 Magnitude 4A Courier Number (voltage) 30257 30258 G24 Data * * *
V0 Phase Angle 4B Courier Number (angle) 30271 G30 Data * * *
MEASUREMENTS 2 03 00 * * *
Alternative Modbus register pairs 30391&
A Phase Watts 01 Courier Number (Power) 30300 30302 G29 Data * * * 30392 available with improved G125 floating
point data type
Alternative Modbus register pairs 30393 &
B Phase Watts 02 Courier Number (Power) 30303 30305 G29 Data * * * 30394 available with improved G125 floating
point data type
C Phase Watts 03 Courier Number (Power) 30306 30308 G29 Data * * * 30396 available with improved G125 floating
point data type
A Phase VArs 04 Courier Number (VAr) 30309 30311 G29 Data * * * 30398 available with improved G125 floating
point data type
B Phase VArs 05 Courier Number (VAr) 30312 30314 G29 Data * * * 30400 available with improved G125 floating
point data type
C Phase VArs 06 Courier Number (VAr) 30315 30317 G29 Data * * * 30402 available with improved G125 floating
point data type
MiCOM P342, P343 Page 13/170

Datagroup
Comment
A Phase VA 07 Courier Number (VA) 30318 30320 G29 Data * * * 30404 available with improved G125 floating
point data type
B Phase VA 08 Courier Number (VA) 30321 30323 G29 Data * * * 30406 available with improved G125 floating
point data type
C Phase VA 09 Courier Number (VA) 30324 30326 G29 Data * * * 30408 available with improved G125 floating
point data type
3 Phase Watts 0A Courier Number (Power) 30327 30329 G29 Data * * * 30410 available with improved G125 floating
point data type
3 Phase VArs 0B Courier Number (VAr) 30330 30332 G29 Data * * * 30412 available with improved G125 floating
point data type
3 Phase VA 0C Courier Number (VA) 30333 30335 G29 Data * * * 30414 available with improved G125 floating
point data type
3Ph Power Factor 0E Courier Number (decimal) 30339 G30 Data * * *
APh Power Factor 0F Courier Number (decimal) 30340 G30 Data * * *
BPh Power Factor 10 Courier Number (decimal) 30341 G30 Data * * *
CPh Power Factor 11 Courier Number (decimal) 30342 G30 Data * * *
3Ph WHours Fwd 12 Courier Number (Wh) 30343 30345 G29 Data * * * 30416 available with improved G125 floating
point data type
3Ph WHours Rev 13 Courier Number (Wh) 30346 30348 G29 Data * * * 30418 available with improved G125 floating
point data type
3Ph VArHours Fwd 14 Courier Number (VArh) 30349 30351 G29 Data * * * 30420 available with improved G125 floating
point data type
3Ph VArHours Rev 15 Courier Number (VArh) 30352 30354 G29 Data * * * 30422 available with improved G125 floating
point data type
3Ph W Fix Demand 16 Courier Number (Power) 30355 30357 G29 Data * * * 30424 available with improved G125 floating
point data type
3Ph VArs Fix Dem 17 Courier Number (Vars) 30358 30360 G29 Data * * * 30426 available with improved G125 floating
point data type
IA Fixed Demand 18 Courier Number (Current) 30361 30362 G24 Data * * *
IB Fixed Demand 19 Courier Number (Current) 30363 30364 G24 Data * * *
IC Fixed Demand 1A Courier Number (Current) 30365 30366 G24 Data * * *
3 Ph W Roll Dem 1B Courier Number (Power) 30367 30369 G29 Data * * * 30428 available with improved G125 floating
point data type
3Ph VArs RollDem 1C Courier Number (VAr) 30370 30372 G29 Data * * * 30430 available with improved G125 floating
point data type
MiCOM P342, P343 Page 14/170

Datagroup
Comment
IA Roll Demand 1D Courier Number (Current) 30373 30374 G24 Data * * *
IB Roll Demand 1E Courier Number (Current) 30375 30376 G24 Data * * *
IC Roll Demand 1F Courier Number (Current) 30377 30378 G24 Data * * *
3Ph W Peak Dem 20 Courier Number (Power) 30379 30381 G29 Data * * * 30432 available with improved G125 floating
point data type
3Ph VAr Peak Dem 21 Courier Number (VAr) 30382 30384 G29 Data * * * 30434 available with improved G125 floating
point data type
IA Peak Demand 22 Courier Number (Current) 30385 30386 G24 Data * * *
IB Peak Demand 23 Courier Number (Current) 30387 30388 G24 Data * * *
IC Peak Demand 24 Courier Number (Current) 30389 30390 G24 Data * * *
Reset Demand 25 Indexed String G11 40103 G11 No Command 0 1 1 1 * * *
Recommended Modbus register pairs for power and energy measurements using G125 floating point data type. See Scada Communications section (P34x/EN CT) of the Technical Guide
N/A 30391 30392 G125 Data * * * A Phase Watts (see [0301])
N/A 30393 30394 G125 Data * * * B Phase Watts (see [0302])
N/A 30395 30396 G125 Data * * * C Phase Watts (see [0303])
N/A 30397 30398 G125 Data * * * A Phase VArs (see [0304])
N/A 30399 30400 G125 Data * * * B Phase VArs (see [0305])
N/A 30401 30402 G125 Data * * * C Phase VArs (see [0306])
N/A 30403 30404 G125 Data * * * A Phase VA (see [0307])
N/A 30405 30406 G125 Data * * * B Phase VA (see [0308])
N/A 30407 30408 G125 Data * * * C Phase VA (see [0309])
N/A 30409 30410 G125 Data * * * 3 Phase Watts (see [030A])
N/A 30411 30412 G125 Data * * * 3 Phase VArs (see [030B])
N/A 30413 30414 G125 Data * * * 3 Phase VA (see [030C])
N/A 30415 30416 G125 Data * * * 3 Phase WHours Fwd (see [0312])
N/A 30417 30418 G125 Data * * * 3 Phase WHours Rev (see [0313])
N/A 30419 30420 G125 Data * * * 3 Phase VArHours Fwd (see [0314])
N/A 30421 30422 G125 Data * * * 3 Phase VArHours Rev (see [0315])
N/A 30423 30424 G125 Data * * * 3 Phase W Fix Demand (see [0316])
N/A 30425 30426 G125 Data * * * 3 Phase VArs Fix Demand (see [0317])
N/A 30427 30428 G125 Data * * * 3 Phase W Roll Demand (see [031B])
N/A 30429 30430 G125 Data * * * 3 Phase VArs Roll Demand (see [031C])
N/A 30431 30432 G125 Data * * * 3 Phase W Peak Demand (see [0320])
N/A 30433 30434 G125 Data * * * 3 Phase VArs Peak Demand (see [0321])
MEASUREMENTS 3 04 00 *
IA-2 Magnitude 01 Courier Number (Current) 30435 30436 G24 Data *
IA-2 Phase Angle 02 Courier Number (Angle) 30437 G30 Data *
IB-2 Magnitude 03 Courier Number (Current) 30438 30439 G24 Data *
IB-2 Phase Angle 04 Courier Number (Angle) 30440 G30 Data *
IC-2 Magnitude 05 Courier Number (Current) 30441 30442 G24 Data *
IC-2 Phase Angle 06 Courier Number (Angle) 30443 G30 Data *
IA Differential 07 Courier Number (Current) 30444 30445 G24 Data *
IB Differential 08 Courier Number (Current) 30446 30447 G24 Data *
MiCOM P342, P343 Page 15/170

Datagroup
Comment
IC Differential 09 Courier Number (Current) 30448 30449 G24 Data *
IA Bias 0A Courier Number (Current) 30450 30451 G24 Data *
IB Bias 0B Courier Number (Current) 30452 30453 G24 Data *
IC Bias 0C Courier Number (Current) 30454 30455 G24 Data *
IREF Diff 0D Courier Number (Current) 30456 30457 G24 Data * *
IREF Bias 0E Courier Number (Current) 30458 30459 G24 Data * *
VN 3rd Harmonic 0F Courier Number (Voltage) 30460 30461 G24 Data *
NPS Thermal 10 Courier Number (Percentage) 30462 G1 Data * *
Reset NPSThermal 11 Indexed String G11 40104 G11 No Command 0 1 1 1 * *
RTD 1 12 Courier Number (Temperature) 30463 G10 Data * * Courier text = RTD label setting
RTD 9 1A Courier Number (Temperature) 30471 G10 Data * * Courier text = RTD label setting
RTD 10 1B Courier Number (Temperature) 30472 G10 Data * * Courier text = RTD label setting
RTD Open Cct 1C G108 30473 G108 Data * *
Indexed String
RTD Short Cct 1D G109 30474 G109 Data * *
Indexed String
RTD Data Error 1E G110 30475 G110 Data * *
Indexed String
Reset RTD Flags 1F Indexed string G11 40105 G11 No Command 0 1 1 1 * *
APh Sen Watts 20 Courier Number (Power) 30476 30477 G125 Data * * *
APh Sen Vars 21 Courier Number (Var) 30478 30479 G125 Data * * *
APh Power Angle 22 Courier Number (angle) 30480 G30 Data * * *
Thermal Overload 23 Courier Number (Percentage) 30481 G1 Data * * *
Reset ThermalO/L 24 Indexed String G11 40106 G11 No Command 0 1 1 1 * * *
CLIO Input 1 25 Courier Number (Decimal) 30482 30483 G125 Data * * * Courier Text = CLIO label setting
CB CONDITION 06 00 * * * CB CONDITION MONITORING
CB Operations 01 Unsigned Integer 30600 G1 Data * * * Number of Circuit Breaker Operations
Total IA Broken 02 Courier Number (current) 30601 30602 G24 Data * * * Broken Current A Phase
Total IB Broken 03 Courier Number (current) 30603 30604 G24 Data * * * Broken Current B Phase
Total IC Broken 04 Courier Number (current) 30605 30606 G24 Data * * * Broken Current C Phase
CB Operate Time 05 Courier Number (time) 30607 G25 Data * * * Circuit Breaker operating time
Reset CB Data 06 Indexed String G11 40150 G11 No Command 0 1 1 1 * * * Reset All Values
CB CONTROL 07 00 * * *
CB Control by 01 Indexed String G99 40200 G99 Disabled Setting 0 7 1 2 *
Close Pulse Time 02 Courier Number (Time) 40201 G2 0.5 Setting 0.1 10 0.01 2 *
MiCOM P342, P343 Page 16/170

Datagroup
Comment
Trip Pulse Time 03 Courier Number (Time) 40202 G2 0.5 Setting 0.1 5 0.01 2 *
Man Close Delay 05 Courier Number (Time) 40203 G2 10 Setting 0.01 600 0.01 2 * Manual Close Delay
CB Healthy Time 06 Courier Number (Time) 40204 40205 G35 5 Setting 0.01 9999 0.01 2 *
Lockout Reset 08 Indexed String G11 40206 G11 No Command 0 1 1 2 * * *
Reset Lockout by 09 Indexed String G81 40207 G81 CB Close Setting 0 1 1 2 * * *
Man Close RstDly 0A Courier Number (Time) 40208 G2 5 Setting 0.01 600 0.01 2 * * * Manual Close Reset Delay
CB Status Input 11 Indexed String G118 40209 G118 None Setting 0 3 1 2 * * *
DATE AND TIME 08 00 * * *
Date/Time N/A 01 IEC870 Time & Date 40300 40303 G12 Setting 0 * * *
Date N/A * * * Front Panel Menu only
12-Jan-98
Time N/A * * * Front Panel Menu only
12:00
IRIG-B Sync 04 Indexed String G37 40304 G37 Disabled Setting 0 1 1 2 * * *
IRIG-B Status 05 Indexed String G17 30090 G17 Data * * *
Battery Status 06 Indexed String G59 30091 G59 Data * * *
Battery Alarm 07 Indexed String G37 40305 G37 Enabled Setting 0 1 1 2 * * *
CONFIGURATION 09 00 * * *
Restore Defaults 01 Indexed String G53 40402 G53 No Operation Command 0 5 1 2 * * *
Setting Group 02 Indexed String G61 40403 G61 Menu Setting 0 1 1 2 * * *
Active Settings 03 Indexed String G90 40404 G90 1 Setting 0 3 1 1 * * *
Save Changes 04 Indexed String G62 40405 G62 No Operation Command 0 2 1 2 * * *
Copy From 05 Indexed String G90 40406 G90 Group 1 Setting 0 3 1 2 * * *
Copy To 06 Indexed String G98 40407 G98 No Operation Command 0 3 1 2 * * *
Setting Group 1 07 Indexed String G37 40408 G37 Enabled Setting 0 1 1 2 * * *
Setting Group 2 08 Indexed String G37 40409 G37 Disabled Setting 0 1 1 2 * * *
Setting Group 3 09 Indexed String G37 40410 G37 Disbaled Setting 0 1 1 2 * * *
Setting Group 4 0A Indexed String G37 40411 G37 Disabled Setting 0 1 1 2 * * *
Gen Differential 0B Indexed String G37 40412 G37 Enabled Setting 0 1 1 2 *
Power 0C Indexed String G37 40413 G37 Enabled Setting 0 1 1 2 * * *
Field Failure 0D Indexed String G37 40414 G37 Enabled Setting 0 1 1 2 * *
NPS Thermal 0E Indexed String G37 40415 G37 Enabled Setting 0 1 1 2 * *
System Backup 0F Indexed String G37 40416 G37 Enabled Setting 0 1 1 2 * *
Overcurrent 10 Indexed String G37 40417 G37 Enabled Setting 0 1 1 2 * * *
Thermal Overload 11 Indexed String G37 40433 G37 Disabled Setting 0 1 1 2 * * *
NOT USED 12
Earth Fault 13 Indexed String G37 40418 G37 Enabled Setting 0 1 1 2 * * *
NOT USED 14
SEF/REF/SPower 15 Indexed String G114 40419 Disabled Setting 0 2 1 2 *
G114 SEF/REF * *
Residual O/V NVD 16 Indexed String G37 40420 G37 Enabled Setting 0 1 1 2 * * * Residual Overvoltage
100% Stator EF 17 Indexed String G37 40421 G37 Disabled Setting 0 1 1 2 *
V/Hz 18 Indexed String G37 40422 G37 Disabled Setting 0 1 1 2 * *
df/dt 19 Indexed String G37 40423 G37 Enabled Setting 0 1 1 2 *
V Vector Shift 1A Indexed String G37 40424 G37 Disabled Setting 0 1 1 2 *
MiCOM P342, P343 Page 17/170

Datagroup
Comment
Dead Machine 1B Indexed String G37 40425 G37 Disabled Setting 0 1 1 2 *
Reconnect Delay 1C Indexed String G37 40426 G37 Disabled Setting 0 1 1 2 *
Volt Protection 1D Indexed String G37 40427 G37 Enabled Setting 0 1 1 2 * * *
Freq Protection 1E Indexed String G37 40428 G37 Enabled Setting 0 1 1 2 * * *
RTD Inputs 1F Indexed String G37 40429 G37 Enabled Setting 0 1 1 2 * *
CB Fail 20 Indexed String G37 40430 G37 Disabled Setting 0 1 1 2 * * *
Supervision 21 Indexed String G37 40431 G37 Disabled Setting 0 1 1 2 * * *
NOT USED 22 NOT USED
NOT USED 23
Pole Slipping 24 Indexed String G37 40436 G37 Enabled Setting 0 1 1 2 *
Input Labels 25 Indexed String G80 Visible Setting 0 1 1 1 * * *
Output Labels 26 Indexed String G80 Visible Setting 0 1 1 1 * * *
RTD Labels 27 Indexed String G80 Visible Setting 0 1 1 1 * *
CT & VT Ratios 28 Indexed String G80 Visible Setting 0 1 1 1 * * *
Record Control 29 Indexed String G80 Visible Setting 0 1 1 1 * * *
Disturb Recorder 2A Indexed String G80 Visible Setting 0 1 1 1 * * * Disturbance recorder
Measure't Setup 2B Indexed String G80 Visible Setting 0 1 1 1 * * *
Comms Settings 2C Indexed String G80 Visible Setting 0 1 1 1 * * *
Commission Tests 2D Indexed String G80 Visible Setting 0 1 1 1 * * *
Setting Values 2E Indexed String G54 Primary Setting 0 1 1 1 * * *
Control Inputs 2F Indexed String G80 Visible Setting 0 1 1 2 * * *
CLIO Inputs 30 Indexed String G37 40434 G37 Enabled Setting 0 1 1 2 * * *
CLIO Outputs 31 Indexed String G37 40435 G37 Enabled Setting 0 1 1 2 * * *
CLIO status (Hidden) 32 Cell value set to False if CLIO not fitted
(Note: No Courier text) Cell value set to True if CLIO is fitted
40400 G18 * * * Record selection command register
40401 G6 * * * Record control command register
CT AND VT RATIOS 0A 00 * * * values for multiplier see mult column
Main VT Primary 01 Courier Number (Voltage) 40500 40501 G35 110 Setting 100 1000000 1 2 * * * Label V1=Main VT Rating/110
Main VT Sec'y 02 Courier Number (Voltage) 40502 G2 110 Setting 80*V1 140*V1 1*V1 2 * * * Label M1=0A01/0A02
Neutral Displacement VT Primary Label
NVD VT Primary 05 Courier Number (Voltage) 40506 40507 G35 110 Setting 100 1000000 1 2 * * *
V3=Neutral Disp VT Rating/110
Neutral Displacement VT Secondary Label
NVD VT Secondary 06 Courier Number (Voltage) 40508 G2 110 Setting 80*V3 140*V3 1*V3 2 * * *
M3=0A05/0A06
Phase CT Primary 07 Courier Number (Current) 40509 G2 1 Setting 1 30000 1 2 * * * I1=Phase CT secondary rating
Phase CT Sec'y 08 Courier Number (Current) 40510 G2 1 Setting 1 5 4 2 * * * Label M4=0A07/0A08
E/F CT Primary 09 Courier Number (Current) 40511 G2 1 Setting 1 30000 1 2 * * Label I2=E/F CT secondary rating
E/F CT Secondary 0A Courier Number (Current) 40512 G2 1 Setting 1 5 4 2 * * Label M5=0A09/0A0A
SEF CT Primary 0B Courier Number (Current) 40513 G2 1 Setting 1 30000 1 2 * * * Label I3=SEF CT secondary rating
SEF CT Secondary 0C Courier Number (Current) 40514 G2 1 Setting 1 5 4 2 * * * Label M6=0A0B/0A0C
RECORD CONTROL 0B 00 * * *
Clear Events 01 Indexed String G11 No Command 0 1 1 1 * * *
Clear Faults 02 Indexed String G11 No Command 0 1 1 1 * * *
Clear Maint 03 Indexed String G11 No Command 0 1 1 1 * * *
Alarm Event 0B 04 Indexed String G37 40520 G37 Enabled Setting 0 1 1 2 * * *
MiCOM P342, P343 Page 18/170

Datagroup
Comment
Output Event 0B 05 Indexed String G37 40521 G37 Enabled Setting 0 1 1 2 * * *
Opto Input Event 0B 06 Indexed String G37 40522 G37 Enabled Setting 0 1 1 2 * * *
Relay Sys Event 0B 07 Indexed String G37 40523 G37 Enabled Setting 0 1 1 2 * * *
Fault Rec Event 0B 08 Indexed String G37 40524 G37 Enabled Setting 0 1 1 2 * * *
Maint Rec Event 0B 09 Indexed String G37 40525 G37 Enabled Setting 0 1 1 2 * * *
Protection Event 0B 0A Indexed String G37 40526 G37 Enabled Setting 0 1 1 2 * * *
DDB 31 - 0 0B 0B Binary Flag (32 bits) 40527 40528 G27 0xFFFFFFFF Setting 0xFFFFFFFF 32 1 2 * * *
DDB 63 - 32 0B 0C Binary Flag (32 bits) 40529 40530 G27 0xFFFFFFFF Setting 0xFFFFFFFF 32 1 2 * * *
DDB 95 - 64 0B 0D Binary Flag (32 bits) 40531 40532 G27 0xFFFFFFFF Setting 0xFFFFFFFF 32 1 2 * * *
DDB 127 - 96 0B 0E Binary Flag (32 bits) 40533 40534 G27 0xFFFFFFFF Setting 0xFFFFFFFF 32 1 2 * * *
DDB 159 - 128 0B 0F Binary Flag (32 bits) 40535 40536 G27 0xFFFFFFFF Setting 0xFFFFFFFF 32 1 2 * * *
DDB 191 - 160 0B 10 Binary Flag (32 bits) 40537 40538 G27 0xFFFFFFFF Setting 0xFFFFFFFF 32 1 2 * * *
DDB 511 - 480 0B 1A Binary Flag (32 bits) 40557 40558 G27 0xFFFFFFFF Setting 0xFFFFFFFF 32 1 2 * * *
DDB 543 - 512 0B 1B Binary Flag (32 bits) 40559 40560 G27 0xFFFFFFFF Setting 0xFFFFFFFF 32 1 2 * * *
DDB 575 - 544 0B 1C Binary Flag (32 bits) 40561 40562 G27 0xFFFFFFFF Setting 0xFFFFFFFF 32 1 2 * * *
DDB 607 - 576 0B 1D Binary Flag (32 bits) 40563 40564 G27 0xFFFFFFFF Setting 0xFFFFFFFF 32 1 2 * * *
DDB 639 - 608 0B 1E Binary Flag (32 bits) 40565 40566 G27 0xFFFFFFFF Setting 0xFFFFFFFF 32 1 2 * * *
DDB 671 - 640 0B 1F Binary Flag (32 bits) 40567 40568 G27 0xFFFFFFFF Setting 0xFFFFFFFF 32 1 2 * * *
DDB 1022 - 992 0B 2A Binary Flag (32 bits) 40589 40590 G27 0xFFFFFFFF Setting 0xFFFFFFFF 32 1 2 * * *
DISTURB RECORDER 0C 00 * * * DISTURBANCE RECORDER
Duration 01 Courier Number (Time) 40600 G2 1.5 Setting 0.1 10.5 0.01 2 * * *
Trigger Position 02 Courier Number (%) 40601 G2 33.3 Setting 0 100 0.1 2 * * *
Trigger Mode 03 Indexed String G34 40602 G34 Single 0 1 1 2 * * *
** Max = 7 for Model1, 8 for Model2,
Analog Channel 1 04 Indexed String G31 40603 G31 VAN Setting 0 ** 1 2 * * *
11 for Model3
MiCOM P342, P343 Page 19/170

Datagroup
Comment
Analog Channel 2 05 Indexed String G31 40604 G31 VBN Setting 0 ** 1 2 * * *
11 for Model3
Analog Channel 3 06 Indexed String G31 40605 G31 VCN Setting 0 ** 1 2 * * *
11 for Model3
Analog Channel 4 07 Indexed String G31 40606 G31 VN Setting 0 ** 1 2 * * *
11 for Model3
Analog Channel 5 08 Indexed String G31 40607 G31 IA Setting 0 ** 1 2 * * *
11 for Model3
Analog Channel 6 09 Indexed String G31 40608 G31 IB Setting 0 ** 1 2 * * *
11 for Model3
Analog Channel 7 0A Indexed String G31 40609 G31 IC Setting 0 ** 1 2 * * *
11 for Model3
Analog Channel 8 0B Indexed String G31 40610 G31 IN SEF Setting 0 ** 1 2 * * *
11 for Model3
Digital Input 1 0C Indexed String G32 40611 G32 Relay 1 Setting 0 DDB Size 1 2 * * *
Input 1 Trigger 0D Indexed String G66 40612 G66 No Trigger Setting 0 2 1 2 * * *
Digital Input 2 0E Indexed String G32 40613 G32 Relay 2 Setting 0 DDB Size 1 2 * * *
Input 2 Trigger 0F Indexed String G66 40614 G66 No Trigger Setting 0 2 1 2 * * *
Digital Input 3 10 Indexed String G32 40615 G32 Relay 3 Setting 0 DDB Size 1 2 * * *
Input 3 Trigger 11 Indexed String G66 40616 G66 No Trigger Setting 0 2 1 2 * * *
Digital Input 8 1A Indexed String G32 40625 G32 Opto Input 1 Setting 0 DDB Size 1 2 * *
Relay 8 *
Input 8 Trigger 1B Indexed String G66 40626 G66 No Trigger Setting 0 2 1 2 * * *
Digital Input 9 1C Indexed String G32 40627 G32 Opto Input 2 Setting 0 DDB Size 1 2 * *
Relay 9 *
Digital Input 10 1E Indexed String G32 40629 G32 Opto Input 3 Setting 0 DDB Size 1 2 * *
Relay 10 *
Digital Input 11 20 Indexed String G32 40631 G32 Opto Input 4 Setting 0 DDB Size 1 2 * *
Relay 11 *
Relay 12 *
Relay 13 *
MiCOM P342, P343 Page 20/170

Datagroup
Comment
Relay 14 *
Opto Input 1 *
Digital Input 16 2A Indexed String G32 40641 G32 Not Used Setting 0 DDB Size 1 2 * *
Opto Input 2 *
Digital Input 17 2C Indexed String G32 40643 G32 Not Used Setting 0 DDB Size 1 2 * *
Opto Input 3 *
Digital Input 18 2E Indexed String G32 40645 G32 Not Used Setting 0 DDB Size 1 2 * *
Opto Input 4 *
Digital Input 19 30 Indexed String G32 40647 G32 Not Used Setting 0 DDB Size 1 2 * *
Opto Input 5 *
Opto Input 6 *
Opto Input 7 *
Opto Input 8 *
Opto Input 9 *
Digital Input 24 3A Indexed String G32 40657 G32 Not Used Setting 0 DDB Size 1 2 * *
Opto Input 10 *
Digital Input 25 3C Indexed String G32 40659 G32 Not Used Setting 0 DDB Size 1 2 * *
Opto Input 11 *
Digital Input 26 3E Indexed String G32 40661 G32 Not Used Setting 0 DDB Size 1 2 * *
Opto Input 12 *
Opto Input 13 *
Opto Input 14 *
MiCOM P342, P343 Page 21/170

Datagroup
Comment
Opto Input 15 *
Opto Input 16 *
Digital Input 31 48 Indexed String G32 40671 G32 Not Used Setting 0 DDB Size 1 2 * * *
Digital Input 32 4A Indexed String G32 40673 G32 Not Used Setting 0 DDB Size 1 2 * * *
MEASURE'T SETUP 0D 00 * * * MEASUREMENT SETTINGS
Default Display 01 Indexed String G52 40700 G52 Description Setting 0 7 1 2 * * *
Local Values 02 Indexed String G54 40701 G54 Primary Setting 0 1 1 1 * * * Local Measurement Values
Remote Values 03 Indexed String G54 40702 G54 Primary Setting 0 1 1 1 * * * Remote Measurement Values
Measurement Ref 04 Indexed String G56 40703 G56 VA Setting 0 5 1 1 * * * Measurement Phase Reference
Measurement Mode 05 Unsigned Integer 40705 G1 0 Setting 0 3 1 1 * * *
Fix Dem Period 06 Courier Number (time-minutes) 40706 G2 15 Setting 1 99 1 2 * * * Fixed Demand Interval
Roll Sub Period 07 Courier Number (time-minutes) 40707 G2 1 Setting 1 99 1 2 * * * Rolling demand sub period
Num Sub Periods 08 Unsigned Integer 40708 G1 15 Setting 1 15 1 2 * * * Number of rolling sub-periods
Remote 2 Measurement Values visible when
Remote 2 Values 0B Indexed String G54 G54 Primary Setting 0 1 1 2 * * *
model no. hardware option (Field 7) = 7 or 8
COMMUNICATIONS 0E 00 * * *
Rear Protocol 01 Indexed String G71 Data * * *
Remote Address 02 Unsigned integer (16 bits) 255 Setting 0 255 1 1 * * * Build = Courier
Remote Address 02 Unsigned integer (16 bits) 1 Setting 1 247 1 1 * * * Build = Modbus. Default Modbus address is 1
Remote Address 02 Unsigned integer (16 bits) 1 Setting 0 254 1 1 * * * Build = IEC60870-5-103
Remote Address 02 Unsigned integer (16 bits) 1 Setting 0 65534 1 1 * * * Build=DNP 3.0
Inactivity Timer 03 Courier Number (Time-minutes) 15 Setting 1 30 1 2 * * * Build = Courier
Inactivity Timer 03 Courier Number (Time-minutes) 15 Setting 1 30 1 2 * * * Build = Modbus
Inactivity Timer 03 Courier Number (Time-minutes) 15 Setting 1 30 1 2 * * * Build = IEC60870-5-103
Baud Rate 04 Indexed String G38m 19200 bits/s Setting 0 2 1 2 * * * Build = Modbus
Baud Rate 04 Indexed String G38v 19200 bits/s Setting 0 1 1 2 * * * Build = IEC60870-5-103
Baud Rate 04 Indexed String G38d 19200 bits/s Setting 0 5 1 2 * * * Build = DNP 3.0
Parity 05 Indexed String G39 None Setting 0 2 1 2 * * * Build = Modbus
Parity 05 Indexed String G39 None Setting 0 2 1 2 * * * Build = DNP 3.0
Measure't Period 06 Courier Number (Time) 15 Setting 1 60 1 2 * * * Build = IEC60870-5-103
Build=IEC60870-5-103 and Fibre Optic Board
Physical Link 07 Indexed String G21 RS485 Setting 0 1 1 1 * * *
fitted
Time Sync 08 Indexed String G37 Disabled Setting 0 1 1 2 * * * Build=DNP 3.0 visible when IRIG-B is disabled
CS103 Blocking 0A Indexed String G210 Disabled Setting 0 2 1 2 * * * Build=IEC60870-5-103

MiCOM P342, P343 Page 22/170

Datagroup
Comment
Visible when Model no. Hardware option (Field
REAR PORT2 (RP2) 80 (Sub Heading) * * *
7) = 7 or 8

RP2 Protocol 81 ASCII Text(16 chars) Courier Data * * *
7) = 7 or 8. Implemented as datatype G71

RP2 Card Status 84 Indexed String G204 Data * * *
7) = 7 or 8
RP2 Port Config 88 Indexed String G205 EIA232 (RS232) Setting 0 1 1 2 * * * Visible if RP2 Card status = OK
RP2 Comms Mode 8A Indexed String G206 IEC60870 FT1.2 Setting 0 1 1 2 * * * Visible if RP2 Card status = OK and 0E88<2
RP2 Address 90 Unsigned Integer (16 bits) 255 Setting 0 255 1 1 * * * Visible if RP2 Card status = OK
RP2 InactivTimer 92 Courier Number (time-minutes) 15 Setting 1 30 1 2 * * * Visible if RP2 Card status = OK
RP2 Baud Rate 94 Indexed String G38c 19200 bits/s Setting 0 2 1 2 * * * Visible if RP2 Card status = OK and
COMMISSION TESTS 0F 00 * * *
Binary Flag(32 bits) The original register 30007 is available for
Opto I/P Status 01 G8 30725 30726 G8 Data * * *
Indexed String opto inputs #1 to #16
Binary Flag(32 bits)
Indexed String
Binary Flag(8 bits)
Test Port Status 03 Data * * *
Indexed String
LED Status 04 Binary Flag(8 bits) Data * * *
Monitor Bit 1 05 Unsigned Integer 40850 G1 64 Setting 0 1022 1 1 * * *
Monitor Bit 6 0A Unsigned Integer 40855 G1 69 Setting 0 1022 1 1 * * *
Monitor Bit 7 0B Unsigned Integer 40856 G1 70 Setting 0 1022 1 1 * * *
Monitor Bit 8 0C Unsigned Integer 40857 G1 71 Setting 0 1022 1 1 * * *
Test Mode 0D Indexed String G119 40858 G119 Disabled Setting 0 2 1 2 * * * IEC60870 Test Mode Change
Binary Flag
Test Pattern 0E G9 40859 40860 G9 0 Setting 0 20 1 2 * * * IEC60870 Test Mode Change
Indexed String
Contact Test 0F Indexed String G93 40861 G93 No Operation Command 0 2 1 2 * * * IEC60870 Test Mode Change
Binary Flag(8 bits)
Test LEDs 10 G94 40862 G94 No Operation Command 0 1 1 2 * * *
Indexed String
The following cells (0F20 to 0F3F) and Modbus addresses (30723 to 30786) are available to access real-time DDB status, including starts, trips and alarms
DDB 31 - 0 N/A 20 Binary Flag(32) 30723 30724 G27 Data * * * DDB Elements 0-31
DDB 63 - 32 N/A 21 Binary Flag(32) 30725 30726 G27 Data * * *
MiCOM P342, P343 Page 23/170

Datagroup
Comment
DDB 351 - 320 N/A 2A Binary Flag(32) 30743 30744 G27 Data * * *
DDB 383 - 352 N/A 2B Binary Flag(32) 30745 30746 G27 Data * * *
DDB 415 - 384 N/A 2C Binary Flag(32) 30747 30748 G27 Data * * *
DDB 447 - 416 N/A 2D Binary Flag(32) 30749 30750 G27 Data * * *
DDB 479 - 448 N/A 2E Binary Flag(32) 30751 30752 G27 Data * * *
DDB 511 - 480 N/A 2F Binary Flag(32) 30753 30754 G27 Data * * *
DDB 863 - 832 N/A 3A Binary Flag(32) 30775 30776 G27 Data * * *
DDB 895 - 864 N/A 3B Binary Flag(32) 30777 30778 G27 Data * * *
DDB 927 - 896 N/A 3C Binary Flag(32) 30779 30780 G27 Data * * *
DDB 959 - 928 N/A 3D Binary Flag(32) 30781 30782 G27 Data * * *
DDB 991 - 960 N/A 3E Binary Flag(32) 30783 30784 G27 Data * * *
DDB 1022 - 992 N/A 3F Binary Flag(32) 30785 30786 G27 Data * * *
N/A Binary Flag(16) 30701 G26 Data * * * Relay Status (repeat of Courier status)
N/A Courier Number (current) 30702 30703 G24 Data * * * IA Magnitude
N/A Courier Number (current) 30704 30705 G24 Data * * * IB Magnitude
N/A Courier Number (current) 30706 30707 G24 Data * * * IC Magnitude
N/A Courier Number (voltage) 30708 30709 G24 Data * * * VAB Magnitude
N/A Courier Number (voltage) 30710 30711 G24 Data * * * VBC Magnitude
N/A Courier Number (voltage) 30712 30713 G24 Data * * * VCA Magnitude
N/A Courier Number (power) 30714 30716 G29 Data * * * 3 Phase Watts
N/A Courier Number (power) 30717 30719 G29 Data * * * 3 Phase VArs
N/A Courier Number (decimal) 30720 G30 Data * * * 3 Phase Power Factor
N/A Courier Number (frequency) 30721 G30 Data * * * Frequency
N/A Binary Flag(8) 30722 G1 Data * * * Relay Test Port Status
CB MONITOR SETUP 10 00 * * *
Broken I^ 01 Courier Number (Decimal) 40151 G2 2 Setting 1 2 0.1 2 * * * Broken Current Index
I^ Maintenance 02 Indexed String G88 40152 G88 Alarm Disabled Setting 0 1 1 2 * * * Broken Current to cause maintenance alarm
I^ Maintenance 03 Courier Number (Current) 40153 40154 G35 1000 Setting 1 25000 1 2 * * * IX Maintenance Alarm
I^ Lockout 04 Indexed String G88 40155 G88 Alarm Disabled Setting 0 1 1 2 * * * Broken Current to cause lockout alarm
I^ Lockout 05 Courier Number (Current) 40156 40157 G35 2000 Setting 1 25000 1 2 * * * IX Maintenance Lockout
Circuit Breaker Trips to cause maintenance
No. CB Ops Maint 06 Indexed String G88 40158 G88 Alarm Disabled Setting 0 1 1 2 * * *
alarm
MiCOM P342, P343 Page 24/170

Datagroup
Comment
Number of Circuit Breaker Trips for
No. CB Ops Maint 07 Unsigned Integer 40159 G1 10 Setting 1 10000 1 2 * * *
maintenance alarm
No. CB Ops Lock 08 Indexed String G88 40160 G88 Alarm Disabled Setting 0 1 1 2 * * * Circuit Breaker Trips to cause lockout alarm
Number of Circuit Breaker Trips for lockout
No. CB Ops Lock 09 Unsigned Integer 40161 G1 20 Setting 1 10000 1 2 * * *
alarm
Circuit Breaker Operating Time to cause
CB Time Maint 0A Indexed String G88 40162 G88 Alarm Disabled Setting 0 1 1 2 * * *
maintenance alarm
Circuit Breaker Operating time for
CB Time Maint 0B Courier Number (Time) 40163 40164 G35 0.1 Setting 0.005 0.5 0.001 2 * * *
maintenance alarm
Circuit Breaker Operating Time to cause
CB Time Lockout 0C Indexed String G88 40165 G88 Alarm Disabled Setting 0 1 1 2 * * *
lockout alarm
Circuit Breaker Operating time for lockout
CB Time Lockout 0D Courier Number (Time) 40166 40167 G35 0.2 Setting 0.005 0.5 0.001 2 * * *
alarm
Fault Freq Lock 0E Indexed String G88 40168 G88 Alarm Disabled Setting 0 1 1 2 * * * Excessive fault frequency
Fault Freq Count 0F Unsigned Integer 40169 G1 10 Setting 1 9999 1 2 * * * Excessive Fault Frequency Counter
Fault Freq Time 10 Courier Number (Time) 40170 40171 G35 3600 Setting 0 9999 1 2 * * * Excessive Fault Frequency Time
Visible for Model Number design suffix 'B' and
OPTO CONFIG 11 00 * * *
beyond
Select Custom to select individual Opto
Global Nominal V 01 Indexed String G200 40900 G200 48-54V Setting 0 5 1 2 * * *
Threshold Voltages
Opto Input 1 02 Indexed String G201 40901 G201 48-54V Setting 0 4 1 2 * * *
Opto Input 9 0A Indexed String G201 40909 G201 48-54V Setting 0 4 1 2 * * *
Opto Input 10 0B Indexed String G201 40910 G201 48-54V Setting 0 4 1 2 * * *
Opto Input 11 0C Indexed String G201 40911 G201 48-54V Setting 0 4 1 2 * * *
Opto Input 12 0D Indexed String G201 40912 G201 48-54V Setting 0 4 1 2 * * *
Opto Input 13 0E Indexed String G201 40913 G201 48-54V Setting 0 4 1 2 * * *
Opto Input 14 0F Indexed String G201 40914 G201 48-54V Setting 0 4 1 2 * * *
MiCOM P342, P343 Page 25/170

Datagroup
Comment
Opto Input 25 1A Indexed String G201 40925 G201 48-54V Setting 0 4 1 2 *
Opto Input 26 1B Indexed String G201 40926 G201 48-54V Setting 0 4 1 2 *
Opto Input 27 1C Indexed String G201 40927 G201 48-54V Setting 0 4 1 2 *
Opto Input 28 1D Indexed String G201 40928 G201 48-54V Setting 0 4 1 2 *
Opto Input 29 1E Indexed String G201 40929 G201 48-54V Setting 0 4 1 2 *
Opto Input 30 1F Indexed String G201 40930 G201 48-54V Setting 0 4 1 2 *
Opto Input 31 20 Indexed String G201 40931 G201 48-54V Setting 0 4 1 2 *
Opto Input 32 21 Indexed String G201 40932 G201 48-54V Setting 0 4 1 2 *
CONTROL INPUTS 12 00 * * *
Ctrl I/P Status 01 Binary Flag (32 bits) G202 40950 40951 G202 Setting 2 * * *
Control Input 1 02 Indexed String G203 40952 G203 No Operation Command 0 2 1 2 * * *
Control Input 9 0A Indexed String G203 40960 G203 No Operation Command 0 2 1 2 * * *
Control Input 10 0B Indexed String G203 40961 G203 No Operation Command 0 2 1 2 * * *
Control Input 11 0C Indexed String G203 40962 G203 No Operation Command 0 2 1 2 * * *
Control Input 12 0D Indexed String G203 40963 G203 No Operation Command 0 2 1 2 * * *
Control Input 13 0E Indexed String G203 40964 G203 No Operation Command 0 2 1 2 * * *
Control Input 14 0F Indexed String G203 40965 G203 No Operation Command 0 2 1 2 * * *
Control Input 25 1A Indexed String G203 40976 G203 No Operation Command 0 2 1 2 * * *
Control Input 26 1B Indexed String G203 40977 G203 No Operation Command 0 2 1 2 * * *
Control Input 27 1C Indexed String G203 40978 G203 No Operation Command 0 2 1 2 * * *
Control Input 28 1D Indexed String G203 40979 G203 No Operation Command 0 2 1 2 * * *
Control Input 29 1E Indexed String G203 40980 G203 No Operation Command 0 2 1 2 * * *
Control Input 30 1F Indexed String G203 40981 G203 No Operation Command 0 2 1 2 * * *
GROUP 1
30 00 *
GEN DIFF
GenDiff Function 01 Indexed String G101 41000 G101 Percentage Bias Setting 0 3 1 2 *
MiCOM P342, P343 Page 26/170

Datagroup
Comment
Gen Diff Is1 02 Courier Number (Current) 41001 G2 0.1 Setting 0.05*I1 0.5*I1 0.01*I1 2 *
Gen Diff k1 03 Courier Number (Percentage) 41002 G2 0 Setting 0 20 5 2 *
Gen Diff Is2 04 Courier Number (Current) 41003 G2 1.2 Setting 1*I1 5*I1 0.1*I1 2 *
Gen Diff k2 05 Courier Number (Percentage) 41004 G2 150 Setting 20 150 10 2 *
Interturn Is_A 10 Courier Number (Current) 41005 G2 0.1 Setting 0.05*I1 2*I1 0.01*I1 2 *
Interturn Is_B 14 Courier Number (Current) 41006 G2 0.1 Setting 0.05*I1 2*I1 0.01*I1 2 *
Interturn Is_C 18 Courier Number (Current) 41007 G2 0.1 Setting 0.05*I1 2*I1 0.01*I1 2 *
Interturn Delay 1C Courier Number (Time) 41008 G2 0.1 Setting 0 100 0.01 2 *
GROUP 1
31 00 * * *
POWER
Operating Mode 20 Indexed String G115 41064 G115 Generating Setting 0 1 1 2 * * *
Power1 Function 24 Indexed String G102 41050 G102 Over Setting 0 3 1 2 *
-P>1 Setting 28 Courier Number (Power) 41051 G2 20 Setting 14*V1*I1 300*V1*I1 2*V1*I1 2 *
5 4*V1*I1 300*V1*I1 0.5*V1*I1 2 * *
P<1 Setting 2C Courier Number (Power) 41052 G2 20 Setting 14*V1*I1 300*V1*I1 2*V1*I1 2 *
10 4*V1*I1 300*V1*I1 0.5*V1*I1 2 * *
P>1 Setting 30 Courier Number (Power) 41053 G2 120 Setting 14*V1*I1 300*V1*I1 2*V1*I1 2 *
120 4*V1*I1 300*V1*I1 0.5*V1*I1 2 * *
Power1 TimeDelay 34 Courier Number (Time) 41054 G2 5 Setting 0 100 0.01 2 * * *
Power1 DO Timer 38 Courier Number (Time) 41055 G2 0 Setting 0 100 0.01 2 * * *
P1 Poledead Inh 3C Indexed String G37 41056 G37 Enabled Setting 0 1 1 2 * * *
Power2 Function 40 Indexed String G102 41057 G102 Disabled Setting 0 3 1 2 *
Low Forward * *
-P>2 Setting 44 Courier Number (Power) 41058 G2 20 Setting 14*V1*I1 300*V1*I1 2*V1*I1 2 *
5 4*V1*I1 300*V1*I1 0.5*V1*I1 2 * *
P<2 Setting 48 Courier Number (Power) 41059 G2 20 Setting 14*V1*I1 300*V1*I1 2*V1*I1 2 *
10 4*V1*I1 300*V1*I1 0.5*V1*I1 2 * *
P>2 Setting 4C Courier Number (Power) 41060 G2 120 Setting 14*V1*I1 300*V1*I1 2*V1*I1 2 *
120 4*V1*I1 300*V1*I1 0.5*V1*I1 2 * *
Power2 TimeDelay 50 Courier Number (Time) 41061 G2 2 Setting 0 100 0.01 2 * * *
P2 Poledead Inh 58 Indexed String G37 41063 G37 Enabled Setting 0 1 1 2 * * *
GROUP 1
32 00 * *
FIELD FAILURE
FFail Alm Status 01 Indexed String G37 41100 G37 Disabled Setting 0 1 1 2 * *
FFail Alm Angle 02 Courier Number (Angle) 41101 G2 15 Setting 15 75 1 2 * *
FFail Alm Delay 03 Courier Number (Time) 41102 G2 5 Setting 0 100 0.01 2 * *
FFail1 Status 04 Indexed String G37 41103 G37 Enabled Setting 0 1 1 2 * *
FFail1 -Xa1 05 Courier Number (Impedance) 41104 G2 20 Setting 0 40*V1/I1 0.5*V1/I1 2 * *
FFail1 Xb1 06 Courier Number (Impedance) 41105 G2 220 Setting 25*V1/I1 325*V1/I1 1*V1/I1 2 * *
FFail1 TimeDelay 07 Courier Number (Time) 41106 G2 5 Setting 0 100 0.01 2 * *
FFail1 DO Timer 08 Courier Number (Time) 41107 G2 0 Setting 0 100 0.01 2 * *
FFail2 Status 09 Indexed String G37 41108 G37 Disabled Setting 0 1 1 2 * *
FFail2 -Xa2 0A Courier Number (Impedance) 41109 G2 20 Setting 0 40*V1/I1 0.5*V1/I1 2 * *
FFail2 Xb2 0B Courier Number (Impedance) 41110 G2 110 Setting 25*V1/I1 325*V1/I1 1*V1/I1 2 * *
MiCOM P342, P343 Page 27/170

Datagroup
Comment
FFail2 TimeDelay 0C Courier Number (Time) 41111 G2 0 Setting 0 100 0.01 2 * *
FFail2 DO Timer 0D Courier Number (Time) 41112 G2 0 Setting 0 100 0.01 2 * *
GROUP 1 Will include NPS Overcurrent (P341) and NPS
33 00 * *
NPS THERMAL overvoltage in Phase 2.20
I2>1 Alarm 01 Indexed String G37 41150 G37 Enabled Setting 0 1 1 2 * *
I2>1 Current Set 02 Courier Number (Current) 41151 G2 0.05 Setting 0.03*I1 0.5*I1 0.01*I1 2 * *
I2>1 Time Delay 03 Courier Number (Time) 41152 G2 20s Setting 0 100 0.01 2 * *
I2>2 Trip 04 Indexed String G37 41153 G37 Enabled Setting 0 1 1 2 * *
I2>2 Current Set 05 Courier Number (Current) 41154 G2 0.1 Setting 0.05*I1 0.5*I1 0.01*I1 2 * *
I2>2 k Setting 06 Courier Number (Time) 41155 G2 15 Setting 2 40 0.1 2 * *
I2>2 kRESET 07 Courier Number (Time) 41156 G2 15 Setting 2 40 0.1 2 * *
I2>2 tMAX 08 Courier Number (Time) 41157 G2 1000 Setting 500 2000 1 2 * *
I2>2 tMIN 09 Courier Number (Time) 41158 G2 0.25 Setting 0 100 0.01 2 * *
GROUP 1
34 00 * *
SYSTEM BACKUP
Backup Function 01 Indexed String G103 41200 G103 Voltage controlled Setting 0 3 1 2 * *
Vector Rotation 02 Indexed String G104 41201 G104 None Setting 0 1 1 2 * *
V Dep OC Char 20 Indexed String G111 41202 G111 IEC S Inverse Setting 0 11 1 2 * *
V Dep OC I> Set 23 Courier Number (Current) 41203 G2 1 Setting 0.8*I1 4*I1 0.01*I1 2 * *
V Dep OC T Dial 25 Courier Number (Decimal) 41204 G2 1 Setting 0.01 100 0.01 2 * *
OC reset characteritic selection. Apply to US
V Dep OC Reset 26 Indexed String G60 41205 G60 DT Setting 0 1 1 2 * *
curves only
V Dep OC Delay 27 Courier Number (Time) 41206 G2 1 Setting 0 100 0.01 2 * * Apply to DT trip characteristic only
V Dep OC TMS 28 Courier Number (Decimal) 41207 G2 1 Setting 0.025 1.2 0.025 2 * *
V Dep OC K (RI) 29 Courier Number (Decimal) 41219 G2 1 Setting 0.1 10 0.05 2 * *
V Dep OC tRESET 2A Courier Number (Time) 41208 G2 0 Setting 0 100 0.01 2 * *
V Dep OC V<1 Set 2D Courier Number (Voltage) 41209 G2 80 Setting 5*V1 120*V1 1*V1 2 * *
V Dep OC V<2 Set 2E Courier Number (Voltage) 41210 G2 60 Setting 5*V1 120*V1 1*V1 2 * *
V Dep OC k Set 2F Courier Number (Decimal) 41211 G2 0.25 Setting 0.1 1 0.05 2 * *
Z<1 Setting 30 Courier Number (Impedance) 41212 G2 70 Setting 2*V1/I1 120*V1/I1 0.5*V1/I1 2 * *
Z<1 Time Delay 31 Courier Number (Time) 41213 G2 5 Setting 0 100 0.01 2 * *
Z<1 tRESET 32 Courier Number (Time) 41214 G2 0 Setting 0 100 0.01 2 * *
Z< Stage 2 33 Indexed String G37 41215 G37 Disabled Setting 0 1 1 2 * *
Z<2 Setting 34 Courier Number (Impedance) 41216 G2 70 Setting 2*V1/I1 120*V1/I1 0.5*V1/I1 2 * *
Z<2 Time Delay 35 Courier Number (Time) 41217 G2 5 Setting 0 100 0.01 2 * *
Z<2 tRESET 36 Courier Number (Time) 41218 G2 0 Setting 0 100 0.01 2 * *
GROUP 1
35 00 * * *
OVERCURRENT
I>1 Function 23 Indexed String G150 41250 G150 Disabled Setting 0 12 1 2 * *
IEC S Inverse *
I>1 Direction 24 Indexed String G44 41251 G44 Non-Directional Setting 0 2 1 2 *
I>1 Current Set 27 Courier Number (Current) 41252 G2 1 Setting 0.08*I1 4.0*I1 0.01*I1 2 * * * I>1 Current Setting
I>1 Time Delay 29 Courier Number (Time) 41253 G2 1 Setting 0 100 0.01 2 * * * I>1 Definite Time
I>1 TMS 2A Courier Number (Decimal) 41254 G2 1 Setting 0.025 1.2 0.025 2 * * *
I>1 Time Dial 2B Courier Number (Decimal) 41255 G2 1 Setting 0.01 100 0.01 2 * * *
MiCOM P342, P343 Page 28/170

Datagroup
Comment
I>1 K (RI) 2C Courier Number (Decimal) 41276 G2 1 Setting 0.1 10 0.05 2 * * *
I>1 Reset Char 2E Indexed String G60 41256 G60 DT Setting 0 1 1 2 * * *
I>1 tRESET 2F Courier Number (Time) 41257 G2 0 Setting 0 100 0.01 2 * * *
I>2 Function 32 Indexed String G150 41258 G150 Disabled Setting 0 12 1 2 * I>2 Overcurrent Status
G105 G105 DT 0 1 1 2 * *
I>2 Current Set 36 Courier Number (Current) 41260 G2 1 Setting 0.08*I1 4.0*I1 0.01*I1 2 *
10 0.08*I1 10.0*I1 0.01*I1 2 * *
I>2 Time Delay 38 Courier Number (Time) 41261 G2 1 Setting 0 100 0.01 2 *
I>2 TMS 39 Courier Number (Decimal) 41262 G2 1 Setting 0.025 1.2 0.025 2 *
I>2 Time Dial 3A Courier Number (Decimal) 41263 G2 1 Setting 0.01 100 0.01 2 *
I>2 K (RI) 3B Courier Number (Decimal) 41277 G2 1 Setting 0.1 10 0.05 2 *
I>2 Reset Char 3D Indexed String G60 41264 G60 DT Setting 0 1 1 2 *
I>2 tRESET 3E Courier Number (Time) 41265 G2 0 Setting 0 100 0.01 2 *
I>3 Status 40 Indexed String G37 41266 G37 Disabled Setting 0 1 1 2 *
I>3 Current Set 44 Courier Number (Current) 41268 G2 20 Setting 0.08*I1 32*I1 0.01*I1 2 *
I>3 Time Delay 45 Courier Number (Time) 41269 G2 0 Setting 0 100 0.01 2 *
I>4 Status 47 Indexed String G37 41270 G37 Disabled Setting 0 1 1 2 *
I>4 Current Set 4B Courier Number (Current) 41272 G2 20 Setting 0.08*I1 32*I1 0.01*I1 2 *
I>4 Time Delay 4C Courier Number (Time) 41273 G2 0 Setting 0 100 0.01 2 *
I> Char Angle 4E Courier Number (Angle) 41274 G2 30 Setting -95 95 1 2 * I> Characteristic Angle
I> Function Link 4F Binary Flag G14 41275 G14 15 Setting 15 4 1 2 *
GROUP 1
36 00 * * *
THERMAL OVERLOAD
Thermal 50 Indexed String G37 41308 G37 Enabled Setting 0 1 1 2 * * * Thermal overload (I2t characteristic)
Thermal I> 55 Courier Number (Current) 41309 G2 1.2 Setting 0.5*I1 2.5*I1 0.01*I1 2 * * *
Thermal Alarm 5A Courier Number (Percentage) 41310 G2 90 Setting 20 100 1 2 * * *
T-heating 5F Courier Number (Time, minutes) 41311 G2 60 Setting 1 200 1 2 * * *
T-cooling 64 Courier Number (Time, minutes) 41312 G2 60 Setting 1 200 1 2 * * *
M Factor 69 Courier Number (Decimal) 41313 G2 0 Setting 0 10 1 2 * * *
GROUP 1
37 00
Not Used
GROUP 1
38 00 * * *
EARTH FAULT
IN Input 01 Indexed String G49 G49 Derived Data *
IN>1 Function 25 Indexed String G151 41400 G151 IEC S Inverse Setting 0 12 1 2 * * *
IN>1 Direction 26 Indexed String G44 41401 G44 Non-Directional Setting 0 2 1 2 *
IN>1 Current 29 Courier Number (Current) 41402 G2 0.2 Setting 0.08*I1 4.0*I1 0.01*I1 2 *
0.1 0.02*I2 4.0*I2 0.01*I2 * * Change scaling factor for Models 2 & 3
IN>1 IDG Is 2A Courier Number (Decimal) 41431 G2 1.5 Setting 1 4 0.1 2 * * *
IN>1 Time Delay 2C Courier Number (Time) 41403 G2 1 Setting 0 200 0.01 2 * * * I>1 Definite Time
IN>1 TMS 2D Courier Number (Decimal) 41404 G2 1 Setting 0.025 1.2 0.025 2 * * *
MiCOM P342, P343 Page 29/170

Datagroup
Comment
IN>1 Time Dial 2E Courier Number (Decimal) 41405 G2 1 Setting 0.01 100 0.01 2 * * *
IN>1 K (RI) 2F Courier Number (Decimal) 41432 G2 1 Setting 0.1 10 0.05 2 * * *
IN>1 IDG Time 30 Courier Number (Decimal) 41433 G2 1.2 Setting 1 2 0.01 2 * * *
IN>1 Reset Char 32 Indexed String G60 41406 G60 DT Setting 0 1 1 2 * * *
IN>1 tRESET 33 Courier Number (Time) 41407 G2 0 Setting 0 100 0.01 2 * * *
IN>2 Function 36 Indexed String G151 41408 G151 Disabled Setting 0 12 1 2 *
G105 G105 Disabled 1 1 1 2 * *
IN>2 Current 3A Courier Number (Current) 41410 G2 0.2 Setting 0.08*I1 4.0*I1 0.01*I1 2 *
0.45 0.02*I2 10.0*I2 0.01*I2 * * Change scaling factor for Models 2 & 3
IN>2 IDG Is 3B Courier Number (Decimal) 41434 G2 1.5 Setting 1 4 0.1 2 *
IN>2 Time Delay 3D Courier Number (Time) 41411 G2 1 Setting 0 200 0.01 2 *
0 * *
IN>2 TMS 3E Courier Number (Decimal) 41412 G2 1 Setting 0.025 1.2 0.025 2 *
IN>2 Time Dial 3F Courier Number (Decimal) 41413 G2 1 Setting 0.01 100 0.01 2 *
IN>2 K (RI) 40 Courier Number (Decimal) 41435 G2 1 Setting 0.1 10 0.05 2 *
IN>2 IDG Time 41 Courier Number (Time) 41436 G2 1.2 Setting 1 2 0.01 2 *
IN>2 Reset Char 43 Indexed String G60 41414 G60 DT Setting 0 1 1 2 *
IN>2 tRESET 44 Courier Number (Time) 41415 G2 0 Setting 0 100 0.01 2 *
IN>3 Status 46 Indexed String G37 41416 G37 Disabled Setting 0 1 1 2 *
IN>3 Current 4A Courier Number (Current) 41418 G2 0.5 Setting 0.08*I1 32*I1 0.01*I1 2 *
IN>3 Time Delay 4B Courier Number (Time) 41419 G2 0 Setting 0 200 0.01 2 *
IN>4 Status 4D Indexed String G37 41420 G37 Disabled Setting 0 1 1 2 *
IN>4 Direction 4E Indexed String G44 41421 G44 Non-Directional Setting 0 2 1 2 *
IN>4 Current 51 Courier Number (Current) 41422 G2 0.5 Setting 0.08*I1 32*I1 0.01*I1 2 *
IN>4 Time Delay 52 Courier Number (Time) 41423 G2 0 Setting 0 200 0.01 2 *
IN> Func Link 54 Binary Flags G63 41424 G63 15 Setting 15 4 1 2 *
IN> DIRECTIONAL 55 (Sub Heading) 2 *
IN> Char Angle 56 Courier Number(Angle) 41425 G2 -60 Setting -95 95 1 2 *
IN> Pol 57 Indexed String G46 41426 G46 Zero Sequence Setting 0 1 1 2 *
IN> VNpol Input 58 Indexed String G49 41427 G49 Measured Setting 0 1 1 2 *
IN> VNpol Set 59 Courier Number (Voltage) 41428 G2 5 Setting 0.5*V1 80*V1 0.5*V1 2 * IN> V0 Polarising Setting
0.5*V3 80*V3 0.5*V3 Change scaling factor
IN> V2pol Set 5A Courier Number (Voltage) 41429 G2 5 Setting 0.5*V1 25*V1 0.5*V1 2 * IN> V2 Polarising Setting
IN> I2pol Set 5B Courier Number (Current) 41430 G2 0.08 Setting 0.08*I1 1*I1 0.01*I1 2 *
GROUP 1
39 00
Not Used
GROUP 1
3A 00 * * *
SEF/REF PROT'N
SEF/REF Options 01 Indexed String G58 41500 G58 SEF Setting 0 4 1 2 * Protection Options
0 7 1 2 * *
ISEF>1 Function 2A Indexed String G152 41501 G152 DT Setting 0 11 1 2 *
G105 G105 0 1 1 * *
ISEF>1 Direction 2B Indexed String G44 41502 G44 Non-Directional Setting 0 2 1 2 * * * ISEF>1 Directionality
ISEF>1 Current 2E Courier Number (Current) 41503 G2 0.05 Setting 0.005*I3 0.1*I3 0.00025*I3 2 * * * ISEF>1 Current Setting
MiCOM P342, P343 Page 30/170

Datagroup
Comment
ISEF>1 IDG Is 2F Courier Number (Decimal) 41535 G2 1.5 Setting 1 4 0.1 2 *
ISEF>1 Delay 31 Courier Number (Time) 41504 G2 1 Setting 0 200 0.01 2 * * * ISEF>1 Definite Time
ISEF>1 TMS 32 Courier Number (Decimal) 41505 G2 1 Setting 0.025 1.2 0.025 2 *
ISEF>1 Time Dial 33 Courier Number (Decimal) 41506 G2 1 Setting 0.01 100 0.01 2 *
ISEF>1 IDG Time 34 Courier Number (Time) 41536 G2 1.2 Setting 1 2 0.01 2 *
ISEF>1 Reset Chr 36 Indexed String G60 41507 G60 DT Setting 0 1 1 2 *
ISEF>1 tRESET 37 Courier Number (Time) 41508 G2 0 Setting 0 100 0.01 2 *
ISEF>2 Function 3A Indexed String G152 41509 G152 Disabled Setting 0 11 1 2 *
ISEF>2 Direction 3B Indexed String G44 41510 G44 Non-Directional Setting 0 2 1 2 *
ISEF>2 Current 3E Courier Number (Current) 41511 G2 0.05 Setting 0.005*I3 0.1*I3 0.00025*I3 2 *
ISEF>2 IDG Is 3F Courier Number (Decimal) 41537 G2 1.5 Setting 1 4 0.1 2 *
ISEF>2 Delay 41 Courier Number (Time) 41512 G2 1 Setting 0 200 0.01 2 *
ISEF>2 TMS 42 Courier Number (Decimal) 41513 G2 1 Setting 0.025 1.2 0.025 2 *
ISEF>2 Time Dial 43 Courier Number (Decimal) 41514 G2 1 Setting 0.01 100 0.01 2 *
ISEF>2 IDG Time 44 Courier Number (Time) 41538 G2 1.2 Setting 1 2 0.01 2 *
ISEF>2 Reset Chr 46 Indexed String G60 41515 G60 DT Setting 0 1 1 2 *
ISEF>2 tRESET 47 Courier Number (Time) 41516 G2 0 Setting 0 100 0.01 2 *
ISEF>3 Status 49 Indexed String G37 41517 G37 Disabled Setting 0 1 1 2 *
ISEF>3 Direction 4A Indexed String G44 41518 G44 Non-Directional Setting 0 2 1 2 * ISEF>3 Directionality
ISEF>3 Current 4D Courier Number (Current) 41519 G2 0.4 Setting 0.005*I3 0.80*I3 0.001*I3 2 * ISEF>3 Current Setting
ISEF>3 Delay 4E Courier Number (Time) 41520 G2 0.5 Setting 0 200 0.01 2 * ISEF>3 Definite Time
ISEF>4 Status 50 Indexed String G37 41521 G37 Disabled Setting 0 1 1 2 *
ISEF>4 Direction 51 Indexed String G44 41522 G44 Non-Directional Setting 0 2 1 2 * ISEF>4 Directionality
ISEF>4 Current 54 Courier Number (Current) 41523 G2 0.6 Setting 0.005*I3 0.80*I3 0.001*I3 2 * ISEF>4 Current Setting
ISEF>4 Delay 55 Courier Number (Time) 41524 G2 0.25 Setting 0 200 0.01 2 * ISEF>4 Definite Time
ISEF> Func Link 57 Binary Flags G64 41525 G64 15 Setting 15 4 1 2 *
ISEF DIRECTIONAL 58 (Sub Heading) 2 * * *
ISEF> Char Angle 59 Courier Number(Angle) 41526 G2 90 Setting -95 95 1 2 * * *
ISEF>VNpol Input 5A Indexed String G49 41527 G49 Measured Setting 0 1 1 2 * * *
ISEF> VNpol Set 5B Courier Number (Voltage) 41528 G2 5 Setting 0.5*V1 80*V1 0.5*V1 2 * * * V3 applied when 3A5A=0, V1 applied when
0.5*V3 80*V3 0.5*V3 * * * 3A5A=1
WATTMETRIC SEF 5D (Sub Heading) * * *
PN> Setting 5E Courier Number (Power) 41529 G2 9 Setting 0.0*V1*I3 20*V1*I3 0.05*V1*I3 2 * * * V3 applied when 3A5A=0, V1 applied when
0.0*V3*I3 20*V3*I3 0.05*V3*I3 * * * 3A5A=1
RESTRICTED E/F 60 (Sub Heading) * * * Restricted Earth Fault
IREF> k1 61 Courier Number (Percentage) 41530 G2 20 Setting 0 20 1 2 * * REF K1, applied to L Impedance
IREF> k2 62 Courier Number (Percentage) 41531 G2 150 Setting 0 150 1 2 * * REF K2, applied to L impedance
IREF> Is1 63 Courier Number (Current) 41532 G2 0.2 Setting 0.05*I1 1.0*I1 0.01*I1 2 * * REF Is1, applied to L impedance
IREF> Is2 64 Courier Number (Current) 41533 G2 1 Setting 0.1*I1 1.5*I1 0.01*I1 2 * * REF Is2, applied to L impedance
IREF> Is 65 Courier Number (Current) 41534 G2 0.2 Setting 0.05*I3 1.0*I3 0.01*I3 2 * * * REF Is, applied to H impedance
GROUP 1
3B 00 * * *
RESIDUAL O/V NVD
VN Input 01 Indexed String G49 41550 G49 Measured Setting 0 1 1 2 * * *
VN>1 Function 02 Indexed String G23 41551 G23 DT Setting 0 2 1 2 * * *
MiCOM P342, P343 Page 31/170

Datagroup
Comment
VN>1 Voltage Set 03 Courier Number (Voltage) 41552 G2 5 Setting 1*V1 50*V1 1*V1 2 * * *
1*V3 50*V3 1*V3 Change scaling factor
VN>1 Time Delay 04 Courier Number (Time) 41553 G2 5 Setting 0 100 0.01 2 * * *
VN>1 TMS 05 Courier Number (Decimal) 41554 G2 1 Setting 0.5 100 0.5 2 * * *
VN>1 tReset 06 Courier Number (Time) 41555 G2 0 Setting 0 100 0.01 2 * * *
VN>2 Status 07 Indexed String G37 41556 G37 Disabled Setting 0 1 1 2 * * *
VN>2 Voltage Set 08 Courier Number (Voltage) 41557 G2 10 Setting 1*V1 50*V1 1*V1 2 * * *
1*V3 50*V3 1*V3 Change scaling factor
VN>2 Time Delay 09 Courier Number (Time) 41558 G2 10 Setting 0 100 0.01 2 * * *
GROUP 1
3C 00 *
100% STATOR EF
100%St EF Status 01 Indexed String G112 41600 G112 1 (Undervoltage) Setting 0 2 1 2 *
100% St EF VN3H< 02 Courier Number (Voltage) 41601 G2 1 Setting 0.3*V3 20*V3 0.1*V3 2 *
VN3H< Delay 03 Courier Number (Time) 41602 G2 5 Setting 0 100 0.01 2 *
V<Inhibit set 04 Courier Number (Voltage) 41603 G2 80 Setting 30*V1 120*V1 1*V1 2 *
P< Inhibit 05 Indexed String G37 41604 G37 Disabled Setting 0 1 1 2 *
P<Inhibit set 06 Courier Number (Power) 41605 G2 4 Setting 4*V1*I1 200*V1*I1 0.5*V1*I1 2 *
Q< Inhibit 07 Indexed String G37 41606 G37 Disabled Setting 0 1 1 2 *
Q<Inhibit set 08 Courier Number (VAr) 41607 G2 4 Setting 4*V1*I1 200*V1*I1 0.5*V1*I1 2 *
S< Inhibit 09 Indexed String G37 41608 G37 Disabled Setting 0 1 1 2 *
S<Inhibit set 0A Courier Number (VA) 41609 G2 4 Setting 4*V1*I1 200*V1*I1 0.5*V1*I1 2 *
100% St EF VN3H> 0B Courier Number (Voltage) 41610 G2 1 Setting 0.3*V3 20*V3 0.1*V3 2 *
VN3H> Delay 0C Courier Number (Time) 41611 G2 5 Setting 0 100 0.01 2 *
GROUP 1
3D 00 * *
VOLTS/HZ
V/Hz Alm Status 01 Indexed String G37 41650 G37 Enabled Setting 0 1 1 2 * *
V/Hz Alarm Set 02 Courier Number (Volts/Hz) 41651 G2 2.31 Setting 1.5*V1 3.5*V1 0.01*V1 2 * *
V/Hz Alarm Delay 03 Courier Number (Time) 41652 G2 10 Setting 0 100 0.01 2 * *
V/Hz Trip Func 04 Indexed String G23 41653 G23 DT Setting 0 2 1 2 * *
V/Hz Trip Set 05 Courier Number (Volts/Hz) 41654 G2 2.42 Setting 1.5*V1 3.5*V1 0.01*V1 2 * *
V/Hz Trip TMS 06 Courier Number (Decimal) 41655 G2 1 Setting 1 63 1 2 * *
V/Hz Trip Delay 07 Courier Number (Time) 41656 G2 1 Setting 0 100 0.01 2 * *
GROUP 1
3E 00 *
DF/DT
df/dt Status 01 Indexed String G37 41700 G37 Enabled Setting 0 1 1 2 *
df/dt Setting 02 Courier Number (Hz/s) 41701 G2 0.2 Setting 0.1 10 0.01 2 *
df/dt Time Delay 03 Courier Number (Time) 41702 G2 0.5 Setting 0 100 0.01 2 *
df/dt f Low 04 Courier Number (Frequency) 41703 G2 49.5 Setting 45 65 0.01 2 *
df/dt f High 05 Courier Number (Frequency) 41704 G2 50.5 Setting 45 65 0.01 2 *
GROUP 1
3F 00 *
V VECTOR SHIFT
V Shift Status 01 Indexed String G37 41750 G37 Enabled Setting 0 1 1 2 *
MiCOM P342, P343 Page 32/170

Datagroup
Comment
V Shift Angle 02 Courier Number (Angle) 41751 G2 10 Setting 2 30 1 2 *
GROUP 1
40 00 *
DEAD MACHINE
Dead Mach Status 01 Indexed String G37 41800 G37 Disabled Setting 0 1 1 2 *
Dead Mach I> 02 Courier Number (Current) 41801 G2 0.1 Setting 0.08*I1 4*I1 0.01*I1 2 *
Dead Mach V< 03 Courier Number (Voltage) 41802 G2 80 Setting 10*V1 120*V1 1*V1 2 *
Dead Mach tPU 04 Courier Number (Time) 41803 G2 5 Setting 0 10 0.1 2 *
Dead Mach tDO 05 Courier Number (Time) 41804 G2 0.5 Setting 0 10 0.1 2 *
GROUP 1
41 00 *
RECONNECT DELAY
Reconnect Status 01 Indexed String G37 41850 G37 Enabled Setting 0 1 1 2 *
Reconnect Delay 02 Courier Number (Time) 41852 G2 60 Setting 0 300 0.01 2 *
Reconnect tPULSE 03 Courier Number (Time) 41853 G2 1 Setting 0.01 30 0.01 2 *
Modbus addresses 41900-41931 assigned for
CLIO labels
GROUP 1
42 00 * * *
VOLT PROTECTION
UNDER VOLTAGE 01 (Sub Heading) * * *
V< Measur't Mode 02 Indexed String G47 41950 G47 Phase-Neutral Setting 0 1 1 2 * * *
V< Operate Mode 03 Indexed String G48 41951 G48 Any Phase Setting 0 1 1 2 * * *
V<1 Function 04 Indexed String G23 41952 G23 DT Setting 0 2 1 2 * * *
V<1 Voltage Set 05 Courier Number (Voltage) 41953 G2 50 Setting 10*V1 120*V1 1*V1 2 * * * Range covers Ph-N & Ph-Ph
V<1 Time Delay 06 Courier Number (Time) 41954 G2 10 Setting 0 100 0.01 2 * * *
V<1 TMS 07 Courier Number (Decimal) 41955 G2 1 Setting 0.5 100 0.5 2 * * *
V<1 Poledead Inh 08 Indexed String G37 41956 G37 Enabled Setting 0 1 1 2 * * *
V<2 Status 09 Indexed String G37 41957 G37 Disabled Setting 0 1 1 2 * * *
V<2 Voltage Set 0A Courier Number (Voltage) 41958 G2 38 Setting 10*V1 120*V1 1*V1 2 * * * Range covers Ph-N & Ph-Ph
V<2 Time Delay 0B Courier Number (Time) 41959 G2 5 Setting 0 100 0.01 2 * * *
V<2 Poledead Inh 0C Indexed String G37 41960 G37 Enabled Setting 0 1 1 2 * * *
OVERVOLTAGE 0D (Sub Heading) * * *
V> Measur't Mode 0E Indexed String G47 41961 G47 Phase-Phase Setting 0 1 1 2 * * *
V> Operate Mode 0F Indexed String G48 41962 G48 Any Phase Setting 0 1 1 2 * * *
V>1 Function 10 Indexed String G23 41963 G23 DT Setting 0 2 1 2 * * *
V>1 Voltage Set 11 Courier Number (Voltage) 41964 G2 130 Setting 60*V1 185*V1 1*V1 2 * * *
V>1 Time Delay 12 Courier Number (Time) 41965 G2 10 Setting 0 100 0.01 2 * * *
V>1 TMS 13 Courier Number (Decimal) 41966 G2 1 Setting 0.5 100 0.5 2 * * *
V>2 Status 14 Indexed String G37 41967 G37 Disabled Setting 0 1 1 2 * * *
V>2 Voltage Set 15 Courier Number (Voltage) 41968 G2 150 Setting 60*V1 185*V1 1*V1 2 * * *
V>2 Time Delay 16 Courier Number (Time) 41969 G2 0.5 Setting 0 100 0.01 2 * * *
GROUP 1
43 00 * * *
FREQ PROTECTION
UNDER FREQUENCY 01 (Sub Heading) * * *
F<1 Status 02 Indexed String G37 42000 G37 Enabled Setting 0 1 1 2 * * *
F<1 Setting 03 Courier Number (Frequency) 42001 G2 49.5 Setting 45 65 0.01 2 * * *
F<1 Time Delay 04 Courier Number (Time) 42002 G2 4 Setting 0 100 0.01 2 * * *
F<2 Status 05 Indexed String G37 42003 G37 Disabled Setting 0 1 1 2 * * *
MiCOM P342, P343 Page 33/170

Datagroup
Comment
F<2 Setting 06 Courier Number (Frequency) 42004 G2 49 Setting 45 65 0.01 2 * * *
F<2 Time Delay 07 Courier Number (Time) 42005 G2 3 Setting 0 100 0.01 2 * * *
F<3 Status 08 Indexed String G37 42006 G37 Disabled Setting 0 1 1 2 * * *
F<3 Setting 09 Courier Number (Frequency) 42007 G2 48.5 Setting 45 65 0.01 2 * * *
F<3 Time Delay 0A Courier Number (Time) 42008 G2 2 Setting 0 100 0.01 2 * * *
F<4 Status 0B Indexed String G37 42009 G37 Disabled Setting 0 1 1 2 * * *
F<4 Setting 0C Courier Number (Frequency) 42010 G2 48 Setting 45 65 0.01 2 * * *
F<4 Time Delay 0D Courier Number (Time) 42011 G2 1 Setting 0 100 0.01 2 * * *
F< Function Link 0E Binary Flag (4 bits) G65 42012 G65 16 Setting 15 4 1 2 * * *
OVER FREQUENCY 0F (Sub Heading) * * *
F>1 Status 10 Indexed String G37 42013 G37 Enabled Setting 0 1 1 2 * * *
F>1 Setting 11 Courier Number (Frequency) 42014 G2 50.5 Setting 45 68 0.01 2 * * *
F>1 Time Delay 12 Courier Number (Time) 42015 G2 2 Setting 0 100 0.01 2 * * *
F>2 Status 13 Indexed String G37 42016 G37 Disabled Setting 0 1 1 2 * * *
F>2 Setting 14 Courier Number (Frequency) 42017 G2 51 Setting 45 68 0.01 2 * * *
F>2 Time Delay 15 Courier Number (Time) 42018 G2 1 Setting 0 100 0.01 2 * * *
GROUP 1
44 00 * *
RTD PROTECTION
Select RTD 01 Binary Flags(10 bits)Indexed String G50 42053 G50 0 Setting 1023 10 1 2 * *
RTD 1 Alarm Set 02 Courier Number (Temperature) 42054 G1 80 Setting 0 200 1 2 * *
RTD 1 Alarm Dly 03 Courier Number (Time) 42055 G1 10 Setting 0 100 1 2 * *
RTD 1 Trip Set 04 Courier Number (Temperature) 42056 G1 85 Setting 0 200 1 2 * *
RTD 1 Trip Dly 05 Courier Number (Time) 42057 G1 1 Setting 0 100 1 2 * *
RTD 3 Alarm Set 0A Courier Number (Temperature) 42062 G1 80 Setting 0 200 1 2 * *
RTD 3 Alarm Dly 0B Courier Number (Time) 42063 G1 10 Setting 0 100 1 2 * *
RTD 3 Trip Set 0C Courier Number (Temperature) 42064 G1 85 Setting 0 200 1 2 * *
RTD 3 Trip Dly 0D Courier Number (Time) 42065 G1 1 Setting 0 100 1 2 * *
RTD 4 Alarm Set 0E Courier Number (Temperature) 42066 G1 80 Setting 0 200 1 2 * *
RTD 4 Alarm Dly 0F Courier Number (Time) 42067 G1 10 Setting 0 100 1 2 * *
RTD 7 Alarm Set 1A Courier Number (Temperature) 42078 G1 80 Setting 0 200 1 2 * *
RTD 7 Alarm Dly 1B Courier Number (Time) 42079 G1 10 Setting 0 100 1 2 * *
RTD 7 Trip Set 1C Courier Number (Temperature) 42080 G1 85 Setting 0 200 1 2 * *
MiCOM P342, P343 Page 34/170

Datagroup
Comment
RTD 7 Trip Dly 1D Courier Number (Time) 42081 G1 1 Setting 0 100 1 2 * *
RTD 8 Alarm Set 1E Courier Number (Temperature) 42082 G1 80 Setting 0 200 1 2 * *
RTD 8 Alarm Dly 1F Courier Number (Time) 42083 G1 10 Setting 0 100 1 2 * *
GROUP 1
45 00 * * *
CB FAIL & I<
BREAKER FAIL 01 (Sub Heading) * * *
CB Fail 1 Status 02 Indexed String G37 42100 G37 Enabled Setting 0 1 1 2 * * *
CB Fail 1 Timer 03 Courier Number (Time) 42101 G2 0.2 Setting 0 10 0.01 2 * * *
CB Fail 2 Status 04 Indexed String G37 42102 G37 Disabled Setting 0 1 1 2 * * *
CB Fail 2 Timer 05 Courier Number (Time) 42103 G2 0.4 Setting 0 10 0.01 2 * * *
CBF Non I Reset 06 Indexed String G68 42104 G68 CB Open & I< Setting 0 2 1 2 * * *
CBF Ext Reset 07 Indexed String G68 42105 G68 CB Open & I< Setting 0 2 1 2 * * *
UNDER CURRENT 08 (Sub Heading) * * *
I< Current Set 09 Courier Number (Current) 42106 G2 0.1 Setting 0.02*I1 3.2*I1 0.01*I1 2 * * *
IN< Current Set 0A Courier Number (Current) 42107 G2 0.1 Setting 0.02*I2 3.2*I2 0.01*I2 2 * * P341 does not have IN input
ISEF< Current 0B Courier Number (Current) 42108 G2 0.02 Setting 0.001*I3 0.8*I3 0.0005*I3 2 * * *
BLOCKED O/C 0C (Sub Heading) * Blocked Overcurrent Schemes
Remove I> Start 0D Indexed String G37 42109 G37 Disabled Setting 0 1 1 2 *
Remove IN> Start 0E Indexed String G37 42110 G37 Disabled Setting 0 1 1 2 *
I< Current Input 15 Indexed String G116 42111 G116 IA-1, IB-1, IC-1 Setting 0 1 1 2 *
GROUP 1
46 00 * * *
SUPERVISION
VT SUPERVISION 01 (Sub Heading) * * *
VTS Status 02 Indexed String G7 42150 G7 Blocking Setting 0 1 1 2 * * *
VTS Reset Mode 03 Indexed String G69 42151 G69 Manual Setting 0 1 1 2 * * *
VTS Time Delay 04 Courier Number (Time) 42152 G2 5 Setting 1 10 0.1 2 * * *
VTS I> Inhibit 05 Courier Number (Current) 42153 G2 10 Setting 0.08*I1 32*I1 0.01*I1 2 * * *
VTS I2> Inhibit 06 Courier Number (Current) 42154 G2 0.05 Setting 0.05*I1 0.5*I1 0.01*I1 2 * * *
CT SUPERVISION 07 (Sub Heading) * * *
CTS Status 08 Indexed String G37 42155 G37 Disabled Setting 0 1 1 2 * * *
CTS VN Input 09 Indexed String G49 42156 G49 Derived Setting 0 1 1 2 * * *
CTS VN< Inhibit 0A Courier Number (Voltage) 42157 G2 5 Setting 0.5*V1 22*V1 0.5*V1 2 * * *
0.5*V3 22*V3 0.5*V3 Change scaling factor
CTS IN> Set 0B Courier Number (Current) 42158 G2 0.2 Setting 0.08*I1 4*I1 0.01*I1 2 * * *
MiCOM P342, P343 Page 35/170

Datagroup
Comment
CTS Time Delay 0C Courier Number (Time) 42159 G2 5 Setting 0 10 1 2 * * *
GROUP 1
47 00 * * *
SENSITIVE POWER
Comp Angle 20 Courier Number (Angle) 42175 G2 0 Setting -5 5 0.1 2 * * *
Operating Mode 24 Indexed String G115 42190 G115 Generating Setting 0 1 1 2 * * *
Sen Power1 Func 28 Indexed String G102 42176 G102 Reverse Setting 0 3 1 2 * * *
Sen -P>1 Setting 2C Courier Number (Power) 42177 G2 0.5*V1*I3 Setting 0.3*V1*I3 100*V1*I3 0.1*V1*I3 2 * * *
Sen P<1 Setting 30 Courier Number (Power) 42178 G2 0.5*V1*I3 Setting 0.3*V1*I3 100*V1*I3 0.1*V1*I3 2 * * *
Sen P>1 Setting 34 Courier Number (Power) 42179 G2 50*V1*I3 Setting 0.3*V1*I3 100*V1*I3 0.1*V1*I3 2 * * *
Sen Power1 Delay 38 Courier Number (Time) 42180 G2 5 Setting 0 100 0.01 2 * * *
Power1 DO Timer 3C Courier Number (Time) 42181 G2 0 Setting 0 100 0.01 2 * * *
P1 PoleDead Inh 40 Indexed String G37 42182 G37 Enabled Setting 0 1 1 2 * * *
Sen Power2 Func 44 Indexed String G102 42183 G102 Low Forward Setting 0 3 1 2 * * *
Sen -P>2 Setting 48 Courier Number (Power) 42184 G2 0.5*V1*I3 Setting 0.3*V1*I3 100*V1*I3 0.1*V1*I3 2 * * *
Sen P<2 Setting 4C Courier Number (Power) 42185 G2 0.5*V1*I3 Setting 0.3*V1*I3 100*V1*I3 0.1*V1*I3 2 * * *
Sen P>2 Setting 50 Courier Number (Power) 42186 G2 50*V1*I3 Setting 0.3*V1*I3 100*V1*I3 0.1*V1*I3 2 * * *
Sen Power2 Delay 54 Courier Number (Time) 42187 G2 2 Setting 0 100 0.01 2 * * *
P2 PoleDead Inh 5C Indexed String G37 42189 G37 Enabled Setting 0 1 1 2 * * *
GROUP 1
48 00
NOT USED
GROUP 1
49 00 *
POLE SLIPPING
PSlip Function 01 Indexed String G37 42250 G37 Enabled Setting 0 1 1 2 *
Z Based PoleSlip 02 (Sub Heading) *
Pole Slip Mode 03 Indexed String G113 42251 G113 Generating Setting 0 2 1 2 *
PSlip Za Forward 04 Courier Number (Impedance) 42252 G2 100*V1/I1 Setting 0.5*V1/I1 350*V1/I1 0.5*V1/I1 2 *
PSlip Zb Reverse 05 Courier Number (Impedance) 42253 G2 150*V1/I1 Setting 0.5*V1/I1 350*V1/I1 0.5*V1/I1 2 *
Lens Angle 06 Courier Number (Angle) 42254 G2 120 Setting 90 150 1 2 *
PSlip Timer T1 07 Courier Number (Time) 42255 G2 0.015 Setting 0 1 0.005 2 *
PSlip Timer T2 08 Courier Number (Time) 42256 G2 0.015 Setting 0 1 0.005 2 *
Blinder Angle 09 Courier Number (Angle) 42257 G2 75 Setting 20 90 1 2 *
PSlip Zc 0A Courier Number (Impedance) 42258 G2 50*V1/I1 Setting 0.5*V1/I1 350*V1/I1 0.5*V1/I1 2 *
Zone1 Slip Count 0B Unsigned Integer 42259 G1 1 Setting 1 20 1 2 *
Zone2 Slip Count 0C Unsigned Integer 42260 G1 2 Setting 1 20 1 2 *
PSlip Reset Time 0D Courier Number (Time) 42261 G2 30 Setting 0 100 0.01 2 *
GROUP 1
4A 00 * * *
INPUT LABELS
Opto Input 1 01 ASCII Text (16 chars) 42300 42307 G3 L1 Setting Group Setting 32 163 1 2 * * *
Opto Input 2 02 ASCII Text (16 chars) 42308 42315 G3 L2 Setting Group Setting 32 163 1 2 * * *
Opto Input 3 03 ASCII Text (16 chars) 42316 42323 G3 L3 Block IN>3&4 Setting 32 163 1 2 *
L3 Block IN>2 * *
Opto Input 4 04 ASCII Text (16 chars) 42324 42331 G3 L4 Block I>3&4 Setting 32 163 1 2 *
L4 Block I>2 * *
Opto Input 5 05 ASCII Text (16 chars) 42332 42339 G3 L5 Reset Setting 32 163 1 2 * * *
Opto Input 6 06 ASCII Text (16 chars) 42340 42347 G3 L6 Ext Prot Trip Setting 32 163 1 2 * * *
MiCOM P342, P343 Page 36/170

Datagroup
Comment
Opto Input 7 07 ASCII Text (16 chars) 42348 42355 G3 L7 52a Setting 32 163 1 2 * * *
Opto Input 8 08 ASCII Text (16 chars) 42356 42363 G3 L8 52b Setting 32 163 1 2 * * *
Opto Input 9 09 ASCII Text (16 chars) 42364 42371 G3 L9 Not Used Setting 32 163 1 2 * * *
Opto Input 10 0A ASCII Text (16 chars) 42372 42379 G3 L10 Not Used Setting 32 163 1 2 * * *
Opto Input 11 0B ASCII Text (16 chars) 42380 42387 G3 L11 Not Used Setting 32 163 1 2 * * *
Opto Input 12 0C ASCII Text (16 chars) 42388 42395 G3 L12 Not Used Setting 32 163 1 2 * * *
Opto Input 13 0D ASCII Text (16 chars) 42396 42403 G3 L13 Not Used Setting 32 163 1 2 * * *
Opto Input 14 0E ASCII Text (16 chars) 42404 42411 G3 L14 Not Used Setting 32 163 1 2 * * *
Opto Input 15 0F ASCII Text (16 chars) 42412 42419 G3 L15 Not Used Setting 32 163 1 2 * * *
Opto Input 25 19 ASCII Text (16 chars) 42492 42499 G3 L25 Not Used Setting 32 163 1 2 *
Opto Input 26 1A ASCII Text (16 chars) 42500 42507 G3 L26 Not Used Setting 32 163 1 2 *
Opto Input 27 1B ASCII Text (16 chars) 42508 42515 G3 L27 Not Used Setting 32 163 1 2 *
Opto Input 28 1C ASCII Text (16 chars) 42516 42523 G3 L28 Not Used Setting 32 163 1 2 *
Opto Input 29 1D ASCII Text (16 chars) 42524 42531 G3 L29 Not Used Setting 32 163 1 2 *
Opto Input 30 1E ASCII Text (16 chars) 42532 42539 G3 L30 Not Used Setting 32 163 1 2 *
Opto Input 31 1F ASCII Text (16 chars) 42540 42547 G3 L31 Not Used Setting 32 163 1 2 *
Opto Input 32 20 ASCII Text (16 chars) 42548 42555 G3 L32 Not Used Setting 32 163 1 2 *
GROUP 1
4B 00 * * *
OUTPUT LABELS
Relay 1 01 ASCII Text (16 chars) 42556 42563 G3 R1 IN>1 Start Setting 32 163 1 2 * * *
R1 Trip CB
Relay 2 02 ASCII Text (16 chars) 42564 42571 G3 R2 I>1 Start Setting 32 163 1 2 * * *
R2 Trip PrimeMov
Relay 3 03 ASCII Text (16 chars) 42572 42579 G3 R3 Any Trip Setting 32 163 1 2 * * *
Relay 4 04 ASCII Text (16 chars) 42580 42587 G3 R4 General Alarm Setting 32 163 1 2 * * *
Relay 5 05 ASCII Text (16 chars) 42588 42595 G3 R5 CB Fail Setting 32 163 1 2 * * *
Relay 6 06 ASCII Text (16 chars) 42596 42603 G3 R6 Control Close Setting 32 163 1 2 *
R6 E/F Trip * *
Relay 7 07 ASCII Text (16 chars) 42604 42611 G3 R7 Control Trip Setting 32 163 1 2 *
R7 V or F Trip *
R7 Volt Trip *
Relay 8 08 ASCII Text (16 chars) 42612 42619 G3 R8 Not Used Setting 32 163 1 2 * *
R8 Freq Trip *
Relay 9 09 ASCII Text (16 chars) 42620 42627 G3 R9 Not Used Setting 32 163 1 2 * *
R9 Diff Trip *
Relay 10 0A ASCII Text (16 chars) 42628 42635 G3 R10 Not Used Setting 32 163 1 2 * *
R10 SysBack Trip *
MiCOM P342, P343 Page 37/170

Datagroup
Comment
Relay 11 0B ASCII Text (16 chars) 42636 42643 G3 R11 Not Used Setting 32 163 1 2 * *
R11 NPS Trip *
Relay 12 0C ASCII Text (16 chars) 42644 42651 G3 R12 Not Used Setting 32 163 1 2 * *
R12 Ffail Trip *
Relay 13 0D ASCII Text (16 chars) 42652 42659 G3 R13 Not Used Setting 32 163 1 2 * *
R13 Power Trip *
Relay 14 0E ASCII Text (16 chars) 42660 42667 G3 R14 Not Used Setting 32 163 1 2 * *
R14 V/Hz Trip *
Relay 15 0F ASCII Text (16 chars) 42668 42675 G3 R15 Not Used Setting 32 163 1 2 * * *
Relay 16 10 ASCII Text (16 chars) 42676 42683 G3 R16 Not Used Setting 32 163 1 2 * * *
Relay 25 19 ASCII Text (16 chars) 42748 42755 G3 R25 Not Used Setting 32 163 1 2 *
Relay 26 1A ASCII Text (16 chars) 42756 42763 G3 R26 Not Used Setting 32 163 1 2 *
Relay 27 1B ASCII Text (16 chars) 42764 42771 G3 R27 Not Used Setting 32 163 1 2 *
Relay 28 1C ASCII Text (16 chars) 42772 42779 G3 R28 Not Used Setting 32 163 1 2 *
Relay 29 1D ASCII Text (16 chars) 42780 42787 G3 R29 Not Used Setting 32 163 1 2 *
Relay 30 1E ASCII Text (16 chars) 42788 42795 G3 R30 Not Used Setting 32 163 1 2 *
Relay 31 1F ASCII Text (16 chars) 42796 42803 G3 R31 Not Used Setting 32 163 1 2 *
Relay 32 20 ASCII Text (16 chars) 42804 42811 G3 R32 Not Used Setting 32 163 1 2 *
GROUP 1
4C 00 * *
RTD LABELS
RTD 1 01 ASCII Text (16 chars) 42812 42819 G3 RTD 1 Setting 32 163 1 2 * *
RTD 10 0A ASCII Text (16 chars) 42884 42891 G3 RTD 10 Setting 32 163 1 2 * *
GROUP 1
4D 00 * * *
CLIO PROTECTION
CLIO Input 1 02 Indexed String G37 42895 G37 Enabled Setting 0 1 1 2 * * *
CLI1 Input Type 04 Indexed String G153 42896 G153 4-20mA Setting 0 3 1 2 * * *
CLI1 Input Label 06 ASCII Text (16 chars) 41900 41907 G3 CLIO Input 1 Setting 32 163 1 2 * * *
CLI1 Minimum 08 Courier Number (Decimal) 42897 42898 G35 0 Setting -9999 9999 0.1 2 * * *
CLI1 Maximum 0A Courier Number (Decimal) 42899 42900 G35 100 Setting -9999 9999 0.1 2 * * *
MiCOM P342, P343 Page 38/170

Datagroup
Comment
CLI1 Alarm 0C Indexed String G37 42901 G37 Disabled Setting 0 1 1 2 * * *
CLI1 Alarm Fn 0E Indexed String G154 42902 G154 Over Setting 0 1 1 2 * * *
CLI1 Alarm Set 10 Courier Number (Decimal) 42903 42904 G35 50 Setting MIN(CLI1 MAX(CLI1 0.1 2 * * *
Min, Max) Min, Max)
CLI1 Alarm Delay 12 Courier Number (Time) 42905 G2 1 Setting 0 100 0.1 2 * * *
CLI1 Trip 14 Indexed String G37 42906 G37 Disabled Setting 0 1 1 2 * * *
CLI1 Trip Fn 16 Indexed String G154 42907 G154 Over Setting 0 1 1 2 * * *
CLI1 Trip Set 18 Courier Number (Decimal) 42908 42909 G35 60 Setting MIN(CLI1 MAX(CLI1 0.1 2 * * *
Min, Max) Min, Max)
CLI1 Trip Delay 1A Courier Number (Time) 42910 G2 0 Setting 0 100 0.1 2 * * *
CLI1 I< Alarm 1C Indexed String G37 42911 G37 Disabled Setting 0 1 1 2 * * * Visible only when 4D04 = 4-20mA
CLI1 I< Alm Set 1E Courier Number (Current) 42912 G2 0.0035 Setting 0 0.004 0.0001 2 * * * Visible only when 4D04 = 4-20mA
Min, Max) Min, Max)
CLI2 Alarm Delay 32 Courier Number (Time) 42923 G2 1s Setting 0 100 0.1 2 * * *
Min, Max) Min, Max)
CLI2 Trip Delay 3A Courier Number (Time) 42928 G2 0s Setting 0 100 0.1 2 * * *
CLI2 I< Alarm 3C Indexed String G37 42929 G37 Disabled Setting 0 1 1 2 * * * Visible only when 4D24=4-20mA
CLI2 I< Alm Set 3E Courier Number (Current) 42930 G2 0.0035 Setting 0 0.004 0.0001 2 * * * Visible only when 4D24=4-20mA
Min, Max) Min, Max)
Min, Max) Min, Max)
MiCOM P342, P343 Page 39/170

Datagroup
Comment
Min, Max) Min, Max)
Min, Max) Min, Max)
CLIO Output 1 A0 Indexed String G37 42967 G37 Disabled Setting 0 1 1 2 * * *
CLO1 Output Type A2 Indexed String G153 42968 G153 4-20mA Setting 0 2 1 2 * * *
CLO1 Set Values A4 Indexed String G54 42969 G54 Primary Setting 0 1 1 2 * * *
CLO1 Parameter A6 Indexed String G155 42970 G155 IA Magnitude Setting 0 See 1 2 * * *
G155
CLO1 Minimum A8 Courier Number 42971 42972 G35 See G155 table Setting See G155 Meas. Range Table 2 * * *
CLO1 Maximum AA Courier Number 42973 42974 G35 See G155 table Setting See G155 Meas. Range Table 2 * * *
CLIO Output 2 B0 Indexed String G37 42975 G37 Disabled Setting 0 1 1 2 * * *
CLO2 Output Type B2 Indexed String G153 42976 G153 4-20mA Setting 0 2 1 2 * * *
CLO2 Set Values B4 Indexed String G54 42977 G54 Primary Setting 0 1 1 2 * * *
CLO2 Parameter B6 Indexed String G155 42978 G155 IB Magnitude Setting 0 See 1 2 * * *
G155
CLO2 Minimum B8 Courier Number 42979 42980 G35 See G155 table Setting See G155 Meas. Range Table 2 * * *
CLO2 Maximum BA Courier Number 42981 42982 G35 See G155 table Setting See G155 Meas. Range Table 2 * * *
CLIO Output 3 C0 Indexed String G37 42983 G37 Disabled Setting 0 1 1 2 * * *
CLO3 Output Type C2 Indexed String G153 42984 G153 4-20mA Setting 0 2 * * *
CLO3 Set Values C4 Indexed String G54 42985 G54 Primary Setting 0 2 * * *
CLO3 Parameter C6 Indexed String G155 42986 G155 IC Magnitude Setting 0 See 1 2 * * *
G155
CLO3 Minimum C8 Courier Number 42987 42988 G35 See G155 Table Setting See G155 Meas. Range Table 2 * * *
CLO3 Maximum CA Courier Number 42989 42990 G35 See G155 Table Setting See G155 Meas. Range Table 2 * * *
CLIO Output 4 D0 Indexed String G37 42991 G37 Disabled Setting 0 2 * * *
CLO4 Output Type D2 Indexed String G153 42992 G153 4-20mA Setting 0 2 * * *
CLO4 Set Values D4 Indexed String G54 42993 G54 Primary Setting 0 2 * * *
CLO4 Parameter D6 Indexed String G155 42994 G155 IN Measured Mag Setting 0 See 1 2 * *
IN Derived Mag G155 *
CLO4 Minimum D8 Courier Number 42995 42996 G35 See G155 Table Setting See G155 Meas. Range Table 2 * * *
MiCOM P342, P343 Page 40/170

Datagroup
Comment
CLO4 Maximum DA Courier Number 42997 42998 G35 See G155 Table Setting See G155 Meas. Range Table 2 * * *
GROUP 2 PROTECTION SETTINGS * * *
Repeat of Group 1 columns/rows 50 00 43000 44999 * * *
(No Header) N/A B0 00 Auto extraction Event Record Column * * *
Select Record 01 Unsigned Integer(2) Setting 0 65535 1 * * * Unique cyclical fault number(from event)
Faulted Phase 02 Binary Flag (8 bits) Indexed String G16 Data * * * Product Specific Bit Flags Targetting
1 bit per elementLSB
Start Elements1 03 Binary Flag (32 Bits)Indexed String 0..31 G84 Data * * * Product Specific Bit Flags Targetting
String..MSB String
Start Elements2 04 Binary Flag (32 Bits)Indexed String 0..31 G107 Data * * *
String..MSB String
Trip Elements1 05 Binary Flag (32 Bits)Indexed String 0..31 G85 Data * * * Product Specific Bit Flags Targetting
String..MSB String
Trip Elements2 06 Binary Flag (32 Bits)Indexed String 0..31 G86 Data * * * Product Specific Bit Flags Targetting
String..MSB String
Fault Alarms 07 Binary Flag (32 Bits)Indexed String 0..31 G87 Data * * * Product Specific Bit Flags Targetting
String..MSB String
Fault Time 08 IEC870 Time & Date Data * * *
Active Group 09 Unsigned Integer Data * * *
System Frequency 0A Courier Number (frequency) Data * * *
Fault Duration 0B Courier Number (time) Data * * *
CB Operate Time 0C Courier Number (time) Data * * *
Relay Trip Time 0D Courier Number (time) Data * * *
IA 0E Courier Number (current) Data * *
IA-1 0E Courier Number (current) Data *
IB 0F Courier Number (current) Data * *
IB-1 0F Courier Number (current) Data *
IC 10 Courier Number (current) Data * *
IC-1 10 Courier Number (current) Data *
VAB 11 Courier Number (voltage) Data * * *
VBC 12 Courier Number (voltage) Data * * *
VCA 13 Courier Number (voltage) Data * * *
VAN 14 Courier Number (voltage) Data * * *
VBN 15 Courier Number (voltage) Data * * *
VCN 16 Courier Number (voltage) Data * * *
IA-2 17 Courier Number (current) Data *
IB-2 18 Courier Number (current) Data *
IC-2 19 Courier Number (current) Data *
IA Differential 1A Courier Number (Current) Data *
IB Differential 1B Courier Number (Current) Data *
IC Differential 1C Courier Number (Current) Data *
VN Measured 1D Courier Number (Voltage) Data * * *
MiCOM P342, P343 Page 41/170

Datagroup
Comment
VN Derived 1E Courier Number (Voltage) Data * * *
IN Measured 1F Courier Number (Voltage) Data * *
IN Derived 1F Courier Number (Current) Data *
I Sensitive 20 Courier Number (Current) Data * * *
IREF Diff 21 Courier Number (Current) Data * *
IREF Bias 22 Courier Number (Current) Data * *
I2 23 Courier Number (Current) Data * *
3 Phase Watts 24 Courier Number (Watts) Data * * *
3 Phase VARs 25 Courier Number (VARs) Data * * *
3 Phase Power Factor 26 Courier Number (No unit) Data * * *
RTD 1 27 Courier Number (Temperature) Data * * Courier Text = RTD label setting
RTD 4 2A Courier Number (Temperature) Data * * Courier Text = RTD label setting
RTD 5 2B Courier Number (Temperature) Data * * Courier Text = RTD label setting
RTD 6 2C Courier Number (Temperature) Data * * Courier Text = RTD label setting
RTD 7 2D Courier Number (Temperature) Data * * Courier Text = RTD label setting
RTD 8 2E Courier Number (Temperature) Data * * Courier Text = RTD label setting
RTD 9 2F Courier Number (Temperature) Data * * Courier Text = RTD label setting
df/dt 31 Courier Number (Hz/s) Data *
V Vector Shift 32 Courier Number (Angle) Data *
CLIO Input 1 33 Courier Number (Decimal) Data * * * Courier Text = CLIO label setting
No Header N/A B1 00 * * *
Select Record 01 UINT16 Setting 0 65535 1 * * *
Time and Date 02 IEC Date and Time Data * * *
Record Text 03 ASCII Text Data * * * Text Description of Error
Error No1 04 UINT32 Data * * * Error Code
Error No2 05 UINT32 Data * * * Error Code
DATA TRANSFER N/A B2 00
Domain 04 Indexed String G57 PSL Settings Setting 0 1 1 2 * * *
Sub-Domain 08 Indexed String G90 Group 1 Setting 0 3 1 2 * * *
Version 0C Unsigned Integer (2 Bytes) 256 Setting 0 65535 1 2 * * *
Start 10 Not Used * * *
Length 14 Not Used * * *
Data Transfer Reference 18 * * *
Transfer Mode 1C Unsigned Integer Indexed Strings G76 6 Setting 0 7 1 2 * * *
Data Transfer 20 Repeated groups of Unsigned Integers Setting * * * Only settable if Domain = PSL Settings
RECORDER CONTROL N/A B3 00 * * *
UNUSED 01 * * *
Recorder Source 02 Indexed String Samples Data * * *
MiCOM P342, P343 Page 42/170

Datagroup
Comment
Reserved for future use 03-1F * * *
RECORDER EXTRACTION
N/A B4 00 * * *
COLUMN
Select Record 01 Unsigned Integer 0 Setting -199 199 1 0 * * *
Trigger Time 02 IEC870 Time & Date Data * * *
Active Channels 03 Binary Flag Data * * * Build=IEC60870-5-103
Channel Types 04 Binary Flag Data * * * Build=IEC60870-5-103
Channel Offsets 05 Courier Number (decimal) Data * * * Build=IEC60870-5-103
Channel Scaling 06 Courier Number (decimal) Data * * * Build=IEC60870-5-103
Channel SkewVal 07 Integer Data * * * Build=IEC60870-5-103
Channel MinVal 08 Integer Data * * * Build=IEC60870-5-103
Channel MaxVal 09 Integer Data * * * Build=IEC60870-5-103
Format 0A Unsigned Integer Data * * * 0 = uncompressed, 1 = compressed
Upload 0B Unsigned Integer Data * * * Unused when Build=IEC60870-5-103
UNUSED 0C-0F
No. Of Samples 10 Unsigned Integer Data * * * Build=IEC60870-5-103
Trig Position 11 Unsigned Integer Data * * * Build=IEC60870-5-103
Time Base 12 Courier Number (time) Data * * * Build=IEC60870-5-103
UNUSED 13
Sample Timer 14 Unsigned Integer Data * * * Build=IEC60870-5-103
UNUSED 15-1F
Dist. Channel 1 20 Integer Data * * * Build=IEC60870-5-103
Dist. Channel 11 2A Integer Data * * * Build=IEC60870-5-103
Dist. Channel 12 2B Integer Data * * * Build=IEC60870-5-103
Dist. Channel 13 2C Integer Data * * * Build=IEC60870-5-103
UNUSED 2D-3D
Dist. Channel 31 3E Binary Flag Data * * * Build=IEC60870-5-103
Dist. Channel 32 3F Binary Flag Data * * * Build=IEC60870-5-103
30800 G1 Data Number of Disturbance Records (0 to 200)
30801 G1 Data Oldest Stored Disturbance Record (1 to 65535)
30802 G1 Data Number of Registers in Current Page

30803 30929 G1 Data Disturbance Record Page (0 to 65535)
40250 G1 Setting 1 65535 1 2 Select Disturbance Record
30930 30933 G12 Data Timestamp of selected record
Calibration Coefficients N/A B5 * * *
Cal Soft Version 01 ASCII text 16 chars * * *
MiCOM P342, P343 Page 43/170

Datagroup
Comment
Cal Date and Time 02 IEC Date and time * * *
Channel Types 03 Repeated Group 16 * Binary Flag 8 bits * * *
Cal Coeffs 04 Block transfer Repeated Group of UINT32 (4 coeffs voltage channel, 8 coeffs current channel) * * *
Comms Diagnostics N/A B6 00 Note: No text in column text * * *
Bus Comms Err Count Front 01 UINT32 * * *
Bus Message Count Front 02 UINT32 * * *
Protocol Err Count Front 03 UINT32 * * *
Slave Message Count Front 04 UNIT32
Reset front count 05 (Reset Menu Cell cmd only) * * *
Bus Comms Err Count Rear 06 UINT32 * * *
Protocol Err Count Rear 07 UINT32 * * *
Slave Message Count Rear 08 UINT32
Busy Count Rear 09 UINT32 * * *
Reset Rear Count 0A (Reset Menu Cell cmd only) * * *
PSL DATA B7 00
Grp 1 PSL Ref 01 ASCII Text (32 Chars) 31000 31015 G3 Data * * *
Date/Time 02 IEC 870 Date & Time 31016 31019 G12 Data * * *
Grp 1 PSL ID 03 Unsigned Integer (32 bits) 31020 31021 G27 Data * * *
COMMS SYS DATA N/A BF 00 * * *
Dist Record Cntrl Ref 01 Menu Cell(2) B300 Data * * *
Dist Record Extract Ref 02 Menu Cell(2) B400 Data * * *
Setting Transfer 03 Unsigned Integer Setting * * *
Reset Demand 04 None (Reset Menu Cell) Data(but supports Reset Menu cell) * * *
UNUSED 05 * * *
Block Xfer Ref 06 Menu Cell(2) B200 Data * * *
DIAGNOSTICS E0 00 * * *
Enable Column 01 Indexed String G11 0 (No) Setting 0 1 1 2 * * * CPU Load Measurements
CPU Load-Instant 11 Unsigned Integer (32 bits) Data * * *
CPU Load-Average 12 Unsigned Integer (32 bits) Data * * *
CPU Load-Min 13 Unsigned Integer (32 bits) Data * * *
CPU Load-Max 14 Unsigned Integer (32 bits) Data * * *
CPU Load Reset 1F Indexed String G11 0 (No) Setting 0 1 1 2 * * *
DDB to set: 21 Unsigned Integer (32 bits) Setting 0 1022 1 2 * * * Manual DDB Control for tests
DDB to reset: 22 Unsigned Integer (32 bits) Setting 0 1022 1 2 * * *
DDB to pulse: 23 Unsigned Integer (32 bits) Setting 0 1022 1 2 * * * Label unfitted IO
Name Unfitted IO 26 Indexed String G11 0 (No) Setting 0 1 1 2 * * *
UINT32 - 1 31 Unsigned Integer (32 bits) Setting 0 2^32-1 1 2 * * * Debug variables - default: Not used
MiCOM P342, P343 Page 44/170

Datagroup
Comment
UINT32 - 2 32 Unsigned Integer (32 bits) Setting 0 2^32-1 1 2 * * *
INT32 -1 41 Signed Integer (32 bits) Data * * *
BIN32 -1 51 Binary Flag (32 bits) Data * * *
FLT32 -1 61 Courier Number (meters) Data * * *
MiCOM P342, P343 Page 45/170
Data Types
Model
Type Value / Bit Mask Description
P341 P342 P343
G1 1 Register UNSIGNED INTEGER (16 Bits) * * *

G2 1 Register NUMERIC SETTING (Unsigned 16 bit) * * *
Used for floating point settings. The setting value is represented as the number of step
increments from the minimum value (see also G35)
i.e. Setting value = (setting minimum) + ((register value) x (setting step size))
G3 1 Register ASCII TEXT CHARACTERS (2 characters per register) * * *
Bit Mask (hex)
0xFF00 First character in high order 8 bits
0x00FF Second character in low order 8 bits
G4 2 Registers PLANT STATUS (32 Bits)
Bit Mask (hex) Data formatted as per data type G27
0x00000001 CB1 Open (0 = Off, 1 = On) * * *
0x00000002 CB1 Closed (0 = Off, 1 = On) * * *
0x00000004 Not Used (0 = Off, 1 = On)
0x00000008 Not Used (0 = Off, 1 = On)
0x00000010 Not Used (0 = Off, 1 = On)
0x00000020 Not Used (0 = Off, 1 = On)
0x00000040 Not Used (0 = Off, 1 = On)
0x00000080 Not Used (0 = Off, 1 = On)
0x00000100 Not Used (0 = Off, 1 = On)
0x00000200 Not Used (0 = Off, 1 = On)
0x00000400 Not Used (0 = Off, 1 = On)
0x00000800 Not Used (0 = Off, 1 = On)
0x00001000 Not Used (0 = Off, 1 = On)
0x00002000 Not Used (0 = Off, 1 = On)
0x00004000 Not Used (0 = Off, 1 = On)
0x00008000 Not Used (0 = Off, 1 = On)
0x00010000 Not Used (0 = Off, 1 = On)
0x00020000 Not Used (0 = Off, 1 = On)
0x00040000 Not Used (0 = Off, 1 = On)
0x00080000 Not Used (0 = Off, 1 = On)
0x00100000 Not Used (0 = Off, 1 = On)
0x00200000 Not Used (0 = Off, 1 = On)
0x00400000 Not Used (0 = Off, 1 = On)
0x00800000 Not Used (0 = Off, 1 = On)
0x01000000 Not Used (0 = Off, 1 = On)
0x02000000 Not Used (0 = Off, 1 = On)
0x04000000 Not Used (0 = Off, 1 = On)
0x08000000 Not Used (0 = Off, 1 = On)
0x10000000 Not Used (0 = Off, 1 = On)
0x20000000 Not Used (0 = Off, 1 = On)
0x40000000 Not Used (0 = Off, 1 = On)
0x80000000 Not Used (0 = Off, 1 = On)
G5 2 Registers CONTROL STATUS (32 Bits)
0x00000001 Not Used (0 = Off, 1 = On) * * *
0x00000002 Not Used (0 = Off, 1 = On) * * *
0x00000004 Not Used (0 = Off, 1 = On) * * *
MiCOM P342, P343 Page 46/170
Model
P341 P342 P343
0x00000008 Not Used (0 = Off, 1 = On) * * *

0x00000010 Not Used (0 = Off, 1 = On) * * *
0x00000020 Not Used (0 = Off, 1 = On) * * *
0x00000040 Not Used (0 = Off, 1 = On) * * *
0x00000080 Not Used (0 = Off, 1 = On) * * *
0x00000100 Not Used (0 = Off, 1 = On) * * *
0x00000200 Not Used (0 = Off, 1 = On) * * *
0x00000400 Not Used (0 = Off, 1 = On) * * *
0x00000800 Not Used (0 = Off, 1 = On) * * *
0x00001000 Not Used (0 = Off, 1 = On) * * *
0x00002000 Not Used (0 = Off, 1 = On) * * *
0x00004000 Not Used (0 = Off, 1 = On) * * *
0x00008000 Not Used (0 = Off, 1 = On) * * *
0x00010000 Not Used (0 = Off, 1 = On) * * *
0x00020000 Not Used (0 = Off, 1 = On) * * *
0x00040000 Not Used (0 = Off, 1 = On) * * *
0x00080000 Not Used (0 = Off, 1 = On) * * *
0x00100000 Not Used (0 = Off, 1 = On) * * *
0x00200000 Not Used (0 = Off, 1 = On) * * *
0x00400000 Not Used (0 = Off, 1 = On) * * *
0x00800000 Not Used (0 = Off, 1 = On) * * *
0x01000000 Not Used (0 = Off, 1 = On) * * *
0x02000000 Not Used (0 = Off, 1 = On) * * *
0x04000000 Not Used (0 = Off, 1 = On) * * *
0x08000000 Not Used (0 = Off, 1 = On) * * *
0x10000000 Not Used (0 = Off, 1 = On) * * *
0x20000000 Not Used (0 = Off, 1 = On) * * *
0x40000000 Not Used (0 = Off, 1 = On) * * *
0x80000000 Not Used (0 = Off, 1 = On) * * *
G6 1 Register RECORD CONTROL COMMAND REGISTER * * *
Value
0 No operation
1 Clear Event records
2 Clear Fault Record
3 Clear Maintenance Records
4 Reset Indications
G7 1 Register VTS INDICATE/BLOCK * * *
Value
0 Blocking
1 Indication
G8 2 Registers LOGIC INPUT STATUS (32 Bits)
0x00000001 Opto 1 Input State (0=Off, 1=Energised) * * *
MiCOM P342, P343 Page 47/170
Model
P341 P342 P343

0x01000000 Opto 25 Input State (0=Off, 1=Energised) *
G9 2 Registers RELAY OUTPUT STATUS (32 Bits)
0x00000001 Relay 1 (0=Not Operated, 1=Operated) * * *
MiCOM P342, P343 Page 48/170
Model
P341 P342 P343
0x01000000 Relay 25 (0=Not Operated, 1=Operated) *

G10 1 Register SIGNED FIXED POINT NUMBER WITH 1 DECIMAL PLACE (16 Bits) * * *
i.e. divide register value by 10 to obtain actual value.
G11 1 Register YES/NO * * *
Value
0 No
1 Yes
G12 4 Registers TIME AND DATE * * *
IEC60870-5-4 "Binary Time 2a" format - see Section 3.8 of SCADA Communications
Bit Mask (hex)
(P34x/EN CT) of Technical Guide
0xFFFF First Register - Milli-seconds

0x9FBF Second Register - Summertime and hours / Validity and minutes
0x0FFF Third register - Month of year / Day of month / Day of week
0x007F Fourth register - Years
G13 1 Register EVENT RECORD TYPE * * *
Value
0 Latched alarm active
1 Latched alarm inactive
2 Self reset alarm active
3 Self reset alarm inactive
4 Relay event
5 Opto event
6 Protection event
7 Platform event
8 Fault logged event
9 Maintenance record logged event
G14 1 Register I> FUNCTION LINK
Bit Mask (hex)
0x0001 I>1 VTS Block *
0x0010 I>3 Block A/R
0x0020 I>4 Block A/R
0x0040 Not Used
0x0080 Not Used
G15 1 Register DISTURBANCE RECORD INDEX STATUS * * *
Value
0 No Record
1 Unextracted
2 Extracted
G16 1 Register FAULTED PHASE * * *
Bit Mask (hex)
MiCOM P342, P343 Page 49/170
Model
P341 P342 P343
0x0001 Start A
0x0002 Start B
0x0004 Start C
0x0008 Start N
0x0010 Trip A
0x0020 Trip B
0x0040 Trip C
0x0080 Trip N
G17 1 Register IRIG-B STATUS * * *
Value
0 Card not fitted
1 Card failed
2 Signal healthy
3 No signal
G18 1 Register RECORD SELECTION COMMAND REGISTER (MODBUS) * * *
Bit Mask (hex)
0x0000 No Operation
0x0001 Select next event
0x0002 Accept Event
0x0004 Select next Disturbance Record
0x0008 Accept disturbance record
0x0010 Select Next Disturbance record page
G19 1 Register LANGUAGE * * *
Value
0 English
1 Francais
2 Deutsch
3 Espanol
G20 2 Registers PASSWORD (4 Characters packed into 32 Bits) * * *
0xFF00 First register, first password character
0x00FF First register, second password character
0xFF00 Second register, third password character
0x00FF Second register, fourth password character
NOTE THAT WHEN REGISTERS OF THIS TYPE ARE READ THE SLAVE WILL ALWAYS
INDICATE AN "*" IN EACH CHARACTER POSITION TO PRESERVE THE PASSWORD
SECURITY.
G21 1 Register IEC60870-5-103 INTERFACE * * *

Value
0 EIA(RS)485
1 Fibre Optic
G22 1 Register PASSWORD CONTROL ACCESS LEVEL * * *
Value
0 Level 0 - Passwords required for levels 1 & 2
1 Level 1 - Password required for level 2
2 Level 2 - No passwords required
G23 1 Register VOLTAGE AND V/Hz CURVE SELECTION * * *
Value
0 Disabled
1 DT
MiCOM P342, P343 Page 50/170
Model
P341 P342 P343
2 IDMT
G24 2 Registers UNSIGNED FIXED POINT NUMBER WITH 3 DECIMAL PLACES (32 Bits) * * *
Data formatted as per data type G27
i.e. divide 'G27' value by 1000 to obtain actual value
Current 0 - 4,000,000A Resolution 1mA
Voltage 0 - 4MV Resolution 1mV
G25 1 Register UNSIGNED FIXED POINT NUMBER WITH 3 DECIMAL PLACES (16 Bits) * * *
i.e. divide register value by 1000 to obtain actual value
Time Interval 0.000 - 655.000s Resolution 1ms
Frequency 0.000 - 655.000Hz Resolution 0.001Hz
G26 1 Register MODBUS RELAY STATUS REGISTER * * *
Bit Mask (hex)
0x0001 In Service Status (1= In service, 0= Out of service)
0x0002 Minor self test failure (=1, 0 otherwise)
0x0004 New auto-extraction event available (=1, 0 otherwise)
Time Synchronised (=1 after Modbus time synch. Resets to 0 after 5 minutes unless re-time
0x0008
synch'd. Other time synch sources do not affect this bit.)
0x0010 New auto-extraction disturbance record available (=1, 0 otherwise)

0x0020 Fault (not used, always zero)
0x0040 Trip LED status (1=LED On, 0 = LED Off)
0x0080 Alarm status summary (logical OR of all alarm status bits)
0x0100 Unused
0x0200 Unused
0x0400 Unused
0x0800 Unused
0x1000 Unused
0x2000 Unused
0x4000 Unused
0x8000 Unused
G27 2 Registers UNSIGNED LONG (32 Bit) VALUE * * *
High order word stored in 1st register
Low order word stored in 2nd register
G28 1 Register SIGNED INTEGER (16 Bit) * * *
G29 3 Registers INTEGER POWER/ENERGY WITH MULTIPLIER
First Register Per unit value formatted as a G28
Second & third registers Scalar, formatted as a G27
Overall value = 'G28'x'G27' see Section 3.9 of SCADA Communications

(P34x/EN CT) of Technical Guide for details
G30 1 Register SIGNED VALUE, 2 DECIMAL PLACES * * *

i.e. divide register value by 100 to obtain actual value
G31 1 Register ANALOGUE CHANNEL ASSIGNMENT SELECTOR (Generator specific)
Value
0 VAN * * *
1 VBN * * *
2 VCN * * *
3 VN * * *
4 IA * *
4 IA-1 *
5 IB * *
5 IB-1 *
MiCOM P342, P343 Page 51/170
Model
P341 P342 P343
6 IC * *
6 IC-1 *
7 IN * *
8 IN Sensitive * * *
9 IA-2 *
10 IB-2 *
11 IC-2 *
G32 1 Register DISTURBANCE RECORD DIGITAL CHANNEL ASSIGNMENT SELECTOR * * *
Value
0 Not used (i.e. nothing recorded for the channel)
1 onwards See separate G32 DDB Table
G33 NOT USED
G34 1 Register TRIGGER MODE * * *
Value
0 Single
1 Extended
G35 2 Registers NUMERIC SETTING (Unsigned 32 Bit) * * *
Used for floating point settings. The setting value is represented as the number of step
increments from the minimum value (see also G2)
Data formatted as per data type G27

i.e. Setting value = (setting minimum) + (('G27' value) x (setting step size))
G36 1 Register REAL NUMBERS * * *
Value
0 Polar
1 Rectangular
G37 1 Register ENABLED / DISABLED * * *
Value
0 Disabled
1 Enabled
G38c COMMUNICATION BAUD RATE (COURIER) * * *
Value
0 9600 bits/s
1 19200 bits/s
2 38400 bits/s
G38m COMMUNICATION BAUD RATE (MODBUS) * * *
Value
0 9600 bits/s
1 19200 bits/s
2 38400 bits/s
G38v COMMUNICATION BAUD RATE (IEC60870-5-103) * * *
Value
0 9600 bits/s
1 19200 bits/s
G38d COMMUNICATION BAUD RATE (DNP 3.0) * * *
Value
0 1200 bits/s
1 2400 bits/s
2 4800 bits/s
3 9600 bits/s
4 19200 bits/s
MiCOM P342, P343 Page 52/170
Model
P341 P342 P343
5 38400 bits/s
G39 1 Register COMMUNICATIONS PARITY * * *
Value
0 Odd
1 Even
2 None
G40 1 Register CHECK SYNC INPUT SELECTION
Value
0 A-N
1 B-N
2 C-N
3 A-B
4 B-C
5 C-A
G41 1 Register CHECK SYNC VOLTAGE BLOCKING
Value
0 None
1 Undervoltage
2 Differential
3 Both
G42 1 Register CHECK SYNC SLIP CONTROL
Value
0 None
1 Timer
2 Frequency
3 Both
G43 1 Register IDMT CURVE TYPE * * *
Value
0 Disabled
1 DT
2 IEC S Inverse
3 IEC V Inverse
4 IEC E Inverse
5 UK LT Inverse
6 IEEE M Inverse
7 IEEE V Inverse
8 IEEE E Inverse
9 US Inverse
10 US ST Inverse
G44 1 Register DIRECTION * * *
Value
0 Non-Directional
1 Directional Fwd
2 Directional Rev
G45 1 Register VTS BLOCK * * *
Value
0 Block
1 Non-Directional
G46 1 Register POLARISATION *
Value
MiCOM P342, P343 Page 53/170
Model
P341 P342 P343
0 Zero Sequence
1 Neg Sequence
G47 1 Register MEASURING MODE * * *
Value
0 Phase-Phase
1 Phase-Neutral
G48 1 Register OPERATION MODE * * *
Value
0 Any Phase
1 Three Phase
G49 1 Register VN OR IN INPUT * * *
Value
0 Measured
1 Derived
G50 1 Register RTD SELECT * *
Bit Mask (hex)
0x0001 RTD Input #1
0x0002 RTD Input #2
0x0004 RTD Input #3
0x0008 RTD Input #4
0x0010 RTD Input #5
0x0020 RTD Input #6
0x0040 RTD Input #7
0x0080 RTD Input #8
0x0100 RTD Input #9
0x0200 RTD Input #10
G51 1 Register FAULT LOCATION
Value
0 Distance
1 Ohms
2 % of Line
G52 1 Register DEFAULT DISPLAY * * *
Value
0 3Ph + N Current
1 3 Ph-neutral Voltage
2 Power
3 Date and Time
4 Description
5 Plant Reference
6 Frequency
7 Access Level
G53 1 Register SELECT FACTORY DEFAULTS * * *
Value
0 No Operation
1 All Settings
2 Setting Group 1
3 Setting Group 2
4 Setting Group 3
5 Setting Group 4
G54 1 Register SELECT PRIMARY SECONDARY MEASUREMENTS * * *
MiCOM P342, P343 Page 54/170
Model
P341 P342 P343
Value
0 Primary
1 Secondary
G55 1 Register CIRCUIT BREAKER CONTROL *
Value
0 No Operation
1 Trip
2 Close
G56 1 Register PHASE MEASUREMENT REFERENCE * * *
Value
0 VA
1 VB
2 VC
3 IA
4 IB
5 IC
G57 1 Register DATA TRANSFER DOMAIN * * *
Value
0 PSL Settings
1 PSL Configuration
G58 1 Register SEF/REF SELECTION
Value
0 SEF * * *
1 SEF cos(PHI) * * *
2 SEF sin(PHI) * * *
3 Wattmetric * * *
4 Hi Z REF * * *
5 Lo Z REF * *
6 Lo Z REF+SEF * *
7 Lo Z REF+Wattmet * *
G59 1 Register BATTERY STATUS * * *
Value
0 Dead
1 Healthy
G60 1 Register TIME DELAY SELECTION * * *
Value
0 DT
1 Inverse
G61 1 Register ACTIVE GROUP CONTROL * * *
Value
0 Select via Menu
1 Select via Opto
G62 1 Register SAVE AS * * *
Value
0 No Operation
1 Save
2 Abort
G63 1 Register IN> FUNCTION LINK
Bit Mask (hex)
0x0001 IN>1 VTS Block *
MiCOM P342, P343 Page 55/170
Model
P341 P342 P343

0x0010 IN>3 Block A/R
0x0020 IN>4 Block A/R
0x0040 Not Used
0x0080 Not Used
G64 1 Register ISEF> FUNC LINK
Bit Mask (hex)
0x0001 ISEF>1 VTS Block * * *
0x0002 ISEF>2 VTS Block *
0x0010 ISEF>3 Block A/R
0x0020 ISEF>4 Block A/R
0x0040 Not Used
0x0080 Not Used
G65 1 Register F< FUNCTION LINK * * *
Bit Mask (hex)
0x0001 F<1 Poledead Blk
0x0010 Not Used
0x0020 Not Used
0x0040 Not Used
0x0080 Not Used
G66 1 Register DISTURBANCE RECORDER DIGITAL CHANNEL TRIGGER * * *
Value
0 No Trigger
1 Trigger L/H
2 Trigger H/L
G67 1 Register THERMAL OVERLOAD * * *
Value
0 Single
1 Dual
G68 1 Register CB FAIL RESET OPTIONS * * *
Value
0 I< Only
1 CB Open & I<
2 Prot Reset & I<
G69 1 Register VTS RESET MODE * * *
Value
0 Manual
1 Auto
G70 1 Register AUTORECLOSE MODE
Value
0 Opto set
1 Auto
2 User Set
MiCOM P342, P343 Page 56/170
Model
P341 P342 P343
3 Pulse Set
G71 1 Register PROTOCOL * * *
Value
0 Courier
1 IEC870-5-103
2 Modbus
G72 1 Register START DEAD TIME
Value
0 Protection Reset
1 CB Trips
G73 1 Register RECLAIM TIME if PROTECTION START
Value
0 Suspend
1 Continue
G74 1 Register RESET LOCKOUT
Value
0 User Interface
1 Select NonAuto
G75 1 Register AUTO-RECLOSE AFTER CONTROL CLOSE
Value
0 Enabled
1 Inhibited
G76 1 Register TRANSFER MODE * * *
Value
0 Prepare Rx
1 Complete Rx
2 Prepare Tx
3 Complete Tx
4 Rx Prepared
5 Tx Prepared
6 OK
7 Error
G77 1 Register AUTO-RECLOSE
Value
0 Out of Service
1 In Service
G78 1 Register A/R TELECONTROL
Value
0 No Operation
1 Auto
2 Non-auto
G79 1 Register CUSTOM SETTINGS * * *
Value
0 Disabled
1 Basic
2 Complete
G80 1 Register VISIBLE/INVISIBLE * * *
Value
0 Invisible
MiCOM P342, P343 Page 57/170
Model
P341 P342 P343
1 Visible
G81 1 Register RESET LOCKOUT BY * * *
Value
0 User Interface
1 CB Close
G82 1 Register A/R PROTECTION BLOCKING
Value
0 No Block
1 Block Inst Prot
G83 1 Register A/R STATUS
Value
0 Auto Mode
1 Non-auto Mode
2 Live Line
G84 2 Registers STARTED ELEMENTS - 1 (32 Bits)
(For fault record use only. The associated Modbus registers cannot be
accessed unless a fault record is selected)

0x00000001 General Start * * *
0x00000002 Start Power1 * * *
0x00000004 Start Power2 * * *
0x00000008 Start FFail1 * *
0x00000010 Start FFail2 * *
0x00000020 Start V Dep O/C * *
0x00000040 Start I>1 * * *
0x00000080 Start I>2 * * *
0x00000100 Start I>3 *
0x00000200 Start I>4 *
0x00000400 Start IN>1 * * *
0x00000800 Start IN>2 * * *
0x00001000 Start IN>3 *
0x00002000 Start IN>4 *
0x00004000 Start ISEF>1 * * *
0x00008000 Start ISEF>2 *
0x00040000 Start NVD VN>1 * * *
0x00080000 Start NVD VN>2 * * *
0x00100000 Start 100% ST EF *
0x00200000 Start Sen Power1 * * *
0x00400000 Start Sen Power2 * * *
0x00800000 Start z PSlip Z1 *
0x01000000 Start z PSlip Z2 *
0x02000000 Start Z<1 * *
0x04000000 Start Z<2 * *
0x08000000
0x10000000
0x20000000
MiCOM P342, P343 Page 58/170
Model
P341 P342 P343
0x40000000
0x80000000
G85 2 Registers TRIPPED ELEMENTS - 1 (32 Bits)

0x00000001 Any Trip * * *
0x00000002 Trip Gen Diff *
0x00000004 Trip Power1 * * *
0x00000008 Trip Power2 * * *
0x00000010 Trip FFail1 * *
0x00000020 Trip FFail2 * *
0x00000040 Trip NPS * *
0x00000080 Trip V Dep O/C * *
0x00000100 Trip I>1 * * *
0x00000200 Trip I>2 * * *
0x00000400 Trip I>3 *
0x00000800 Trip I>4 *
0x00001000 Trip IN>1 * * *
0x00002000 Trip IN>2 * * *
0x00004000 Trip IN>3 *
0x00008000 Trip IN>4 *
0x00010000 Trip ISEF>1 * * *
0x00020000 Trip ISEF>2 *
0x00040000 Trip ISEF>3 *
0x00080000 Trip ISEF>4 *
0x00100000 Trip IREF> * * *
0x00200000 Trip NVD VN>1 * * *
0x00400000 Trip NVD VN>2 * * *
0x00800000 Trip 100% ST EF *
0x01000000 Trip Dead Mach *
0x02000000 Trip Sen Power1 * * *
0x04000000 Trip Sen Power2 * * *
0x08000000 Trip z PSlip Z1 *
0x10000000 Trip z PSlip Z2 *
0x20000000 Trip Thermal O/L * * *
0x40000000 Trip Z<1 * *
0x80000000 Trip Z<2 * *
G86 2 Registers TRIPPED ELEMENTS - 2 (32 Bits)

0x00000001 Trip V<1 * * *
0x00000002 Trip V<2 * * *
0x00000004 Trip V< A/AB * * *
0x00000008 Trip V< B/BC * * *
0x00000010 Trip V< C/CA * * *
0x00000020 Trip V>1 * * *
0x00000040 Trip V>2 * * *
0x00000080 Trip V> A/AB * * *
MiCOM P342, P343 Page 59/170
Model
P341 P342 P343
0x00000100 Trip V> B/BC * * *

0x00000200 Trip V> C/CA * * *
0x00000400 Trip F<1 * * *
0x00000800 Trip F<2 * * *
0x00001000 Trip F<3 * * *
0x00002000 Trip F<4 * * *
0x00004000 Trip F>1 * * *
0x00008000 Trip F>2 * * *
0x00010000 Trip V/Hz * *
0x00010000 Trip V Shift *
0x00020000 Trip df/dt *
0x00040000 Trip RTD 1 * *
0x00080000 Trip RTD 2 * *
0x00100000 Trip RTD 3 * *
0x00200000 Trip RTD 4 * *
0x00400000 Trip RTD 5 * *
0x00800000 Trip RTD 6 * *
0x01000000 Trip RTD 7 * *
0x02000000 Trip RTD 8 * *
0x04000000 Trip RTD 9 * *
0x08000000 Trip RTD 10 * *
0x10000000 Trip CL Input 1 * * *
0x20000000 Trip CL Input 2 * * *
0x40000000 Trip CL Input 3 * * *
0x80000000 Trip CL Input 4 * * *
G87 2 Registers FAULT ALARMS (32 Bits)

0x00000001 CB Fail 1 * * *
0x00000002 CB Fail 2 * * *
0x00000004 VTS * * *
0x00000008 CTS * * *
0x00000010 Alarm FFail * *
0x00000020 Alarm NPS * *
0x00000040 Alarm V/Hz * *
0x00000080 Alarm RTD 1 * *
0x00000100 Alarm RTD 2 * *
0x00000200 Alarm RTD 3 * *
0x00000400 Alarm RTD 4 * *
0x00000800 Alarm RTD 5 * *
0x00001000 Alarm RTD 6 * *
0x00002000 Alarm RTD 7 * *
0x00004000 Alarm RTD 8 * *
0x00008000 Alarm RTD 9 * *
0x00010000 Alarm RTD 10 * *
0x00020000 Alarm Thermal * * *
0x00040000 Alarm CL Input 1 * * *
0x00080000 Alarm CL Input 2 * * *
0x00100000 Alarm CL Input 3 * * *
MiCOM P342, P343 Page 60/170
Model
P341 P342 P343
0x00200000 Alarm CL Input 4 * * *

0x00400000
0x00800000
0x01000000
0x02000000
0x04000000
0x08000000
0x10000000
0x20000000
0x40000000
0x80000000
G88 1 Register ALARMS * * *
Value
0 Alarm Disabled
1 Alarm Enabled
G89 1 Register MAIN VT LOCATION
Value
0 Line
1 Bus
G90 1 Register GROUP SELECTION * * *
Value
0 Group 1
1 Group 2
2 Group 3
3 Group 4
G91 1 Register A/R PROTECTION BLOCKING
Value
0 Allow Tripping
1 Block Tripping
G92 1 Register LOCKOUT
Value
0 No Lockout
1 Lockout
G93 1 Register COMMISSION TEST * * *
Value
0 No Operation
1 Apply Test
2 Remove Test
G94 1 Register COMMISSION TEST * * *
Value
0 No Operation
1 Apply Test
G95 1 Register SYSTEM FN LINKS * * *
Bit Mask (hex)
0x0001 Trip led self reset (1 = enable self reset)
0x0002 Not Used
0x0004 Not Used
0x0008 Not used
0x0010 Not Used
0x0020 Not Used
MiCOM P342, P343 Page 61/170
Model
P341 P342 P343
0x0040 Not Used

0x0080 Not Used
G96 2 Registers ALARM STATUS 1 (ALARMS 1 - 32) (32 Bits)
0x00000001 Not Used * * *
0x00000002 Not Used * * *
0x00000004 SG-opto Invalid * * *
0x00000008 Prot'n Disabled * * *
0x00000010 VT Fail Alarm * * *
0x00000020 CTS Fail Alarm * * *
0x00000040 CB Fail * * *
0x00000080 I^ Maint Alarm * * *
0x00000100 I^ Maint Lockout * * *
0x00000200 CB OPs Maint * * *
0x00000400 CB OPs Lock * * *
0x00000800 CB Time Maint * * *
0x00001000 CB Time Lockout * * *
0x00002000 Fault Freq Lock * * *
0x00004000 CB Status Alarm * * *
0x00008000 CB Trip Fail *
0x00010000 CB Close Fail *
0x00020000 Man CB Unhealthy *
0x00040000 F out of Range *
0x00040000 NPS Alarm * *
0x00080000 Thermal Alarm * * *
0x00100000 V/Hz Alarm * *
0x00200000 Field Fail Alarm * *
0x00400000 RTD Thermal Alm * *
0x00800000 RTD Open Cct * *
0x01000000 RTD short Cct * *
0x02000000 RTD Data Error * *
0x04000000 RTD Board Fail * *
0x08000000 Freq Prot Alm * * *
0x10000000 Voltage Prot Alm * * *
0x20000000 Not used
0x40000000 Not Used
0x80000000 Not Used
G97 1 Register DISTANCE UNIT
Value
0 Kilometres
1 Miles
G98 1 Register COPY TO * * *
Value
0 No Operation
1 Group 1
2 Group 2
3 Group 3
4 Group 4
G99 1 Register CB CONTROL *
Value
MiCOM P342, P343 Page 62/170
Model
P341 P342 P343
0 Disabled
1 Local
2 Remote
3 Local+Remote
4 Opto
5 Opto+local
6 Opto+Remote
7 Opto+Rem+local
G100 NOT USED
G101 1 Register GEN DIFF FUNCTION SELECT * *
Value
0 Disabled
1 Percentage Bias
2 High Impedance
3 Interturn
G102 1 Register POWER FUNCTION SELECT * * *
Value
0 Disabled
1 Reverse
2 Low Forward
3 Over
G103 1 Register SYSTEM BACKUP FUNCTION SELECT * *
Value
0 Disabled
1 Underimpedance
2 Volt controlled
3 Volt restrained
G104 1 Register SYSTEM BACKUP VECTOR ROTATION * *
Value
0 None
1 Delta-Star
G105 1 Register DEFINITE TIME OVERCURRENT SELECTION * * *
Value
0 Disabled
1 DT
G107 2 Registers STARTED ELEMENTS - 2 (32 Bits)

0x00000001 Start V<1 * * *
0x00000002 Start V<2 * * *
0x00000004 Start V< A/AB * * *
0x00000008 Start V< B/BC * * *
0x00000010 Start V< C/CA * * *
0x00000020 Start V>1 * * *
0x00000040 Start V>2 * * *
0x00000080 Start V> A/AB * * *
0x00000100 Start V> B/BC * * *
0x00000200 Start V> C/CA * * *
0x00000400 Start F<1 * * *
MiCOM P342, P343 Page 63/170
Model
P341 P342 P343
0x00000800 Start F<2 * * *

0x00001000 Start F<3 * * *
0x00002000 Start F<4 * * *
0x00004000 Start F>1 * * *
0x00008000 Start F>2 * * *
0x00010000 Start V/Hz * *
0x00020000 Start df/dt *
0x00040000 Start CLI1 Alarm * * *
0x00400000 Start CLI1 Trip * * *
0x04000000
0x08000000
0x10000000
0x20000000
0x40000000
0x80000000
G108 1 Register RTD OPEN CIRCUIT FLAGS * *
Bit Mask (hex)
0x0001 RTD 1 label
0x0002 RTD 2 label
0x0004 RTD 3 label
0x0008 RTD 4 label
0x0010 RTD 5 label
0x0020 RTD 6 label
0x0040 RTD 7 label
0x0080 RTD 8 label
0x0100 RTD 9 label
0x0200 RTD 10 label
G109 1 Register RTD SHORT CIRCUIT FLAGS * *
Bit Mask (hex)
0x0001 RTD 1 label
0x0002 RTD 2 label
0x0004 RTD 3 label
0x0008 RTD 4 label
0x0010 RTD 5 label
0x0020 RTD 6 label
0x0040 RTD 7 label
0x0080 RTD 8 label
0x0100 RTD 9 label
0x0200 RTD 10 label
G110 1 Register RTD DATA ERROR * *
Bit Mask (hex)
0x0001 RTD 1 label
0x0002 RTD 2 label
0x0004 RTD 3 label
MiCOM P342, P343 Page 64/170
Model
P341 P342 P343
0x0008 RTD 4 label

0x0010 RTD 5 label
0x0020 RTD 6 label
0x0040 RTD 7 label
0x0080 RTD 8 label
0x0100 RTD 9 label
0x0200 RTD 10 label
G111 1 Register SYSTEM BACKUP V DEP OC IDMT CURVE TYPE * *
Value
0 DT (DT)
1 IEC S Inverse (TMS)
2 IEC V Inverse (TMS)
3 IEC E Inverse (TMS)
4 UK LT Inverse (TMS)
5 Rectifier (TMS)
6 RI (K)
7 IEEE M Inverse (TD)
8 IEEE V Inverse (TD)
9 IEEE E Inverse (TD)
10 US Inverse (TD)
11 US ST Inverse (TD)
G112 1 Register 100% STATOR EARTH FAULT STATUS *
Value
0 Disabled
1 VN3H< Enabled
2 VN3H> Enabled
G113 1 Register POLE SLIPPING OPERATING MODE *
Value
0 Generating
1 Motoring
2 Both
G114 1 Register SEF/REF/SPOWER SELECTION * * *
Value
0 Disabled
1 SEF/REF
2 Sensitive Power
G115 1 Register POWER PROTECTION OPERATING MODE * * *
Value
0 Generating
1 Motoring
G116 1 Register CB FAIL PHASE UNDERCURRENT CURRENT INPUTS * * *
Value
0 IA-1 IB-1 IC-1
1 IA-2 IB-2 IC-2
G118 1 Register CB CONTROL LOGIC INPUT ASSIGNMENTS * * *
Value
0 None
1 52A
2 52B
MiCOM P342, P343 Page 65/170
Model
P341 P342 P343
3 Both 52A and 52B

G119 1 Register TEST MODE * * *
Value
0 Disabled
1 Test Mode
2 Blocked
G125 2 Registers IEEE FLOATING POINT FORMAT (Short float; 32 Bits) * * *
Bit 31 = sign
Bits 30-23 = e7 - e0
Implicit 1
Bits 22-0 = f22 - f0
(32 bit value formatted as per data type G27)
G128 2 Registers ALARM STATUS 2 (ALARMS 33 - 64) (32 Bits) * * *
0x00000001 CL Card I/P Fail * * *
0x00000002 CL Card O/P Fail * * *
0x00000004 CL Input 1 Alarm * * *
0x00000008 CL Input 2 Alarm * * *
0x00000010 CL Input 3 Alarm * * *
0x00000020 CL Input 4 Alarm * * *
0x00000040 CLI1 I< Fail Alm * * *
0x00000080 CLI2 I< Fail Alm * * *
0x00000100 CLI3 I< Fail Alm * * *
0x00000200 CLI4 I< Fail Alm * * *
0x00000400 Not Used
0x00000800 Not Used
0x00001000 Not Used
0x00002000 Not Used
0x00004000 Not Used
0x00008000 Not Used
0x00010000 MR User Alarm 16 * * *
0x00020000 MR User Alarm 15 * * *
0x00040000 MR User Alarm 14 * * *
0x00080000 MR User Alarm 13 * * *
0x00100000 MR User Alarm 12 * * *
0x00200000 MR User Alarm 11 * * *
0x00400000 MR User Alarm 10 * * *
0x00800000 MR User Alarm 9 * * *
0x01000000 MR User Alarm 8 * * *
0x02000000 MR User Alarm 7 * * *
0x04000000 MR User Alarm 6 * * *
0x08000000 MR User Alarm 5 * * *
0x10000000 SR User Alarm 4 * * *
0x20000000 SR User Alarm 3 * * *
0x40000000 SR User Alarm 2 * * *
0x80000000 SR User Alarm 1 * * *
G150 1 Register POC IDMT CURVE TYPE * * *
Value
0 Disabled
1 DT (DT)
MiCOM P342, P343 Page 66/170
Model
P341 P342 P343

6 Rectifier (TMS)
7 RI (K)
11 US Inverse (TD)
G151 1 Register EF IDMT CURVE TYPE * * *
Value
0 Disabled
1 DT (DT)
6 RI (K)
10 US Inverse (TD)
12 IDG
G152 1 Register SEF IDMT CURVE TYPE * * *
Value
0 Disabled
1 DT (DT)
9 US Inverse (TD)
11 IDG
G153 1 Register CLIO INPUT RANGE * * *
Value
0 0-1mA
1 0-10mA
2 0-20mA
3 4-20mA
G154 1 Register CLIO TRIP / ALARM OPERATING MODE * * *
Value
0 Under
MiCOM P342, P343 Page 67/170
Model
P341 P342 P343
1 Over
G155 1 Register CLIO OUTPUT MEASUREMENT
Value Value Value
IA Magnitude 0 0 0
IB Magnitude 1 1 1
IC Magnitude 2 2 2
IN Measured Mag 3 3
IN Derived Mag 3
I Sen Magnitude 4 4 4
I1 Magnitude 5 5 5
I2 Magnitude 6 6 6
I0 Magnitude 7 7 7
IA RMS 8 8 8
IB RMS 9 9 9
IC RMS 10 10 10
VAB Magnitude 11 11 11
VBC Magnitude 12 12 12
VCA Magnitude 13 13 13
VAN Magnitude 14 14 14
VBN Magnitude 15 15 15
VCN Magnitude 16 16 16
VN Measured Mag 17 17 17
VN Derived Mag 18 18 18
V1 Magnitude 19 19 19
VAN RMS 22 22 22
VBN RMS 23 23 23
VCN RMS 24 24 24
Frequency 25 25 25
3 Phase Watts 26 26 26
A Phase Watts 27 27 27
B Phase Watts 28 28 28
C Phase Watts 29 29 29
3 Phase Vars 30 30 30
A Phase Vars 31 31 31
B Phase Vars 32 32 32
C Phase Vars 33 33 33
3 Phase VA 34 34 34
A Phase VA 35 35 35
B Phase VA 36 36 36
C Phase VA 37 37 37
3Ph Power Factor 38 38 38
APh Power Factor 39 39 39
BPh Power Factor 40 40 40
CPh Power Factor 41 41 41
3Ph W Fix Demand 42 42 42
3Ph Vars Fix Dem 43 43 43
IA Fixed Demand 44 44 44
IB Fixed Demand 45 45 45
MiCOM P342, P343 Page 68/170
Model
P341 P342 P343
IC Fixed Demand 46 46 46
3 Ph W Roll Dem 47 47 47
3Ph Vars RollDem 48 48 48
IA Roll Demand 49 49 49
IB Roll Demand 50 50 50
IC Roll Demand 51 51 51
3Ph W Peak Dem 52 52 52
3Ph Var Peak Dem 53 53 53
IA Peak Demand 54 54 54
IB Peak Demand 55 55 55
IC Peak Demand 56 56 56
VN 3rd Harmonic 57
NPS Thermal 57 58
Thermal Overload 57 58 59
RTD 1 59 60
RTD 2 60 61
RTD 3 61 62
RTD 4 62 63
RTD 5 63 64
RTD 6 64 65
RTD 7 65 66
RTD 8 66 67
RTD 9 67 68
RTD 10 68 69
CL Input 1 58 69 70
CL Input 2 59 70 71
CL Input 3 60 71 72
CL Input 4 61 72 73
G200 1 Register GLOBAL OPTO NOMINAL VOLTAGE SELECTION * * *
Value
0 24-27V
1 30-34V
2 48-54V
3 110-125V
4 220-250V
5 Custom
G201 1 Register SINGLE OPTO NOMINAL VOLTAGE SELECTION * * *
Value
0 24-27V
1 30-34V
2 48-54V
3 110-125V
4 220-250V
G202 2 Registers CONTROL INPUT STATUS (32 Bits) * * *
0x00000001 Control Input 1 (0 = Reset, 1 = Set)
MiCOM P342, P343 Page 69/170
Model
P341 P342 P343

G203 1 Register VIRTUAL INPUT * * *
Value
0 No Operation
1 Set
2 Reset
G204 1 Register REAR COMMS CARD STATUS * * *
Value
0 Unsupported
1 Card not Fitted
2 EIA(RS)232 OK
3 EIA(RS)232 OK
4 K-Bus OK
G205 1 Register SECOND REAR COMMUNICATIONS PORT CONFIGURATION (model option) * * *
Value
0 EIA(RS)232
1 EIA(RS)485
2 K-Bus
G206 1 Register COMMS MODE (IEC60870-5-2) * * *
Value
0 IEC60870 FT1.2
1 10-bit no parity
G210 1 Register CS103 BLOCKING * * *
Value
MiCOM P342, P343 Page 70/170
Model
P341 P342 P343
0 Disabled
1 Monitor Blocking
2 Command Blocking
G228 2 Registers ALARM STATUS 3 (ALARMS 65 - 96) (32 Bits) * * *
0x00000001 Battery Fail
0x00000002 Field Volt Fail
0x00000004 Unused
0x00000008 GOOSE IED Absent
0x00000010 NIC not fitted
0x00000020 NIC no response
0x00000040 NIC fatal error
0x00000080 NIC Software Reload
0x00000100 Bad TCP/IP Configuration
0x00000200 Bad OSI Configuration
0x00000400 NIC Link Fail
0x00000800 NIC SW-Mismatch
0x00001000 IP addr conflict
0x00002000 Unused
0x00004000 Unused
0x00008000 Unused
0x00010000 Unused
0x00020000 Unused
0x00040000 Unused
0x00080000 Unused
0x00100000 Unused
0x00200000 Unused
0x00400000 Unused
0x00800000 Unused
0x01000000 Unused
0x02000000 Unused
0x04000000 Unused
0x08000000 Unused
0x10000000 Unused
0x20000000 Unused
0x40000000 Unused
0x80000000 Unused
MiCOM P342, P343 Page 71/170
G32 Digital Channel Assignment Selector
P341 P342 P343
0 Unused Unused Unused

1 see 4B01 see 4B01 see 4B01
10 see 4B0A see 4B0A see 4B0A
11 see 4B0B see 4B0B see 4B0B
12 see 4B0C see 4B0C see 4B0C
13 see 4B0D see 4B0D see 4B0D
14 see 4B0E see 4B0E see 4B0E
15 see 4B0F see 4B0F see 4B0F
25 see 4A01 see 4A01 see 4B19
26 see 4A02 see 4A02 see 4B1A
27 see 4A03 see 4A03 see 4B1B
28 see 4A04 see 4A04 see 4B1C
29 see 4A05 see 4A05 see 4B1D
30 see 4A06 see 4A06 see 4B1E
31 see 4A07 see 4A07 see 4B1F
32 see 4A08 see 4A08 see 4B20
33 see 4A09 see 4A09 see 4A01
34 see 4A0A see 4A0A see 4A02
35 see 4A0B see 4A0B see 4A03
36 see 4A0C see 4A0C see 4A04
37 see 4A0D see 4A0D see 4A05
38 see 4A0E see 4A0E see 4A06
39 see 4A0F see 4A0F see 4A07
42 see 4A12 see 4A12 see 4A0A
43 see 4A13 see 4A13 see 4A0B
44 see 4A14 see 4A14 see 4A0C
45 see 4A15 see 4A15 see 4A0D
46 see 4A16 see 4A16 see 4A0E
47 see 4A17 see 4A17 see 4A0F
MiCOM P342, P343 Page 72/170
P341 P342 P343

49 LED 1 LED 1 see 4A11
57 SG-opto Invalid SG-opto Invalid see 4A19
58 Prot'n Disabled Prot'n Disabled see 4A1A
59 VT Fail Alarm VT Fail Alarm see 4A1B
60 CT Fail Alarm CT Fail Alarm see 4A1C
61 CB Fail Alarm CB Fail Alarm see 4A1D
62 I^ Maint Alarm I^ Maint Alarm see 4A1E
63 I^ Lockout Alarm I^ Lockout Alarm see 4A1F
64 CB Ops Maint CB Ops Maint see 4A20
65 CB Ops Lockout CB Ops Lockout LED 1
66 CB Op Time Maint CB Op Time Maint LED 2
67 CB Op Time Lock CB Op Time Lock LED 3
68 Fault Freq Lock Fault Freq Lock LED 4
69 CB Status Alarm CB Status Alarm LED 5
70 Man CB Trip Fail Man CB Trip Fail LED 6
71 Man CB Cls Fail Man CB Cls Fail LED 7
72 Man CB Unhealthy Man CB Unhealthy LED 8
73 F out of Range NPS Alarm SG-opto Invalid
74 Thermal Alarm Thermal Alarm Prot'n Disabled
75 Freq Prot Alm V/Hz Alarm VT Fail Alarm
76 Voltage Prot Alm Field Fail Alarm CT Fail Alarm
77 CL Card I/P Fail RTD Thermal Alm CB Fail Alarm
78 CL Card O/P Fail RTD Open Cct I^ Maint Alarm
79 CL Input 1 Alarm RTD short Cct I^ Lockout Alarm
80 CL Input 2 Alarm RTD Data Error CB Ops Maint
81 CL Input 3 Alarm RTD Board Fail CB Ops Lockout
82 CL Input 4 Alarm Freq Prot Alm CB Op Time Maint
83 CLI1 I< Fail Alm Voltage Prot Alm CB Op Time Lock
84 CLI2 I< Fail Alm CL Card I/P Fail Fault Freq Lock
85 CLI3 I< Fail Alm CL Card O/P Fail CB Status Alarm
86 CLI4 I< Fail Alm CL Input 1 Alarm Man CB Trip Fail
87 MR User Alarm 16 CL Input 2 Alarm Man CB Cls Fail
88 MR User Alarm 15 CL Input 3 Alarm Man CB Unhealthy
89 MR User Alarm 14 CL Input 4 Alarm NPS Alarm
90 MR User Alarm 13 CLI1 I< Fail Alm Thermal Alarm
91 MR User Alarm 12 CLI2 I< Fail Alm V/Hz Alarm
92 MR User Alarm 11 CLI3 I< Fail Alm Field Fail Alarm
93 MR User Alarm 10 CLI4 I< Fail Alm RTD Thermal Alm
94 MR User Alarm 9 MR User Alarm 16 RTD Open Cct
95 MR User Alarm 8 MR User Alarm 15 RTD short Cct
96 MR User Alarm 7 MR User Alarm 14 RTD Data Error
97 MR User Alarm 6 MR User Alarm 13 RTD Board Fail
MiCOM P342, P343 Page 73/170
P341 P342 P343
98 MR User Alarm 5 MR User Alarm 12 Freq Prot Alm

99 SR User Alarm 4 MR User Alarm 11 Voltage Prot Alm
100 SR User Alarm 3 MR User Alarm 10 CL Card I/P Fail
101 SR User Alarm 2 MR User Alarm 9 CL Card O/P Fail
102 SR User Alarm 1 MR User Alarm 8 CL Input 1 Alarm
103 df/dt Trip MR User Alarm 7 CL Input 2 Alarm
104 V Shift Trip MR User Alarm 6 CL Input 3 Alarm
105 IN>1 Trip MR User Alarm 5 CL Input 4 Alarm
106 IN>2 Trip SR User Alarm 4 CLI1 I< Fail Alm
109 IREF> Trip SR User Alarm 1 CLI4 I< Fail Alm
110 ISEF>1 Trip Field Fail1 Trip MR User Alarm 16
111 ISEF>2 Trip Field Fail2 Trip MR User Alarm 15
112 ISEF>3 Trip NPS Trip MR User Alarm 14
113 ISEF>4 Trip V Dep OC Trip MR User Alarm 13
114 VN>1 Trip V Dep OC Trip A MR User Alarm 12
115 VN>2 Trip V Dep OC Trip B MR User Alarm 11
116 V<1 Trip V Dep OC Trip C MR User Alarm 10
117 V<1 Trip A/AB V/Hz Trip MR User Alarm 9
118 V<1 Trip B/BC RTD 1 Trip MR User Alarm 8
119 V<1 Trip C/CA RTD 2 Trip MR User Alarm 7
120 V<2 Trip RTD 3 Trip MR User Alarm 6
121 V<2 Trip A/AB RTD 4 Trip MR User Alarm 5
122 V<2 Trip B/BC RTD 5 Trip SR User Alarm 4
123 V<2 Trip C/CA RTD 6 Trip SR User Alarm 3
124 V>1 Trip RTD 7 Trip SR User Alarm 2
125 V>1 Trip A/AB RTD 8 Trip SR User Alarm 1
126 V>1 Trip B/BC RTD 9 Trip 100% ST EF Trip
127 V>1 Trip C/CA RTD 10 Trip DeadMachine Trip
128 V>2 Trip Any RTD Trip Gen Diff Trip
129 V>2 Trip A/AB IN>1 Trip Gen Diff Trip A
130 V>2 Trip B/BC IN>2 Trip Gen Diff Trip B
131 V>2 Trip C/CA IREF> Trip Gen Diff Trip C
132 F<1 Trip ISEF>1 Trip Field Fail1 Trip
133 F<2 Trip VN>1 Trip Field Fail2 Trip
134 F<3 Trip VN>2 Trip NPS Trip
135 F<4 Trip V<1 Trip V Dep OC Trip
136 F>1 Trip V<1 Trip A/AB V Dep OC Trip A
137 F>2 Trip V<1 Trip B/BC V Dep OC Trip B
138 Power1 Trip V<1 Trip C/CA V Dep OC Trip C
139 Power2 Trip V<2 Trip V/Hz Trip
140 I>1 Trip V<2 Trip A/AB RTD 1 Trip
141 I>1 Trip A V<2 Trip B/BC RTD 2 Trip
142 I>1 Trip B V<2 Trip C/CA RTD 3 Trip
143 I>1 Trip C V>1 Trip RTD 4 Trip
144 I>2 Trip V>1 Trip A/AB RTD 5 Trip
145 I>2 Trip A V>1 Trip B/BC RTD 6 Trip
146 I>2 Trip B V>1 Trip C/CA RTD 7 Trip
147 I>2 Trip C V>2 Trip RTD 8 Trip
MiCOM P342, P343 Page 74/170
P341 P342 P343
148 I>3 Trip V>2 Trip A/AB RTD 9 Trip

149 I>3 Trip A V>2 Trip B/BC RTD 10 Trip
150 I>3 Trip B V>2 Trip C/CA Any RTD Trip
151 I>3 Trip C F<1 Trip IN>1 Trip
152 I>4 Trip F<2 Trip IN>2 Trip
153 I>4 Trip A F<3 Trip IREF> Trip
154 I>4 Trip B F<4 Trip ISEF>1 Trip
155 I>4 Trip C F>1 Trip VN>1 Trip
156 Bfail1 Trip 3ph F>2 Trip VN>2 Trip
157 Bfail2 Trip 3ph Power1 Trip V<1 Trip
158 SPower1 Trip Power2 Trip V<1 Trip A/AB
159 SPower2 Trip I>1 Trip V<1 Trip B/BC
160 Thermal O/L Trip I>1 Trip A V<1 Trip C/CA
161 CL Input 1 Trip I>1 Trip B V<2 Trip
162 CL Input 2 Trip I>1 Trip C V<2 Trip A/AB
163 CL Input 3 Trip I>2 Trip V<2 Trip B/BC
164 CL Input 4 Trip I>2 Trip A V<2 Trip C/CA
165 Any Start I>2 Trip B V>1 Trip
166 VN>1 Start I>2 Trip C V>1 Trip A/AB
167 VN>2 Start Bfail1 Trip 3ph V>1 Trip B/BC
168 V<1 Start Bfail2 Trip 3ph V>1 Trip C/CA
169 V<1 Start A/AB SPower1 Trip V>2 Trip
170 V<1 Start B/BC SPower2 Trip V>2 Trip A/AB
171 V<1 Start C/CA Thermal O/L Trip V>2 Trip B/BC
172 V<2 Start Z<1 Trip V>2 Trip C/CA
173 V<2 Start A/AB Z<1 Trip A F<1 Trip
174 V<2 Start B/BC Z<1 Trip B F<2 Trip
175 V<2 Start C/CA Z<1 Trip C F<3 Trip
176 V>1 Start Z<2 Trip F<4 Trip
177 V>1 Start A/AB Z<2 Trip A F>1 Trip
178 V>1 Start B/BC Z<2 Trip B F>2 Trip
179 V>1 Start C/CA Z<2 Trip C Power1 Trip
180 V>2 Start CL Input 1 Trip Power2 Trip
181 V>2 Start A/AB CL Input 2 Trip I>1 Trip
182 V>2 Start B/BC CL Input 3 Trip I>1 Trip A
183 V>2 Start C/CA CL Input 4 Trip I>1 Trip B
184 Power1 Start Any Start I>1 Trip C
185 Power2 Start VN>1 Start I>2 Trip
186 I>1 Start VN>2 Start I>2 Trip A
187 I>1 Start A V<1 Start I>2 Trip B
188 I>1 Start B V<1 Start A/AB I>2 Trip C
189 I>1 Start C V<1 Start B/BC Bfail1 Trip 3ph
190 I>2 Start V<1 Start C/CA Bfail2 Trip 3ph
191 I>2 Start A V<2 Start SPower1 Trip
192 I>2 Start B V<2 Start A/AB SPower2 Trip
193 I>2 Start C V<2 Start B/BC PSlipz Z1 Trip
194 I>3 Start V<2 Start C/CA PSlipz Z2 Trip
195 I>3 Start A V>1 Start Thermal O/L Trip
196 I>3 Start B V>1 Start A/AB Z<1 Trip
197 I>3 Start C V>1 Start B/BC Z<1 Trip A
MiCOM P342, P343 Page 75/170
P341 P342 P343
198 I>4 Start V>1 Start C/CA Z<1 Trip B

199 I>4 Start A V>2 Start Z<1 Trip C
200 I>4 Start B V>2 Start A/AB Z<2 Trip
201 I>4 Start C V>2 Start B/BC Z<2 Trip A
202 IN>1 Start V>2 Start C/CA Z<2 Trip B
203 IN>2 Start Power1 Start Z<2 Trip C
204 IN>3 Start Power2 Start CL Input 1 Trip
205 IN>4 Start I>1 Start CL Input 2 Trip
206 ISEF>1 Start I>1 Start A CL Input 3 Trip
207 ISEF>2 Start I>1 Start B CL Input 4 Trip
208 ISEF>3 Start I>1 Start C Any Start
209 ISEF>4 Start I>2 Start VN>1 Start
210 F<1 Start I>2 Start A VN>2 Start
211 F<2 Start I>2 Start B V<1 Start
212 F<3 Start I>2 Start C V<1 Start A/AB
213 F<4 Start IN>1 Start V<1 Start B/BC
214 F>1 Start IN>2 Start V<1 Start C/CA
215 F>2 Start ISEF>1 Start V<2 Start
216 I> BlockStart F<1 Start V<2 Start A/AB
217 IN/SEF>Blk Start F<2 Start V<2 Start B/BC
218 df/dt Start F<3 Start V<2 Start C/CA
219 IA< Start F<4 Start V>1 Start
220 IB< Start F>1 Start V>1 Start A/AB
221 IC< Start F>2 Start V>1 Start B/BC
222 ISEF< Start IA< Start V>1 Start C/CA
223 SPower1 Start IB< Start V>2 Start
224 SPower2 Start IC< Start V>2 Start A/AB
225 CLI1 Alarm Start ISEF< Start V>2 Start B/BC
226 CLI2 Alarm Start IN< Start V>2 Start C/CA
227 CLI3 Alarm Start V/Hz Start Power1 Start
228 CLI4 Alarm Start FFail1 Start Power2 Start
229 CLI1 Trip Start FFail2 Start I>1 Start
230 CLI2 Trip Start V Dep OC Start I>1 Start A
231 CLI3 Trip Start V Dep OC Start A I>1 Start B
232 CLI4 Trip Start V Dep OC Start B I>1 Start C
233 VTS Fast Block V Dep OC Start C I>2 Start
234 VTS Slow Block SPower1 Start I>2 Start A
235 CTS Block SPower2 Start I>2 Start B
236 Control Trip Z<1 Start I>2 Start C
237 Control Close Z<1 Start A IN>1 Start
238 Close in Prog Z<1 Start B IN>2 Start
239 Reconnection Z<1 Start C ISEF>1 Start
240 Lockout Alarm Z<2 Start 100% ST EF Start
241 CB Open 3 ph Z<2 Start A F<1 Start
242 CB Closed 3 ph Z<2 Start B F<2 Start
243 Field volts fail Z<2 Start C F<3 Start
244 All Poles Dead CLI1 Alarm Start F<4 Start
245 Any Pole Dead CLI2 Alarm Start F>1 Start
246 Pole Dead A CLI3 Alarm Start F>2 Start
247 Pole Dead B CLI4 Alarm Start IA< Start
MiCOM P342, P343 Page 76/170
P341 P342 P343
248 Pole Dead C CLI1 Trip Start IB< Start

249 CLI2 Trip Start IC< Start
250 CLI3 Trip Start ISEF< Start
251 CLI4 Trip Start IN< Start
252 VTS Fast Block V/Hz Start
253 VTS Slow Block FFail1 Start
254 CTS Block FFail2 Start
255 RTD 1 Alarm V Dep OC Start
256 RTD 2 Alarm V Dep OC Start A
257 RTD 3 Alarm V Dep OC Start B
258 RTD 4 Alarm V Dep OC Start C
259 RTD 5 Alarm SPower1 Start
260 RTD 6 Alarm SPower2 Start
261 RTD 7 Alarm PSlipz Z1 Start
262 RTD 8 Alarm PSlipz Z2 Start
263 RTD 9 Alarm PSlipz LensStart
264 RTD 10 Alarm PSlipz BlindStrt
265 Lockout Alarm PSlipz ReactStrt
266 CB Open 3 ph Z<1 Start
267 CB Closed 3 ph Z<1 Start A
268 Field volts fail Z<1 Start B
269 All Poles Dead Z<1 Start C
270 Any Pole Dead Z<2 Start
271 Pole Dead A Z<2 Start A
272 Pole Dead B Z<2 Start B
273 Pole Dead C Z<2 Start C
274 CLI1 Alarm Start
278 CLI1 Trip Start
279 CLI2 Trip Start
280 CLI3 Trip Start
281 CLI4 Trip Start
282 VTS Fast Block
283 VTS Slow Block
284 CTS Block
285 RTD 1 Alarm
286 RTD 2 Alarm
287 RTD 3 Alarm
288 RTD 4 Alarm
289 RTD 5 Alarm
290 RTD 6 Alarm
291 RTD 7 Alarm
292 RTD 8 Alarm
293 RTD 9 Alarm
294 RTD 10 Alarm
295 Lockout Alarm
296 CB Open 3 ph
297 CB Closed 3 ph
MiCOM P342, P343 Page 77/170
P341 P342 P343
298 Field volts fail

299 All Poles Dead
300 Any Pole Dead
301 Pole Dead A
302 Pole Dead B
303 Pole Dead C
MiCOM P342, P343 Page 78/170
Measurements Range for Each G155 Selection
CLIO Output Default Default Pri/Sec

Unit Minimum Maximum Step Size
Measurement Minimum Maximum Multiplier
IA Magnitude A 0*I1 16*I1 0.01*I1 0*I1 1.2*I1 M4
IB Magnitude A 0*I1 16*I1 0.01*I1 0*I1 1.2*I1 M4
IC Magnitude A 0*I1 16*I1 0.01*I1 0*I1 1.2*I1 M4
IN Measured Mag A 0*I2 16*I2 0.01*I2 0*I2 1.2*I2 M5
IN Derived Mag A 0*I1 16*I1 0.01*I1 0*I1 1.2*I1 M4
I Sen Magnitude A 0*I3 16*I3 0.01*I3 0*I3 1.2*I3 M6
I1 Magnitude A 0*I1 16*I1 0.01*I1 0*I1 1.2*I1 M4
IA RMS A 0*I1 16*I1 0.01*I1 0*I1 1.2*I1 M4
IB RMS A 0*I1 16*I1 0.01*I1 0*I1 1.2*I1 M4
IC RMS A 0*I1 16*I1 0.01*I1 0*I1 1.2*I1 M4
VAB Magnitude V 0*V1 200*V1 0.1*V1 0*V1 140*V1 M1
VBC Magnitude V 0*V1 200*V1 0.1*V1 0*V1 140*V1 M1
VCA Magnitude V 0*V1 200*V1 0.1*V1 0*V1 140*V1 M1
VAN Magnitude V 0*V1 200*V1 0.1*V1 0*V1 80*V1 M1
VBN Magnitude V 0*V1 200*V1 0.1*V1 0*V1 80*V1 M1
VCN Magnitude V 0*V1 200*V1 0.1*V1 0*V1 80*V1 M1
VN Measured Mag V 0*V3 200*V3 0.1*V3 0*V3 80*V3 M3
VN Derived Mag V 0*V1 200*V1 0.1*V1 0*V1 80*V1 M1
V1 Magnitude V 0*V1 200*V1 0.1*V1 0*V1 80*V1 M1
VAN RMS V 0*V1 200*V1 0.1*V1 0*V1 80*V1 M1
VBN RMS V 0*V1 200*V1 0.1*V1 0*V1 80*V1 M1
VCN RMS V 0*V1 200*V1 0.1*V1 0*V1 80*V1 M1
Frequency Hz 0 70 0.01 45 65
3 Phase Watts W -6000*V1*I1 6000*V1*I1 1*V1*I1 0*V1*I1 300*V1*I1 M1*M4
A Phase Watts W -2000*V1*I1 2000*V1*I1 1*V1*I1 0*V1*I1 100*V1*I1 M1*M4
B Phase Watts W -2000*V1*I1 2000*V1*I1 1*V1*I1 0*V1*I1 100*V1*I1 M1*M4
C Phase Watts W -2000*V1*I1 2000*V1*I1 1*V1*I1 0*V1*I1 100*V1*I1 M1*M4
3 Phase Vars Var -6000*V1*I1 6000*V1*I1 1*V1*I1 0*V1*I1 300*V1*I1 M1*M4
A Phase Vars Var -2000*V1*I1 2000*V1*I1 1*V1*I1 0*V1*I1 100*V1*I1 M1*M4
B Phase Vars Var -2000*V1*I1 2000*V1*I1 1*V1*I1 0*V1*I1 100*V1*I1 M1*M4

MiCOM P342, P343 Page 79/170

C Phase Vars Var -2000*V1*I1 2000*V1*I1 1*V1*I1 0*V1*I1 100*V1*I1 M1*M4
3 Phase VA VA 0*V1*I1 6000*V1*I1 1*V1*I1 0*V1*I1 300*V1*I1 M1*M4
A Phase VA VA 0*V1*I1 2000*V1*I1 1*V1*I1 0*V1*I1 100*V1*I1 M1*M4
B Phase VA VA 0*V1*I1 2000*V1*I1 1*V1*I1 0*V1*I1 100*V1*I1 M1*M4
C Phase VA VA 0*V1*I1 2000*V1*I1 1*V1*I1 0*V1*I1 100*V1*I1 M1*M4
3Ph Power Factor -1 1 0.01 0 1
APh Power Factor -1 1 0.01 0 1
BPh Power Factor -1 1 0.01 0 1
CPh Power Factor -1 1 0.01 0 1
3Ph W Fix Demand W -6000*V1*I1 6000*V1*I1 1*V1*I1 0*V1*I1 300*V1*I1 M1*M4
3Ph Vars Fix Dem Var -6000*V1*I1 6000*V1*I1 1*V1*I1 0*V1*I1 300*V1*I1 M1*M4
IA Fixed Demand A 0*I1 16*I1 0.01*I1 0*I1 1.2*I1 M4
IB Fixed Demand A 0*I1 16*I1 0.01*I1 0*I1 1.2*I1 M4
IC Fixed Demand A 0*I1 16*I1 0.01*I1 0*I1 1.2*I1 M4
3 Ph W Roll Dem W -6000*V1*I1 6000*V1*I1 1*V1*I1 0*V1*I1 300*V1*I1 M1*M4
3Ph Vars RollDem Var -6000*V1*I1 6000*V1*I1 1*V1*I1 0*V1*I1 300*V1*I1 M1*M4
IA Roll Demand A 0*I1 16*I1 0.01*I1 0*I1 1.2*I1 M4
IB Roll Demand A 0*I1 16*I1 0.01*I1 0*I1 1.2*I1 M4
IC Roll Demand A 0*I1 16*I1 0.01*I1 0*I1 1.2*I1 M4
3Ph W Peak Dem W -6000*V1*I1 6000*V1*I1 1*V1*I1 0*V1*I1 300*V1*I1 M1*M4
3Ph Var Peak Dem Var -6000*V1*I1 6000*V1*I1 1*V1*I1 0*V1*I1 300*V1*I1 M1*M4
IA Peak Demand A 0*I1 16*I1 0.01*I1 0*I1 1.2*I1 M4
IB Peak Demand A 0*I1 16*I1 0.01*I1 0*I1 1.2*I1 M4
IC Peak Demand A 0*I1 16*I1 0.01*I1 0*I1 1.2*I1 M4
VN 3rd Harmonic V 0*V3 200*V3 0.1*V3 0*V3 80*V3 M3
NPS Thermal % 0 200 0.01 0 120
Thermal Overload % 0 200 0.01 0 120
RTD 1 °C -40 300 0.1 0 200
RTD 2 °C -40 300 0.1 0 200
RTD 3 °C -40 300 0.1 0 200
RTD 4 °C -40 300 0.1 0 200
RTD 5 °C -40 300 0.1 0 200
RTD 6 °C -40 300 0.1 0 200
RTD 7 °C -40 300 0.1 0 200
RTD 8 °C -40 300 0.1 0 200
RTD 9 °C -40 300 0.1 0 200

MiCOM P342, P343 Page 80/170

RTD 10 °C -40 300 0.1 0 200
CL Input 1 -9999 9999 0.1 0 9999
CL Input 2 -9999 9999 0.1 0 9999
CL Input 3 -9999 9999 0.1 0 9999
CL Input 4 -9999 9999 0.1 0 9999

MiCOM P342, P343 Page 81/170
Digital Data Bus
English Text
DDB No. Source Description P341 P342 P343
0123456789ABCDEF
0 Output Condition Output Relay 1 see 4B01 * * *

9 Output Condition Output Relay 10 see 4B0A * * *
10 Output Condition Output Relay 11 see 4B0B * * *
11 Output Condition Output Relay 12 see 4B0C * * *
12 Output Condition Output Relay 13 see 4B0D * * *
13 Output Condition Output Relay 14 see 4B0E * * *
14 Output Condition Output Relay 15 see 4B0F * * *
24 Output Condition Output Relay 25 see 4B19 *
25 Output Condition Output Relay 26 see 4B1A *
26 Output Condition Output Relay 27 see 4B1B *
27 Output Condition Output Relay 28 see 4B1C *
28 Output Condition Output Relay 29 see 4B1D *
29 Output Condition Output Relay 30 see 4B1E *
30 Output Condition Output Relay 31 see 4B1F *
31 Output Condition Output Relay 32 see 4B20 *
32 OPTO Opto Isolator Input 1 (setting group selector) see 4A01 * * *
33 OPTO Opto Isolator Input 2 (setting group selector) see 4A02 * * *
34 OPTO Opto Isolator Input 3 see 4A03 * * *
41 OPTO Opto Isolator Input 10 see 4A0A * * *
42 OPTO Opto Isolator Input 11 see 4A0B * * *
43 OPTO Opto Isolator Input 12 see 4A0C * * *
44 OPTO Opto Isolator Input 13 see 4A0D * * *
45 OPTO Opto Isolator Input 14 see 4A0E * * *
46 OPTO Opto Isolator Input 15 see 4A0F * * *
MiCOM P342, P343 Page 82/170
English Text
0123456789ABCDEF

56 OPTO Opto Isolator Input 25 see 4A19 *
57 OPTO Opto Isolator Input 26 see 4A1A *
58 OPTO Opto Isolator Input 27 see 4A1B *
59 OPTO Opto Isolator Input 28 see 4A1C *
60 OPTO Opto Isolator Input 29 see 4A1D *
61 OPTO Opto Isolator Input 30 see 4A1E *
62 OPTO Opto Isolator Input 31 see 4A1F *
63 OPTO Opto Isolator Input 32 see 4A20 *
64 Output Condition LED 1 LED 1 * * *
72 UNUSED
73 UNUSED
74 UNUSED
75 UNUSED
76 UNUSED
77 UNUSED
78 UNUSED
79 UNUSED
80 PSL LED Conditioner IN 1 LED Cond IN 1 * * *
88 UNUSED
89 UNUSED
90 UNUSED
91 UNUSED
92 UNUSED
93 UNUSED
94 UNUSED
95 UNUSED
96 UNUSED
97 UNUSED
MiCOM P342, P343 Page 83/170
English Text
0123456789ABCDEF
98 UNUSED
99 UNUSED
100 UNUSED
101 UNUSED
102 UNUSED
103 UNUSED
104 UNUSED
105 UNUSED
106 UNUSED
107 UNUSED
108 UNUSED
109 UNUSED
110 UNUSED
111 UNUSED
112 UNUSED
113 UNUSED
114 UNUSED
115 UNUSED
116 UNUSED
117 UNUSED
118 UNUSED
119 UNUSED
120 UNUSED
121 UNUSED
122 UNUSED
123 UNUSED
124 UNUSED
125 UNUSED
126 UNUSED
127 UNUSED
128 UNUSED
129 UNUSED
130 UNUSED
131 UNUSED
132 UNUSED
133 UNUSED
134 UNUSED
135 UNUSED
136 UNUSED
137 UNUSED
138 UNUSED
139 UNUSED
140 UNUSED
141 UNUSED
142 UNUSED
143 UNUSED
144 UNUSED
145 UNUSED
146 UNUSED
147 UNUSED
MiCOM P342, P343 Page 84/170
English Text
0123456789ABCDEF
148 UNUSED
149 UNUSED
150 UNUSED
151 UNUSED
152 UNUSED
153 UNUSED
154 UNUSED
155 UNUSED
156 UNUSED
157 UNUSED
158 UNUSED
159 UNUSED
160 PSL Relay Conditioner 1 Relay Cond 1 * * *
162 PSL Relay Conditioner 3 - Any Trip Any Trip * * *
184 PSL Relay Conditioner 25 Relay Cond 25 *
192 UNUSED
193 UNUSED
194 UNUSED
195 UNUSED
196 UNUSED
197 UNUSED
MiCOM P342, P343 Page 85/170
English Text
0123456789ABCDEF
198 UNUSED
199 UNUSED
200 UNUSED
201 UNUSED
202 UNUSED
203 UNUSED
204 UNUSED
205 UNUSED
206 UNUSED
207 UNUSED
208 UNUSED
209 UNUSED
210 UNUSED
211 UNUSED
212 UNUSED
213 UNUSED
214 UNUSED
215 UNUSED
216 UNUSED
217 UNUSED
218 UNUSED
219 UNUSED
220 UNUSED
221 UNUSED
222 UNUSED
223 UNUSED
224 PSL Timer in 1 Timer in 1 * * *
232 UNUSED
233 UNUSED
234 UNUSED
235 UNUSED
236 UNUSED
237 UNUSED
238 UNUSED
239 UNUSED
240 UNUSED
241 UNUSED
242 UNUSED
243 UNUSED
244 UNUSED
245 UNUSED
246 UNUSED
247 UNUSED
MiCOM P342, P343 Page 86/170
English Text
0123456789ABCDEF
248 UNUSED
249 UNUSED
250 UNUSED
251 UNUSED
252 UNUSED
253 UNUSED
254 UNUSED
255 UNUSED
256 Auxiliary Timer Timer out 1 Timer out 1 * * *
264 UNUSED
265 UNUSED
266 UNUSED
267 UNUSED
268 UNUSED
269 UNUSED
270 UNUSED
271 UNUSED
272 UNUSED
273 UNUSED
274 UNUSED
275 UNUSED
276 UNUSED
277 UNUSED
278 UNUSED
279 UNUSED
280 UNUSED
281 UNUSED
282 UNUSED
283 UNUSED
284 UNUSED
285 UNUSED
286 UNUSED
287 UNUSED
288 PSL Fault Record Trigger Input Fault REC TRIG * * *
289 UNUSED
290 Group Selection Setting Group via Opto Invalid SG-opto Invalid * * *
291 Commission Test Test Mode Enabled Prot'n Disabled * * *
292 VT Supervision VTS Indication VT Fail Alarm * * *
293 CT Supervision CTS Indication CT Fail Alarm * * *
294 Breaker Fail Breaker Fail Any Trip CB Fail Alarm * * *
295 CB Monitoring Broken Current Maintenance Alarm I^ Maint Alarm * * *
296 CB Monitoring Broken Current Lockout Alarm I^ Lockout Alarm * * *
297 CB Monitoring Number of CB Operations Maintenance Alarm CB Ops Maint * * *
MiCOM P342, P343 Page 87/170
English Text
0123456789ABCDEF
298 CB Monitoring Number of CB Operations Maintenance Lockout CB Ops Lockout * * *

299 CB Monitoring Excessive CB Operation Time Maintenance Alarm CB Op Time Maint * * *
300 CB Monitoring Excessive CB Operation Time Lockout Alarm CB Op Time Lock * * *
301 CB Monitoring Excessive Fault Frequency Lockout Alarm Fault Freq Lock * * *
302 CB Status CB Status Alarm CB Status Alarm * * *
303 CB Control CB Failed to Trip Man CB Trip Fail * * *
304 CB Control CB Failed to Close Man CB Cls Fail * * *
305 CB Control Control CB Unhealthy Man CB Unhealthy * * *
306 Frequency Tracking Frequency Out of Range F out of Range *
306 NPS Thermal Negative Phase Sequence Alarm NPS Alarm * *
307 Thermal Overload Thermal Overload Alarm Thermal Alarm * * *
308 Overfluxing Volts Per Hz Alarm V/Hz Alarm * *
309 Field Failure Field Failure Alarm Field Fail Alarm * *
310 RTD Thermal RTD Thermal Alarm RTD Thermal Alm * *
311 RTD Thermal RTD Open Circuit Failure RTD Open Cct * *
312 RTD Thermal RTD Short Circuit Failure RTD short Cct * *
313 RTD Thermal RTD Data Inconsistency Error RTD Data Error * *
314 RTD Thermal RTD Board Failure RTD Board Fail * *
315 PSL Frequency Protection Alarm Freq Prot Alm * * *
316 PSL Voltage Protection Alarm Voltage Prot Alm * * *
317 UNUSED
318 UNUSED
319 UNUSED
320 Current Loop Inputs CLIO Input Board Failure CL Card I/P Fail * * *
321 Current Loop Outputs CLIO Output Board Failure CL Card O/P Fail * * *
322 Current Loop Inputs Current Loop Input 1 Alarm CL Input 1 Alarm * * *
326 Current Loop Inputs Current Loop Input 1 Undercurrent Fail Alarm CLI1 I< Fail Alm * * *
330 UNUSED
331 UNUSED
332 UNUSED
333 UNUSED
334 UNUSED
335 UNUSED
336 PSL User Definable Alarm 16 (Manual Reset) MR User Alarm 16 * * *
MiCOM P342, P343 Page 88/170
English Text
0123456789ABCDEF

348 PSL User Definable Alarm 4 (Self Reset) SR User Alarm 4 * * *
352 PSL Block Voltage Dependant Overcurrent time delay VDepOC Timer Blk * *
353 PSL Block Under Impedance time delay UnderZ Timer Blk * *
354 PSL Block Phase Overcurrent Stage 1 time delay I>1 Timer Block * * *
355 PSL Block Phase Overcurrent Stage 2 time delay I>2 Timer Block * * *
356 PSL Block Phase Overcurrent Stage 3 time delay I>3 Timer Block *
357 PSL Block Phase Overcurrent Stage 4 time delay I>4 Timer Block *
358 PSL Block Earth Fault Stage 1 time delay IN>1 Timer Blk * * *
359 PSL Block Earth Fault Stage 2 time delay IN>2 Timer Blk * * *
360 PSL Block Earth Fault Stage 3 time delay IN>3 Timer Blk *
361 PSL Block Earth Fault Stage 4 time delay IN>4 Timer Blk *
362 PSL Block SEF Stage 1 time delay ISEF>1 Timer Blk * * *
363 PSL Block SEF Stage 2 time delay ISEF>2 Timer Blk *
366 PSL Logic Input Trip CB Init Trip CB *
367 PSL Logic Input Close CB Init Close CB *
368 PSL Block Residual Overvoltage Stage 1 time delay VN>1 Timer Blk * * *
369 PSL Block Residual Overvoltage Stage 2 time delay VN>2 Timer Blk * * *
370 PSL Block Phase Undervoltage Stage 1 time delay V<1 Timer Block * * *
371 PSL Block Phase Undervoltage Stage 2 time delay V<2 Timer Block * * *
372 PSL Block Phase Overvoltage Stage 1 time delay V>1 Timer Block * * *
373 PSL Block Phase Overvoltage Stage 2 time delay V>2 Timer Block * * *
374 PSL Block Underfrequency Stage 1 Timer F<1 timer Block * * *
375 PSL Block Underfrequency Stage 2 Timer F<2 Timer Block * * *
378 PSL Block Overfrequency Stage 1 Timer F>1 Timer Block * * *
379 PSL Block Overfrequency Stage 2 Timer F>2 Timer Block * * *
380 PSL External Trip 3ph Ext. Trip 3ph * * *
381 PSL 52-A (3 phase) CB Aux 3ph(52-A) * * *
382 PSL 52-B (3 phase) CB Aux 3ph(52-B) * * *
383 PSL CB Healthy CB Healthy * * *
384 PSL MCB/VTS opto MCB/VTS * * *
385 PSL Reset Manual CB Close Time Delay Reset Close Dly * * *
386 PSL Reset Latched Relays & LED’s Reset Relays/LED * * *
387 PSL Reset Lockout Opto Input Reset Lockout * * *
388 PSL Reset CB Maintenance Values Reset All Values * * *
389 PSL Reset NPS Thermal State Reset I2 Thermal * *
390 PSL Reset Thermal Overload State Reset ThermalO/L * * *
391 PSL IEC60870-5-103 Monitor Blocking Monitor Blocked * * *
392 PSL IEC60870-5-103 Command Blocking Command Blocked * * *
393 PSL Block Current Loop Input 1 protection CL Input 1 Blk * * *
MiCOM P342, P343 Page 89/170
English Text
0123456789ABCDEF
397 UNUSED
398 UNUSED
399 UNUSED
400 UNUSED
401 UNUSED
402 UNUSED
403 UNUSED
404 UNUSED
405 UNUSED
406 UNUSED
407 UNUSED
408 UNUSED
409 UNUSED
410 UNUSED
411 UNUSED
412 UNUSED
413 UNUSED
414 UNUSED
415 PSL Initiate Test Mode Test Mode * * *
416 100% Stator Earth Fault 100% Stator Earth Fault Trip 100% ST EF Trip *
417 Dead Machine Dead Machine Protection Trip DeadMachine Trip *
418 Generator Differential Generator Differential Trip 3ph Gen Diff Trip *
419 Generator Differential Generator Differential Trip A Gen Diff Trip A *
420 Generator Differential Generator Differential Trip B Gen Diff Trip B *
421 Generator Differential Generator Differential Trip C Gen Diff Trip C *
422 Field Failure Field Failure Stage 1 Trip Field Fail1 Trip * *
423 Field Failure Field Failure Stage 2 Trip Field Fail2 Trip * *
424 NPS Thermal Negative Phase Sequence Trip NPS Trip * *
425 System Backup Voltage Dependant Overcurrent Trip 3ph V Dep OC Trip * *
426 System Backup Voltage Dependant Overcurrent Trip A V Dep OC Trip A * *
427 System Backup Voltage Dependant Overcurrent Trip B V Dep OC Trip B * *
428 System Backup Voltage Dependant Overcurrent Trip C V Dep OC Trip C * *
429 Overfluxing Volts per Hz Trip V/Hz Trip * *
430 RTD Thermal RTD 1 Trip RTD 1 Trip * *
440 RTD Thermal Any RTD Trip Any RTD Trip * *
440 df/dt Rate Of Change Of Frequency Trip df/dt Trip *
441 Voltage Vector Shift Voltage Vector Shift Trip V Shift Trip *
442 Earth Fault 1st Stage EF Trip IN>1 Trip * * *
443 Earth Fault 2nd Stage EF Trip IN>2 Trip * * *
444 Earth Fault 3rd Stage EF Trip IN>3 Trip *
445 Earth Fault 4th Stage EF Trip IN>4 Trip *
MiCOM P342, P343 Page 90/170
English Text
0123456789ABCDEF
446 Restricted Earth Fault REF Trip IREF> Trip * * *

447 Sensitive Earth Fault 1st Stage SEF Trip ISEF>1 Trip * * *
448 Sensitive Earth Fault 2nd Stage SEF Trip ISEF>2 Trip *
449 Sensitive Earth Fault 3rd Stage SEF Trip ISEF>3 Trip *
450 Sensitive Earth Fault 4th Stage SEF Trip ISEF>4 Trip *
451 Neutral Displacement 1st Stage Residual O/V Trip VN>1 Trip * * *
452 Neutral Displacement 2nd Stage Residual O/V Trip VN>2 Trip * * *
453 Under Voltage 1st Stage Phase U/V Trip 3ph V<1 Trip * * *
454 Under Voltage 1st Stage Phase U/V Trip A/AB V<1 Trip A/AB * * *
455 Under Voltage 1st Stage Phase U/V Trip B/BC V<1 Trip B/BC * * *
456 Under Voltage 1st Stage Phase U/V Trip C/CA V<1 Trip C/CA * * *
457 Under Voltage 2nd Stage Phase U/V Trip 3ph V<2 Trip * * *
458 Under Voltage 2nd Stage Phase U/V Trip A/AB V<2 Trip A/AB * * *
459 Under Voltage 2nd Stage Phase U/V Trip B/BC V<2 Trip B/BC * * *
460 Under Voltage 2nd Stage Phase U/V Trip C/CA V<2 Trip C/CA * * *
461 Over Voltage 1st Stage Phase O/V Trip 3ph V>1 Trip * * *
462 Over Voltage 1st Stage Phase O/V Trip A/AB V>1 Trip A/AB * * *
463 Over Voltage 1st Stage Phase O/V Trip B/BC V>1 Trip B/BC * * *
464 Over Voltage 1st Stage Phase O/V Trip C/CA V>1 Trip C/CA * * *
465 Over Voltage 2nd Stage Phase O/V Trip 3ph V>2 Trip * * *
466 Over Voltage 2nd Stage Phase O/V Trip A/AB V>2 Trip A/AB * * *
467 Over Voltage 2nd Stage Phase O/V Trip B/BC V>2 Trip B/BC * * *
468 Over Voltage 2nd Stage Phase O/V Trip C/CA V>2 Trip C/CA * * *
469 Under Frequency Under Frequency Stage 1 Trip F<1 Trip * * *
473 Over Frequency Over Frequency Stage 1 Trip F>1 Trip * * *
474 Over Frequency Over Frequency Stage 2 Trip F>2 Trip * * *
475 Power Power Stage 1 Trip Power1 Trip * * *
476 Power Power Stage 2 Trip Power2 Trip * * *
477 Over Current 1st Stage O/C Trip 3ph I>1 Trip * * *
478 Over Current 1st Stage O/C Trip A I>1 Trip A * * *
479 Over Current 1st Stage O/C Trip B I>1 Trip B * * *
480 Over Current 1st Stage O/C Trip C I>1 Trip C * * *
481 Over Current 2nd Stage O/C Trip 3ph I>2 Trip * * *
482 Over Current 2nd Stage O/C Trip A I>2 Trip A * * *
483 Over Current 2nd Stage O/C Trip B I>2 Trip B * * *
484 Over Current 2nd Stage O/C Trip C I>2 Trip C * * *
485 Over Current 3rd Stage O/C Trip 3ph I>3 Trip *
486 Over Current 3rd Stage O/C Trip A I>3 Trip A *
487 Over Current 3rd Stage O/C Trip B I>3 Trip B *
488 Over Current 3rd Stage O/C Trip C I>3 Trip C *
489 Over Current 4th Stage O/C Trip 3ph I>4 Trip *
490 Over Current 4th Stage O/C Trip A I>4 Trip A *
491 Over Current 4th Stage O/C Trip B I>4 Trip B *
492 Over Current 4th Stage O/C Trip C I>4 Trip C *
493 Breaker failure tBF1 Trip 3ph Bfail1 Trip 3ph * * *
494 Breaker failure tBF2 Trip 3ph Bfail2 Trip 3ph * * *
495 Sensitive Power Sensitive A Phase Power Stage 1 Trip SPower1 Trip * * *
MiCOM P342, P343 Page 91/170
English Text
0123456789ABCDEF
496 Sensitive Power Sensitive A Phase Power Stage 2 Trip SPower2 Trip * * *
497 Z based Pole Slipping Pole Slip (Impedance) Zone1 Trip PSlipz Z1 Trip *
498 Z based Pole Slipping Pole Slip (Impedance) Zone2 Trip PSlipz Z2 Trip *
499 Thermal Overload Thermal Overload Trip Thermal O/L Trip * * *
500 System Backup Underimpedance 3Phase Stage 1 Trip Z<1 Trip * *
501 System Backup Underimpedance Phase A Stage 1 Trip Z<1 Trip A * *
502 System Backup Underimpedance Phase B Stage 1 Trip Z<1 Trip B * *
503 System Backup Underimpedance Phase C Stage 1 Trip Z<1 Trip C * *
504 System Backup Underimpedance 3Phase Stage 2 Trip Z<2 Trip * *
505 System Backup Underimpedance Phase A Stage 2 Trip Z<2 Trip A * *
506 System Backup Underimpedance Phase B Stage 2 Trip Z<2 Trip B * *
507 System Backup Underimpedance Phase C Stage 2 Trip Z<2 Trip C * *
508 Current Loop Inputs Current Loop Input 1 Trip CL Input 1 Trip * * *
512 UNUSED
513 UNUSED
514 UNUSED
515 UNUSED
516 UNUSED
517 UNUSED
518 UNUSED
519 UNUSED
520 UNUSED
521 UNUSED
522 UNUSED
523 UNUSED
524 UNUSED
525 UNUSED
526 UNUSED
527 UNUSED
528 UNUSED
529 UNUSED
530 UNUSED
531 UNUSED
532 UNUSED
533 UNUSED
534 UNUSED
535 UNUSED
536 UNUSED
537 UNUSED
538 UNUSED
539 UNUSED
540 UNUSED
541 UNUSED
542 UNUSED
543 UNUSED
544 UNUSED
545 UNUSED
MiCOM P342, P343 Page 92/170
English Text
0123456789ABCDEF
546 UNUSED
547 UNUSED
548 UNUSED
549 UNUSED
550 UNUSED
551 UNUSED
552 UNUSED
553 UNUSED
554 UNUSED
555 UNUSED
556 UNUSED
557 UNUSED
558 UNUSED
559 UNUSED
560 UNUSED
561 UNUSED
562 UNUSED
563 UNUSED
564 UNUSED
565 UNUSED
566 UNUSED
567 UNUSED
568 UNUSED
569 UNUSED
570 UNUSED
571 UNUSED
572 UNUSED
573 UNUSED
574 UNUSED
575 UNUSED
576 All protection Any Start Any Start * * *
577 Neutral displacement 1st Stage Residual O/V Start VN>1 Start * * *
578 Neutral displacement 2nd Stage Residual O/V Start VN>2 Start * * *
579 Under Voltage 1st Stage Phase U/V Start 3ph V<1 Start * * *
580 Under Voltage 1st Stage Phase U/V Start A/AB V<1 Start A/AB * * *
581 Under Voltage 1st Stage Phase U/V Start B/BC V<1 Start B/BC * * *
582 Under Voltage 1st Stage Phase U/V Start C/CA V<1 Start C/CA * * *
583 Under Voltage 2nd Stage Phase U/V Start 3ph V<2 Start * * *
584 Under Voltage 2nd Stage Phase U/V Start A/AB V<2 Start A/AB * * *
585 Under Voltage 2nd Stage Phase U/V Start B/BC V<2 Start B/BC * * *
586 Under Voltage 2nd Stage Phase U/V Start C/CA V<2 Start C/CA * * *
587 Over Voltage 1st Stage Phase O/V Start 3ph V>1 Start * * *
588 Over Voltage 1st Stage Phase O/V Start A/AB V>1 Start A/AB * * *
589 Over Voltage 1st Stage Phase O/V Start B/BC V>1 Start B/BC * * *
590 Over Voltage 1st Stage Phase O/V Start C/CA V>1 Start C/CA * * *
591 Over Voltage 2nd Stage Phase O/V Start 3ph V>2 Start * * *
592 Over Voltage 2nd Stage Phase O/V Start A/AB V>2 Start A/AB * * *
593 Over Voltage 2nd Stage Phase O/V Start B/BC V>2 Start B/BC * * *
594 Over Voltage 2nd Stage Phase O/V Start C/CA V>2 Start C/CA * * *
595 Power Power Stage 1 Start Power1 Start * * *
MiCOM P342, P343 Page 93/170
English Text
0123456789ABCDEF
596 Power Power Stage 2 Start Power2 Start * * *

597 Over Current 1st Stage O/C Start 3ph I>1 Start * * *
598 Over Current 1st Stage O/C Start A I>1 Start A * * *
599 Over Current 1st Stage O/C Start B I>1 Start B * * *
600 Over Current 1st Stage O/C Start C I>1 Start C * * *
601 Over Current 2nd Stage O/C Start 3ph I>2 Start * * *
602 Over Current 2nd Stage O/C Start A I>2 Start A * * *
603 Over Current 2nd Stage O/C Start B I>2 Start B * * *
604 Over Current 2nd Stage O/C Start C I>2 Start C * * *
605 Over Current 3rd Stage O/C Start 3ph I>3 Start *
606 Over Current 3rd Stage O/C Start A I>3 Start A *
607 Over Current 3rd Stage O/C Start B I>3 Start B *
608 Over Current 3rd Stage O/C Start C I>3 Start C *
609 Over Current 4th Stage O/C Start 3ph I>4 Start *
610 Over Current 4th Stage O/C Start A I>4 Start A *
611 Over Current 4th Stage O/C Start B I>4 Start B *
612 Over Current 4th Stage O/C Start C I>4 Start C *
613 Earth Fault 1st Stage EF Start IN>1 Start * * *
614 Earth Fault 2nd Stage EF Start IN>2 Start * * *
615 Earth Fault 3rd Stage EF Start IN>3 Start *
616 Earth Fault 4th Stage EF Start IN>4 Start *
617 Sensitive Earth Fault 1st Stage SEF Start ISEF>1 Start * * *
618 Sensitive Earth Fault 2nd Stage SEF Start ISEF>2 Start *
619 Sensitive Earth Fault 3rd Stage SEF Start ISEF>3 Start *
620 Sensitive Earth Fault 4th Stage SEF Start ISEF>4 Start *
621 100% Stator Earth Fault 100% Stator Earth Fault Start 100% ST EF Start *
622 Under Frequency Under Frequency Stage 1 Start F<1 Start * * *
626 Over Frequency Over Frequency Stage 1 Start F>1 Start * * *
627 Over Frequency Over Frequency Stage 2 Start F>2 Start * * *
628 Over Current I> Blocked O/C Start I> BlockStart *
629 Over Current IN/ISEF> Blocked O/C Start IN/SEF>Blk Start *
630 df/dt Rate Of Change Of Frequency Start df/dt Start *
631 Under Current IA< Operate IA< Start * * *
632 Under Current IB< Operate IB< Start * * *
633 Under Current IC< Operate IC< Start * * *
634 Under Current ISEF< Operate ISEF< Start * * *
635 Under Current IN< Operate IN< Start * *
636 Overfluxing Volts per Hz Start V/Hz Start * *
637 Field Failure Field Failure Stage 1 Start FFail1 Start * *
638 Field Failure Field Failure Stage 2 Start FFail2 Start * *
639 System Backup Voltage Dependant Overcurrent Start 3Ph V Dep OC Start * *
640 System Backup Voltage Dependant Overcurrent Start A V Dep OC Start A * *
641 System Backup Voltage Dependant Overcurrent Start B V Dep OC Start B * *
642 System Backup Voltage Dependant Overcurrent Start C V Dep OC Start C * *
643 Sensitive Power Sensitive A Phase Power Stage 1 Start SPower1 Start * * *
644 Sensitive Power Sensitive A Phase Power Stage 2 Start SPower2 Start * * *
645 Z based Pole Slipping Pole Slip (Impedance) Zone1 Start PSlipz Z1 Start *
MiCOM P342, P343 Page 94/170
English Text
0123456789ABCDEF
646 Z based Pole Slipping Pole Slip (Impedance) Zone2 Start PSlipz Z2 Start *
647 Z based Pole Slipping Pole Slip (impedance) Lens Start PSlipz LensStart *
648 Z based Pole Slipping Pole Slip (impedance) Blinder Start PSlipz BlindStrt *
649 Z based Pole Slipping Pole Slip (impedance) Reactance Line Start PSlipz ReactStrt *
650 System Backup Underimpedance 3Phase Stage 1 Start Z<1 Start * *
651 System Backup Underimpedance Phase A Stage 1 Start Z<1 Start A * *
652 System Backup Underimpedance Phase B Stage 1 Start Z<1 Start B * *
653 System Backup Underimpedance Phase C Stage 1 Start Z<1 Start C * *
654 System Backup Underimpedance 3Phase Stage 2 Start Z<2 Start * *
655 System Backup Underimpedance Phase A Stage 2 Start Z<2 Start A * *
656 System Backup Underimpedance Phase B Stage 2 Start Z<2 Start B * *
657 System Backup Underimpedance Phase C Stage 2 Start Z<2 Start C * *
658 Current Loop Inputs Current Loop Input 1 Alarm Start CLI1 Alarm Start * * *
662 Current Loop Inputs Current Loop Input 1 Trip Start CLI1 Trip Start * * *
666 UNUSED
667 UNUSED
668 UNUSED
669 UNUSED
670 UNUSED
671 UNUSED
672 UNUSED
673 UNUSED
674 UNUSED
675 UNUSED
676 UNUSED
677 UNUSED
678 UNUSED
679 UNUSED
680 UNUSED
681 UNUSED
682 UNUSED
683 UNUSED
684 UNUSED
685 UNUSED
686 UNUSED
687 UNUSED
688 UNUSED
689 UNUSED
690 UNUSED
691 UNUSED
692 UNUSED
693 UNUSED
694 UNUSED
695 UNUSED
MiCOM P342, P343 Page 95/170
English Text
0123456789ABCDEF
696 UNUSED
697 UNUSED
698 UNUSED
699 UNUSED
700 UNUSED
701 UNUSED
702 UNUSED
703 UNUSED
704 UNUSED
705 UNUSED
706 UNUSED
707 UNUSED
708 UNUSED
709 UNUSED
710 UNUSED
711 UNUSED
712 UNUSED
713 UNUSED
714 UNUSED
715 UNUSED
716 UNUSED
717 UNUSED
718 UNUSED
719 UNUSED
720 UNUSED
721 UNUSED
722 UNUSED
723 UNUSED
724 UNUSED
725 UNUSED
726 UNUSED
727 UNUSED
728 UNUSED
729 UNUSED
730 UNUSED
731 UNUSED
732 UNUSED
733 UNUSED
734 UNUSED
735 UNUSED
736 VT Supervision VTS Fast Block VTS Fast Block * * *
737 VT Supervision VTS Slow Block VTS Slow Block * * *
738 CT Supervision CTS Block CTS Block * * *
739 CB Control Control Trip Control Trip *
740 CB Control Control Close Control Close *
741 CB Control Control Close in Progress Close in Prog *
742 Reconnection Reconnection Time Delay Output Reconnection *
743 RTD Thermal RTD 1 Alarm RTD 1 Alarm * *
MiCOM P342, P343 Page 96/170
English Text
0123456789ABCDEF

753 CB Monitoring Composite Lockout Alarm Lockout Alarm * * *
754 CB Status Monitor 3 ph CB Open CB Open 3 ph * * *
755 CB Status Monitor 3 ph CB Closed CB Closed 3 ph * * *
756 Field Voltage Monitor Field Voltage Failure Field volts fail * * *
757 Poledead All Poles Dead All Poles Dead * * *
758 Poledead Any Pole Dead Any Pole Dead * * *
759 Poledead Phase A Pole Dead Pole Dead A * * *
760 Poledead Phase B Pole Dead Pole Dead B * * *
761 Poledead Phase C Pole Dead Pole Dead C * * *
762 VT Supervision VTS Accelerate Ind VTS Acc Ind * * *
763 VT Supervision Any Voltage Dependent VTS Volt Dep * * *
764 VT Supervision Ia Over Threshold VTS IA> * * *
765 VT Supervision Ib Over Threshold VTS IB> * * *
766 VT Supervision Ic Over Threshold VTS IC> * * *
767 VT Supervision Va Over Threshold VTS VA> * * *
768 VT Supervision Vb Over Threshold VTS VB> * * *
769 VT Supervision Vc Over Threshold VTS VC> * * *
770 VT Supervision I2 Over Threshold VTS I2> * * *
771 VT Supervision V2 Over Threshold VTS V2> * * *
772 VT Supervision Superimposed Ia Over Threshold VTS IA delta> * * *
773 VT Supervision Superimposed Ib Over Threshold VTS IB delta> * * *
774 VT Supervision Superimposed Ic Over Threshold VTS IC delta> * * *
775 CB Failure CBF Current Prot SEF Stage Trip BFail SEF Trip-1 * * *
776 CB Failure CBF Non Current Prot Stage Trip BFail Non I Tr-1 * * *
777 CB Failure CBF Current Prot SEF Trip BFail SEF Trip * * *
778 CB Failure CBF Non Current Prot Trip BFail Non I Trip * * *
779 Frequency tracking Freq High Freq High * * *
780 Frequency tracking Freq Low Freq Low * * *
781 Frequency tracking Freq Not Found Freq Not found * * *
782 Frequency tracking Stop Freq Track Stop Freq Track * * *
783 Reconnection Reconnect LOM (Unqualified) Recon LOM-1 *
784 Reconnection Reconnect Disable (Unqualified) Recon Disable-1 *
785 Reconnection Reconnect LOM Recon LOM *
786 Reconnection Reconnect Disable Recon Disable *
787 UNUSED
788 UNUSED
789 UNUSED
790 UNUSED
791 UNUSED
792 UNUSED
793 UNUSED
794 UNUSED
795 UNUSED
MiCOM P342, P343 Page 97/170
English Text
0123456789ABCDEF
796 UNUSED
797 UNUSED
798 UNUSED
799 UNUSED
800 UNUSED
801 UNUSED
802 UNUSED
803 UNUSED
804 UNUSED
805 UNUSED
806 UNUSED
807 UNUSED
808 UNUSED
809 UNUSED
810 UNUSED
811 UNUSED
812 UNUSED
813 UNUSED
814 UNUSED
815 UNUSED
816 UNUSED
817 UNUSED
818 UNUSED
819 UNUSED
820 UNUSED
821 UNUSED
822 UNUSED
823 UNUSED
824 UNUSED
825 UNUSED
826 UNUSED
827 UNUSED
828 UNUSED
829 UNUSED
830 UNUSED
831 UNUSED
832 CONTROL Control Input 1 Control Input 1 * * *
MiCOM P342, P343 Page 98/170
English Text
0123456789ABCDEF

864 UNUSED
865 UNUSED
866 UNUSED
867 UNUSED
868 UNUSED
869 UNUSED
870 UNUSED
871 UNUSED
872 UNUSED
873 UNUSED
874 UNUSED
875 UNUSED
876 UNUSED
877 UNUSED
878 UNUSED
879 UNUSED
880 UNUSED
881 UNUSED
882 UNUSED
883 UNUSED
884 UNUSED
885 UNUSED
886 UNUSED
887 UNUSED
888 UNUSED
889 UNUSED
890 UNUSED
891 UNUSED
892 UNUSED
893 UNUSED
894 UNUSED
895 UNUSED
MiCOM P342, P343 Page 99/170
English Text
0123456789ABCDEF
896 UNUSED
897 UNUSED
898 UNUSED
899 UNUSED
900 UNUSED
901 UNUSED
902 UNUSED
903 UNUSED
904 UNUSED
905 UNUSED
906 UNUSED
907 UNUSED
908 UNUSED
909 UNUSED
910 UNUSED
911 UNUSED
912 UNUSED
913 UNUSED
914 UNUSED
915 UNUSED
916 UNUSED
917 UNUSED
918 UNUSED
919 UNUSED
920 UNUSED
921 UNUSED
922 UNUSED
923 UNUSED
924 UNUSED
925 UNUSED
926 UNUSED
927 UNUSED
928 PSLINT PSL Int. 1 * * *
MiCOM P342, P343 Page 100/170
English Text
0123456789ABCDEF

MiCOM P342, P343 Page 101/170
English Text
0123456789ABCDEF

MiCOM P342, P343 Page 102/170
This sheet contains all the text used in Events and all other messages
Courier Events: Cell Ref. Text Value (Binary Flag)

Opto Input Events: 0020 Logic inputs 32 bit binary flag value
Contact Events: 0021 Output Contacts 32 bit binary flag value
Alarm Status 1 Events (Alarms 1 - 32):
Not Used 0022 0 Alarm Name + ON/OFF 00000000000000000000000000000001
SG-opto Invalid 0022 2 Alarm Name + ON/OFF 00000000000000000000000000000100
Prot'n Disabled 0022 3 Alarm Name + ON/OFF 00000000000000000000000000001000
VT Fail Alarm 0022 4 Alarm Name + ON/OFF 00000000000000000000000000010000
CTS Fail Alarm 0022 5 Alarm Name + ON/OFF 00000000000000000000000000100000
CB Fail 0022 6 Alarm Name + ON/OFF 00000000000000000000000001000000
I^ Maint Alarm 0022 7 Alarm Name + ON/OFF 00000000000000000000000010000000
I^ Maint Lockout 0022 8 Alarm Name + ON/OFF 00000000000000000000000100000000
CB OPs Maint 0022 9 Alarm Name + ON/OFF 00000000000000000000001000000000
CB OPs Lock 0022 10 Alarm Name + ON/OFF 00000000000000000000010000000000
CB Time Maint 0022 11 Alarm Name + ON/OFF 00000000000000000000100000000000
CB Time Lockout 0022 12 Alarm Name + ON/OFF 00000000000000000001000000000000
Fault Freq Lock 0022 13 Alarm Name + ON/OFF 00000000000000000010000000000000
CB Status Alarm 0022 14 Alarm Name + ON/OFF 00000000000000000100000000000000
CB Trip Fail 0022 15 Alarm Name + ON/OFF 00000000000000001000000000000000
CB Close Fail 0022 16 Alarm Name + ON/OFF 00000000000000010000000000000000
Man CB Unhealthy 0022 17 Alarm Name + ON/OFF 00000000000000100000000000000000
F out of Range Model 1 only 0022 18 Alarm Name + ON/OFF 00000000000001000000000000000000
NPS Alarm Models 2 & 3 only 0022 18 Alarm Name + ON/OFF 00000000000001000000000000000000
Thermal Alarm 0022 19 Alarm Name + ON/OFF 00000000000010000000000000000000
V/Hz Alarm 0022 20 Alarm Name + ON/OFF 00000000000100000000000000000000
Field Fail Alarm 0022 21 Alarm Name + ON/OFF 00000000001000000000000000000000
RTD Thermal Alm 0022 22 Alarm Name + ON/OFF 00000000010000000000000000000000
RTD Open Cct 0022 23 Alarm Name + ON/OFF 00000000100000000000000000000000
RTD short Cct 0022 24 Alarm Name + ON/OFF 00000001000000000000000000000000
RTD Data Error 0022 25 Alarm Name + ON/OFF 00000010000000000000000000000000
RTD Board Fail 0022 26 Alarm Name + ON/OFF 00000100000000000000000000000000
Freq Prot Alm 0022 27 Alarm Name + ON/OFF 00001000000000000000000000000000
Voltage Prot Alm 0022 28 Alarm Name + ON/OFF 00010000000000000000000000000000
CL Card I/P Fail 0051 0 Alarm Name + ON/OFF 00000000000000000000000000000001
CL Card O/P Fail 0051 1 Alarm Name + ON/OFF 00000000000000000000000000000010
CL Input 1 Alarm 0051 2 Alarm Name + ON/OFF 00000000000000000000000000000100
CLI1 I< Fail Alm 0051 6 Alarm Name + ON/OFF 00000000000000000000000001000000
MR User Alarm 16 0051 16 Alarm Name + ON/OFF 00000000000000010000000000000000
SR User Alarm 4 0051 28 Alarm Name + ON/OFF 00010000000000000000000000000000
Battery Fail 0052 0 Alarm Name + ON/OFF 00000000000000000000000000000001
Field Volt Fail 0052 1 Alarm Name + ON/OFF 00000000000000000000000000000010
GOOSE IED Absent 0052 3 Alarm Name + ON/OFF 00000000000000000000000000001000
NIC not fitted 0052 4 Alarm Name + ON/OFF 00000000000000000000000000010000
NIC no response 0052 5 Alarm Name + ON/OFF 00000000000000000000000000100000
NIC fatal error 0052 6 Alarm Name + ON/OFF 00000000000000000000000001000000
MiCOM P342, P343 Page 103/170

NIC Software Reload 0052 7 Alarm Name + ON/OFF 00000000000000000000000010000000
Bad TCP/IP Configuration 0052 8 Alarm Name + ON/OFF 00000000000000000000000100000000
Bad OSI Configuration 0052 9 Alarm Name + ON/OFF 00000000000000000000001000000000
NIC Link Fail 0052 10 Alarm Name + ON/OFF 00000000000000000000010000000000
NIC SW-Mismatch 0052 11 Alarm Name + ON/OFF 00000000000000000000100000000000
IP addr conflict 0052 12 Alarm Name + ON/OFF 00000000000000000001000000000000
Protection Events: Cell Ref. Text Value

0F26 - 0F3F DDB Signal Name ON/OFF 32bit Binary Flag of the revelant packed DDB
Fault Records: Cell Ref. Event Extraction Column Text Value Record Number
0100 B000 Fault Record 0 16bit UINT
Self Monitoring:
Cell Ref. Event Extraction Column Text Value (32bit UINT) Record Number
(List is not exhaustive)
Bus Check Failure FFFF B100 Bus Failure 1 16bit UINT
SRAM Failure FFFF SRAM Failure 2
BB RAM Failure FFFF BB RAM Failure 3
LCD Failure FFFF LCD Failure 4
Watchdog 1 Failure (Fast) FFFF Watchdog 1 Fail 5
Watchdog 2 Failure (Slow) FFFF Watchdog 2 Fail 6
Field Voltage Failure FFFF Field Volt Fail 7
Flash EPROM Failure FFFF FlashEEPROM Fail 8
EEPROM Failure FFFF EEPROM Fail 9
Cal EEPROM Failure FFFF Cal EEPROM Fail 10
Incorrect Hardware Configuration FFFF Invalid H/W 11
Power Up Boot FFFF Power Up Boot 12
Soft Reboot FFFF Soft Reboot 13
Setting Changes: Cell Ref. Text Value
C & S Change FFFF Settings Updated 0
Group 1 Change 0905 Group 1 Updated 1
Disturbance Recorder 0C01 Disturbance Settings 0
Active Group Change 0904 Active Group Changed (UINT of New Active Group)
General Events:
Time Sync
Password Unlocked 0002 Password Unlocked [New Access Level]
Password Invalid 0002 Password Invalid 0
Password Modified level 1 00D2 Password 1 Edit 0
Password Modified level 2 00D3 Password 2 Edit 0
Password Expired 0002 Password Expired [ Password Level]
IRIG-B Active 0803 IRIG-B Active 1
IRIG-B Inactive 0803 IRIG-B Inactive 0
MiCOM P342, P343 Page 104/170
IEC60870-5-103: Device Profile

Vendor Name: Alstom T&D - Energy, Automation & Information
Device Name: P340 Generator Protection
Models Covered: P341****3**07**
P342****3**07**
P343****3**07**
Compatibility
2
Level:
Physical Layer
Electrical Interface: EIA(RS)485
Number of Loads: 1 for one protection equipment
Optical Interface
Plastic fibre BFOC/2.5 type connector
(Order Option)
Transmission Speed: 9600 or 19200bps (User Setting)
Application Layer
Common Address of ASDU = Link Address
Compatible Range Information Numbers in Monitor Direction
Inf. Model Number

ASDU TYPE COT FUN Description GI Interpretation DDB Ordinal
No. 1 2 3 4 5 6
System Functions
8 10 255 0 End of General Interrogration * * *
6 8 255 0 Time Synchronisation * * *
5 3 224 2 Reset FCB * * *
5 4 224 3 Reset CU * * *
5 5 224 4 Start/Restart * * *
5 6 224 5 Power On * * *
Note: Indentification message in ASDU 5: "ALSTOM P" + 16bit model + 8bit major version + 1 character minor version e.g. "ALSTOM P" + 343 + 06 + 'A'
Status Indications
1 1,7,9,11,12,20,21 224 16 Auto-recloser active *
1 1,7,9,11,12,20,21 224 17 Tele-protection active *
1 1,7,9,11,12,20,21 224 18 Protection active *
1 1,7,11,12,20, 21 224 19 LED Reset * * * Reset Indications
1 9,11 224 20 Monitor direction blocked * * * * 391
1 9,11 224 21 Test mode * * * * Protection Disabled 291
1 9,11 224 22 Local parameter setting *
1 1,7,9,11,12,20,21 224 23 Characteristic 1 * * * * PG1 Changed
1 1,7,9,11 224 27 Auxillary input 1 * * * * Opto Input 1 32
Supervision Indications
1 1,7,9 224 32 Measurand supervision I *
1 1,7,9 224 33 Measurand supervision V *
1 1,7,9 224 35 Phase sequence supervision *
1 1,7,9 224 36 Trip circuit supervision *
1 1,7,9 224 37 I>> back-up supervision *
1 1,7,9 224 38 VT fuse failure * * * * VTS Indication 292
1 1,7,9 224 39 Teleprotection disturbed *
1 1,7,9 224 46 Group warning *
1 1,7,9 224 47 Group alarm *
Earth Fault Indications
1 1,7,9 224 48 Earth Fault L1 *
1 1,7,9 224 49 Earth Fault L2 *
1 1,7,9 224 50 Earth Fault L3 *
1 1,7,9 224 51 Earth Fault Fwd *
MiCOM P342, P343 Page 105/170
Inf. Model Number

No. 1 2 3 4 5 6
1 1,7,9 224 52 Earth Fault Rev *
Fault Indications
2 1,7,9 224 64 Start /pickup L1 * * * * 1st Stage O/C Start A 598
2 1,7,9 224 65 Start /pickup L2 * * * * 1st Stage O/C Start B 599
2 1,7,9 224 66 Start /pickup L3 * * * * 1st Stage O/C Start C 600
2 1,7,9 224 67 Start /pickup N * * * * 1st Stage EF Start 613
2 1,7 224 68 General Trip * * * Any Trip 162
2 1,7 224 69 Trip L1 * * * 1st Stage O/C Trip A 478
2 1,7 224 70 Trip L2 * * * 1st Stage O/C Trip B 479
2 1,7 224 71 Trip L3 * * * 1st Stage O/C Trip C 480
2 1,7 224 72 Trip I>> (back up)
4 1,7 224 73 Fault Location in ohms
2 1,7 224 74 Fault forward
2 1,7 224 75 Fault reverse
2 1,7 224 76 Teleprotection signal sent
2 1,7 224 77 Teleprotection signal received
2 1,7 224 78 Zone 1
2 1,7 224 79 Zone 2
2 1,7 224 80 Zone 3
2 1,7 224 81 Zone 4
2 1,7 224 82 Zone 5
2 1,7 224 83 Zone 6
2 1,7,9 224 84 General Start * * * * Any Start 576
2 1,7 224 85 Breaker Failure * * * Breaker Fail Any Trip 294
2 1,7 224 86 Trip measuring system L1
2 1,7 224 89 Trip measuring system E
2 1,7 224 90 Trip I> * * * 1st Stage O/C Trip 3ph 477
2 1,7 224 91 Trip I>> * * * 2nd Stage O/C Trip 3ph 481
2 1,7 224 92 Trip IN> * * * 1st Stage EF Trip 442
2 1,7 224 93 Trip IN>> * * * 2nd Stage EF Trip 443
Auto-Reclose Indications
1 1,7 224 128 CB 'on' by A/R
1 1,7 224 129 CB 'on' by long time A/R
1 1,7,9 224 130 AR blocked *
Measurands
3.1 2,7 224 144 Measurand I
3.2 2,7 224 145 Measurands I,V
3.3 2,7 224 146 Measurands I,V,P,Q
3.4 2,7 224 147 Measurands IN,VEN
Measurands
9 2,7 224 148 * * * Note unavailable measurands sent as invalid
IL1,2,3,VL1,2,3,P,Q,f
Generic Functions
10 42,43 224 240 Read Headings
Read attributes of all entries of a
10 42,43 224 241
group
10 42,43 224 243 Read directory of entry
1,2,7,9,11,12,
10 224 244 Real attribute of entry *
42,43
10 10 224 245 End of GGI
10 41,44 224 249 Write entry with confirm
10 40,41 224 250 Write entry with execute
10 40 224 251 Write entry aborted
MiCOM P342, P343 Page 106/170
Inf. Model Number

No. 1 2 3 4 5 6
Compatible Range Information Numbers in Control Direction
Inf. Model Number

No. 1 2 3 4 5 6
System Functions
7 9 255 0 Init General Interrogation * * *
6 8 255 0 Time Synchronisation * * *
General Commands
20 20 224 16 Auto-recloser on/off Autoreclose in Service
20 20 224 17 Teleprotection on/off
20 20 224 18 Protection on/off
20 20 224 19 LED Reset * * * Reset Indications and Latches
20 20 224 23 Activate characteristic 1 * * * Activate Setting Group 1
Generic Functions
Read headings of all defined
21 42 224 240
groups
Read single attribute of all entries
21 42 224 241
of a group
21 42 224 243 Read directory of single entry
21 42 224 244 Read attribute of sngle entry
Generic General Interrogation
21 9 224 245
(GGI)
10 40 224 248 Write entry
10 40 224 249 Write with confirm
10 40 224 250 Write with execute
10 40 224 251 Write entry abort
Basic Application Functions
Test Mode * * * * *
Blocking of monitor direction * * * * *
Disturbance data * * * * *
Generic services * *
Private data * * * * *
Miscellaneous Max. MVAL = times rated value
Measurands 1.2 2.4
Current L1 *
Current L2 *
Current L3 *
Voltage L1-E *
Voltage L2-E *
Voltage L3-E *
Active Power P *
Reactive Power Q *
Frequency F *
Voltage L1-L2
Private Range Information Numbers in Monitor Direction
Inf. Model Number

ASDU TYPE COT FUN Display Text (English) GI DDB Signal Description DDB Ordinal
No. 1 2 3 4 5 6
1 1,7,9 226 0 Contact 1 * * * * Output Relay 1 0
MiCOM P342, P343 Page 107/170
Inf. Model Number

No. 1 2 3 4 5 6
1 1,7,9 226 24 Contact 25 * * Output Relay 25 24
1 1,7,9,11 224 27 Opto 1 * * * * Opto Input 1 32
1 1,7,9,11 224 28 Opto 2 * * * * Opto Input 2 33
1 1,7,9,11 224 29 Opto 3 * * * * Opto Input 3 34
1 1,7,9,11 224 30 Opto 4 * * * * Opto Input 4 35
1 1,7,9,11 226 36 Opto 5 * * * * Opto Input 5 36
1 1,7,9,11 226 37 Opto 6 * * * * Opto Input 6 37
1 1,7,9,11 226 38 Opto 7 * * * * Opto Input 7 38
1 1,7,9,11 226 39 Opto 8 * * * * Opto Input 8 39
1 1,7,9,11 226 40 Opto 9 * * * * Opto Input 9 40
1 1,7,9,11 226 41 Opto 10 * * * * Opto Input 10 41
1 1,7,9,11 226 42 Opto 11 * * * * Opto Input 11 42
1 1,7,9,11 226 43 Opto 12 * * * * Opto Input 12 43
1 1,7,9,11 226 44 Opto 13 * * * * Opto Input 13 44
1 1,7,9,11 226 45 Opto 14 * * * * Opto Input 14 45
1 1,7,9,11 226 46 Opto 15 * * * * Opto Input 15 46
1 1,7,9,11 226 47 Opto 16 * * * * Opto Input 16 47
1 1,7,9,11 226 48 Opto 17 * * * * Opto Input 17 48
1 1,7,9,11 226 49 Opto 18 * * * * Opto Input 18 49
1 1,7,9,11 226 50 Opto 19 * * * * Opto Input 19 50
1 1,7,9,11 226 51 Opto 20 * * * * Opto Input 20 51
1 1,7,9,11 226 52 Opto 21 * * * * Opto Input 21 52
1 1,7,9,11 226 53 Opto 22 * * * * Opto Input 22 53
1 1,7,9,11 226 54 Opto 23 * * * * Opto Input 23 54
1 1,7,9,11 226 55 Opto 24 * * * * Opto Input 24 55
1 1,7,9,11 226 56 Opto 25 * * Opto Input 25 56
1 1,7,9,11 226 57 Opto 26 * * Opto Input 26 57
1 1,7,9,11 226 58 Opto 27 * * Opto Input 27 58
1 1,7,9,11 226 59 Opto 28 * * Opto Input 28 59
1 1,7,9,11 226 60 Opto 29 * * Opto Input 29 60
1 1,7,9,11 226 61 Opto 30 * * Opto Input 30 61
1 1,7,9,11 226 62 Opto 31 * * Opto Input 31 62
1 1,7,9,11 226 63 Opto 32 * * Opto Input 32 63
226 64 LED 1 * * * Programmable LED 1 64
MiCOM P342, P343 Page 108/170
Inf. Model Number

No. 1 2 3 4 5 6
226 72 72
226 73 73
226 74 74
226 75 75
226 76 76
226 77 77
226 78 78
226 79 79
Input to LED Output

226 80 LED Cond IN 1 * * * 80
Condition
Input to LED Output

226 81 LED Cond IN 2 * * * 81
Condition
Input to LED Output

226 82 LED Cond IN 3 * * * 82
Condition
Input to LED Output

226 83 LED Cond IN 4 * * * 83
Condition
Input to LED Output

226 84 LED Cond IN 5 * * * 84
Condition
Input to LED Output

226 85 LED Cond IN 6 * * * 85
Condition
Input to LED Output

226 86 LED Cond IN 7 * * * 86
Condition
Input to LED Output

226 87 LED Cond IN 8 * * * 87
Condition
226 88 88
226 89 89
226 90 90
226 91 91
226 92 92
226 93 93
226 94 94
226 95 95
226 96 96
226 97 97
226 98 98
226 99 99
226 100 100
226 101 101
226 102 102
226 103 103
226 104 104
226 105 105
226 106 106
226 107 107
226 108 108
226 109 109
226 110 110
226 111 111
226 112 112
226 113 113
226 114 114
226 115 115
226 116 116
226 117 117
226 118 118
226 119 119
MiCOM P342, P343 Page 109/170
Inf. Model Number

No. 1 2 3 4 5 6
226 120 120
226 121 121
226 122 122
226 123 123
226 124 124
226 125 125
226 126 126
226 127 127
226 128 128
226 129 129
226 130 130
226 131 131
226 132 132
226 133 133
226 134 134
226 135 135
226 136 136
226 137 137
226 138 138
226 139 139
226 140 140
226 141 141
226 142 142
226 143 143
226 144 144
226 145 145
226 146 146
226 147 147
226 148 148
226 149 149
226 150 150
226 151 151
226 152 152
226 153 153
226 154 154
226 155 155
226 156 156
226 157 157
226 158 158
226 159 159
Input to Relay Output

226 160 Relay Cond 1 * * * 160
Condition

226 161 Relay Cond 2 * * * 161
Condition

2 1,7 224 68 Any Trip * * * 162
Condition

226 163 Relay Cond 4 * * * 163
Condition

226 164 Relay Cond 5 * * * 164
Condition

226 165 Relay Cond 6 * * * 165
Condition

226 166 Relay Cond 7 * * * 166
Condition

226 167 Relay Cond 8 * * * 167
Condition

226 168 Relay Cond 9 * * * 168
Condition
MiCOM P342, P343 Page 110/170
Inf. Model Number

No. 1 2 3 4 5 6

226 169 Relay Cond 10 * * * 169
Condition

226 170 Relay Cond 11 * * * 170
Condition

226 171 Relay Cond 12 * * * 171
Condition

226 172 Relay Cond 13 * * * 172
Condition

226 173 Relay Cond 14 * * * 173
Condition

226 174 Relay Cond 15 * * * 174
Condition

226 175 Relay Cond 16 * * * 175
Condition

226 176 Relay Cond 17 * * * 176
Condition

226 177 Relay Cond 18 * * * 177
Condition

226 178 Relay Cond 19 * * * 178
Condition

226 179 Relay Cond 20 * * * 179
Condition

226 180 Relay Cond 21 * * * 180
Condition

226 181 Relay Cond 22 * * * 181
Condition

226 182 Relay Cond 23 * * * 182
Condition

226 183 Relay Cond 24 * * * 183
Condition

226 184 Relay Cond 25 * 184
Condition

226 185 Relay Cond 26 * 185
Condition

226 186 Relay Cond 27 * 186
Condition

226 187 Relay Cond 28 * 187
Condition

226 188 Relay Cond 29 * 188
Condition

226 189 Relay Cond 30 * 189
Condition

226 190 Relay Cond 31 * 190
Condition

226 191 Relay Cond 32 * 191
Condition
226 192 192

226 193 193
226 194 194
226 195 195
226 196 196
226 197 197
226 198 198
226 199 199
226 200 200
226 201 201
226 202 202
226 203 203
MiCOM P342, P343 Page 111/170
Inf. Model Number

No. 1 2 3 4 5 6
226 204 204
226 205 205
226 206 206
226 207 207
226 208 208
226 209 209
226 210 210
226 211 211
226 212 212
226 213 213
226 214 214
226 215 215
226 216 216
226 217 217
226 218 218
226 219 219
226 220 220
226 221 221
226 222 222
226 223 223
226 224 Timer in 1 * * * Input to Auxiliary Timer 1 224
226 232 232
226 233 233
226 234 234
226 235 235
226 236 236
226 237 237
226 238 238
226 239 239
226 240 240
226 241 241
226 242 242
226 243 243
226 244 244
226 245 245
226 246 246
226 247 247
226 248 248
226 249 249
226 250 250
226 251 251
226 252 252
226 253 253
226 254 254
226 255 255
227 0 Timer out 1 * * * Output from Auxiliary Timer 1 256
MiCOM P342, P343 Page 112/170
Inf. Model Number

No. 1 2 3 4 5 6
227 8 264
227 9 265
227 10 266
227 11 267
227 12 268
227 13 269
227 14 270
227 15 271
227 16 272
227 17 273
227 18 274
227 19 275
227 20 276
227 21 277
227 22 278
227 23 279
227 24 280
227 25 281
227 26 282
227 27 283
227 28 284
227 29 285
227 30 286
227 31 287
227 32 Fault REC TRIG * * * Trigger for Fault Recorder 288
227 33 289
1 1,7,9 227 34 SG-opto Invalid * * * * Setting Group via opto invalid 290
1 9,11 224 21 Prot'n Disabled * * * * Test Mode Enabled Alarm 291
1 1,7,9 224 38 VT Fail Alarm * * * * VTS Indication 292
1 1,7,9 227 37 CT Fail Alarm * * * * CTS Indication 293
2 1,7 224 85 CB Fail Alarm * * * Breaker Fail Any Trip 294
Broken Current Maintenance

1 1,7,9 227 39 I^ Maint Alarm * * * * 295
Alarm
Broken Current Lockout

1 1,7,9 227 40 I^ Lockout Alarm * * * * 296
Alarm
No of CB Ops Maintenance
1 1,7,9 227 41 CB Ops Maint * * * * 297
Alarm
No of CB Ops Maintenance
1 1,7,9 227 42 CB Ops Lockout * * * * 298
Lockout
Excessive CB Op Time
1 1,7,9 227 43 CB Op Time Maint * * * * 299
Maintenance Alarm
Excessive CB Op Time
1 1,7,9 227 44 CB Op Time Lock * * * * 300
Lockout Alarm
Excessive Fault Frequency

1 1,7,9 227 45 Fault Freq Lock * * * * 301
Lockout Alarm
CB Status Alarm (Invalid CB

1 1,7,9 227 46 CB Status Alarm * * * * 302
auxilliary contacts)
1 1,7 227 47 Man CB Trip Fail * * * CB Failed to Trip Alarm 303

1 1,7 227 48 Man CB Cls Fail * * * CB Failed to Close Alarm 304
CB Unhealthy on Control
1 1,7 227 49 Man CB Unhealthy * * * 305
Close Alarm
1 1,7,9 227 50 F out of Range * * Frequency out of range 306
Negative Phase Sequence

1 1,7,9 227 50 NPS Alarm * * * 306
Alarm
1 1,7,9 227 51 Thermal Alarm * * * * Thermal Overload Alarm 307

1 1,7,9 227 52 V/Hz Alarm * * * Volts Per Hz Alarm 308
1 1,7,9 227 53 Field Fail Alarm * * * Field failure Alarm 309
1 1,7,9 227 54 RTD Thermal Alm * * * RTD thermal Alarm 310
MiCOM P342, P343 Page 113/170
Inf. Model Number

No. 1 2 3 4 5 6
1 1,7,9 227 55 RTD Open Cct * * * RTD open circuit failure 311
1 1,7,9 227 56 RTD short Cct * * * RTD short circuit failure 312
1 1,7,9 227 57 RTD Data Error * * * RTD data inconsistency error 313
1 1,7,9 227 58 RTD Board Fail * * * RTD Board failure 314

1 1,7,9 227 59 Freq Prot Alm * * * * Frequency protection alarm 315
1 1,7,9 227 60 Voltage Prot Alm * * * * Voltage protection alarm 316
227 61 317
227 62 318
227 63 319
1 1,7,9 227 64 CL Card I/P Fail * * * * CLIO Card Input Failure 320
1 1,7,9 227 65 CL Card O/P Fail * * * * CLIO Card Output Failure 321
1 1,7,9 227 66 CL Input 1 Alarm * * * * Current Loop Input 1 Alarm 322
Current Loop Input 1

1 1,7,9 227 70 CLI1 I< Fail Alm * * * * 326
Undercurrent Fail Alarm

1 1,7,9 227 71 CLI2 I< Fail Alm * * * * 327

1 1,7,9 227 72 CLI3 I< Fail Alm * * * * 328

1 1,7,9 227 73 CLI4 I< Fail Alm * * * * 329
227 74 330
227 75 331
227 76 332
227 77 333
227 78 334
227 79 335
User Definable Alarm 16

1 1,7,9 227 80 MR User Alarm 16 * * * * 336
(Manual Reset)

1 1,7,9 227 81 MR User Alarm 15 * * * * 337
(Manual Reset)

1 1,7,9 227 82 MR User Alarm 14 * * * * 338
(Manual Reset)

1 1,7,9 227 83 MR User Alarm 13 * * * * 339
(Manual Reset)

1 1,7,9 227 84 MR User Alarm 12 * * * * 340
(Manual Reset)

1 1,7,9 227 85 MR User Alarm 11 * * * * 341
(Manual Reset)

1 1,7,9 227 86 MR User Alarm 10 * * * * 342
(Manual Reset)

1 1,7,9 227 87 MR User Alarm 9 * * * * 343
(Manual Reset)

1 1,7,9 227 88 MR User Alarm 8 * * * * 344
(Manual Reset)

1 1,7,9 227 89 MR User Alarm 7 * * * * 345
(Manual Reset)

1 1,7,9 227 90 MR User Alarm 6 * * * * 346
(Manual Reset)

1 1,7,9 227 91 MR User Alarm 5 * * * * 347
(Manual Reset)
User Definable Alarm 4 (Self

1 1,7,9 227 92 SR User Alarm 4 * * * * 348
Reset)

1 1,7,9 227 93 SR User Alarm 3 * * * * 349
Reset)
MiCOM P342, P343 Page 114/170
Inf. Model Number

No. 1 2 3 4 5 6

1 1,7,9 227 94 SR User Alarm 2 * * * * 350
Reset)

1 1,7,9 227 95 SR User Alarm 1 * * * * 351
Reset)
Block Voltage Dependent

227 96 VDepOC Timer Blk * * 352
time delay
Block Under Impedance time

227 97 UnderZ Timer Blk * * 353
delay
Block Phase Overcurrent

227 98 I>1 Timer Block * * * 354
Stage 1 time delay

227 99 I>2 Timer Block * * * 355
Stage 2 time delay

227 100 I>3 Timer Block * 356
Stage 3 time delay

227 101 I>4 Timer Block * 357
Stage 4 time delay
Block Earth Fault Stage 1 time

227 102 IN>1 Timer Blk * * * 358
delay

227 103 IN>2 Timer Blk * * * 359
delay

227 104 IN>3 Timer Blk * 360
delay

227 105 IN>4 Timer Blk * 361
delay
227 106 ISEF>1 Timer Blk * * * Block SEF Stage 1 time delay 362
227 107 ISEF>2 Timer Blk * Block SEF Stage 2 time delay 363
227 110 Init Trip CB * Logic Input Trip CB 366

227 111 Init Close CB * Logic Input Close CB 367
Block Residual Overvoltage

227 112 VN>1 Timer Blk * * * 368
Stage 1 time delay
Block Residual Overvoltage

227 113 VN>2 Timer Blk * * * 369
Stage 2 time delay
Block Phase Undervoltage

227 114 V<1 Timer Block * * * 370
Stage 1 time delay
Block Phase Undervoltage

227 115 V<2 Timer Block * * * 371
Stage 2 time delay
Block Phase Overvoltage

227 116 V>1 Timer Block * * * 372
Stage 1 time delay
Block Phase Overvoltage

227 117 V>2 Timer Block * * * 373
Stage 2 time delay
Block Underfrequency Stage

227 118 F<1 timer Block * * * 374
1 Timer

227 119 F<2 Timer Block * * * 375
2 Timer

227 120 F<3 Timer Block * * * 376
3 Timer

227 121 F<4 Timer Block * * * 377
4 Timer
Block Overfrequency Stage 1

227 122 F>1 Timer Block * * * 378
Timer
MiCOM P342, P343 Page 115/170
Inf. Model Number

No. 1 2 3 4 5 6
Block Overfrequency Stage 2

227 123 F>2 Timer Block * * * 379
Timer
227 124 Ext. Trip 3ph * * * External Trip 3ph 380

227 125 CB Aux 3ph(52-A) * * * 52-A (3 phase) 381
227 126 CB Aux 3ph(52-B) * * * 52-B (3 phase) 382
227 127 CB Healthy * * * CB Healthy 383
227 128 MCB/VTS * * * MCB/VTS opto 384
Reset Manual CB Close Time

227 129 Reset Close Dly * * * 385
Delay
227 130 Reset Relays/LED * * * Reset Latched Relays & LED’s 386
227 131 Reset Lockout * * * Reset Lockout Opto Input 387
227 132 Reset All Values * * * Reset CB Maintenance Values 388
227 133 Reset I2 Thermal * * Reset NPS Thermal State 389
227 134 Reset ThermalO/L * * * Reset Overload Thermal State 390
IEC60870-5-103 Monitor
1 9, 11 224 20 Monitor Blocked * * * * 391
Blocking
IEC60870-5-103 Command
1 9, 11 227 136 Command Blocked * * * * 392
Blocking
Block Current Loop Input 1

227 137 CL Input 1 Blk * * * 393
protection

227 138 CL Input 2 Blk * * * 394
protection

227 139 CL Input 3 Blk * * * 395
protection

227 140 CL Input 4 Blk * * * 396
protection
227 141 397

227 142 398
227 143 399
227 144 400
227 145 401
227 146 402
227 147 403
227 148 404
227 149 405
227 150 406
227 151 407
227 152 408
227 153 409
227 154 410
227 155 411
227 156 412
227 157 413
227 158 414
227 159 Test Mode * * * Input To Initiate Test Mode 415
2 1,7 227 160 100% ST EF Trip * 100% Stator Earth Fault Trip 416
2 1,7 227 161 DeadMachine Trip * Dead machine protection Trip 417
Generator Differential trip

2 1,7 227 162 Gen Diff Trip * 418
3ph
2 1,7 227 163 Gen Diff Trip A * Generator Differential Trip A 419
2 1,7 227 164 Gen Diff Trip B * Generator Differential Trip B 420
2 1,7 227 165 Gen Diff Trip C * Generator Differential Trip C 421
2 1,7 227 166 Field Fail1 Trip * * Field Failure Stage 1 Trip 422
2 1,7 227 167 Field Fail2 Trip * * Field Failure Stage 2 Trip 423
Negative Phase Sequence

2 1,7 227 168 NPS Trip * * 424
Trip
Voltage Dependent O/C Trip

2 1,7 227 169 V Dep OC Trip * * 425
3ph
MiCOM P342, P343 Page 116/170
Inf. Model Number

No. 1 2 3 4 5 6

2 1,7 227 170 V Dep OC Trip A * * 426
A

2 1,7 227 171 V Dep OC Trip B * * 427
B

2 1,7 227 172 V Dep OC Trip C * * 428
C
2 1,7 227 173 V/Hz Trip * * Volts per Hz Trip 429

2 1,7 227 174 RTD 1 Trip * * RTD 1 TRIP 430
2 1,7 227 175 RTD 2 Trip * * RTD 2 TRIP 431
2 1,7 227 176 RTD 3 Trip * * RTD 3 TRIP 432
2 1,7 227 177 RTD 4 Trip * * RTD 4 TRIP 433
2 1,7 227 178 RTD 5 Trip * * RTD 5 TRIP 434
2 1,7 227 179 RTD 6 Trip * * RTD 6 TRIP 435
2 1,7 227 180 RTD 7 Trip * * RTD 7 TRIP 436
2 1,7 227 181 RTD 8 Trip * * RTD 8 TRIP 437
2 1,7 227 182 RTD 9 Trip * * RTD 9 TRIP 438
2 1,7 227 183 RTD 10 Trip * * RTD 10 TRIP 439
2 1,7 227 184 Any RTD Trip * * Any RTD Trip 440
Rate of change of frequency

2 1,7 227 184 df/dt Trip * 440
Trip
2 1,7 227 185 V Shift Trip * Voltage vector shift trip 441
2 1,7 224 92 IN>1 Trip * * * 1st Stage EF Trip 442
2 1,7 224 93 IN>2 Trip * * * 2nd Stage EF Trip 443
2 1,7 227 188 IN>3 Trip * 3rd Stage EF Trip 444
2 1,7 227 189 IN>4 Trip * 4th Stage EF Trip 445
2 1,7 227 190 IREF> Trip * * * REF Trip 446
2 1,7 227 191 ISEF>1 Trip * * * 1st Stage SEF Trip 447
2 1,7 227 192 ISEF>2 Trip * 2nd Stage SEF Trip 448
2 1,7 227 193 ISEF>3 Trip * 3rd Stage SEF Trip 449
2 1,7 227 194 ISEF>4 Trip * 4th Stage SEF Trip 450
2 1,7 227 195 VN>1 Trip * * * 1st Stage Residual O/V Trip 451
2 1,7 227 196 VN>2 Trip * * * 2nd Stage Residual O/V Trip 452
2 1,7 227 197 V<1 Trip * * * 1st Stage Phase U/V Trip 3ph 453
1st Stage Phase U/V Trip

2 1,7 227 198 V<1 Trip A/AB * * * 454
A/AB

2 1,7 227 199 V<1 Trip B/BC * * * 455
B/BC

2 1,7 227 200 V<1 Trip C/CA * * * 456
C/CA
2nd Stage Phase U/V Trip

2 1,7 227 201 V<2 Trip * * * 457
3ph

2 1,7 227 202 V<2 Trip A/AB * * * 458
A/AB

2 1,7 227 203 V<2 Trip B/BC * * * 459
B/BC

2 1,7 227 204 V<2 Trip C/CA * * * 460
C/CA
2 1,7 227 205 V>1 Trip * * * 1st Stage Phase O/V Trip 3ph 461
1st Stage Phase O/V Trip

2 1,7 227 206 V>1 Trip A/AB * * * 462
A/AB

2 1,7 227 207 V>1 Trip B/BC * * * 463
B/BC

2 1,7 227 208 V>1 Trip C/CA * * * 464
C/CA
2nd Stage Phase O/V Trip

2 1,7 227 209 V>2 Trip * * * 465
3ph
MiCOM P342, P343 Page 117/170
Inf. Model Number

No. 1 2 3 4 5 6

2 1,7 227 210 V>2 Trip A/AB * * * 466
A/AB

2 1,7 227 211 V>2 Trip B/BC * * * 467
B/BC

2 1,7 227 212 V>2 Trip C/CA * * * 468
C/CA
2 1,7 227 213 F<1 Trip * * * Under frequency Stage 1 trip 469
2 1,7 227 217 F>1 Trip * * * Over frequency Stage 1 Trip 473
2 1,7 227 218 F>2 Trip * * * Over frequency Stage 2 Trip 474
2 1,7 227 219 Power1 Trip * * * Power stage 1 trip 475
2 1,7 227 220 Power2 Trip * * * Power stage 2 trip 476
2 1,7 224 90 I>1 Trip * * * 1st Stage O/C Trip 3ph 477
2 1,7 224 69 I>1 Trip A * * * 1st Stage O/C Trip A 478
2 1,7 224 70 I>1 Trip B * * * 1st Stage O/C Trip B 479
2 1,7 224 71 I>1 Trip C * * * 1st Stage O/C Trip C 480
2 1,7 224 91 I>2 Trip * * * 2nd Stage O/C Trip 3ph 481
2 1,7 227 226 I>2 Trip A * * * 2nd Stage O/C Trip A 482
2 1,7 227 227 I>2 Trip B * * * 2nd Stage O/C Trip B 483
2 1,7 227 228 I>2 Trip C * * * 2nd Stage O/C Trip C 484
2 1,7 227 229 I>3 Trip * 3rd Stage O/C Trip 3ph 485
2 1,7 227 230 I>3 Trip A * 3rd Stage O/C Trip A 486
2 1,7 227 231 I>3 Trip B * 3rd Stage O/C Trip B 487
2 1,7 227 232 I>3 Trip C * 3rd Stage O/C Trip C 488
2 1,7 227 233 I>4 Trip * 4th Stage O/C Trip 3ph 489
2 1,7 227 234 I>4 Trip A * 4th Stage O/C Trip A 490
2 1,7 227 235 I>4 Trip B * 4th Stage O/C Trip B 491
2 1,7 227 236 I>4 Trip C * 4th Stage O/C Trip C 492
2 1,7 227 237 Bfail1 Trip 3ph * * * tBF1 Trip 3Ph 493
2 1,7 227 238 Bfail2 Trip 3ph * * * tBF2 Trip 3Ph 494
Sensitive A Phase Power Stage

2 1,7 227 239 SPower1 Trip * * * 495
1 Trip

2 1,7 227 240 SPower2 Trip * * * 496
2 Trip
Pole Slip (Impedance) Zone1

2 1,7 227 241 PSlipz Z1 Trip * 497
Trip

2 1,7 227 242 PSlipz Z2 Trip * 498
Trip
2 1,7 227 243 Thermal O/L Trip * * * Thermal Overload Trip 499
Under Impedance Stage 1

2 1,7 227 244 Z<1 Trip * * 500
Trip 3 Ph

2 1,7 227 245 Z<1 Trip A * * 501
Trip A

2 1,7 227 246 Z<1 Trip B * * 502
Trip B

2 1,7 227 247 Z<1 Trip C * * 503
Trip C

2 1,7 227 248 Z<2 Trip * * 504
Trip 3 Ph

2 1,7 227 249 Z<2 Trip A * * 505
Trip A

2 1,7 227 250 Z<2 Trip B * * 506
Trip B

2 1,7 227 251 Z<2 Trip C * * 507
Trip C
2 1,7 227 252 CL Input 1 Trip * * * Current Loop Input 1 Trip 508
MiCOM P342, P343 Page 118/170
Inf. Model Number

No. 1 2 3 4 5 6
228 0 512
228 1 513
228 2 514
228 3 515
228 4 516
228 5 517
228 6 518
228 7 519
228 8 520
228 9 521
228 10 522
228 11 523
228 12 524
228 13 525
228 14 526
228 15 527
228 16 528
228 17 529
228 18 530
228 19 531
228 20 532
228 21 533
228 22 534
228 23 535
228 24 536
228 25 537
228 26 538
228 27 539
228 28 540
228 29 541
228 30 542
228 31 543
228 32 544
228 33 545
228 34 546
228 35 547
228 36 548
228 37 549
228 38 550
228 39 551
228 40 552
228 41 553
228 42 554
228 43 555
228 44 556
228 45 557
228 46 558
228 47 559
228 48 560
228 49 561
228 50 562
228 51 563
228 52 564
228 53 565
228 54 566
228 55 567
MiCOM P342, P343 Page 119/170
Inf. Model Number

No. 1 2 3 4 5 6
228 56 568
228 57 569
228 58 570
228 59 571
228 60 572
228 61 573
228 62 574
228 63 575
2 1,7,9 224 84 Any Start * * * * Any Start 576
2 1,7,9 228 65 VN>1 Start * * * * 1st Stage Residual O/V Start 577
2 1,7,9 228 66 VN>2 Start * * * * 2nd Stage Residual O/V Start 578
2 1,7,9 228 67 V<1 Start * * * * 1st Stage Phase U/V Start 3ph 579
1st Stage Phase U/V Start

2 1,7,9 228 68 V<1 Start A/AB * * * * 580
A/AB

2 1,7,9 228 69 V<1 Start B/BC * * * * 581
B/BC

2 1,7,9 228 70 V<1 Start C/CA * * * * 582
C/CA
2nd Stage Phase U/V Start

2 1,7,9 228 71 V<2 Start * * * * 583
3ph

2 1,7,9 228 72 V<2 Start A/AB * * * * 584
A/AB

2 1,7,9 228 73 V<2 Start B/BC * * * * 585
B/BC

2 1,7,9 228 74 V<2 Start C/CA * * * * 586
C/CA
1st Stage Phase O/V Start

2 1,7,9 228 75 V>1 Start * * * * 587
3ph

2 1,7,9 228 76 V>1 Start A/AB * * * * 588
A/AB

2 1,7,9 228 77 V>1 Start B/BC * * * * 589
B/BC

2 1,7,9 228 78 V>1 Start C/CA * * * * 590
C/CA
2nd Stage Phase O/V Start

2 1,7,9 228 79 V>2 Start * * * * 591
3ph

2 1,7,9 228 80 V>2 Start A/AB * * * * 592
A/AB

2 1,7,9 228 81 V>2 Start B/BC * * * * 593
B/BC

2 1,7,9 228 82 V>2 Start C/CA * * * * 594
C/CA
2 1,7,9 228 83 Power1 Start * * * * Power Stage 1 start 595

2 1,7,9 228 84 Power2 Start * * * * Power stage 1 start 596
2 1,7,9 228 85 I>1 Start * * * * 1st Stage O/C Start 3ph 597
2 1,7,9 224 64 I>1 Start A * * * * 1st Stage O/C Start A 598
2 1,7,9 224 65 I>1 Start B * * * * 1st Stage O/C Start B 599
2 1,7,9 224 66 I>1 Start C * * * * 1st Stage O/C Start C 600
2 1,7,9 228 89 I>2 Start * * * * 2nd Stage O/C Start 3ph 601
2 1,7,9 228 90 I>2 Start A * * * * 2nd Stage O/C Start A 602
2 1,7,9 228 91 I>2 Start B * * * * 2nd Stage O/C Start B 603
2 1,7,9 228 92 I>2 Start C * * * * 2nd Stage O/C Start C 604
2 1,7,9 228 93 I>3 Start * * 3rd Stage O/C Start 3ph 605
2 1,7,9 228 94 I>3 Start A * * 3rd Stage O/C Start A 606
2 1,7,9 228 95 I>3 Start B * * 3rd Stage O/C Start B 607
2 1,7,9 228 96 I>3 Start C * * 3rd Stage O/C Start C 608
2 1,7,9 228 97 I>4 Start * * 4th Stage O/C Start 3ph 609
2 1,7,9 228 98 I>4 Start A * * 4th Stage O/C Start A 610
MiCOM P342, P343 Page 120/170
Inf. Model Number

No. 1 2 3 4 5 6
2 1,7,9 228 99 I>4 Start B * * 4th Stage O/C Start B 611
2 1,7,9 228 100 I>4 Start C * * 4th Stage O/C Start C 612
2 1,7,9 224 67 IN>1 Start * * * * 1st Stage EF Start 613
2 1,7,9 228 102 IN>2 Start * * * * 2nd Stage EF Start 614
2 1,7,9 228 103 IN>3 Start * * 3rd Stage EF Start 615
2 1,7,9 228 104 IN>4 Start * * 4th Stage EF Start 616
2 1,7,9 228 105 ISEF>1 Start * * * * 1st Stage SEF Start 617
2 1,7,9 228 106 ISEF>2 Start * * 2nd Stage SEF Start 618
2 1,7,9 228 107 ISEF>3 Start * * 3rd Stage SEF Start 619
2 1,7,9 228 108 ISEF>4 Start * * 4th Stage SEF Start 620
2 1,7,9 228 109 100% ST EF Start * * 100% Stator Earth Fault Start 621
Under frequency Stage 1

2 1,7,9 228 110 F<1 Start * * * * 622
START

2 1,7,9 228 111 F<2 Start * * * * 623
START

2 1,7,9 228 112 F<3 Start * * * * 624
START

2 1,7,9 228 113 F<4 Start * * * * 625
START
Over frequency Stage 1

2 1,7,9 228 114 F>1 Start * * * * 626
START
Over frequency Stage 2

2 1,7,9 228 115 F>2 Start * * * * 627
START
I> Blocked O/C Start,

2 1,7,9 228 116 I> BlockStart * * 628
inhibited by CB Fail
IN/ISEF> Blocked O/C Start,

2 1,7,9 228 117 IN/SEF>Blk Start * * 629
inhibited by CB Fail
Rate of change of frequency

2 1,7,9 228 118 df/dt Start * * 630
Start
228 119 IA< Start * * * * IA< operate 631

228 120 IB< Start * * * * IB< operate 632
228 121 IC< Start * * * * IC< operate 633
228 122 ISEF< Start * * * * ISEF< operate 634
228 123 IN< Start * * * IN< operate 635
2 1,7,9 228 124 V/Hz Start * * * Volts per Hz Start 636
2 1,7,9 228 125 FFail1 Start * * * Field failure Stage 1 start 637
2 1,7,9 228 126 FFail2 Start * * * Field failure Stage 2 start 638
Voltage Dependent
2 1,7,9 228 127 V Dep OC Start * * * 639
Overcurrent Start
Voltage Dependent
2 1,7,9 228 128 V Dep OC Start A * * * 640
Overcurrent Start A
Voltage Dependent
2 1,7,9 228 129 V Dep OC Start B * * * 641
Overcurrent Start B
Voltage Dependent
2 1,7,9 228 130 V Dep OC Start C * * * 642
Overcurrent Start C

2 1,7,9 228 131 SPower1 Start * * * * 643
1 Start

2 1,7,9 228 132 SPower2 Start * * * * 644
2 Start

2 1,7,9 228 133 PSlipz Z1 Start * * 645
Start

2 1,7,9 228 134 PSlipz Z2 Start * * 646
Start
Pole Slip (impedance) Lens

2 1,7,9 228 135 PSlipz LensStart * * 647
Start
Pole Slip (impedance) Blinder

2 1,7,9 228 136 PSlipz BlindStrt * * 648
Start
MiCOM P342, P343 Page 121/170
Inf. Model Number

No. 1 2 3 4 5 6
Pole Slip (impedance)

2 1,7,9 228 137 PSlipz ReactStrt * * 649
Reactance Line Start

2 1,7,9 228 138 Z<1 Start * * * 650
Start

2 1,7,9 228 139 Z<1 Start A * * * 651
Start A

2 1,7,9 228 140 Z<1 Start B * * * 652
Start B

2 1,7,9 228 141 Z<1 Start C * * * 653
Start C

2 1,7,9 228 142 Z<2 Start * * * 654
Start

2 1,7,9 228 143 Z<2 Start A * * * 655
Start A

2 1,7,9 228 144 Z<2 Start B * * * 656
Start B

2 1,7,9 228 145 Z<2 Start C * * * 657
Start C
Current Loop Input 1 Alarm

2 1,7,9 228 146 CLI1 Alarm Start * * * * 658
Start

2 1,7,9 228 147 CLI2 Alarm Start * * * * 659
Start

2 1,7,9 228 148 CLI3 Alarm Start * * * * 660
Start

2 1,7,9 228 149 CLI4 Alarm Start * * * * 661
Start
Current Loop Input 1 Trip

2 1,7,9 228 150 CLI1 Trip Start * * * * 662
Start

2 1,7,9 228 151 CLI2 Trip Start * * * * 663
Start

2 1,7,9 228 152 CLI3 Trip Start * * * * 664
Start

2 1,7,9 228 153 CLI4 Trip Start * * * * 665
Start
228 154 666

228 155 667
228 156 668
228 157 669
228 158 670
228 159 671
228 160 672
228 161 673
228 162 674
228 163 675
228 164 676
228 165 677
228 166 678
228 167 679
228 168 680
228 169 681
228 170 682
228 171 683
228 172 684
228 173 685
228 174 686
228 175 687
228 176 688
228 177 689
MiCOM P342, P343 Page 122/170
Inf. Model Number

No. 1 2 3 4 5 6
228 178 690
228 179 691
228 180 692
228 181 693
228 182 694
228 183 695
228 184 696
228 185 697
228 186 698
228 187 699
228 188 700
228 189 701
228 190 702
228 191 703
228 192 704
228 193 705
228 194 706
228 195 707
228 196 708
228 197 709
228 198 710
228 199 711
228 200 712
228 201 713
228 202 714
228 203 715
228 204 716
228 205 717
228 206 718
228 207 719
228 208 720
228 209 721
228 210 722
228 211 723
228 212 724
228 213 725
228 214 726
228 215 727
228 216 728
228 217 729
228 218 730
228 219 731
228 220 732
228 221 733
228 222 734
228 223 735
228 224 VTS Fast Block * * * VTS Fast Block 736
228 225 VTS Slow Block * * * VTS Slow Block 737
228 226 CTS Block * * * CTS Block 738
1 1,7 228 227 Control Trip * Control Trip 739
1 1,7 228 228 Control Close * Control Close 740
1 1,7 228 229 Close in Prog * Control Close in Progress 741
Reconnection Time Delay

1 1,7 228 230 Reconnection * 742
Output
1 1,7,9 228 231 RTD 1 Alarm * * * RTD 1 Alarm 743

MiCOM P342, P343 Page 123/170
Inf. Model Number

No. 1 2 3 4 5 6
228 241 Lockout Alarm * * * * Composite lockout alarm 753
1 1,7,9 228 242 CB Open 3 ph * * * * 3 ph CB Open 754
1 1,7,9 228 243 CB Closed 3 ph * * * * 3 ph CB Closed 755
Field Voltage Failure (Alarm

1 1,7,9 228 244 Field volts fail * * * * 756
66)
228 245 All Poles Dead * * * All Poles Dead 757

228 246 Any Pole Dead * * * Any Pole Dead 758
228 247 Pole Dead A * * * Phase A Pole Dead 759
228 248 Pole Dead B * * * Phase B Pole Dead 760
228 249 Pole Dead C * * * Phase C Pole Dead 761
228 250 VTS Acc Ind * * * Accelerate Ind 762
228 251 VTS Volt Dep * * * Any Voltage Dependent 763
228 252 VTS IA> * * * Ia over threshold 764
228 253 VTS IB> * * * Ib over threshold 765
228 254 VTS IC> * * * Ic over threshold 766
228 255 VTS VA> * * * Va over threshold 767
229 0 VTS VB> * * * Vb over threshold 768
229 1 VTS VC> * * * Vc over threshold 769
229 2 VTS I2> * * * I2 over threshold 770
229 3 VTS V2> * * * V2 over threshold 771
Superimposed Ia over
229 4 VTS IA delta> * * * 772
threshold
Superimposed Ib over
229 5 VTS IB delta> * * * 773
threshold
Superimposed Ic over
229 6 VTS IC delta> * * * 774
threshold
CBF current prot SEF stage

229 7 BFail SEF Trip-1 * * * 775
trip
CBF non current prot stage

229 8 BFail Non I Tr-1 * * * 776
trip
229 9 BFail SEF Trip * * * CBF current Prot SEF Trip 777
229 10 BFail Non I Trip * * * CBF Non Current Prot Trip 778
229 11 Freq High * * * Freq High 779
229 12 Freq Low * * * Freq Low 780
229 13 Freq Not found * * * Freq Not found 781
229 14 Stop Freq Track * * * Stop Freq Track 782
1 1,7 229 15 Recon LOM-1 * Reconnect LOM (unqualified) 783
Reconnect Disable
1 1,7 229 16 Recon Disable-1 * 784
(unqualified)
1 1,7 229 17 Recon LOM * Reconnect LOM 785

1 1,7 229 18 Recon Disable * Reconnect Disable 786
229 19 787
229 20 788
229 21 789
229 22 790
229 23 791
229 24 792
229 25 793
229 26 794
229 27 795
229 28 796
229 29 797
229 30 798
229 31 799
MiCOM P342, P343 Page 124/170
Inf. Model Number

No. 1 2 3 4 5 6
229 32 800
229 33 801
229 34 802
229 35 803
229 36 804
229 37 805
229 38 806
229 39 807
229 40 808
229 41 809
229 42 810
229 43 811
229 44 812
229 45 813
229 46 814
229 47 815
229 48 816
229 49 817
229 50 818
229 51 819
229 52 820
229 53 821
229 54 822
229 55 823
229 56 824
229 57 825
229 58 826
229 59 827
229 60 828
229 61 829
229 62 830
229 63 831
1 9,11,12,20,21 229 64 Control Input 1 * * * * Control Input 832
MiCOM P342, P343 Page 125/170
Inf. Model Number

No. 1 2 3 4 5 6
229 96 GOOSE VIP 1 864
229 97 GOOSE VIP 2 865
229 98 GOOSE VIP 3 866
229 99 GOOSE VIP 4 867
229 100 GOOSE VIP 5 868
229 101 GOOSE VIP 6 869
229 102 GOOSE VIP 7 870
229 103 GOOSE VIP 8 871
229 104 GOOSE VIP 9 872
229 105 GOOSE VIP 10 873
229 106 GOOSE VIP 11 874
229 107 GOOSE VIP 12 875
229 108 GOOSE VIP 13 876
229 109 GOOSE VIP 14 877
229 110 GOOSE VIP 15 878
229 111 GOOSE VIP 16 879
229 112 GOOSE VIP 17 880
229 113 GOOSE VIP 18 881
229 114 GOOSE VIP 19 882
229 115 GOOSE VIP 20 883
229 116 GOOSE VIP 21 884
229 117 GOOSE VIP 22 885
229 118 GOOSE VIP 23 886
229 119 GOOSE VIP 24 887
229 120 GOOSE VIP 25 888
229 121 GOOSE VIP 26 889
229 122 GOOSE VIP 27 890
229 123 GOOSE VIP 28 891
229 124 GOOSE VIP 29 892
229 125 GOOSE VIP 30 893
229 126 GOOSE VIP 31 894
229 127 GOOSE VIP 32 895
229 128 GOOSE VOP 1 896
229 129 GOOSE VOP 2 897
229 130 GOOSE VOP 3 898
229 131 GOOSE VOP 4 899
229 132 GOOSE VOP 5 900
229 133 GOOSE VOP 6 901
229 134 GOOSE VOP 7 902
229 135 GOOSE VOP 8 903
229 136 InterLogic I/P 1 904
229 144 InterLogic O/P 1 912
MiCOM P342, P343 Page 126/170
Inf. Model Number

No. 1 2 3 4 5 6
229 152 Direct Ctrl 1 920
229 160 PSL Int. 1 * * * PSL Internal Node 1 928
MiCOM P342, P343 Page 127/170
Inf. Model Number

No. 1 2 3 4 5 6
1 1,7 229 255 Battery Fail * * * (Alarm 65)
230 0 Unused (Alarm 67)
1 1,7 230 1 GOOSE IED Absent * * * (Alarm 68)
1 1,7 230 2 NIC not fitted * * * (Alarm 69)
1 1,7 230 3 NIC no response * * * (Alarm 70)
1 1,7 230 4 NIC fatal error * * * (Alarm 71)
1 1,7 230 5 NIC Software Reload * * * (Alarm 72)
1 1,7 230 6 Bad TCP/IP Configuration * * * (Alarm 73)
1 1,7 230 7 Bad OSI Configuration * * * (Alarm 74)
1 1,7 230 8 NIC Link Fail * * * (Alarm 75)
1 1,7 230 9 NIC SW-Mismatch * * * (Alarm 76)
1 1,7 230 10 IP addr conflict * * * (Alarm 77)
MiCOM P342, P343 Page 128/170
Inf. Model Number

No. 1 2 3 4 5 6
Private Range Information Numbers in Control Direction
Inf. Model Number

ASDU TYPE COT FUN Display Text (English) GI DDB Signal Description DDB Ordinal
No. 1 2 3 4 5 6
20 20 229 64 Control Input 1 * * * Control Input 832
MiCOM P342, P343 Page 129/170
Inf. Model Number

No. 1 2 3 4 5 6
Disturbance Data Actual Channel Identifiers
ACC Standard Interpretation
0 Global Null Channel
1 IL1 IA
2 IL2 IB
3 IL3 IC
4 IN IN
5 VL1E VAN
6 VL2E VBN
7 VL3E VCN
8 VEN VN
64 - IN Sensitive
65 - IA-2
66 - IB-2
67 - IC-2
245 - SampleTime
Page 130/170 MiCOM P342, P343
1. INTRODUCTION
The purpose of this document is to describe the specific implementation of the
Distributed Network Protocol (DNP) version 3.0 within P340 MiCOM relays.
The MiCOM P340 uses the Triangle MicroWorks, Inc. DNP 3.0 Slave Source Code
Library version 2.31.
This document, in conjunction with the DNP 3.0 Basic 4 Document Set, and the DNP
Subset Definitions Document, provides complete information on how to communicate
with P340 relays with the DNP 3.0 protocol.
This implementation of DNP 3.0 is fully compliant with DNP 3.0 Subset Definition
Level 2. It also contains many Subset Level 3 and above features.
2. DNP V3.0 DEVICE PROFILE

The following table provides a “Device Profile Document” in the standard format
defined in the DNP 3.0 Subset Definitions Document. While it is referred to in the
DNP 3.0 Subset Definitions as a “Document”, it is only a component of a total
interoperability guide. This table, in combination with the following should provide a
complete interoperability/configuration guide for the P340 range of MiCOM relays:
• The Implementation Table provided in Section §3
• The Point List Tables provided in Section §4
MiCOM P342, P343 Page 131/170
DNP 3.0
Device Profile Document
Vendor Name: ALSTOM T&D Ltd – Energy Automation and Information
Device Name: MiCOM P340 Generator Protection
Models Covered: • P341****4*0070*
• P342****4*0070*
• P343****4*0070*
Highest DNP Level Supported: Device Function:
For Requests: Level 2 ¨ Master
For Responses: Level 2 þ Slave
Notable objects, functions, and/or qualifiers supported in addition to the highest DNP levels
supported (the complete list is described in the DNP 3.0 Implementation Table):
• For static (non-change event) object requests, request qualifier codes 00
and 01 (start-stop), 07 and 08 (limited quantity), and 17 and 28 (index) are
supported in addition to the request qualifier code 06 (no range (all
points)).
• Static object requests sent with qualifiers 00, 01, 06, 07, or 08 will be
responded with qualifiers 00 or 01.
• Static object requests sent with qualifiers 17 or 28 will be responded with
qualifiers 17 or 28.
• For change-event object requests, qualifiers 17 or 28 are always responded.
• 16-bit and 32-bit analog change events with time may be requested.
• The read function code for Object 50 (time and date) variation 1 is
supported.
Maximum Data Link Frame Size (octets): Maximum Application Fragment Size (octets)
Transmitted: 292 Transmitted: 2048
Received: 292 Received: 249
Maximum Data Link Retries: Maximum Application Layer Retries:
¨ None þ None
þ Fixed at 2 ¨ Configurable
¨ Configurable
Requires Data Link Layer Confirmation: Requires Application Layer Confirmation:
þ Never ¨ Never
¨ Always ¨ Always
¨ Sometimes þ When reporting event data
¨ Configurable þ When sending multi-fragment
responses
¨ Sometimes
¨ Configurable
Page 132/170 MiCOM P342, P343
Timeouts while waiting for:

Data Link Confirm: ¨ None þ Fixed at ¨ Variable ¨ Configurable
100ms
Complete Appl. Fragment: þ None ¨ Fixed at ___ ¨ Variable ¨ Configurable
¨ None þ Fixed at ¨ Variable ¨ Configurable
Application Confirm:
1s
Complete Appl. Response: þ None ¨ Fixed at ___ ¨ Variable ¨ Configurable
Others:
Inter-character Delay: 4 character times at selected baud rate
Select/Operate Arm Timeout: Default 10s
Need Time Interval: Configurable, 0 or 30min
Sends/Executes Control Operations:
Write Binary Outputs: þ Never ¨ Always ¨ Sometimes ¨ Configurable
Select/Operate: ¨ Never þ Always ¨ Sometimes ¨ Configurable
Direct Operate: ¨ Never þ Always ¨ Sometimes ¨ Configurable
Direct Operate – No Ack: ¨ Never þ Always ¨ Sometimes ¨ Configurable
Count > 1 þ Never ¨ Always ¨ Sometimes ¨ Configurable

Pulse On/NUL/Trip/Close ¨ Never ¨ Always þ Sometimes ¨ Configurable
Pulse Off/NUL/Trip/Close þ Never ¨ Always ¨ Sometimes ¨ Configurable
Latch On/NUL ¨ Never ¨ Always þ Sometimes ¨ Configurable
Latch Off/NUL ¨ Never ¨ Always þ Sometimes ¨ Configurable
Queue þ Never ¨ Always ¨ Sometimes ¨ Configurable

Clear Queue þ Never ¨ Always ¨ Sometimes ¨ Configurable
Note: The applicability of the Pulse On, Latch On, & Latch Off control operations is
specified in the Object10/12 point list table in section §4.2.
Reports Binary Input Change Events when no Reports time-tagged Binary Input Change
specific variation requested: Events when no specific variation requested:
þ Never ¨ Never
þ Only time-tagged variation 2 þ Binary input change with time
¨ Only non-time-tagged ¨ Binary input change with relative time
¨ Configurable ¨ Configurable
Sends Unsolicited Responses: Sends Static Data in Unsolicited Responses:
þ Never þ Never
¨ Configurable ¨ When device restarts
¨ Certain objects only ¨ When status flags changes
¨ Sometimes
¨ Enable/Disable unsolicited functions No other options are permitted.
codes supported
MiCOM P342, P343 Page 133/170
Default Counter Object/Variation: Counters Roll Over at:

¨ No counters reported ¨ No counters reported
¨ Configurable ¨ Configurable
þ Default object: 20 ¨ 16 bits
þ Default variation: 5 þ 32 bits
þ Point-by-point list attached ¨ Other value: _____
þ Point-by-point list attached
Sends multi-fragment responses:
þ Yes
¨ No
3. IMPLEMENTATION TABLE
The following table identifies the variations, function codes, and qualifiers supported
by the P340 in both request and response messages.
For static (non-change-event) objects, requests sent with qualifiers 00, 01, 06, 07, or
08, will be responded with qualifiers 00 or 01. Static object requests sent with
qualifiers 17 or 28 will be responded with qualifiers 17 or 28. For change-event
objects, qualifiers 17 or 28 are always responded.
Object Request Response
Object Variation Function Codes Qualifier Codes Function Qualifier Codes

Description
Number Number (dec) (hex) Codes (dec) (hex)
1 0 Binary Input (Variation 0 1 (read) 00, 01 (start-stop)

is used to request default
variation) 06 (no range, or all)
07, 08 limited qty)
17, 28 (index)
1 1 Binary Input without Flag 1 (read) 00, 01 (start-stop) 129 (response) 00, 01 (start-stop)
(default – 06 (no range, or all) 17, 28 (index –

see note 1) see note 2)
07, 08 limited qty)
17, 28 (index)
1 2 Binary Input with Flag 1 (read) 00, 01 (start-stop) 129 (response) 00, 01 (start-stop)
06 (no range, or all) 17, 28 (index –

see note 2)
07, 08 limited qty)
17, 28 (index)
2 0 Binary Input Change 1 (read) 06 (no range, or all)

(Variation 0 is used to
request default variation) 07, 08 (limited qty)
2 1 Binary Input Change 1 (read) 06 (no range, or all) 129 (response) 17, 28 (index)
without Time
07, 08 (limited qty)
2 2 Binary Input Change with 1 (read) 06 (no range, or all) 129 (response) 17, 28 (index)
Time
(default – 07, 08 (limited qty)
see note 1)
10 0 Binary Output Status 1 (read) 00, 01 (start-stop)

request default variation) 06 (no range, or all)
07, 08 limited qty)
17, 28 (index)
10 2 Binary Output Status 1 (read) 00, 01 (start-stop) 129 (response) 00, 01 (start-stop)

07, 08 limited qty)
17, 28 (index)
Page 134/170 MiCOM P342, P343

Description
12 1 Control Relay Output 3 (select) 00, 01 (start-stop) 129 (response) echo of request
Block
4 (operate) 06 (limited qty)
5 (direct op) 07, 08 (index)
6 (dir. op, no ack) 17, 28
20 0 Binary Counter (Variation 1 (read) 00, 01 (start-stop)

0 is used to request
default variation) 7 (freeze) 06 (no range, or all)
8 (freeze no ack) 07, 08 limited qty)
9 (freeze clear) 17, 28 (index)
10 (frz. cl. no ack)
20 1 32-Bit Binary Counter 1 (read) 00, 01 (start-stop) 129 (response) 00, 01 (start-stop)
with Flag
7 (freeze) 06 (no range, or all) 17, 28 (index –
see note 2)
with Flag
see note 2)
without Flag
(default – 7 (freeze) 06 (no range, or all) 17, 28 (index –
without Flag
see note 2)
21 0 Frozen Counter 1 (read) 00, 01 (start-stop)

request default variation) 06 (no range, or all)
07, 08 limited qty)
17, 28 (index)
21 1 32-Bit Frozen Counter 1 (read) 00, 01 (start-stop) 129 (response) 00, 01 (start-stop)
with Flag
see note 2)
07, 08 limited qty)
17, 28 (index)
with Flag
see note 2)
07, 08 limited qty)
17, 28 (index)
without Flag
07, 08 limited qty)
17, 28 (index)
without Flag
see note 2)
07, 08 limited qty)
17, 28 (index)
MiCOM P342, P343 Page 135/170

Description
30 0 Analog Input (Variation 0 1 (read) 00, 01 (start-stop)

is used to request default
variation) 06 (no range, or all)
07, 08 limited qty)
17, 28 (index)
30 1 32-Bit Analog Input 1 (read) 00, 01 (start-stop) 129 (response) 00, 01 (start-stop)

see note 2)
07, 08 limited qty)
17, 28 (index)

07, 08 limited qty)
17, 28 (index)
without Flag
see note 2)
07, 08 limited qty)
17, 28 (index)
without Flag
see note 2)
07, 08 limited qty)
17, 28 (index)
32 0 Analog Change Event 1 (read) 06 (no range, or all)

request default variation) 07, 08 (limited qty)
32 1 32-Bit Analog Change 1 (read) 06 (no range, or all) 129 (response) 17, 28 (index)
Event without Time
Event without Time
(default – 07, 08 (limited qty)
see note 1)
Event with Time
Event with Time
50 0 Time and Date 1 (read) 00, 01 (start-stop) 129 (response) 00, 01 (start-stop)

see note 2)
07, 08 limited qty)
17, 28 (index)
50 1 Time and Date 1 (read) 00, 01 (start-stop) 129 (response) 00, 01 (start-stop)
(default – 2 (write) 06 (no range, or all) 17, 28 (index –

07 (limited qty = 1)
08 (limited qty)
17, 28 (index)
52 2 Time Delay Fine 129 (response) 07 (limited

qty)
(qty = 1)
60 0 Class 0, 1, 2, and 3 1 (read) 06 (no range, or all)

Data
60 1 Class 0 Data 1 (read) 06 (no range, or all) 129 (response) 17, 28 (index)

Page 136/170 MiCOM P342, P343

Description
80 1 Internal Indications 1 (write) 00 (start–stop)

(index must = 7)
No Object (function code 13 (cold restart)

only)
No Object (function code 1 (warm restart)

only)
No Object (function code 1 (delay meas.)

only)
Notes:
1. A Default variation refers to the variation responded when variation 0 is
requested and/or in class 0, 1, 2, or 3 scans.
2. For static (non-change-event) objects, qualifiers 17 or 28 are only responded
when a request is sent with qualifiers 17 or 28, respectively. Otherwise, static
object requests sent with qualifiers 00, 01, 06, 07, or 08, will be responded
with qualifiers 00 or 01. (For change-event objects, qualifiers 17 or 28 are
always responded.)
4. POINT LIST
The tables in the following sections identify all the individual data points provided by
this implementation of DNP 3.0.
4.1 Binary input points
The Binary Input objects (1 & 2) provide read-only access to a sub-set of the P340’s
digital data bus (DDB).
By default, all the static object (object 1) points belong to the Class 0 data set. The
default allocation of the points in the change-event object (object 2) to a change-
event class (1, 2, 3) is indicated in the point-list table below. The MiCOM S1 setting
support software may be used to alter both of these assignments. However,
deselecting a point from class 0 also has the effect of removing the point from the
point-list of objects 1 & 2 and renumbering the remaining points to ensure the point
indices are contiguous.
The validity of each point is reported through the “online” bit in the “flag”, which is
supplied for each point with the “with flag” object variations. Points reported as
being offline, will typically be points that are invalid for the relay’s current
configuration, which is a product of its model number and current settings.
MiCOM P342, P343 Page 137/170
Binary Input Points

Static (Steady-State) Object Number: 1
Change Event Object Number: 2
Request Function Codes supported: 1 (read)
Static Variation reported when variation 0 requested: 1 (Binary Input without status)
Change Event Variation reported when variation 0 requested: 2 (Binary Input Change with Time)
Default
P341 P342 P343 Change
DDB Initial
Point Point Point Name/Description Event Class
NO Value
Index Index Index (1, 2, 3, or
none)
Output Relay Status

0 0 0 Output Relay 1 0 2 False
24 Output Relay 25 24 2 False
Page 138/170 MiCOM P342, P343
Binary Input Points

Default
DDB Initial
NO Value
none)
Opto Isolator Input Status

24 24 32 Opto Isolator Input 1 32 2 False
56 Opto Isolator Input 25 56 2 False
MiCOM P342, P343 Page 139/170
Binary Input Points

Default
DDB Initial
NO Value
none)
Alarm & Event Indications

48 48 64 Setting Group via Opto Invalid 290 2 False
49 49 65 Test Mode Enabled 291 2 False
50 50 66 VTS Indication 292 2 False
51 51 67 CTS Indication 293 2 False
52 52 68 Breaker Fail Any Trip 294 2 False
53 53 69 Broken Current Maintenance Alarm 295 2 False
54 54 70 Broken Current Lockout Alarm 296 2 False
55 55 71 Number of CB Operations Maintenance Alarm 297 2 False
Number of CB Operations Maintenance
56 56 72 298 2 False
Lockout
Excessive CB Operation Time Maintenance
57 57 73 299 2 False
Alarm
58 58 74 Excessive CB Operation Time Lockout Alarm 300 2 False
59 59 75 Excessive Fault Frequency Lockout Alarm 301 2 False
60 60 76 CB Status Alarm 302 2 False
61 CB Failed to Trip 303 2 False
62 CB Failed to Close 304 2 False
63 Control CB Unhealthy 305 2 False
64 Frequency Out of Range 306 2 False
61 77 Negative Phase Sequence Alarm 306 2 False
65 62 78 Thermal Overload Alarm 307 2 False
63 79 Volts Per Hz Alarm 308 2 False
64 80 Field Failure Alarm 309 2 False
65 81 RTD Thermal Alarm 310 2 False
66 82 RTD Open Circuit Failure 311 2 False
67 83 RTD Short Circuit Failure 312 2 False
68 84 RTD Data Inconsistency Error 313 2 False
69 85 RTD Board Failure 314 2 False
66 70 86 Frequency Protection Alarm 315 2 False
67 71 87 Voltage Protection Alarm 316 2 False
68 72 88 User Definable Alarm 1 (Self Reset) 351 2 False
Page 140/170 MiCOM P342, P343
Binary Input Points

Default
DDB Initial
NO Value
none)
75 91 RTD 1 Alarm 743 2 False

71 85 101 Composite Lockout Alarm 753 2 False
72 86 102 Field Voltage Failure 756 2 False
Miscellaneous Indications
73 87 103 Battery Status N/A 2 False
74 88 104 IRIG-B Status N/A 2 False
Protection Operation Signals
75 89 105 Any Trip 162 2 False
76 90 106 External Trip 3ph 380 2 False
107 100% Stator Earth Fault Trip 416 2 False
108 Dead Machine Protection Trip 417 2 False
109 Generator Differential Trip 3ph 418 2 False
110 Generator Differential Trip A 419 2 False
111 Generator Differential Trip B 420 2 False
112 Generator Differential Trip C 421 2 False
91 113 Field Failure Stage 1 Trip 422 2 False
92 114 Field Failure Stage 2 Trip 423 2 False
93 115 Negative Phase Sequence Trip 424 2 False
94 116 Voltage Dependant Over Current Trip 3ph 425 2 False
95 117 Voltage Dependant Over Current Trip A 426 2 False
96 118 Voltage Dependant Over Current Trip B 427 2 False
97 119 Voltage Dependant Over Current Trip C 428 2 False
98 120 Volts per Hz Trip 429 2 False
99 121 RTD 1 Trip 430 2 False
MiCOM P342, P343 Page 141/170
Binary Input Points

Default
DDB Initial
NO Value
none)

108 130 RTD 10 Trip 439 2 False
109 131 Any RTD Trip 440 2 False
77 Rate Of Change Of Frequency Trip 440 2 False
78 Voltage Vector Shift Trip 441 2 False
79 110 132 1st Stage EF Trip 442 2 False
80 111 133 2nd Stage EF Trip 443 2 False
81 3rd Stage EF Trip 444 2 False
82 4th Stage EF Trip 445 2 False
83 112 134 REF Trip 446 2 False
84 113 135 1st Stage SEF Trip 447 2 False
85 2nd Stage SEF Trip 448 2 False
86 3rd Stage SEF Trip 449 2 False
87 4th Stage SEF Trip 450 2 False
88 114 136 1st Stage Residual O/V Trip 451 2 False
89 115 137 2nd Stage Residual O/V Trip 452 2 False
90 116 138 1st Stage Phase U/V Trip 3ph 453 2 False
91 117 139 1st Stage Phase U/V Trip A/AB 454 2 False
92 118 140 1st Stage Phase U/V Trip B/BC 455 2 False
93 119 141 1st Stage Phase U/V Trip C/CA 456 2 False
94 120 142 2nd Stage Phase U/V Trip 3ph 457 2 False
95 121 143 2nd Stage Phase U/V Trip A/AB 458 2 False
96 122 144 2nd Stage Phase U/V Trip B/BC 459 2 False
97 123 145 2nd Stage Phase U/V Trip C/CA 460 2 False
98 124 146 1st Stage Phase O/V Trip 3ph 461 2 False
99 125 147 1st Stage Phase O/V Trip A/AB 462 2 False
100 126 148 1st Stage Phase O/V Trip B/BC 463 2 False
101 127 149 1st Stage Phase O/V Trip C/CA 464 2 False
Page 142/170 MiCOM P342, P343
Binary Input Points

Default
DDB Initial
NO Value
none)
102 128 150 2nd Stage Phase O/V Trip 3ph 465 2 False
103 129 151 2nd Stage Phase O/V Trip A/AB 466 2 False
104 130 152 2nd Stage Phase O/V Trip B/BC 467 2 False
105 131 153 2nd Stage Phase O/V Trip C/CA 468 2 False
106 132 154 Under Frequency Stage 1 Trip 469 2 False
110 136 158 Over Frequency Stage 1 Trip 473 2 False
111 137 159 Over Frequency Stage 2 Trip 474 2 False
112 138 160 Power Stage 1 Trip 475 2 False
113 139 161 Power Stage 2 Trip 476 2 False
114 140 162 1st Stage O/C Trip 3ph 477 2 False
115 141 163 1st Stage O/C Trip A 478 2 False
116 142 164 1st Stage O/C Trip B 479 2 False
117 143 165 1st Stage O/C Trip C 480 2 False
118 144 166 2nd Stage O/C Trip 3ph 481 2 False
119 145 167 2nd Stage O/C Trip A 482 2 False
120 146 168 2nd Stage O/C Trip B 483 2 False
121 147 169 2nd Stage O/C Trip C 484 2 False
122 3rd Stage O/C Trip 3ph 485 2 False
123 3rd Stage O/C Trip A 486 2 False
124 3rd Stage O/C Trip B 487 2 False
125 3rd Stage O/C Trip C 488 2 False
126 4th Stage O/C Trip 3ph 489 2 False
127 4th Stage O/C Trip A 490 2 False
128 4th Stage O/C Trip B 491 2 False
129 4th Stage O/C Trip C 492 2 False
130 148 170 tBF1 Trip 3ph 493 2 False
131 149 171 tBF2 Trip 3ph 494 2 False
132 150 172 Sensitive A Phase Power Stage 1 Trip 495 2 False
133 151 173 Sensitive A Phase Power Stage 2 Trip 496 2 False
174 Pole Slip (Impedance) Zone1 Trip 497 2 False
175 Pole Slip (Impedance) Zone2 Trip 498 2 False
MiCOM P342, P343 Page 143/170
Binary Input Points

Default
DDB Initial
NO Value
none)
134 152 176 Thermal Overload Trip 499 2 False

153 177 Under Impedance 3 Phase Stage 1 Trip 500 2 False
154 178 Under Impedance Phase A Stage 1 Trip 501 2 False
155 179 Under Impedance Phase B Stage 1 Trip 502 2 False
156 180 Under Impedance Phase C Stage 1 Trip 503 2 False
157 181 Under Impedance 3 Phase Stage 2 Trip 504 2 False
158 182 Under Impedance Phase A Stage 2 Trip 505 2 False
159 183 Under Impedance Phase B Stage 2 Trip 506 2 False
160 184 Under Impedance Phase C Stage 2 Trip 507 2 False
135 161 185 Any Start 576 2 False
136 162 186 1st Stage Residual O/V Start 577 2 False
137 163 187 2nd Stage Residual O/V Start 578 2 False
138 164 188 1st Stage Phase U/V Start 3ph 579 2 False
139 165 189 1st Stage Phase U/V Start A/AB 580 2 False
140 166 190 1st Stage Phase U/V Start B/BC 581 2 False
141 167 191 1st Stage Phase U/V Start C/CA 582 2 False
142 168 192 2nd Stage Phase U/V Start 3ph 583 2 False
143 169 193 2nd Stage Phase U/V Start A/AB 584 2 False
144 170 194 2nd Stage Phase U/V Start B/BC 585 2 False
145 171 195 2nd Stage Phase U/V Start C/CA 586 2 False
146 172 196 1st Stage Phase O/V Start 3ph 587 2 False
147 173 197 1st Stage Phase O/V Start A/AB 588 2 False
148 174 198 1st Stage Phase O/V Start B/BC 589 2 False
149 175 199 1st Stage Phase O/V Start C/CA 590 2 False
150 176 200 2nd Stage Phase O/V Start 3ph 591 2 False
151 177 201 2nd Stage Phase O/V Start A/AB 592 2 False
152 178 202 2nd Stage Phase O/V Start B/BC 593 2 False
153 179 203 2nd Stage Phase O/V Start C/CA 594 2 False
154 180 204 Power Stage 1 Start 595 2 False
155 181 205 Power Stage 2 Start 596 2 False
156 182 206 1st Stage O/C Start 3ph 597 2 False
157 183 207 1st Stage O/C Start A 598 2 False
158 184 208 1st Stage O/C Start B 599 2 False
159 185 209 1st Stage O/C Start C 600 2 False
Page 144/170 MiCOM P342, P343
Binary Input Points

Default
DDB Initial
NO Value
none)
160 186 210 2nd Stage O/C Start 3ph 601 2 False
161 187 211 2nd Stage O/C Start A 602 2 False
162 188 212 2nd Stage O/C Start B 603 2 False
163 189 213 2nd Stage O/C Start C 604 2 False
164 3rd Stage O/C Start 3ph 605 2 False
165 3rd Stage O/C Start A 606 2 False
166 3rd Stage O/C Start B 607 2 False
167 3rd Stage O/C Start C 608 2 False
168 4th Stage O/C Start 3ph 609 2 False
169 4th Stage O/C Start A 610 2 False
170 4th Stage O/C Start B 611 2 False
171 4th Stage O/C Start C 612 2 False
172 190 214 1st Stage EF Start 613 2 False
173 191 215 2nd Stage EF Start 614 2 False
174 3rd Stage EF Start 615 2 False
175 4th Stage EF Start 616 2 False
176 192 216 1st Stage SEF Start 617 2 False
177 2nd Stage SEF Start 618 2 False
178 3rd Stage SEF Start 619 2 False
179 4th Stage SEF Start 620 2 False
217 100% Stator Earth Fault Start 621 2 False
180 193 218 Under Frequency Stage 1 Start 622 2 False
184 197 222 Over Frequency Stage 1 Start 626 2 False
185 198 223 Over Frequency Stage 2 Start 627 2 False
186 I> Blocked O/C Start 628 2 False
187 IN/ISEF> Blocked O/C Start 629 2 False
188 Rate Of Change Of Frequency Start 630 2 False
199 224 Volts per Hz Start 636 2 False
200 225 Field Failure Stage 1 Start 637 2 False
201 226 Field Failure Stage 2 Start 638 2 False
202 227 Voltage Dependant Over Current Start 3Ph 639 2 False
MiCOM P342, P343 Page 145/170
Binary Input Points

Default
DDB Initial
NO Value
none)
203 228 Voltage Dependant Over Current Start A 640 2 False

204 229 Voltage Dependant Over Current Start B 641 2 False
205 230 Voltage Dependant Over Current Start C 642 2 False
189 206 231 Sensitive A Phase Power Stage 1 Start 643 2 False
190 207 232 Sensitive A Phase Power Stage 2 Start 644 2 False
233 Pole Slip (Impedance) Zone1 Start 645 2 False
234 Pole Slip (Impedance) Zone2 Start 646 2 False
235 Pole Slip (impedance) Lens Start 647 2 False
236 Pole Slip (impedance) Blinder Start 648 2 False
237 Pole Slip (impedance) Reactance Line Start 649 2 False
208 238 Under Impedance 3Phase Stage 1 Start 650 2 False
209 239 Under Impedance Phase A Stage 1 Start 651 2 False
210 240 Under Impedance Phase B Stage 1 Start 652 2 False
211 241 Under Impedance Phase C Stage 1 Start 653 2 False
212 242 Under Impedance 3Phase Stage 2 Start 654 2 False
213 243 Under Impedance Phase A Stage 2 Start 655 2 False
214 244 Under Impedance Phase B Stage 2 Start 656 2 False
215 245 Under Impedance Phase C Stage 2 Start 657 2 False
191 216 246 VTS Fast Block 736 2 False
192 217 247 VTS Slow Block 737 2 False
193 218 248 CTS Block 738 2 False
194 Control Trip 739 2 False
195 Control Close 740 2 False
196 Control Close in Progress 741 2 False
197 Reconnection Time Delay Output 742 2 False
CB Status
198 219 249 3 ph CB Open 754 2 False
199 220 250 3 ph CB Closed 755 2 False
200 221 251 IA< Operate 631 2 False
201 222 252 IB< Operate 632 2 False
202 223 253 IC< Operate 633 2 False
203 224 254 ISEF< Operate 634 2 False
225 255 IN< Operate 635 2 False
204 226 256 All Poles Dead 757 2 False
Page 146/170 MiCOM P342, P343
Binary Input Points

Default
DDB Initial
NO Value
none)
205 227 257 Any Pole Dead 758 2 False

206 228 258 Phase A Pole Dead 759 2 False
207 229 259 Phase B Pole Dead 760 2 False
208 230 260 Phase C Pole Dead 761 2 False
New in software version 07
Alarm Signals
209 231 261 CLIO Input Board Failure 320 2 False
210 232 262 CLIO Output Board Failure 321 2 False
211 233 263 Current Loop Input 1 Alarm 322 2 False
215 237 267 Current Loop Input 1 Undercurrent Fail Alarm 326 2 False
219 241 271 User Definable Alarm 16 (Manual Reset) 336 2 False
Trip Signals
232 254 284 Current Loop Input 1 Trip 508 2 False
MiCOM P342, P343 Page 147/170
Binary Input Points

Default
DDB Initial
NO Value
none)
Start Signals
236 258 288 Current Loop Input 1 Alarm Start 658 2 False
240 262 292 Current Loop Input 1 Trip Start 662 2 False
4.2 Binary output status points and control relay output block
The following table lists both the Binary Output Status Points (Object 10) and the
Control Relay Output Block (Object 12).
Binary Output Status points are included in Class 0 data set. (Since there is not a
change-event object for the binary outputs, the binary output points are not part of
the class 1, 2, or 3 data sets). It is not possible to configure the class 0 membership
of this object with MiCOM S1.
The Control Relay Output Block (CROB) implementation is compliant with the DNP
technical bulletin TB2000-006, which rescinds CROB behaviours specified in the
original four document set and addendum sub-set documents.
The following text is a brief summary of DNP technical bulletin TB2000-006:
Each control point in the CROB may be either a "complimentary control function" or a
"single function".
Examples of complimentary control functions are:
• Trip and close
• On and Off
Examples of single-function controls are:

• Trip
• Activate
Page 148/170 MiCOM P342, P343
A point index cannot support both complimentary and single-function methods of

operation.
Complimentary control function points require the use of a complementary control-
code pair. The CROB provides two sets of control pairs:
• Code 0316 "Latch On" and code 0416 "Latch Off"
• Code 4116 "Pulse On/Close" and code 8116 "Pulse On/Trip"
In DNP there is no significance to these codes; they do the same thing. A
complimentary-control point may "permit" either or both of these pairs. If a point
permits both pairs of codes then:
• Latch On and Pulse Close must perform the same function
• Latch Off and Pulse Trip must perform the same function
Single-function control points may permit one or more of the following control codes:
• Code 0116 "Pulse On"
• Code 0316 "Latch On"
• Code 0416 "Latch Off"
• Code 4116 "Pulse On/Close
• Code 8116 "Pulse On/Trip"
There is no significance to these codes; they do the same thing. Each of the
permitted single-function codes must perform the same function on a given single-
function point index.
The original DNP 3.0 specification for the CROB "exposes the details of the device
hardware to the protocol stack. This is unnecessary and creates interoperability
issues". Moreover, "some IED vendors have implemented points that do different
things based on the control code that is sent. " E.g. a point latches for the latch codes
and pulses for the pulse codes. "This perverts the original intent of the CROB and
makes it impossible for masters that statically configure control codes to be
interoperable with such [IEDs]. This type of implementation is also not transportable
across legacy protocol boundaries."
In the following table, point indices that are marked as “unpaired” will accept the
correspondingly marked control codes and treat them identically as a “trigger” for the
command action associated with the point. Unpaired points do not have a state
value that can be read and a read request, whilst completing successfully, will always
return a value of zero.
Points that are marked as “paired” behave as complimentary-controls and have a
state value that can be read. The Latch On and Pulse On/Close control-codes set the
specified output status point whilst the Latch Off and Pulse On/Trip codes reset it.
The Count field is not supported and must be either zero or one. The On-time, and
Off-time fields are ignored. The Queue and Clear bits in the Control-Code field are
not supported and must be zero. The “Pulse Off” control-code code is not supported.
MiCOM P342, P343 Page 149/170
Binary Output Status Points

Object Number: 10
Request Function Code supported: 1 (read)
Default Variation reported when variation 0 requested: 2 (Binary Output Status)
Control Relay Output Blocks (CROB)
Object Number: 12
Request Function Code supported: 3 (select), 4 (operate), 5 (direct operate), 6 (direct operate, no ack)
Supported CROB Fields
Pulse On/Close
Pulse On/Trip
P341 P342 P343
Unpaired
Latch Off
Latch On
Pulse On
Point Point Point Name/Description
Paired
Index Index Index
Setting Group Control:

0 0 0 Activate Setting Group 1 * * * * *
Control Commands:
4 Initiate CB Trip * * * * * *
5 Initiate CB Close * * * * * *
6 4 4 Reset Indication * * * * *
7 5 5 Reset Demand * * * * *
6 6 Reset Negative Phase Sequence Thermal Replica * * * * *
8 7 7 Reset Thermal Overload Replica * * * * *
9 8 8 Clear Event Records * * * * *
10 9 9 Clear Fault Records * * * * *
11 10 10 Clear Maintenance Records * * * * *
12 11 11 Test LEDs * * * * *
13 12 12 Reset Lockout * * * * *
14 13 13 Reset CB Data * * * * *
14 14 Reset RTD Flags * * * * *
Scheme Logic Control Input Signals:
15 15 15 Control Input 1 * * * * *
16 16 16 Control Input 2 * * * * *
17 17 17 Control Input 3 * * * * *
18 18 18 Control Input 4 * * * * *
19 19 19 Control Input 5 * * * * *
20 20 20 Control Input 6 * * * * *
21 21 21 Control Input 7 * * * * *
22 22 22 Control Input 8 * * * * *
23 23 23 Control Input 9 * * * * *
24 24 24 Control Input 10 * * * * *
25 25 25 Control Input 11 * * * * *
Page 150/170 MiCOM P342, P343
Binary Output Status Points

Object Number: 10
Default Variation reported when variation 0 requested: 2 (Binary Output Status)
Control Relay Output Blocks (CROB)
Object Number: 12
Request Function Code supported: 3 (select), 4 (operate), 5 (direct operate), 6 (direct operate, no ack)
Supported CROB Fields
Pulse On/Close
Pulse On/Trip
P341 P342 P343
Unpaired
Latch Off
Latch On
Pulse On
Point Point Point Name/Description
Paired
Index Index Index
26 26 26 Control Input 12 * * * * *
27 27 27 Control Input 13 * * * * *
28 28 28 Control Input 14 * * * * *
29 29 29 Control Input 15 * * * * *
30 30 30 Control Input 16 * * * * *
31 31 31 Control Input 17 * * * * *
32 32 32 Control Input 18 * * * * *
33 33 33 Control Input 19 * * * * *
34 34 34 Control Input 20 * * * * *
35 35 35 Control Input 21 * * * * *
36 36 36 Control Input 22 * * * * *
37 37 37 Control Input 23 * * * * *
38 38 38 Control Input 24 * * * * *
39 39 39 Control Input 25 * * * * *
40 40 40 Control Input 26 * * * * *
41 41 41 Control Input 27 * * * * *
42 42 42 Control Input 28 * * * * *
43 43 43 Control Input 29 * * * * *
44 44 44 Control Input 30 * * * * *
45 45 45 Control Input 31 * * * * *
46 46 46 Control Input 32 * * * * *
4.3 Counters
The following table lists both Binary Counters (Object 20) and Frozen Counters
(Object 21). When a freeze function is performed on a Binary Counter point, the
frozen value is available in the corresponding Frozen Counter point.
By default the Binary Counters (object 20) and Frozen Counters (object 21) are
included in class 0 polls. The MiCOM S1 setting support software may be used to
alter both of these assignments. (Since there is not a change-event object for the
Binary Counters or Frozen Counters, the counter points are not part of the class 1, 2,
or 3 data sets). However, deselecting a point from class 0 also has the effect of
removing the point from the point-list of the associated object (20 or 21) and
renumbering the remaining points to ensure the point indices are contiguous.
MiCOM P342, P343 Page 151/170
Moreover, if a point is deselected from the running counter object (20) then it is also
deselected from the frozen counter object (21).
Binary Counter Points

Request Function Code supported: 1(read), 7(freeze), 8(freeze no ack), 9(freeze and clear),
10(freeze and clear, no ack)
Static Variation reported when variation 0 requested: 5 (32-Bit Binary Counter without Flag)
Change Event Variation reported when variation 0 requested: none – not supported
Frozen Counter Points
Static (Steady State) Object Number: 21
Static Variation reported when variation 0 requested: 9 (32-Bit Binary Counter without Flag)
Change Event Variation reported when variation 0 requested: none – not supported
P341 P342 P343
Point Point Point Name/Description Data Type
Index Index Index
0 0 0 3Ph WHours Fwd D10

1 1 1 3Ph WHours Rev D10
2 2 2 3Ph VArHours Fwd D10
3 3 3 3Ph VArHours Rev D10
4 4 4 CB Operations -
4.4 Analog inputs

The following table lists the Analog Inputs (Object 30).
For each point, the “Data Type” code refers to the points scaling information in
section §4.5; analog values are provided in a fixed-point integer format derived from
the relay’s internal per-unit quantities. The scaling information associated with each
data-type code, in section §4.5, will result in an equivalent secondary (i.e. relay input)
value. Additional scaling will be required to produce the primary (i.e. power system)
values.
By default, all the static object (object 30) points belong to the Class 0 data set. The
“Default Deadband”, and the “Default Change Event Assigned Class” columns are
used to represent the absolute amount by which the point must change before an
analog change event will be generated. The default allocation of the points in the
change-event object (object 32) to a change-event class (1, 2, 3) is also indicated.
The class 0, deadband, and event class values may be changed with the MiCOM S1
setting support software. However, deselecting a point from class 0 also has the
effect of removing the point from the point-list of objects 30 & 32 and renumbering
the remaining points to ensure the point indices are contiguous.
Page 152/170 MiCOM P342, P343
Analog Inputs
Static Variation reported when variation 0 requested: 2 (16-Bit Analog Input)
Change Event Variation reported when variation 0 requested: 2 (16-Bit Analog Change Event without
Time)
Default
Data Default
Point Point Point Name/Description Valid Range Event Class
Type Deadband
none)
Active Group
0 0 0 Active Group D9 1…4 1 3
Measurements 1
1 1 IA Magnitude D1 0.000…65.534 0.1 3
2 2 IA Phase Angle D4 -180.00…+180.00 1 3
3 3 IB Magnitude D1 0.000…65.534 0.1 3

4 4 IB Phase Angle D4 -180.00…+180.00 1 3
5 5 IC Magnitude D1 0.000…65.534 0.1 3
6 6 IC Phase Angle D4 -180.00…+180.00 1 3

1 IA-1 Magnitude D1 0.000…65.534 0.1 3
2 IA-1 Phase Angle D4 -180.00…+180.00 1 3
3 IB-1 Magnitude D1 0.000…65.534 0.1 3

4 IB-1 Phase Angle D4 -180.00…+180.00 1 3
5 IC-1 Magnitude D1 0.000…65.534 0.1 3
6 IC-1 Phase Angle D4 -180.00…+180.00 1 3
7 7 IN Measured Mag D2 0.0000…2.0000 0.01 3
8 8 IN Measured Ang D4 -180.00…+180.00 1 3

7 IN Derived Mag D1 0.000…65.534 0.1 3
8 IN Derived Angle D4 -180.00…+180.00 1 3
9 9 9 I Sen Magnitude D2 0.0000…2.0000 0.01 3

10 10 10 I Sen Angle D4 -180.00…+180.00 1 3
11 11 11 I1 Magnitude D1 0.000…65.534 0.1 3
12 12 12 I2 Magnitude D1 0.000…65.534 0.1 3

13 13 13 I0 Magnitude D1 0.000…65.534 0.1 3
14 14 14 IA RMS D1 0.000…65.534 0.1 3
15 15 15 IB RMS D1 0.000…65.534 0.1 3

16 16 16 IC RMS D1 0.000…65.534 0.1 3
17 17 17 VAB Magnitude D3 0.00…220.00 5 3
18 18 18 VAB Phase Angle D4 -180.00…+180.00 1 3
19 19 19 VBC Magnitude D3 0.00…220.00 5 3
20 20 20 VBC Phase Angle D4 -180.00…+180.00 1 3

21 21 21 VCA Magnitude D3 0.00…220.00 5 3
22 22 22 VCA Phase Angle D4 -180.00…+180.00 1 3
23 23 23 VAN Magnitude D3 0.00…220.00 5 3

24 24 24 VAN Phase Angle D4 -180.00…+180.00 1 3
25 25 25 VBN Magnitude D3 0.00…220.00 5 3

MiCOM P342, P343 Page 153/170
Analog Inputs
Time)
Default
Data Default
Type Deadband
none)
26 26 26 VBN Phase Angle D4 -180.00…+180.00 1 3

27 27 27 VCN Magnitude D3 0.00…220.00 5 3
28 28 28 VCN Phase Angle D4 -180.00…+180.00 1 3

29 29 29 VN Measured Mag D3 0.00…220.00 5 3
30 30 30 VN Measured Ang D4 -180.00…+180.00 1 3
31 31 31 VN Derived Mag D3 0.00…220.00 5 3

32 32 32 VN Derived Ang D4 -180.00…+180.00 1 3
33 33 33 V1 Magnitude D3 0.00…220.00 5 3
34 34 34 V2 Magnitude D3 0.00…220.00 5 3
35 35 35 V0 Magnitude D3 0.00…220.00 5 3
36 36 36 VAN RMS D3 0.00…220.00 5 3
37 37 37 VBN RMS D3 0.00…220.00 5 3

38 38 38 VCN RMS D3 0.00…220.00 5 3
39 39 39 Frequency D5 5.00…70.00 0.5 3
Measurements 2
40 40 40 A Phase Watts D6 -3150.0…+3150.0 1 3
41 41 41 B Phase Watts D6 -3150.0…+3150.0 1 3

42 42 42 C Phase Watts D6 -3150.0…+3150.0 1 3
43 43 43 A Phase VArs D6 -3150.0…+3150.0 1 3
44 44 44 B Phase VArs D6 -3150.0…+3150.0 1 3

45 45 45 C Phase VArs D6 -3150.0…+3150.0 1 3
46 46 46 A Phase VA D6 -3150.0…+3150.0 1 3
47 47 47 B Phase VA D6 -3150.0…+3150.0 1 3
48 48 48 C Phase VA D6 -3150.0…+3150.0 1 3
49 49 49 3 Phase Watts D6 -3150.0…+3150.0 1 3
50 50 50 3 Phase VArs D6 -3150.0…+3150.0 1 3

51 51 51 3 Phase VA D6 -3150.0…+3150.0 1 3
52 52 52 3Ph Power Factor D8 0.000…1.000 0.1 3
53 53 53 APh Power Factor D8 0.000…1.000 0.1 3
54 54 54 BPh Power Factor D8 0.000…1.000 0.1 3
55 55 55 CPh Power Factor D8 0.000…1.000 0.1 3

56 56 56 3Ph W Fix Demand D6 -3150.0…+3150.0 1 3
57 57 57 3Ph VArs Fix Dem D6 -3150.0…+3150.0 1 3
58 58 58 IA Fixed Demand D1 0.000…65.534 0.1 3

59 59 59 IB Fixed Demand D1 0.000…65.534 0.1 3
60 60 60 IC Fixed Demand D1 0.000…65.534 0.1 3

Page 154/170 MiCOM P342, P343
Analog Inputs
Time)
Default
Data Default
Type Deadband
none)
61 61 61 3 Ph W Roll Dem D6 -3150.0…+3150.0 1 3

62 62 62 3Ph VArs RollDem D6 -3150.0…+3150.0 1 3
63 63 63 IA Roll Demand D1 0.000…65.534 0.1 3

64 64 64 IB Roll Demand D1 0.000…65.534 0.1 3
65 65 65 IC Roll Demand D1 0.000…65.534 0.1 3
66 66 66 3Ph W Peak Dem D6 -3150.0…+3150.0 1 3

67 67 67 3Ph VAr Peak Dem D6 -3150.0…+3150.0 1 3
68 68 68 IA Peak Demand D1 0.000…65.534 0.1 3
69 69 69 IB Peak Demand D1 0.000…65.534 0.1 3

70 70 70 IC Peak Demand D1 0.000…65.534 0.1 3
Measurements 3
71 IA-2 Magnitude D1 0.000…65.534 0.1 3

72 IA-2 Phase Angle D4 -180.00…+180.00 1 3
73 IB-2 Magnitude D1 0.000…65.534 0.1 3
74 IB-2 Phase Angle D4 -180.00…+180.00 1 3
75 IC-2 Magnitude D1 0.000…65.534 0.1 3
76 IC-2 Phase Angle D4 -180.00…+180.00 1 3

77 IA Differential D1 0.000…65.534 0.1 3
78 IB Differential D1 0.000…65.534 0.1 3
79 IC Differential D1 0.000…65.534 0.1 3

80 IA Bias D1 0.000…65.534 0.1 3
81 IB Bias D1 0.000…65.534 0.1 3
82 IC Bias D1 0.000…65.534 0.1 3

71 83 IREF Diff D2 0.0000…2.0000 0.01 3
72 84 IREF Bias D2 0.0000…2.0000 0.01 3
85 VN 3rd Harmonic D3 0.00…220.00 5 3

73 86 NPS Thermal D7 0.00…327.67 10 3
74 87 RTD 1 D14 -40.0…300.0 1 3
75 88 RTD 2 D14 -40.0…300.0 1 3
76 89 RTD 3 D14 -40.0…300.0 1 3
77 90 RTD 4 D14 -40.0…300.0 1 3

78 91 RTD 5 D14 -40.0…300.0 1 3
79 92 RTD 6 D14 -40.0…300.0 1 3
80 93 RTD 7 D14 -40.0…300.0 1 3

81 94 RTD 8 D14 -40.0…300.0 1 3
82 95 RTD 9 D14 -40.0…300.0 1 3

MiCOM P342, P343 Page 155/170
Analog Inputs
Time)
Default
Data Default
Type Deadband
none)
83 96 RTD 10 D14 -40.0…300.0 1 3

71 84 97 APh Sen Watts D6 -3150.0…+3150.0 1 3
72 85 98 APh Sen Vars D6 -3150.0…+3150.0 1 3

73 86 99 APh Power Angle D4 -180.00…+180.00 1 3
74 87 100 Thermal Overload D7 0.00…327.67 10 3
New in software version

‘06’
75 88 101 I1 Phase Angle D4 -180.00…+180.00 1 3
76 89 102 I2 Phase Angle D4 -180.00…+180.00 1 3

77 90 103 I0 Phase Angle D4 -180.00…+180.00 1 3
78 91 104 V1 Phase Angle D4 -180.00…+180.00 1 3
79 92 105 V2 Phase Angle D4 -180.00…+180.00 1 3

80 93 106 V0 Phase Angle D4 -180.00…+180.00 1 3
New in software version
‘07’
81 94 107 CLIO Input 1 D16 -9999.9…+9999.9 10 3

82 95 108 CLIO Input 2 D16 -9999.9…+9999.9 10 3
83 96 109 CLIO Input 3 D16 -9999.9…+9999.9 10 3
84 97 110 CLIO Input 4 D16 -9999.9…+9999.9 10 3

Default
4.5
Standard
Data Change Change Event Change Event Change Event
Name/Description Scaling Numeric Range Units
Type Event Deadband MIN Deadband MAX Deadband STEP
Deadband
D1 Standard Phase, RMS, & Sequence Current x In / 500 0.1 0.05 In 64 In 0.01 In 0.000…65.534 A
Page 156/170
D2 Sensitive Current x In / 10000 0.01 0.01 In 2 In 0.001 In 0.0000…2.0000 A

P34x/EN GC/F33
D3 Voltage x Vn /(110 x 100) 5 0.1 Vn / 110 220 Vn / 110 0.1 Vn / 110 0.00…220.00 V
D4 Angle x 0.01 1 0.1 180 0.1 -180.00…+180.00 Degrees

Data type codes
D5 Frequency x 0.01 0.5 0.1 70 0.1 5.00…70.00 Hz
D6 Power x 0.1In x Vn / 110 1 0.1In .Vn / 110 3200 In x Vn / 110 0.1In x Vn / 110 -3150.0…+3150.0 W/VAr/VA
D7 Percentage x 0.01 10 0.1 320 0.1 0.00…327.67 %
D8 Power Factor x 0.001 0.1 0.01 1 0.01 0.000…1.000 [None]
D9 Setting Group x1 1 1 4 1 1…4 [None]
D10 Energy x In x Vn / 110 n/a In x Vn / 110 32000 In x Vn / 110 In x Vn / 110 0…231-1 Wh/VArh/VAh
D11 Admittance (Standard Current) x ( In / 1000)( 110 / Vn) 0.1 (0.01 In)( 110 / Vn) 32 In x ( 110 / Vn) (0.01 In)( 110 / Vn) -7.040…+7.040 S
D12 Admittance (Sensitive Current) x ( In / 10000)( 110 / Vn) 0.01 (0.001 In)( 110 / 2 In x ( 110 / Vn) (0.001 In)( 110 / Vn) -0.0220…+0.0220 S
Vn)
D13 Time (Minutes) x 0.01 5 1 30 0.5 0.00…327.67 Min
D14 Temperature (Celsius) x 0.1 1 0.1 300 0.1 -40.0…300.0 C
D15 Time (Seconds) x 0.00001 0.001 0.0001 0.03 0.0001 0.00000…0.32767 s
D16 CLIO Input Value x 0.1 10 0.1 9999 0.1 -9999.9…+9999.9 [User]
Notes:
1. In and Vn are the relay input ratings: 1A or 5A and 110V or 440V respectively.
2. The scaling value represents the multiplier required for the master station to scale the value obtained from the relay to the relay’s secondary (i.e. input) terms. Additional scaling will be
required by the master station to obtain primary quantities.
3. Type D6 can represent Watts, VArs or VA, the exact unit applied depends on the description of the item.
4. The default change event deadband is used unless specified otherwise in the point list.
5. All quantities are presented to the relay’s internal DNP3 interface as signed 32-bit values. Use of the 16-bit variations will require an assessment on a point by point basis as to whether the
value should be treated as signed or unsigned. The specified numeric range for each point can be used as a good guide to making this decision.
Relay Menu Database
MiCOM P342, P343
6. The “D16” units are defined by the user, depending on the type of CLIO transducer connected.
MiCOM P342, P343 Page 157/170
MiCOM P342 PROGRAMMABLE SCHEME LOGIC (07)

Opto Input and Fault Record Trigger Mappings
L3 Block IN>2 IN>2 Timer Blk

DDB #034 DDB #359
L4 Block I>2 I>2 Timer Block

DDB #035 DDB #355
L5 Reset Reset Relays/LED

DDB #036 DDB #386
L6 Ext Prot Trip Ext. Trip 3ph

DDB #037 DDB #380
L7 52a CB Aux 3ph(52-A)

DDB #038 DDB #381
L8 52b CB Aux 3ph(52-B)

DDB #039 DDB #382
Fault Record Trigger Mapping
R3 Any Trip Fault REC TRIG

DDB #002 DDB #288
P34x/EN GC/F33 Relay Menu Databases
Page 158/170 MiCOM P342, P343

Output Relay Mappings
Field Fail2 Trip

DDB #423
V Dep OC Trip
DDB #425
Z<1 Trip
DDB #500
Z<2 Trip
DDB #504
IN>1 Trip
DDB #442
IN>2 Trip
DDB #443
IREF> Trip
DDB #446
ISEF>1 Trip 100
DDB #447
VN>1 Trip
DDB #451
1 Dwell
0
R1 Trip CB
DDB #000
VN>2 Trip
DDB #452
V>2 Trip
DDB #465
I>1 Trip
DDB #477
I>2 Trip
DDB #481
Power1 Trip
DDB #475
V<2 Trip
DDB #457
SPower1 Trip
DDB #495
Thermal O/L Trip
DDB #499
Field Fail1 Trip
DDB #422
NPS Trip
DDB #424
V/Hz Trip
DDB #429
RTD 1 Trip
DDB #430
RTD 2 Trip
DDB #431
RTD 3 Trip
DDB #432
RTD 4 Trip
DDB #433
RTD 5 Trip
DDB #434
RTD 6 Trip
1
DDB #435
RTD 7 Trip
DDB #436 &
RTD 8 Trip
DDB #437
RTD 9 Trip
DDB #438
RTD 10 Trip
DDB #439
F>2 Trip
DDB #474
F<4 Trip
DDB #472
CL Input 1 Trip
DDB #508
CL Input 2 Trip
DDB #509
CL Input 3 Trip
DDB #510
CL Input 4 Trip
DDB #511
Power2 Trip
DDB #476
SPower2 Trip 1
DDB #496
MiCOM P342, P343 Page 159/170

Field Fail1 Trip

DDB #422
Field Fail2 Trip
DDB #423
NPS Trip
DDB #424
V Dep OC Trip
DDB #425
Z<1 Trip
DDB #500
Z<2 Trip
DDB #504
Thermal O/L Trip
DDB #499
V/Hz Trip
DDB #429
RTD 1 Trip
DDB #430
RTD 2 Trip
DDB #431
RTD 3 Trip
DDB #432
RTD 4 Trip
DDB #433
RTD 5 Trip
DDB #434
RTD 6 Trip
DDB #435
RTD 7 Trip
DDB #436
RTD 8 Trip
DDB #437
RTD 9 Trip
DDB #438
RTD 10 Trip 100
DDB #439
IN>1 Trip
1 Dwell
0
R2 Trip PrimeMov
DDB #001
DDB #442
IN>2 Trip
DDB #443
IREF> Trip
DDB #446
ISEF>1 Trip
DDB #447
VN>1 Trip
DDB #451
VN>2 Trip
DDB #452
V>2 Trip
DDB #465
F>2 Trip
DDB #474
Power1 Trip
DDB #475
I>1 Trip
DDB #477
I>2 Trip
DDB #481
V<2 Trip
DDB #457
F<4 Trip
DDB #472
SPower1 Trip
DDB #495
CL Input 1 Trip
DDB #508
CL Input 2 Trip
DDB #509
CL Input 3 Trip
DDB #510
CL Input 4 Trip
DDB #511
Page 160/170 MiCOM P342, P343

Thermal O/L Trip

DDB #499
Z<1 Trip
Z<2 Trip DDB #500
DDB #504 V Dep OC Trip
100% ST EF Trip DDB #425
DDB #416 DeadMachine Trip
Gen Diff Trip DDB #417
DDB #418 Field Fail1 Trip
Field Fail2 Trip DDB #422
DDB #423 NPS Trip
V/Hz Trip DDB #424
DDB #429 RTD 1 Trip
RTD 2 Trip DDB #430
DDB #431 RTD 3 Trip
RTD 4 Trip DDB #432
DDB #433 RTD 5 Trip
RTD 6 Trip DDB #434
DDB #435 RTD 7 Trip
RTD 8 Trip DDB #436
DDB #437 RTD 9 Trip
RTD 10 Trip DDB #438
DDB #439 IN>1 Trip
IN>2 Trip DDB #442
DDB #443 100
IREF> Trip
ISEF>1 Trip
DDB #447
DDB #446 1 Dwell
0
R3 Any Trip
DDB #002
VN>1 Trip
VN>2 Trip DDB #451
DDB #452 V<1 Trip
V<2 Trip DDB #453
DDB #457 V>1 Trip
V>2 Trip DDB #461
DDB #465 F<1 Trip
F<2 Trip DDB #469
DDB #470 F<3 Trip
F<4 Trip DDB #471
DDB #472 F>1 Trip
F>2 Trip DDB #473
DDB #474 Power1 Trip
Power2 Trip DDB #475
DDB #476 I>1 Trip
I>2 Trip DDB #477
DDB #481 SPower1 Trip
SPower2 Trip DDB #495
DDB #496 PSlipz Z1 Trip
PSlipz Z2 Trip DDB #497
DDB #498 CL Input 1 Trip
DDB #508
CL Input 2 Trip
DDB #509
CL Input 4 Trip
DDB #511
CL Input 3 Trip
DDB #510
MiCOM P342, P343 Page 161/170

Thermal Alarm
DDB #307
Field Fail Alarm
DDB #309
SG-opto Invalid
DDB #290
RTD Thermal Alm
DDB #310
VT Fail Alarm
DDB #292
RTD Open Cct
DDB #311
CT Fail Alarm
DDB #293
RTD short Cct
DDB #312
CB Fail Alarm
DDB #294
RTD Data Error
DDB #313
I^ Maint Alarm
DDB #295
RTD Board Fail
DDB #314
I^ Lockout Alarm
DDB #296
Field volts fail
DDB #756
CB Ops Maint
DDB #297
CL Card I/P Fail
DDB #320
CB Ops Lockout
DDB #298 0
CL Card O/P Fail
DDB #321 1 Drop-Off
500
R4 General Alarm
DDB #003
CB Op Time Maint
DDB #299
CL Input 1 Alarm
DDB #322
CB Op Time Lock
DDB #300
CL Input 2 Alarm
DDB #323
Fault Freq Lock
DDB #301
CL Input 3 Alarm
DDB #324
CB Status Alarm
DDB #302
CL Input 4 Alarm
DDB #325
Man CB Trip Fail
DDB #303
CLI1 I< Fail Alm
DDB #326
Man CB Cls Fail
DDB #304
CLI2 I< Fail Alm
DDB #327
Man CB Unhealthy
DDB #305
CLI3 I< Fail Alm
DDB #328
NPS Alarm
DDB #306
CLI4 I< Fail Alm
DDB #329
V/Hz Alarm
DDB #308
V<1 Trip Voltage Prot Alm

DDB #453 DDB #316
1
V>1 Trip
DDB #461
F<1 Trip
DDB #469
F<2 Trip
DDB #470
1
F<3 Trip Freq Prot Alm
DDB #471 DDB #315
F>1 Trip
DDB #473
Page 162/170 MiCOM P342, P343

100
Bfail1 Trip 3ph R5 CB Fail
DDB #493 Dwell DDB #004
0
IN>1 Trip
DDB #442
IN>2 Trip
DDB #443
IREF> Trip
DDB #446 0
1 Straight
0
R6 E/F Trip
DDB #005
ISEF>1 Trip
DDB #447
VN>1 Trip
DDB #451
VN>2 Trip
DDB #452
V<2 Trip
DDB #457
V>2 Trip
DDB #465
0
1 Straight
0
R7 V or F Trip
DDB #006
F>2 Trip
DDB #474
F<4 Trip
DDB #472
MiCOM P342, P343 Page 163/170

LED Mappings
IN>1 Trip
DDB #442
IN>2 Trip
DDB #443
ISEF>1 Trip
DDB #447
IREF> Trip
1 Latching LED 1
DDB #064
DDB #446
VN>1 Trip
DDB #451
VN>2 Trip
DDB #452
I>1 Trip
DDB #477
I>2 Trip
DDB #481 1 Latching LED 2
DDB #065
V Dep OC Trip
DDB #425
Field Fail1 Trip

DDB #422
1 Latching LED 3
DDB #066
Field Fail2 Trip

DDB #423
NPS Trip
DDB #424
Latching LED 4
DDB #067
V>2 Trip
DDB #465
1 Latching LED 5
DDB #068
V<2 Trip
DDB #457
F>2 Trip
DDB #474
1 Latching LED 6
DDB #069
F<4 Trip
DDB #472
Power1 Trip
DDB #475
SPower1 Trip
1 Latching LED 7
DDB #070
DDB #495
Any Start
Non - LED 8
DDB #576 Latching DDB #071
Page 164/170 MiCOM P342, P343

Opto Input and Fault Record Trigger Mappings
L3 Block IN>2 IN>2 Timer Blk

DDB #034 DDB #359
L4 Block I>2 I>2 Timer Block

DDB #035 DDB #355
L5 Reset Reset Relays/LED

DDB #036 DDB #386
L6 Ext Prot Trip Ext. Trip 3ph

DDB #037 DDB #380
L7 52a CB Aux 3ph(52-A)

DDB #038 DDB #381
L8 52b CB Aux 3ph(52-B)

DDB #039 DDB #382
Fault Record Trigger Mapping
R3 Any Trip Fault REC TRIG

DDB #002 DDB #288
MiCOM P342, P343 Page 165/170

Z<1 Trip
DDB #500
Z<2 Trip
DDB #504
V Dep OC Trip
DDB #425
PSlipz Z1 Trip
DDB #497
PSlipz Z2 Trip
DDB #498
100% ST EF Trip
DDB #416
DeadMachine Trip
DDB #417
Gen Diff Trip
DDB #418
Field Fail2 Trip
DDB #423
IN>1 Trip
DDB #442
IN>2 Trip
DDB #443
IREF> Trip 100
ISEF>1 Trip
DDB #446
1 Dwell
0
R1 Trip CB
DDB #000
DDB #447
VN>1 Trip
DDB #451
VN>2 Trip
DDB #452
V>2 Trip
DDB #465
I>1 Trip
DDB #477
I>2 Trip
DDB #481
Power1 Trip
DDB #475
V<2 Trip
DDB #457
SPower1 Trip
DDB #495
Thermal O/L Trip

DDB #499
Field Fail1 Trip
DDB #422
NPS Trip
DDB #424
V/Hz Trip
DDB #429
RTD 1 Trip
DDB #430
RTD 2 Trip
DDB #431
RTD 3 Trip
DDB #432
RTD 4 Trip
DDB #433
RTD 5 Trip
DDB #434
1
RTD 6 Trip
DDB #435
RTD 7 Trip
DDB #436
RTD 8 Trip
DDB #437
RTD 9 Trip
DDB #438
RTD 10 Trip
DDB #439
F<4 Trip
DDB #472
F>2 Trip
DDB #474
&
CL Input 1 Trip
DDB #508
CL Input 2 Trip
DDB #509
CL Input 3 Trip
DDB #510
CL Input 4 Trip
DDB #511
Power2 Trip
DDB #476
SPower2 Trip
1
DDB #496
Page 166/170 MiCOM P342, P343

Thermal O/L Trip

DDB #499
Z<1 Trip
DDB #500
Z<2 Trip
DDB #504
V Dep OC Trip
DDB #425
100% ST EF Trip
DDB #416
DeadMachine Trip
DDB #417
Gen Diff Trip
DDB #418
Field Fail1 Trip
DDB #422
Field Fail2 Trip
DDB #423
NPS Trip
DDB #424
V/Hz Trip
DDB #429
RTD 1 Trip
DDB #430
RTD 2 Trip
DDB #431
RTD 3 Trip
DDB #432
RTD 4 Trip
DDB #433
RTD 5 Trip
DDB #434
RTD 6 Trip
DDB #435
RTD 7 Trip
DDB #436
RTD 8 Trip
DDB #437
RTD 9 Trip
DDB #438
RTD 10 Trip 100
DDB #439
IN>1 Trip
1 Dwell
0
R2 Trip PrimeMov
DDB #001
DDB #442
IN>2 Trip
DDB #443
IREF> Trip
DDB #446
ISEF>1 Trip
DDB #447
VN>1 Trip
DDB #451
VN>2 Trip
DDB #452
V>2 Trip
DDB #465
F>2 Trip
DDB #474
Power1 Trip
DDB #475
I>1 Trip
DDB #477
I>2 Trip
DDB #481
V<2 Trip
DDB #457
F<4 Trip
DDB #472
SPower1 Trip
DDB #495
PSlipz Z1 Trip
DDB #497
PSlipz Z2 Trip
DDB #498
CL Input 1 Trip
DDB #508
CL Input 2 Trip
DDB #509
CL Input 3 Trip
DDB #510
CL Input 4 Trip
DDB #511
MiCOM P342, P343 Page 167/170

Thermal O/L Trip

DDB #499
Z<1 Trip
Z<2 Trip DDB #500
DDB #504 V Dep OC Trip
100% ST EF Trip DDB #425
DDB #416 DeadMachine Trip
Gen Diff Trip DDB #417
DDB #418 Field Fail1 Trip
Field Fail2 Trip DDB #422
DDB #423 NPS Trip
V/Hz Trip DDB #424
DDB #429 RTD 1 Trip
RTD 2 Trip DDB #430
DDB #431 RTD 3 Trip
RTD 4 Trip DDB #432
DDB #433 RTD 5 Trip
RTD 6 Trip DDB #434
DDB #435 RTD 7 Trip
RTD 8 Trip DDB #436
DDB #437 RTD 9 Trip
RTD 10 Trip DDB #438
DDB #439 IN>1 Trip
IN>2 Trip DDB #442
DDB #443 100
IREF> Trip
ISEF>1 Trip
DDB #447
DDB #446 1 Dwell
0
R3 Any Trip
DDB #002
VN>1 Trip
VN>2 Trip DDB #451
DDB #452 V<1 Trip
V<2 Trip DDB #453
DDB #457 V>1 Trip
V>2 Trip DDB #461
DDB #465 F<1 Trip
F<2 Trip DDB #469
DDB #470 F<3 Trip
F<4 Trip DDB #471
DDB #472 F>1 Trip
F>2 Trip DDB #473
DDB #474 Power1 Trip
Power2 Trip DDB #475
DDB #476 I>1 Trip
I>2 Trip DDB #477
DDB #481 SPower1 Trip
SPower2 Trip DDB #495
DDB #496 PSlipz Z1 Trip
PSlipz Z2 Trip DDB #497
DDB #498 CL Input 1 Trip
DDB #508
CL Input 2 Trip
DDB #509
CL Input 4 Trip
DDB #511
CL Input 3 Trip
DDB #510
Page 168/170 MiCOM P342, P343

Thermal Alarm
DDB #307
SG-opto Invalid
DDB #290
VT Fail Alarm
DDB #292
CT Fail Alarm
DDB #293
CB Fail Alarm
DDB #294
I^ Maint Alarm
DDB #295
I^ Lockout Alarm
DDB #296
CB Ops Maint
DDB #297
CB Ops Lockout
DDB #298
CB Op Time Maint
DDB #299
CB Op Time Lock
DDB #300
Fault Freq Lock
DDB #301
CB Status Alarm
DDB #302
Man CB Trip Fail
DDB #303
Man CB Cls Fail
DDB #304
Man CB Unhealthy
DDB #305
NPS Alarm
DDB #306
V/Hz Alarm
DDB #308
Field Fail Alarm 0
DDB #309
RTD Thermal Alm
1 Drop-Off
500
R4 General Alarm
DDB #003
DDB #310
RTD Open Cct
DDB #311
RTD short Cct
DDB #312
RTD Data Error
DDB #313
RTD Board Fail
DDB #314
Field volts fail
DDB #756
CL Card I/P Fail
DDB #320
CL Card O/P Fail
DDB #321
CL Input 1 Alarm
DDB #322
CL Input 2 Alarm
DDB #323
CL Input 3 Alarm
DDB #324
CL Input 4 Alarm
DDB #325
CLI1 I< Fail Alm
DDB #326
CLI2 I< Fail Alm
DDB #327
CLI3 I< Fail Alm
DDB #328
CLI4 I< Fail Alm
DDB #329
F<1 Trip
DDB #469
F<2 Trip
DDB #470
F<3 Trip
DDB #471 1
F>1 Trip
DDB #473
Freq Prot Alm
DDB #315
V<1 Trip
DDB #453
V>1 Trip
DDB #461
1 Voltage Prot Alm
DDB #316
MiCOM P342, P343 Page 169/170

100
Bfail1 Trip 3ph R5 CB Fail
DDB #493 Dwell DDB #004
0
100% ST EF Trip
DDB #416
IN>1 Trip
DDB #442
IN>2 Trip
DDB #443
IREF> Trip 0
DDB #446
1 Straight
0
R6 E/F Trip
DDB #005
ISEF>1 Trip
DDB #447
VN>1 Trip
DDB #451
VN>2 Trip
DDB #452
V>2 Trip
DDB #465 0
1 Straight
0
R7 Volt Trip
DDB #006
V<2 Trip
DDB #457
F>2 Trip
DDB #474
0
1 Straight
0
R8 Freq Trip
DDB #007
F<4 Trip
DDB #472
0
Gen Diff Trip R9 Diff Trip
DDB #418 Straight DDB #008
0
V Dep OC Trip
DDB #425
0
Z<1 Trip
DDB #500 1 Straight R10 SysBack Trip
DDB #009
0
Z<2 Trip
DDB #504
0
NPS Trip R11 NPS Trip
0
Field Fail1 Trip

DDB #422
0
Field Fail2 Trip

1 Straight
0
R12 FFail Trip
DDB #011
DDB #423
Power1 Trip
DDB #475
0
Power2 Trip
DDB #476
SPower1 Trip
1 Straight
0
R13 Power Trip
DDB #012
DDB #495
SPower2 Trip
DDB #496 0
V/Hz Trip R14 V/Hz Trip
0
Page 170/170 MiCOM P342, P343

LED Mappings
100% ST EF Trip
DDB #416
IN>1 Trip
DDB #442
IN>2 Trip
DDB #443
ISEF>1 Trip
DDB #447
IREF> Trip
1 Latching LED 1
DDB #064
DDB #446
VN>1 Trip
DDB #451
VN>2 Trip
DDB #452
I>1 Trip
DDB #477
I>2 Trip
DDB #481 1 Latching LED 2
DDB #065
V Dep OC Trip
DDB #425
Field Fail1 Trip

DDB #422
Field Fail2 Trip

1 Latching LED 3
DDB #066
DDB #423
NPS Trip
DDB #424
Latching LED 4
DDB #067
V>2 Trip
DDB #465
1 Latching LED 5
DDB #068
V<2 Trip
DDB #457
F>2 Trip
DDB #474
Non -
1 Latching
LED 6
DDB #069
F<4 Trip
DDB #472
Power1 Trip
DDB #475
1 Latching LED 7
DDB #070
SPower1 Trip
DDB #495
Any Start
Non - LED 8
DDB #576 Latching DDB #071
External Connection P34x/EN CO/F33
Diagrams
MiCOM P342, P343
EXTERNAL CONNECTION
DIAGRAMS
P34x/EN CO/F33 External Connection
Diagrams
MiCOM P342, P343
Diagrams
2ND REAR COMMS PORT BOARD

ETHERNET BOARD
(Not Available Yet)
IRIG-B BOARD
P2139ENc
Figure 1: Comms Options MiCOM Px40 Platform

Diagrams
P2192ena
Figure 2: Generator Protection Relay (40TE) for Small Generator Using VEE Connected
VT's (8 I/P & 7 O/P)
Diagrams
P2193ena
Figure 3: Generator Protection Relay (40TE) for Small Generator with Sensitive Power
(8 I/P & 7 O/P)
Diagrams
P2194ena
Figure 4: Generator Protection Relay (40TE) for Small Generator (8 I/P & 7 O/P & RTD’s)
Diagrams
P2195ena
Figure 5: Generator Protection Relay (40TE) for Small Generator (8 I/P & 7 O/P & RTD’s)
Diagrams
P1357ena
Figure 6: Generator Protection Relay (40TE) for Small Generator (8 I/P & 7 O/P & CLIO)
Diagrams
P2196ena
Figure 7: Generator Protection Relay (40TE) for Small Generator (8 I/P & 15 O/P)
Diagrams
P2197ena
Diagrams
P2198ena
Diagrams
P1358ena
Figure 10: Generator Protection Relay (60TE) for Small Generator (16 I/P & 16 O/P &
RTD’s & CLIO)
Diagrams
P1359ena
RTD’s & CLIO)
Diagrams
P2201ena
RTD’s)
Diagrams
P2202ena
RTD’s)
Diagrams
P2203ena
Figure 14: Generator Protection Relay (60TE) with Biased Differential (16 I/P & 14 O/P &
RTD’s)
Diagrams
P2204ena
Figure 15: Generator Protection Relay (60TE) (16 I/P & 14 O/P & RTD’s)
Diagrams
P2205ena
Figure 16: Generator Protection Relay (60TE) with High Impedance Differential (16 I/P &
14 O/P)
Diagrams
P2206ena
Figure 17: Generator Protection Relay (60TE) with High Impedance Differential (16 I/P &
14 O/P)
Diagrams
P2207ena
Figure 18: Generator Protection Relay with Biased Differential Using VEE Connected VT’s
and Sensitive Power (16 I/P & 14 O/P)
Diagrams
P1360ena
CLIO)
Diagrams
P2208ena
Figure 20: Generator Protection Relay (60TE) with Biased Differential (24 I/P & 14 O/P)
Diagrams
P2209ena
Figure 21: Generator Protection Relay (60TE) with Biased Differential (16 I/P & 22 O/P)
Diagrams
P1361ena
RTD’s & CLIO)
Diagrams
P1362ena
RTD’s & CLIO)
Diagrams
P2212ena
RTD’s)
Diagrams
P2213ena
RTD’s)
Diagrams
P1363ena
RTD & CLIO)
Diagrams
P1364ena
RTD & CLIO)
Diagrams
P1366ena
Figure 28: Assembly P341/2 Generator Protection Relay (40TE) (8 I/P & 7 O/P with
Optional I/P & O/P)
Diagrams
P1367ena
Figure 29: Assembly P342 Generator Protection Relay (40TE) (8 I/P & 7 O/P with Optional
RTD & CLIO)
Diagrams
P1370ena
Figure 30: Assembly P342 Generator Protection Relay (60TE) (16 I/P & 16 O/P with
Optional I/P & O/P)
Diagrams
P1369ena
Optional RTD & CLIO)
Diagrams
P1365ena
Optional I/P & O/P)
Diagrams
P1368ena
Diagrams
P1371ena
Optional I/P & O/P)
Diagrams
P1372ena
Diagrams
P1373ena
Figure 36: Assembly P343 Generator Protection Relay (80TE) (32 I/P & 16 O/P & RTD &
CLIO or 16 I/P & 32 O/P & RTD & CLIO)
Hardware/Software Version P34x/EN VC/E33
History and Compatibility
MiCOM P342, P343
HARDWARE / SOFTWARE VERSION

HISTORY AND COMPATIBILITY
(Note: Includes versions released and supplied to customers only)

P34x/EN VC/E33 Hardware/Software Version
MiCOM P342, P343
Relay type: P342/3 …
Software
Version Hardware Original S1 Technical
Description of Changes
Suffix Date of Issue Compatibility Documentation
Major Minor
A A Oct 1999 Original Issue V1.09 or Later TG8614A
MiCOM P342, P343
ü Corrected 90 degree phase angle displacement in

measurement of Ia, Ib, Ic

Hardware/Software Version
ü Corrected RTD temperature and invalid system frequency

B A Dec 1999 measurements in MODBUS fault records V1.09 or Later TG8614A
ü Corrected VT scaling factors for Va, Vb, Vc in fault
records
ü Minor bug fixes
01
ü Trip LED status saved during power cycling
ü Corrections to omission of fault duration and CB
operating time in fault record
ü Corrected -90 degree phase angle displacement in
C A Mar 2000 measurement of VN and VN derived V1.09 or Later TG8614A
ü Reset of alarms and indications event added to event
record
ü Minor bug fixes
ü DNP 3.0 protocol added
ü Courier and MODBUS enhancements to improve
compatibility with other protection (mainly PX20
products)
02 A A Oct 2000 V1.10 or Later TG8614B
ü Modifications to IEC60870-5-103 Test Mode
ü Poledead logic DDB signals made visible in PSL
ü Foreign Language text updated
P34x/EN VC/E33
Page 1/16
Software
Hardware Original S1 Technical
Page 2/16
Version Description of Changes

Major Minor
P34x/EN VC/E33
ü Active and reactive power added to MODBUS fault

02 record
A A Oct 2000 V1.10 or Later TG8614B
Cont.
ü Minor bug fixes
ü Event filtering added
A A Jan 2001 ü Correction to energy measurement inaccuracy V2.00 or Later TG8614B
ü Minor bug fixes
ü Correction to NPS Alarm operation
B A May 2001 V2.00 or Later TG8614B
ü Minor bug fixes
ü Resolved possible reboot caused by Disturbance
C A Jan 2002 Recorder V2.00 or Later TG8614B
ü Minor bug fixes
ü Resolved possible reboot caused by invalid MODBUS
D A Feb 2002 requests V2.00 or Later TG8614B
03
ü Minor bug fixes
ü Enhanced DNP 3.0 Object 10 support for Pulse
On/Close control points
ü DNP 3.0 Object 10 included in Class 0 poll
ü DNP 3.0 support for season in time information
E A Dec 2002 ü Correction to MODBUS CB Trip and Close via "0"

command
ü Change to neutral voltage displacement protection and
directional SEF protection so that they are not blocked by
the VT supervision logic when when the VN Input and
MiCOM P342, P343
ISEF>VNPol are selected as Measured

Software
Major Minor
ü Correction to undervoltage stage 2 (V<2) setting range.
MiCOM P342, P343
The setting range has been increased from 10-70V to

10-120V (Vn=110/120V) so that it is the same as V<1
03 ü Correction to VT ratio scaling problem in the disturbance

E A Dec 2002 V2.00 or Later TG8614B
Cont. recorder
ü Improvement to the RTD start-up calibration routine
ü Minor bug fixes
ü Not released to production
ü Pole slipping and sensitive reverse power added
ü 100% stator earth fault protection enhancements
ü Neutral voltage displacement threshold, VN>1/2,
increased from 50 to 80V (Vn=100/120V), 200 to 320 V
A A Jun 2001 (Vn=380/480V) V2.01 or Later TG8614B
ü Earth fault polarising voltage threshold, Vnpol, increased
from 22 to 88V (Vn=100/120V) and 88 to 352V
04 (Vn=380/480V)
ü cos phi and sin phi features added to SEF protection
ü Minor bug fixes
B A Jul 2001 ü Minor bug fix to background self check diagnostics V2.01 or Later TG8614B
introduced in 04A
ü Correction to Courier NPS thermal reset command
C A Dec 2001 V2.01 or Later TG8614B
ü Minor bug fixes
P34x/EN VC/E33
Page 3/16
Software
Page 4/16

Major Minor
P34x/EN VC/E33

D A Jan 2002 Recorder V2.01 or Later TG8614B
ü Minor bug fixes
E A Feb 2002 requests V2.01 or Later TG8614B
ü Minor bug fixes
ü DNP 3.0 Object 10 included in Class 0 poll
ü DNP 3.0 support for season in time information
04 ü Correction to MODBUS CB Trip and Close via "0"
Cont. command
F A Dec 2002 the VT supervision logic when the VN Input and V2.01 or Later TG8614B
ü Correction to VT ratio scaling problem in the disturbance
recorder
ü Minor bug fixes
MiCOM P342, P343

Software
Major Minor
MiCOM P342, P343
ü Thermal overload protection added

ü Additional stage of under-impedance protection

ü Control inputs added

ü PSL DDB list of signals increased from 512 to 1023
signals
ü PSL Data menu added with PSL Reference information for
version history
A A/B Sept 2001 ü Optional additional opto inputs and output contacts with V2.05 or Later P34x/EN T/C11
a larger case size option available
ü New ‘Universal’ wide ranging opto inputs (Model
05 number hardware suffix changed to B)
ü New output contacts with better break and continuous
carry ratings (Model number hardware suffix changed to
B)
ü Minor bug fixes
ü Courier and MODBUS builds only
ü Correction to VT ratio scaling problem in the disturbance
B A/B Oct 2001 recorder V2.05 or Later P34x/EN T/C11
ü Minor bug fixes
P34x/EN VC/E33
Page 5/16
Software
Page 6/16

Major Minor
P34x/EN VC/E33
ü IEC60870-5-103 build with special private code

mapping for ALSTOM Power project in Iceland. Includes
private codes and uncompressed disturbance recorder
1(C) A/B Jan 2002 ü Resolved possible reboot caused by Disturbance V2.05 or Later P34x/EN T/C11
Recorder
ü Minor bug fixes
ü IEC60870-5-103 build only
Recorder
requests
ü Enhancements to IEC60870-5-103 build to include
05 private codes, monitor blocking and disturbance record
D A/B Feb 2002 extraction. New uncompressed disturbance recorder for V2.05 or Later P34x/EN T/C11
Cont.
IEC60870-5-103 build only
ü Correction to Courier NPS thermal reset command
ü Correction to IEC60870-5-103 voltage measurements
for Vn=380/480V relays
ü Minor bug fixes
ü Correction to foreign language text for System Backup
E A/B Mar 2002 protection not included in previous 05 software builds V2.05 or Later P34x/EN T/C11
ü Minor bug fixes
MiCOM P342, P343
F A/B Oct 2002

ü Correction to MODBUS CB Trip and Close via "0"
command
Software
Major Minor
MiCOM P342, P343

the VT supervision logic when the VN Input and

F A/B Oct 2002 ü Correction to undervoltage stage 2 (V<2) setting range.

ü Minor bug fixes
ü IEC60870-5-103 build with special private code
mapping for ALSTOM Power project in Iceland. Includes
05 private codes and uncompressed disturbance recorder
Cont. ü Correction to IEC60870-5-103 voltage measurements
for Vn=380/480V relays
ü Correction to foreign language text for System Backup
protection not included in previous 05 software builds
(1) F A/B Oct 2002 ü Change to neutral voltage displacement protection and V2.05 or Later P34x/EN T/C11
the VT supervision logic when when the VN Input and
ü Minor bug fixes
ü IEC60870-5-103 build only
P34x/EN VC/E33
Page 7/16
Software
Page 8/16

Major Minor
P34x/EN VC/E33

ü Additional IDMT characteristics for overcurrent and
voltage dependent overcurrent protection (rectifier and RI
curve), earth fault protection (RI and IDG curve) and
sensitive earth fault protection (IDG curve)
ü Change to time dial setting range of IEEE and US curves.
Previously curves were based on TD/7 where TD = 0.5-
15. Now, curves are based on TD where TD = 0.01-
100. Also, includes change to US ST Inverse (C02)
curve. K constant and L constant multipled x 7 because
of change to TD, now K=0.16758 and L=0.11858
ü Angle measurements for sequence quantities in
Measurements 1 menu added
ü Interturn protection added
06 A A/C Aug 2000 V2.06 or Later P34x/EN T/D22
ü Optional 2nd rear communication port added
ü New power supply with increased output rating and
reduced dc inrush current (typically < 10A). (Model
number hardware changed to suffix C)
ü Wider setting range for Power and Sensitive Power
protection. P>1/2 (reverse power) and P<1/2 (low
forward power) maximum setting changed from 40In to
300In W (Vn=100/120V) and from 160In W to 1200In
W (Vn=380/480V). Sen –P>1/2 and Sen P<1/2
maximum setting changed from 15In to 100In W
(Vn=100/120V) and from 60In to 400In W
(Vn=380/480V). There is also an additional setting for
MiCOM P342, P343
the Power and Sensitive Power protection to select the

Operating mode as Generating or Motoring
Software
Major Minor
ü Wider setting range for the voltage dependent
MiCOM P342, P343
overcurrent protection. Volt Dep OC V<1 and V<2

minimum setting changed from 20 to 5 V
(Vn=100/120V) and from 80 to 20V (Vn=380/480V). V

Dep OC k Set minimum setting changed from 0.25 to

0.1
ü Maximum overfrequency protection setting increased
from 65 to 68 Hz
ü Change to undervoltage stage 2 (V<2) setting range to
correct an error. The setting range has been increased
A A/C Aug 2000 from 10-70 V to 10-120V (Vn=100/120V) so that it is V2.06 or Later P34x/EN T/D22
the same as V<1
06 ü Change to neutral voltage displacement protection and
Cont. directional SEF protection so that they are now not
blocked by the voltage transformer supervision logic
when the VN Input and ISEF> VN Pol are selected as
Measured
ü Includes all the improvements and corrections in 05F
software except for 2 enhancements shown for 06B
ü Minor bug fixes
B A/C Oct 2002 V2.06 or Later P34x/EN T/D22
ü Minor bug fixes
P34x/EN VC/E33
Page 9/16
Software
Page 10/16

Major Minor
P34x/EN VC/E33

ü Optional additional 4 analogue inputs and 4 outputs
(current loop inputs and outputs – CLIO)
ü Additional setting to select the current inputs (IA-1, IB-1,
IC-1 or IA-2, IB-2, IC-2) used for the breaker fail
undercurrent
ü Two new hardware configurations - (1) 32 Inputs, 16
Outputs, RTD, CLIO (2) 16 Inputs, 32 Outputs, RTD,
CLIO
A A/C Apr 2003 ü Number of alarms increased from 64 to 96 (New Alarm V2.09 or Later P34x/EN T/E33
Status 3 word - 32 bit)
ü Additional user alarms. Previously 1 manual reset and 2
self reset user alarms, now 12 manual reset and 4 self
07 reset user alarms
ü Control Input states added to non volatile memory
ü German language text updated
ü Minor bug fixes
ü Power measurement limits added to prevent non zero
values with no current and voltage. Also power factor
measurements limited to +/-1
B A/C Oct 2003 ü In the Commissioning Test menu the DDB status has V2.09 or Later P34x/EN T/E33
been made visible on the front panel display
ü Support for Trip LED Status and Alarm Status added to
MiCOM P342, P343
G26 data type for MODBUS register 30001

Software
Major Minor
ü Correction to the CB trip/Close functionality via
MiCOM P342, P343
MODBUS so that local/remote setting in the CB Control

menu is not ignored
ü Correction to MODBUS auto event extraction which does

not work correctly in versions 05 and 06 software
ü Extension of the control input functionality to support
pulse and latch operations in DNP 3.0
ü DNP 3.0 object 10 added to class 0 poll
ü Correction to DNP 3.0 time sync operation so that it does
not modify the season bit in the time stamp
ü Improvement to the differential protection performance
at low frequencies
07
B A/C Oct 2003 ü Correction to the manual reset user alarms so that the V2.09 or Later P34x/EN T/E33
Cont.
event record shows the alarm turning off only when a
reset command has been issued. Previously the "alarm
off" event is produced once the initiating signal is
removed
ü Correction to the fault recorder window for current based
trips so that it can terminate properly once the
FAULT_REC_TRIG signal (DDB 288) is reset. Previously it
needed to wait for Relay 3 to reset also before
termination
ü DDB 649 for pole slip reactance line start removed from
the event list
ü Minor bug fixes
P34x/EN VC/E33
Page 11/16
Relay Software Version
01 02 03 04 05 06 07
01 ü ü ü ü û û û
Page 12/16
02 û ü ü ü û û û
P34x/EN VC/E33
03 û û ü ü û û û
04 û û û ü û û û
05 û û û û ü û û
06 û û û û û ü ü
07 û û û û û û ü
Setting File Software Version

MiCOM P342, P343

01 02 03 04 05 06 07
01 ü ü ü ü û û û
02 û ü ü ü û û û
03 û û ü ü û û û
MiCOM P342, P343
04 û û û ü û û û
05 û û û û ü ü ü
06 û û û û ü ü ü
07 û û û û û û ü
PSL File Software Version

P34x/EN VC/E33
Page 13/16
01 02 03 04 05A-E 05F 06 07
01 ü û û û û û û û
Page 14/16
02 û ü û û û û û û
P34x/EN VC/E33
03 û û ü û û û û û
04 û û û ü û û û û
05A-E û û û û ü û û û
05F û û û û û ü û û
06 û û û û û û ü û
07 û û û û û û û ü
Menu Text File Software Version

MiCOM P342, P343
1
Menu text remains compatible within each software version (except 05) but is NOT compatible across different versions.
Hardware/Software Version P34x /EN VC/E33
Information Required with Order
MiCOM P342 GENERATOR PROTECTION RELAY NOMENCLATURE
Character Type (A=Alpha, N=Numeric, A N N N A X X X A X X N N X A

X=Alpha-numeric)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
Character Numbering (Maximum = 15)
P 3 4 2 * * * * * * 0 * * 0 *
Vx Aux Rating
24-48 Vdc 1
48-110 Vdc, 30-100 Vac 2
110-250 Vdc, 100-240 Vac 3
In/Vn Rating
In=1A/5A, Vn=100/120V 1
In=1A/5A, Vn=380/480V 2
Hardware Options
Nothing 1
IRIG-B only 2
Fibre Optic Converter Only 3
IRIG-B & Fibre Optic Converter 4
Rear Comms Board* 7
Rear Comms + IRIG-B* 8
Product Specific
Size 40TE Case, No Option (8 Optos + 7 Relays) A
Size 40TE Case, 8 Optos + 7 Relays + RTD B
Size 40TE Case, 8 Optos + 7 Relays + CLIO* C
Size 40TE Case, 16 Optos + 7 Relays* D
Size 40TE Case, 8 Optos + 15 Relays* E
Size 40TE Case, 12 Optos + 11 Relays* F
Size 60TE Case, 16 Optos + 16 Relays* G
Size 60TE Case, 16 Optos + 16 Relays + RTD* H
Size 60TE Case, 16 Optos + 16 Relays + CLIO* J
Size 60TE Case, 24 Optos + 16 Relays* K
Size 60TE Case, 16 Optos + 24 Relays* L
Size 60TE Case, 16 Optos + 16 Relays + RTD + CLIO* M
Size 60TE Case, 24 Optos + 16 Relays + RTD* N
Size 60TE Case, 16 Optos + 24 Relays + RTD* P
Protocol Options
K-Bus 1
MODBUS 2
IEC870 3
DNP3.0 4
Mounting
Panel Mounting A
Software XX
Setting Files
Default 0
Customer 1
Design Suffix
Original A
Phase 2 Hardware C
Note Design Suffix
A = Original hardware (48V opto inputs only, lower contact rating, no I/O expansion available)
C = Latest hardware (Universal Optos, New Relays, New Power Supply)
* Not available in design suffix A relays
Note Mounting
For rack mounting assembled single rack frames and blanking plates are available
P34x/EN VC/E33 Hardware/Software Version
Information Required with Order
MiCOM P343 GENERATOR PROTECTION RELAY NOMENCLATURE
Character Type (A=Alpha, N=Numeric, A N N N A X X X A X X N N X A

X=Alpha-numeric)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
Character Numbering (Maximum = 15)
P 3 4 3 * * * * * * 0 * * 0 *
Vx Aux Rating
24-48 Vdc 1
48-110 Vdc, 30-100 Vac 2
110-250 Vdc, 100-240 Vac 3
In/Vn Rating
In=1A/5A, Vn=100/120V 1
In=1A/5A, Vn=380/480V 2
Hardware Options
Nothing 1
IRIG-B only 2
Fibre Optic Converter Only 3
IRIG-B & Fibre Optic Converter 4
Rear Comms Board* 7
Rear Comms + IRIG-B* 8
Product Specific
Size 60TE Case, No Option (16 Optos + 14 Relays) A
Size 60TE Case, 16 Optos + 14 Relays + RTD B
Size 60TE Case, 16 Optos + 14 Relays + CLIO* C
Size 60TE Case, 24 Optos + 14 Relays* D
Size 60TE Case, 16 Optos + 22 Relays* E
Size 80TE Case, 24 Optos + 24 Relays* F
Size 80TE Case, 24 Optos + 24 Relays + RTD* G
Size 80TE Case, 24 Optos + 24 Relays + CLIO* H
Size 80TE Case, 32 Optos + 24 Relays* J
Size 80TE Case, 24 Optos + 32 Relays* K
Size 80TE Case, 24 Optos + 24 Relays + RTD + CLIO* L
Size 80TE Case, 32 Optos + 24 Relays + RTD* M
Size 80TE Case, 24 Optos + 32 Relays + RTD* N
Size 80TE Case, 32 Optos + 16 Relays + RTD + CLIO* P

Size 80TE Case, 16 Optos + 32 Relays + RTD + CLIO* Q
Protocol Options
K-Bus 1
MODBUS 2
IEC870 3
DNP3.0 4
Mounting
Panel Mounting A
Rack Mounting (Size 80TE case only)* B
Software XX
Setting Files
Default 0
Customer 1
Design Suffix
Original A
Phase 2 Hardware C
Note Design Suffix
A = Original hardware (48V opto inputs only, lower contact rating, no I/O expansion available)
C = Latest hardware (Universal Optos, New Relays, New Power Supply)
* Not available in design suffix A relays
Note Mounting
For rack mounting in the 60TE case size assembled single rack frames and blanking plates are available
REPAIR FORM
Please complete this form and return it to AREVA T&D with the equipment to be repaired. This
form may also be used in the case of application queries.
AREVA T&D
St. Leonards Avenue
Stafford
ST17 4LX
England
For : After Sales Service Department
Customer Ref: ___________________ Model No: ___________________
AREVA T&D Contract Ref: ___________________ Serial No: ___________________
Date: ___________________
1. What parameters were in use at the time the fault occurred?
AC Volts ___________________ Main VT/Test set
DC Volts ___________________ Battery/Power supply
AC current ___________________ Main CT/Test set
Frequency ___________________
2. Which type of test was being used?

3. Were all the external components fitted where required? Yes / No
(Delete as appropriate)
4. List the relay settings being used
5. What did you expect to happen?
continued overleaf
#
6. What did happen?
7. When did the fault occur?
Instant Yes / No Intermittent Yes / No
Time delayed Yes / No (Delete as appropriate)
By how long? ___________________
8. What indications if any did the relay show?
9. Was there any visual damage?
10. Any other remarks which may be useful:
Signature Title
Name (in capitals) Company name

#
Publication: P34x/EN O/F33
TRANSMISSION & DISTRIBUTION Energy Automation & Information energy.automation-information@areva-td.com

www.areva.com

MICOM P34x - EN - O - F33

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

MICOM P34x - EN - O - F33

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Description:

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

MICOM P34x - EN - O - F33

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

MiCOM

Software Version 0070C

This version of the Operation Guide is specific to the following models

Model Number Software Number

MiCOM P342, P343

Manual Issue F33 Amendments completed 21.11.2003

MiCOM P342, P343

Manual Issue F33 Amendments completed 21.11.2003

MiCOM P342, P343

GENERATOR PROTECTION RELAYS

MICOM P342, P343

Handling of Electronic Equipment

Introduction P34x/EN IT/F33

Installation P34x/EN IN/F33

Commissioning and Maintenance P34x/EN CM/F33

Problem Analysis P34x/EN PR/F33

Relay Menu Database P34x/EN GC/F33

External Connection Diagrams P34x/EN CO/F33

Hardware / Software Version History and

MiCOM P342, P343

2. INSTALLING, COMMISSIONING AND SERVICING 3

3. EQUIPMENT OPERATING CONDITIONS 4

5. DECOMMISSIONING AND DISPOSAL 5

Caution: refer to product documentation Caution: risk of electric shock

Protective/safety *earth terminal Functional *earth terminal

2. INSTALLING, COMMISSIONING AND SERVICING

3. EQUIPMENT OPERATING CONDITIONS

5. DECOMMISSIONING AND DISPOSAL

Insulation class: IEC 601010-1 : 1990/A2 : 2001 This equipment requires a

Insulation IEC 601010-1 : 1990/A2 : 1995 Distribution level, fixed

Environment: IEC 601010-1 : 1990/A2 : 1995 Compliance is demonstrated

Product Safety: 72/23/EEC Compliance with the European

MiCOM P342, P343

MiCOM P342, P343

MiCOM P342, P343 Page 1/28

2. INTRODUCTION TO MiCOM GUIDES 4

3. USER INTERFACES AND MENU STRUCTURE 6

Page 2/28 MiCOM P342, P343

Figure 1: Relay front view 6

MiCOM P342, P343 Page 3/28

Page 4/28 MiCOM P342, P343

2. INTRODUCTION TO MiCOM GUIDES

MiCOM P342, P343 Page 5/28

P34x/EN CO External Connection Diagrams

Page 6/28 MiCOM P342, P343

3. USER INTERFACES AND MENU STRUCTURE

Serial No and I*, V Ratings Top cover

Figure 1: Relay front view

MiCOM P342, P343 Page 7/28

Note: *May vary according to relay type/model

Page 8/28 MiCOM P342, P343

Optional IRIG-B board Digital input connections

Rear comms port

Current* and voltage Digital output

Figure 2: Relay rear view

Note: *May vary according to relay type/model

MiCOM P342, P343 Page 9/28

Note: *May vary according to relay type/model

Protective/safety earth terminal Functional earth terminal

Twisted pair K-Bus RS485 communications link